Part Modeling Print

About Part Pro/ENGINEER Part enables you to design models as solids in a progressive three-dimensional solid modeling environment.
Solid models are geometric models that offer mass properties such as volume, surface area, and inertia. If you manipulate any model, the 3-D model remains solid. Pro/ENGINEER provides a progressive environment in which you create and change your models through direct graphical manipulation. You drive the design process for your project by selecting an object (geometry) and then choose a tool to invoke an action on that object. This object-action workflow provides greater control over the design of your models while allowing you to express your creativity. The user interface provides further support for this design process As you work with your model, the context sensitive user interface guides you through the design process. After you choose an object and an action, Pro/ENGINEER interprets the current modeling context and presents requirements and optional items to complete the task. This information is displayed in a non obtrusive user interface called the dashboard that enhances your ability to directly work with your models by assessing your actions and guiding you through the design process. The Pro/ENGINEER progressive modeling environment streamlines the design process enabling you to concentrate on product development and drive your designs to new levels of creativity. Design Concepts You can design many different types of models in Pro/ENGINEER. However, before you begin your design project, you need to understand a few basic design concepts:
Design IntentBefore you design your model, you need to identify the design intent. Design intent defines the purpose and function of the finished product based on product specifications or requirements. Capturing design intent builds value and longevity into your products. This key concept is at the core of the Pro/ENGINEER feature-based modeling process. Feature-Based ModelingPro/ENGINEER part modeling begins with creating individual geometric features one after another. These features become interrelated to other features as you reference them during the design process. Parametric DesignThe interrelationships between features allow the model to become parametric. So, if you alter one feature and that change directly affects other related (dependent) features, then Pro/ENGINEER dynamically changes those related features. This parametric ability maintains the integrity of the part and preserves your design intent. AssociativityPro/ENGINEER maintains design intent outside of Part mode through associativity. As you continue to design the model, you can add parts, assemblies, drawings, and other associated objects, such as piping, sheet metal, or electrical wiring. All of these functions are fully associative within Pro/ENGINEER. So, if you change your design at any level, your project will dynamically reflect the changes at all levels, preserving design intent. Planning Your Design You can immediately begin designing models in Pro/ENGINEER, and with product deadlines, it is tempting to jump-in and start creating models. However, to build value in your designs, you need to create products that can keep up with the constant design changes driven by market demands. You need to build flexibility in your designs. Flexibility is the key to a friendly robust product design while maintaining design intent, and you can accomplish it through planning. To plan your design, you need to have a basic understanding of your model from a broad perspective. In other words, understand the overall function, form, and fit of the product. This understanding includes the following points:
Overall Size Basic model characteristics The way in which the model can be assembled
Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling
1/ 375
Approximate amount of components the assembly would contain The way in which the model can be manufactured Design Approaches Even the best plans are imperfect. However, you can eliminate many future modeling issues if you think out your model before starting your design. The following two design approaches can help you in determining your planning strategy:
Top Down DesignYou analyze your product from the finished product and work down. So, you begin with the master assembly and break it down into assemblies and subassemblies. Then, identify the main assembly components and their key features. Finally, understand the relationships within and between assemblies, and assess how the product will be assembled. With this information, you can plan a design and leverage overall design intent into your models. Top down design is the industry paradigm for companies that design products that undergo frequent design modifications or for those companies that design diverse products. Bottom Up DesignYou analyze your product from the component level and work up to the master assembly. Note that successful bottom up design demands a basic understanding of the master assembly. Designs based on the bottom up approach do not fully leverage design intent. Even though the end result can be the same as using top down design, you increase your risk for design conflicts and errors that result in a less flexible design. Bottom up design remains the most used paradigm in the design industry today. Companies that design similar products or products that do not demand frequent modifications during their life cycle use bottom up design approach. The Modeling Process The following graphic illustrates the modeling process and the role design intent plays:
Features and Parts All models that you build contain the following fundamental anatomical attributes:
FeaturesIndividual geometry created one at a time. Features include datums, extrusions, holes, rounds, chamfers, surface features, cuts, patterns, sweeps, etc. You can have multiple features in a part. PartsCollection of geometric features that define the geometric entity called the part. Parts are referred to as components in an assembly. You can have multiple components in an assembly. AssembliesCollection of components assembled together to create the model. You can have multiple assemblies and subassemblies in a hierarchical order according their relationships with other assemblies and the master assembly. Parent-Child Relationships You can use various types of Pro/ENGINEER features as building blocks in the progressive creation of solid parts. Certain features, by necessity, precede other more dependent features in the design process. Those
2/ 375
dependent features rely on the previously defined features for dimensional and geometric references. This is known as a parent-child relationship. The parent-child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects of Pro/ENGINEER and parametric modeling in general. This relationship plays an important role in propagating changes across the model to maintain the design intent. After a parent feature in a part is changed, all children are dynamically altered to reflect the changes in the parent feature. If you suppress or delete a parent feature, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you for an action pertaining to the related children. You can also minimize the cases of unnecessary or unintended parent-child relationships. It is therefore essential to reference feature dimensions so that Pro/ENGINEER can correctly propagate design changes throughout the model. When working with parent-child relationships, it can be helpful to remember that parent features can exist without child features. However, child features cannot exist without their parents. Putting It All Together Using the bottom up design approach, you incorporate features and parts of a complex design into assemblies and subassemblies, and ultimately into the master assembly. If you work in a top down direction, you break down a master assembly into subassemblies, parts, and features. Whichever design approach you use, your task is to properly capture the design intent to provide some level of flexibility. The more flexibility that you built into your models, the fewer issues that will arise as you change the design during the product life cycle. Remember that each Pro/ENGINEER parametric model is a careful synthesis of physical and intellectual design. Starting Out in Part Mode The first feature you create in the model can be a solid, datum, or a group of features copied from your UDF (User-Defined Feature) library. Creating the Initial Solid Feature The first solid feature is the working block of material that is refined and modified until the final design. The first feature extrusions are always extruded in the positive direction (out of the screen towards you). Creating a User-Defined Feature as the First Feature You can create a group from your UDF library as the base feature as long as it has no references to other features. For example, you might have a UDF that is a solid feature that references two datum planes, which reference the default coordinate system (created as the base feature). All the features must then be included in the UDF to become the base feature for a new part. Creating Features There are many kinds of features that you can create on a part. There are solid features and surface features, and features specific to applications. Part modeling refers to the creation of solid features and some user-defined features. Some features add material and some remove material. The most basic way to add material is through a protrusion. The most basic way to remove material is through a cut. Tip: A feature is the smallest building block in a Pro/ENGINEER part model. If you build your models with simple features, your parts become more flexible. About Configuring Part You can customize the way you model parts by entering config.pro configuration file options and their values in the Options dialog box (Tools > Options). Part Modeling Help provides a list of configuration options arranged in alphabetical order. Each option contains the following information:
Configuration option name.
3/ 375

1. 2. 3. 4.
Default and available variables or values. All default values are in italic. Brief description and notes describing the configuration option. To Set Part Configuration Options Click Tools > Options. The Options dialog box opens. Click the Show only options loaded from file check box to see currently loaded configuration options or clear this check box to see all configuration options. Select the configuration option from the list or type the configuration option name in the Option box. In the Value box type or select a value. Note: The default value is followed by an asterisk (*). 5. 6. Click Add/Change. The configuration option and its value appear in the list. A green status icon confirms the change. When you finish configuring, click Apply or OK.
allow_anatomic_features yes, no Setting this configuration option to yes makes the following commands available when you click Insert > Advanced:
Local Push Radius Dome Section Dome Ear Lip Slot Shaft Flange Neck Setting this configuration option to yes also makes Evaluate available when you click Insert > Model Datum. About the Datum Planes User Interface DATUM PLANE Dialog Box The DATUM PLANE dialog box contains the following tabbed pages:
Placement Display Properties The Placement tabbed page contains the following:
References collectorAllows you to place a new datum plane by referencing existing planes, surfaces, edges, points, coordinate systems, axes, vertices, sketch-based features, face facets, edge facets, vertex facets, curves, sketched datum curves, and channels. You can also select datum coordinate systems or noncylindrical surfaces as placement references for the creation of datum planes. Additionally, you can set a constraint for each of the selected references. The constraint types available on the Constraint Type Options menu are as follows:
4/ 375
ThroughPlaces the new datum plane through the selected reference. When you select a datum coordinate system as the placement reference, the Planes Options menu appears with the following options: XYPlaces the datum plane through the XY plane YZPlaces the datum plane through the YZ plane and is the default ZXPlaces the datum plane through the ZX plane
OffsetPlaces the new datum plane at an offset from the selected reference. It is the default constraint type when you select a datum coordinate system as the placement reference. Depending on the references you have selected, you can use the Constraint list box to enter a transitional offset value or a rotational offset value for the new datum plane. ParallelPlaces the new datum parallel to the selected reference. NormalPlaces the new datum plane normal to the selected reference. TangentPlaces the new datum plane tangent to the selected reference. The Tangent constraint is added to the newly created datum plane when the datum plane is tangent to a noncylindrical surface and passes through a datum point, vertex, or an endpoint of an edge that is selected as a reference.
o o o
Section listAllows you to specify the section of a sketch-based feature through which the datum plane passes. The Display tabbed page contains the following:
FlipFlips the normal direction of the datum plane. Adjust Outline check boxAllows you to adjust the size of the datum plane's outline. When selected, the following options are available on the Outline Type Options menu:
o o
ReferenceAllows you to size the datum plane to the selected reference such as a part, feature, edge, axis, or surface. SizeAllows you to size the datum plane or adjust its outline display size to specified values of width and height and is the default. When selected, the following options are available: WidthAllows you to specify a value as the width of the datum plane outline display. Is available when you select the Adjust Outline checkbox and Size. HeightAllows you to specify a value as the height of the datum plane outline display. Is available when you select the Adjust Outline check box and Size. Note: When you redefine a legacy datum plane that uses the radius as the outline dimension, the radius dimension is changed to the height and width values of the displayed outline of the legacy datum plane. These values are displayed in the Width and Height boxes when you select the Adjust Outline check box and select Size in the Display tabbed page.
Lock aspect ratioAllows you to maintain the proportion between the height and the width of the datum plane outline display. Is available when you select the Adjust Outline checkbox and Size.
In the Properties tabbed page you can view information about the current datum plane feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Additionally, you can use the Properties tabbed page to rename the datum feature. Shortcut Menus When you right-click in the graphics window, the Feature menu appears with the following options:
Flip Normal directionFlips the normal direction of the datum plane. ClearClears the active collector. Switch to OffsetAvailable when you snap an offset drag handle to a specific location. Allows you to unsnap an already snapped handle and changes the constraint from Parallel to Offset by removing the Through constraint. Maintains the location of the datum plane and displays the offset handle.
5/ 375
When you select the Adjust Outline check box on the Display tabbed page, select Reference, and rightclick in the graphics window, a shortcut menu appears with the following options:
Placement ReferencesActivates the Placement collector and allows you to specify the placement references to which the datum plane is constrained. Fit OutlineActivates the Fit Outline collector and allows you to specify the reference to which the datum plane display outline is sized. When you right-click in the Reference collector, a shortcut menu appears with the following options:
RemoveClears the reference that you select in the Reference collector. InformationAllows you to view information about the selected reference in the Pro/ENGINEER embedded browser or the Information window. Handles The following are the types of handles that are displayed:
Two-Dimension Outline HandleAvailable when you specify the width and height values to resize the display outline of a datum plane in the Display tabbed page of the DATUM PLANE dialog box. The outline handle is located at each corner of the preview of the current datum plane being created or redefined. You can move any one of the handles to resize the datum plane outline display. Offset HandleDisplayed when you select datum planes or planar surfaces as references for the creation of datum planes, and when the default constraint is Offset. You can use the offset handle to manually translate the datum plane to the required offset distance, snap the handle to a point, linear edge, axis, or curve, and also unsnap the handle that is snapped to a location. The offset handle is automatically locked when you add a relation to drive the Offset dimension. About Using Datum Planes with Legacy Data For datum planes created in the earlier versions of Pro/ENGINEER, the datum plane adjusts its boundaries as follows:
Radius values specified The size of the selected references, such as a part, feature, edge, axis, or surface
Using Legacy Datum Planes with Size Adjusted to Specified Radius For legacy datum planes with radius dimensions that determine their size:
The radius dimensions of the legacy datum planes are not retained if you have redefined the datum planes in the current version of Pro/ENGINEER. Note: When the radius, which is the outline dimension that drives a relation, is not retained but is changed to the height and width values during redefinition, the relevant relation is also no longer valid.
The radius dimensions of the legacy datum planes are retained if you have not redefined the legacy datum planes in the current version of Pro/ENGINEER. When the radius dimensions of the legacy datum planes are retained, you can redefine and change the radius dimension in the current version of Pro/ENGINEER. The height and width values of the displayed outline of the legacy datum plane are displayed in Width and Height boxes when you select the Adjust Outline checkbox and select Size in the Display tabbed page of the DATUM PLANE dialog box. The outline handle is displayed and you can use the handle to enlarge the boundaries of the datum plane.
6/ 375
Using Legacy Datum Planes with Datum Coordinate Systems or Point Features as References If you redefine legacy datum planes with datum coordinate systems or datum point features that include only single points, the current version of Pro/ENGINEER displays the datum coordinate systems or the datum point features in the Fit Outline collector as references to which the legacy datum planes adjust their size. If the datum point features consist of more than single points, you can retain a single point in each feature and delete the rest of the points. The datum planes adjust their size to the reference datum point features with single points. During the redefinition process, you can replace these datum point features with valid references. About Modifying the Size of the Datum Planes Datum planes, by default, are displayed scaled to the model size. You can resize the boundaries of the datum planes or adjust them to selected references or specific values. You can size datum planes to visually fit a selected reference which is a part, feature, surface, edge, or axis. Alternatively, you can specify values for the height and width of the datum planes to expand the display outlines of the datum planes beyond the model outlines when you create or redefine datum planes. View the display outlines of the datum planes in Drawing mode. Note: You cannot change the values of width and height by editing the datum plane dimensions. The values that you specify as the height and width of the datum plane boundaries are not Pro/ENGINEER dimension values and are not displayed. These values do not affect the regeneration of the model. Use the default_dec_places configuration option to set precise values. Alternatively, you can also use the two-dimension outline handles to resize the display outlines of datum planes. A handle is displayed at each corner of the previewed datum plane when you specify the width and height values for the display outline of a datum plane. You can lock the aspect ratio between the values of width and height such that a change in a value also changes the other value proportionally. When you drag one of the handles to change the height or width of the previewed datum plane, the values are automatically updated in the Width and Height boxes of the Display tabbed page. The movement of the handle in the direction of the width or height is correspondingly restricted. and the location of the mirrored handle is maintained as follows:
When you move the top right handle, the bottom left handle is not moved When you move the top left handle, the bottom right handle is not moved When you move the bottom right handle, the top left handle is not moved When you move the bottom left handle, the top right handle is not moved Note: The movement of the handle is restricted to a point when the value of the width or height is equal to its upper limit. Model accuracy is maintained when the datum plane display outline changes. Pro/ENGINEER may refit the display outline, if required. To Create a Datum Plane and Adjust Its Display by Size 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. button in the Datum toolbar or click Insert > Model Datum > Click the DATUM PLANE dialog box opens. Plane. The
In the graphics window, select placement references for the new datum plane. Choose the required constraint option from the constraint list within the References collector. To add multiple references to your select list, press CTRL while you select. As you select your references, they appear in the References collector in the DATUM PLANE dialog box. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until you have established the necessary constraints. If the references are incomplete, the system will wait for additional references until the datum is fully constrained. Click the Display tab to adjust the size of the outline display of the datum plane.
7/ 375
6. 7. 8.
Select the Adjust Outline check box. Select Size to adjust the size of the outline display to the specified values. Specify values in Width and Height for the width and height of the datum plane outline display. Note: The height and width values of the datum plane outline display are not displayed in the graphics window. The two-dimension outline handles are displayed at each corner of the datum plane preview. Alternatively, drag one of the handles to change the width or height of the datum plane display outline.
9.
Click Lock aspect ratio if you want to maintain the proportion of the height and width of the outline display.
Click OK to create the datum plane with its outline display adjusted to the specified height and width values. To Adjust Datum Display by Reference You can size all datum planes to visually fit a part, feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius. 1. Right-click on the datum plane in the Model Tree and select Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, select a datum plane in the graphics window and click Edit > Definition. The DATUM PLANE dialog box opens. Note: You can also adjust the size of the datum plane during the creation of the datum plane. 2. 3. 4. Click the Display tab. Select the Adjust Outline check box. Select Reference in the list box to size the datum plane to the selected reference. Note: To select a feature as the reference, set up the selection filter to exclusively select features and filter out datum coordinate systems and datum point features that include single points. 5. Select a part, feature, edge, axis, or surface as a size reference. Click OK to adjust the datum display. To Create an Offset Datum Plane 1. Click the button in the Datum toolbar. The DATUM PLANE dialog box opens. Alternatively, click Plane.
Insert > Model Datum > 2. 3. 4.
Select an existing datum plane or planar surface from which to offset the new datum plane. The reference you select appears in the References collector along with its constraint type. If Offset is not the default constraint for the selected reference, select Offset from the constraints list in the References collector. To adjust the offset distance, you can:
o o
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually translate the datum plane to the required distance. In the DATUM PLANE dialog box, type a distance value in the Offset Translation value box or select a value from a list of the most recently used values.
Click OK to create the offset datum plane. To Create a Datum Plane with an Angular Offset 1. Click the button in the Datum toolbar. The DATUM PLANE dialog box opens. Alternatively, click Plane.
Insert > Model Datum > 2.
Select an existing datum axis, straight edge, or straight curve. The reference you select appears in the References collector in the DATUM PLANE dialog box.
8/ 375
3. 4.
If Through is not the default constraint, select Through from the constraints list in the References collector. Press CTRL and select a datum plane or planar surface that is normal to the selected datum axis. By default Offset is selected as the constraint. Note: You can also first select a planar surface to create the datum plane.
5.
To adjust the angle of the datum plane:
o o
6.
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually rotate the datum plane to the required angle. In the DATUM PLANE dialog box, type an angular value in the Offset Rotation value box or select a value from a list of the most recently used values.
Click OK to create the offset datum plane.
Snapping and Unsnapping of Handles When you select datum planes or planar surfaces as references for the creation of datum planes, and when the default constraint is Offset, a handle is displayed with which you can manually drag the datum plane to the required offset distance. You can also snap the offset handles to the following locations:
A point A linear edge An axis A curve These locations or references to which the handles are snapped have the constraint type Through while the constraint of the datum planes or the datum reference is set to Parallel. You can also unsnap handles that are already snapped to these locations so that references with the Through constraint, such as a vertex, datum point, straight edge, curve, or datum axis, are removed while the location of the datum plane or planar surface is maintained. To unsnap a handle, you must hold down the SHIFT key and move the handle with the mouse located close to the handle. Pro/ENGINEER displays the snapped handle when the Placement collector in the DATUM PLANE dialog box displays one of the following selections:
A datum plane or planar surface with the Parallel constraint and a vertex or datum point with the Through constraint A vertex or a datum point with the Through constraint and a datum plane or planar surface with the Parallel constraint A datum plane or planar surface with the Parallel constraint and a parallel straight edge, curve, or datum axis with the Through constraint A parallel straight edge, curve, or datum axis with the Through constraint and a parallel datum plane or planar surface with the Parallel constraint The offset handle is automatically locked when you add a relation to drive the Offset dimension. About Creating a Datum Plane Using a Datum Coordinate System You can select a datum coordinate system as a placement reference and place the datum plane along one of its axes, at an offset from the origin, or through one of the virtual planes. The constraints that are available are Offset and Through. Offset is the default. When the constraint type is Offset, the datum plane is placed along one of the axes of the datum coordinate system that is selected as a placement reference and is offset from the origin.
9/ 375
If you set the show_dim_sign configuration option to no, the offset dimension is displayed as an absolute or positive value even if you have entered a negative value, and the datum plane flips to the opposite side of the reference datum coordinate system. When you set show_dim_sign to yes with a negative value, the offset dimension is displayed as the real value, and the datum plane retains its location on the same side as the reference datum coordinate system. When the constraint type is Through, you must select one of the following virtual planes defined by the selected datum coordinate system:
XY YZ ZX The default virtual plane is YZ. The datum plane is defined through the specified axes and placed through the selected virtual plane of the datum coordinate system. That is, if you select the XY virtual plane, the datum plane is defined through the x- and y-axes of the datum coordinate system. To Create a Datum Plane Through a Datum Coordinate System 1. Click the button in the Datum toolbar. The DATUM PLANE dialog box opens. Alternatively, click Plane.
Insert > Model Datum > 2. 3. 4.
Select a datum coordinate system as the placement reference. The selected datum coordinate system appears in the References collector along with its constraint type. Change the constraint type to Through in the References collector. Select one of the following Plane options:
o o o
5.
XYPlaces the datum plane through the XY plane and defined through the x- and y-axes of the datum coordinate axis. YZPlaces the datum plane through the YZ plane and defined through the y- and z-axes of the datum coordinate axis. This is the default. ZXPlaces the datum plane through the XZ plane and defined through the z- and x-axes of the datum coordinate axis.
Click OK to create the offset datum plane offset in the specified direction along one of the axes of the datum coordinate system or through one of the virtual planes of the datum coordinate system.
About Creating a Datum Plane Tangent to a Surface You can create a datum plane that is tangent to a noncylindrical surface and passes through one of the following references:
A datum point A vertex An endpoint of an edge The following depend on whether you first select a noncylindrical surface or a reference:
If you first select a surface, then select any datum point on the selected surface or on an edge that is created by the selected surface. You can also select a vertex or the endpoint of an edge instead of the datum point. However, the vertex or the endpoint of an edge that you select must also belong to the selected surface. If you first select or create the datum point and then select the noncylindrical surface, you must have used the surface or one of its edges as the placement reference to create the datum point. If you first select a vertex or an endpoint of an edge and then select the noncylindrical surface, the surface must include the vertex or the endpoint of the edge.
10/ 375
The Tangent constraint is added to the newly created datum plane. To Preselect Datum References As a time-saving measure, you can select any of the following combinations of references in the graphics window and click the button to define a fully constrained datum plane. This feature allows you to quickly define datum planes without using the DATUM PLANE dialog box. References Two coplanar edges or two axes (must be coplanar but not collinear) Three datum points or vertices (must not be collinear) Results Datum plane is created constrained through the references Datum plane is created constrained through each of the datum points / vertices. Datum plane is created normal to plane through the selected points.
A datum plane or planar surface and two datum points or vertices (points or vertices must not be collinear with the normal to the plane) A datum point and an axis or straight edge/curve (point must not be collinear with the axis or edge)
Datum plane is created constrained through the datum point and the axis / edge.
About Datum Axes Like datum planes, datum axes can be used as references for feature creation. Datum axes are particularly useful for making datum planes, placing items concentrically, and creating radial patterns. Datum axes, as opposed to feature axes, are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed, blanked, or deleted. Datum axes can be previewed during their creation. You can specify a value as the axis length or adjust the axis length to visually fit to an edge, surface, datum axis, a feature in Part mode, or a part in Assembly mode selected as a reference. The outline of the reference is used to determine the length of the datum axis. Datum Axes Names Pro/ENGINEER names datum axes A_#, where # is the number of datum axes that have been created. You can set an initial name for a datum axis during the creation process by using the Properties tab in the DATUM AXIS dialog box. Or, if you want to change the name of an existing datum axis, you can right-click on the datum feature in the Model Tree and select Rename from the shortcut menu. About the Datum Axes User Interface DATUM AXIS Dialog Box The DATUM AXIS dialog box contains the following tabbed pages:
Placement Display Properties Placement The Placement tabbed page contains the following:
References CollectorPlaces a new datum axis. Use this collector to select a reference on which to place the new datum axis, then select the reference type. The reference types are:
11/ 375
o o
ThroughIndicates that the datum axis extends through the selected reference. To select additional references hold down CTRL as you select. NormalPlaces the datum axis normal to the selected reference. This type of reference requires you to either define references in the Offset References collector or add an additional point or vertex to fully constrain the axis. TangentPlaces the datum axis tangent to the selected references. This type of constraint requires you to add an additional point or vertex as reference. An axis is created parallel to the tangent vector at the location of the point or vertex.
Offset References CollectorActivates the Offset References collector if Normal is selected as a reference type in the References collector. Use this collector to select offset references.
Display The Display tabbed page contains the Adjust Outline check box. Adjust Outline allows you to adjust the length of the datum axis outline so that the datum axis outline fits to a specified size or to a selected reference. When selected, the following options are available from the Outline Type Options menu:
SizeAllows you to adjust the length of the datum axis to a specified length. You can use the handle to manually adjust the length of the datum axis to a desired value or specify a value in the Length value box. ReferenceAllows you to adjust the length of the datum axis so that it fits to the selected reference such as an edge, surface, datum axis, a feature in the Part mode, or a part in the Assembly mode. The References collector displays the selected reference type.
Properties From the Properties tabbed page you can view information about the current datum axis feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Additionally, you can use the Properties tabbed page to rename the datum feature. Shortcut Menus When you right-click in the References collector, a shortcut menu appears with the following options:
RemoveClears the reference that you select in the Reference collector. InformationAllows you to view information about the selected reference in the Pro/ENGINEER browser or the Information window. When you select a feature in the graphics window and right-click, a shortcut menu appears with the following options:
Placement ReferencesSpecifies the references through which the datum axis is created. Offset ReferencesSpecifies the references from which the datum axis is offset. Fit OutlineSpecifies the reference to which the size of the datum axis outline fits. It activates the collector that allows you to specify the reference for the datum axis. This option is available only when you click the Adjust Outline check box in the Display tabbed page of the DATUM AXIS dialog box and select Reference. ClearClears the active collector. To Create a Datum Axis and Adjust Its Size 1. 2. Click the button in the Datum toolbar. The DATUM AXIS dialog box. Alternatively, click Insert > Model Datum > Axis. In the graphics window, select up to two placement references for the new datum axis. You can select planes, surfaces, edges, vertices, curves, and datum points. The references appear in the References collector in the DATUM AXIS dialog box. You can preview the datum axis during creation, even though it is not fully defined.
12/ 375
Note: To add multiple references to your select list press CTRL while you select. 3. Select the required constraint option from constraint list in the References collector. The constraints are Through, Normal, and Tangent. 4. 5. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 until you have established the necessary constraints. If the references are incomplete, the system waits for additional references until the datum is fully constrained. Click the Display tab.
6. To change the size of the datum axis, select the Adjust Outline check box and then click one of the following options from the Outline Type Options menu:
o o
SizeAdjusts the size of the datum axis to a specified length. Type a value in the Length value box. The length of the datum axis is the distance between the two ends of the previewed datum axis. ReferenceAdjusts the size of the datum axis to the selected reference. Select an edge, surface, datum axis, feature in the Part mode, or Part in the Assembly mode as the reference. The References collector displays the selected reference type. You can also set up the selection filter.
7.
Click OK to create the datum axis and adjust its length.
To Create a Datum Axis Normal to a Surface Using Two Offset References 1. 2. button in the Datum toolbar. The DATUM AXIS dialog box opens. Alternatively, click Click the Insert > Model Datum > Axis. Select a surface in the graphics window. The selected surface with the constraint type set to Normal appears in the References collector. You can preview the datum axis normal to the selected surface. A handle appears on the surface. Two offset reference handles also appear. Drag the offset reference handles to select two references or graphically select two references such as a plane and a planar surface or straight edges. The two selected offset references appear in the Offset references collector. Click OK to create the datum axis normal to the selected surface.
3.
4.
To Preselect Datum Axis References As a time-saving measure, you can select any of the following combinations of references in the graphics button to automatically define a fully constrained datum axis. This feature allows window and click the you to quickly define datum axes without using the DATUM AXIS dialog box. The datum axis includes handles for specific sets of references, such as a datum point and planar surface, or a vertex and a datum plane. Hold down SHIFT to snap the handle. References One straight edge or axis Two datum points or vertices A datum point or vertex and a datum plane or planar surface Results A datum axis is created through the selected edge.
A datum axis is created constrained through each of the datum points or vertices. The datum axis is created through the datum point or vertex and perpendicular to the datum plane or planar surface. A handle is displayed at the intersection of the datum axis and the datum plane or planar surface. If the planes intersect, a datum axis is created through the line of intersection.
Two nonparallel datum planes or planar
13/ 375
surfaces A curve or edge and one of its end points or a datum point A surface and offset references two
of intersection. A datum axis is created constrained through the endpoint or the datum point and tangent to the curve or edge.
A datum axis is created normal to the surface. A handle and two offset reference handles are displayed on the surface. If the datum point is on the selected surface, a datum axis is created through the point and normal to the surface. If the datum point is not on the selected surface the DATUM AXIS dialog box opens.
A datum point and a surface
About the Datum Point Feature You can use datum points as a construction element when modeling geometry or as a known point for conducting computations and model analyses. You can add points to your model at any timeeven while in the process of creating another feature. To add datum points to your model, use the Datum Point feature. A Datum point feature can contain multiple datum points that are created during the same operation. Datum points that belong to the same feature behave as follows:
In the Model Tree, all datum points appear under one feature node. All points in the Datum Point feature act as a group. Deleting a feature deletes all points in that feature. To delete individual points in the Datum Point feature, you must edit its definition. Different Types of Datum Points Pro/ENGINEER supports four types of datum point that vary depending on their method of creation and use. Note that the first three types are used in regular modeling. You can select from the following types of datum points:
General pointA datum point created on an entity or at the intersection of entities, or offset from an entity. SketchedA datum point created in Sketcher. Offset from a coordinate systemA datum point created by offsetting from a selected coordinate system. Field pointA point used in Behavioral Modeling for analysis purposes. A field point identifies a geometric domain. Accessing Datum Points To access the Datum Point tool, do one of the following:
Click Insert > Model Datum > Point and select the desired type. On the Datums toolbar, click an arrow next to to open the datum point palette
, which displays icons for different types of datum point. Select an icon for the particular type of datum point that you want to create. Datum Points Display Each point is identified by a label PNT#, where # is the consecutive number of the datum point.
14/ 375
By default, Pro/ENGINEER displays a datum point as a cross. You can change the point symbol to appear as a dot, circle, triangle, or square using one of the following methods:
By using the Datum Display dialog box. Click View > Display Settings > Datum Display and select an option from the Point Symbol list. By setting the configuration file option datum_point_symbol.
About General Datum Points To create datum points that lie on or are offset from the model geometry, use the general type of datum points. Depending on the existing geometry and your design intent, you can use different methods for specifying the point's location. Note: Within one Datum Point feature, you can add points using different placement methods. You can place a general datum point at the following locations:
On a curve, edge, or axis At the center of a circular or elliptical entity On a surface or quilt, or offset from a surface or quilt On a vertex or offset from a vertex Offset from an existing datum point At the intersection of entities. For example, you can place a point at the intersection of three planes, at the intersection of a curve and a surface, or at the intersection of two curves. Accessing a General Datum Point To access a general datum point, do one of the following:
Click Insert > Model Datum > Point > Point. On the Datum Features toolbar, click Using the Object-Action Workflow With certain types of datum points, you can first select feature references and then activate the Datum Points tools. You can preselect the following feature references before activating the tool: .
A vertex Multiple vertices A curve An edge A surface or quilt A datum axis You can also select the following combinations of entities:
A vertex and a straight curve, edge, or axis A vertex and a datum coordinate system A vertex and datum plane or planar surface Two or three surfaces Two edges or curves
15/ 375
Surface (or datum plane) and curve (or edge) Creating a Group of Datum Point on a Surface or Quilt You can create a group of datum points on a surface or quilt by placing multiple points on the selected reference. All points created during one operation belong to the same group. About General Datum Points To create datum points that lie on or are offset from the model geometry, use the general type of datum points. Depending on the existing geometry and your design intent, you can use different methods for specifying the point's location. Note: Within one Datum Point feature, you can add points using different placement methods. You can place a general datum point at the following locations:
On a curve, edge, or axis At the center of a circular or elliptical entity On a surface or quilt, or offset from a surface or quilt On a vertex or offset from a vertex Offset from an existing datum point At the intersection of entities. For example, you can place a point at the intersection of three planes, at the intersection of a curve and a surface, or at the intersection of two curves. Accessing a General Datum Point To access a general datum point, do one of the following:
Click Insert > Model Datum > Point > Point. On the Datum Features toolbar, click Using the Object-Action Workflow With certain types of datum points, you can first select feature references and then activate the Datum Points tools. You can preselect the following feature references before activating the tool: .
A vertex Multiple vertices A curve An edge A surface or quilt A datum axis You can also select the following combinations of entities:
A vertex and a straight curve, edge, or axis A vertex and a datum coordinate system A vertex and datum plane or planar surface Two or three surfaces Two edges or curves Surface (or datum plane) and curve (or edge)
16/ 375
Creating a Group of Datum Point on a Surface or Quilt You can create a group of datum points on a surface or quilt by placing multiple points on the selected reference. All points created during one operation belong to the same group. About the General Point User Interface Feature Icon The icon for the general datum points Datum Point Dialog Box The Datum Point dialog box has two tabs: is located on the Datums toolbar.
PlacementDefines a point's location. PropertiesLets you edit the feature name and access feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Using the Placement Tab The Placement tab of the Datum Point dialog box adapts to the particular placement method that you chose by providing options and fields that are required for constraining the point. Therefore, as you switch from one placement method (for example, at the intersection of three datums) to another (for example, on curve), the appropriate input fields become available. For details, refer to a specific datum point creation procedure. The Placement tab may include the following elements:
Points listLists points that you have created within the current datum point feature. ReferencesLists primary placement references. For example, if you are creating a point at the intersection of three surface, the three selected surfaces appear in the list. You can remove or add references. Press CTRL while adding to the References list. To remove a reference, right-click the reference and click Remove, or unselect it from the graphics window. If appropriate, a reference may have specific placement constraint listed. For example, On or Offset, or On and At Center.
Offset boxLists an offset dimension for points placed at an offset distance. Offset referencesLists references that you select for dimensioning a point to the model geometry. To start adding references, click within the list and select a reference. To add another reference, press CTRL while selecting the next reference. To remove a reference, do one of the following:
o o o
Right-click the reference and click Remove. Unselect the reference from the graphics window. Use the offset reference handle.
For each selected reference, you can adjust the placement dimension (located to the right of the reference) by clicking the dimension value and typing a new one. Note: For points on a curve or edge, the Offset references section lists additional elements. For details, see the procedure for adding points on a curve.
Shortcut Menus The options on the shortcut menu depend on the datum point you are creating. When you right-click a datum point, the shortcut menu may list the following options:
Placement ReferencesSpecifies new placement references. Offset ReferencesSpecifies new offset references.
17/ 375
OffsetChanges the On location constraint to Offset. Next Curve EndLets you select the other endpoint of a curve or edge to use as a reference. New PointLets you create a new point. RatioLets you type a length ratio for placing a point on a curve or edge. RealLets you type a distance from the endpoint of a curve or edge. DuplicateCreate a datum point by applying the same placement constraints and references. UnsnapUnselect an entity that was prehighlighted by the system. To Work with the Points List in the Datum Points Dialog Box As you add a new point, the new point appears on the points list on the Placement tab of the Datum Point dialog box. You can right-click a point on the list to access the following commands on the shortcut menu:
DeleteDelete the selected point. RenameRename the selected point. DuplicateCreate a new point using the same placement method. To add a new point, do one of the following:
Click New Point in the point list in the Datum Point dialog box. Select a point and click Duplicate on the shortcut menu. This creates a new point with the same references. To Create a Datum Point on a Curve, Edge, or Datum Axis 1. 2. Select an edge, datum curve, or axis. . A default point is added to the selected entity. The Datum Point dialog box opens. Notice Click that the new point is added to the point list, and the entity collected for the operation appears under References. You can adjust the point's location manually by dragging the point's handle, or you can position the point using the Placement tab. When positioning a datum point using the Placement tab, you have two options:
3.
o o
End of curveMeasure the distance from the selected end of a curve or edge. To use another endpoint, click Next End. For a curve or edge, the End of curve option is selected by default. ReferenceMeasure the distance from a selected entity. Select a reference entity, for example, a solid surface.
There are two ways to specify the offset distance:
By specifying the offset ratioType the offset ratio in the Offset dimension box. The offset ratio is a fraction of the distance from the datum point to the selected endpoint to the total length of the curve or edge. You can enter a value between 0 and 1. For example, entering the offset ratio of .25, places a datum point at 1/4 of the curve's length from the selected endpoint. By specifying the actual lengthChange Ratio to Real by selecting from the pull-down list. In the Offset dimension box, type the actual curve length from the datum point to the endpoint or reference.
4.
Click New Point to add more points, or click OK.
Tip: Creating a Datum Point at the Extension of a Straight Edge or Curve You can create a point on the invisible extension of a straight edge, straight curve, or datum axis.
18/ 375
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select a linear reference. Click . The Datum Point dialog box opens.
Under Offset references, select Reference. Drag the handle along the invisible extension of the selected edge, curve, or datum axis. Tip: You can adjust the placement dimension by using the Datum Point dialog box. Click a dimension value listed in Offset references and type a new one.
5.
To Create a Datum Point at a Curve's Intersection You can use this procedure to create a datum point at the intersection of a curve, edge, or axis with another entity such as a plane, surface, curve, edge, or axis. 1. 2. Select a curve, edge, or axis. . A default point is added to the selected entity. The Datum Point dialog box opens, and Click the new point is added to the points list. The entity collected for the operation appears under References. To move the point to the intersection with another entity, press CTRL while selecting the intersecting entity. When you click the intersecting entity, the datum point snaps to the intersection. Tips:
3.
o o
4.
You can snap to the intersection with another entity by pressing the SHIFT button while dragging the handle. You can unsnap the handle by right-clicking and selecting Unsnap on the shortcut menu.
To Create a Datum Point at the Center You can create a datum point at the center of a circular or elliptical datum curve or edge. 1. 2. 3. Select a circular or elliptical edge or datum curve. Click . The Datum Point dialog box opens. By default, the system creates a point that lies on the selected entity. The location constraint under References is set to On. To place the point at the center of the selected entity, you must switch the On location constraint to At Center. In the Datum Point dialog box, click On in the table cell and select At Center from the pulldown list. The point is placed at the center. Click New Point to add more points, or click OK.
4.
To Create a Datum Point On or Offset from a Surface You can add points to a surface or quilt. To place a point on a surface or quilt, you must dimension it to two references. In Pro/ENGINEER, these dimensions are considered offset reference dimensions. Each new point placed on a surface or quilt has a placement handle displayed at the pick location and two offset reference handles that you will use to dimension the point to the model geometry. Initially, the offset reference handles are not attached to any reference. Tip: To create an offset point, start by creating a point on a surface and then offset it from the surface by changing the On location constraint to Offset. 1. 2. Select a surface or quilt. . The Datum Point dialog box opens. A new point is added to the points list, and the Click selected surface appears under References.
19/ 375
In the graphics window, the new point is added to the model at the selected location. 3. Dimension the point to two offset references. For each direction, drag the offset reference handle to attach it to the appropriate reference entity (an edge, surface, or plane). When you release the handle, the system adds a placement dimension. Tip: Alternatively, you can click within the Offset references list in the Datum Point dialog box and hold down CTRL while selecting a reference for each direction. 4. To adjust placement dimensions, double-click a dimension value in the graphics area and type a new one. Tip: Alternatively, you can adjust dimensions by using the Datum Point dialog box. Click a dimension value listed under Offset references and type a new one. 5. If you are creating an offset point, you must change the default On location constraint to Offset. To do this, click On and select Offset from the list. Tip: You can right-click the point's placement handle and select Offset from the shortcut menu. 6. 7. Type the offset value in the Offset dimension box or drag the offset handle to a desired location. Click New Point to add more points, or click OK.
Creating Multiple Datum Points on the Same Surface or Quilt When you create multiple points on the same surface or quilt, you create a group of points that use the same offset references for all points in the group. To create a group of points: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a surface or quilt. Click .
Select the locations of the points on the surface or quilt. When you finish placing points, specify the offset references for one point in the group. The system dimensions all other points in the group to the same offset references.
To Create a Datum Point Offset from Another Point To define the offset direction, select the following geometry as a reference:

1. 2. 3. 4.
Straight edge, straight curve, datum axis or a coordinate systemDrag the point's handle parallel to the selected reference. Coordinate systemSelect an axis (x, y, or z) along which to offset the point. Datum plane or planar surfaceDrag the point's handle normal to the selected reference. Select a datum point or vertex. Press CTRL while selecting a direction reference. Click . The Datum Point dialog box opens. By default, the system adds a new point that is coincident with the selected point. Drag the point to the desired location. Tip: Alternatively, you can adjust the placement dimension by using the Datum Point dialog box and typing a dimension value in the Offset box. 5. Click New Point to add more points, or click OK.
To Create a Datum Point at the Intersection of Entities 1. Press CTRL while selecting intersecting entities. You can select one of the following combinations:
20/ 375
o o o
Three surfaces or datum planes A curve, datum axis, or edge, intersecting with a surface or datum plane Two intersecting curves, edges, or axes Note: You can select two curves that do not intersect. In this case, the system places a point on the first curve at the location that is at the shortest distance to the second curve.
2. 3.
Click . The Datum Point dialog box opens. A new point is created at the intersection of the selected entities. Click New Point to continue with the point creation, or click OK.
About Sketched Datum Points Sketched datum points are created in Sketcher by selecting their location on a two-dimensional sketching plane. You can sketch multiple datum points at the same time. All sketched datum points that you create during one operation belong to the same Datum Point feature and lie on the same sketching plane. Accessing a Sketched Datum Point To access the Sketched Datum Point tool, do one of the following:
Click Insert > Model Datum > Point > Sketched. On the Datums toolbar, click the . arrow to open the datum point palette
. Then click
About the Sketched Datum Points User Interface Feature Icon The sketched datum point icon is located on the Datums toolbar.
Sketched Datum Point Dialog Box The Sketched Datum Point dialog box has two tabs:
o o o
PlacementIn this dialog box, you can define the following: Sketching planeSelect a planar surface or a datum plane, or click Use Previous. Sketch viewing directionAccept the default viewing direction as indicated by the arrow, or click Flip. Sketch orientationSpecify how to orient the sketch by selecting an orientation reference and orienting it as Top, Bottom, Left, or Right. PropertiesRenames the feature and displays feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. The Sketch button places you in Sketcher mode. To Create a Sketched Datum Points 1. 2. 3. 4. Click on the datum point palette ( dialog box opens. ). The Sketched Datum Point
Select a sketching plane and specify its orientation, or accept the default orientation. Click Sketch. You are now placed in Sketcher. Accept the default references or select different references for dimensioning the section. When finished, click Close on the References dialog box.
21/ 375
5. 6.
Click Click
and place a point. Add as many points as you need. to exit Sketcher.
About Datum Points Offset from a Coordinate System You can add points by locating them with respect to a selected coordinate system. You can offset points using Cartesian, Spherical, or Cylindrical coordinate system. Accessing Points Offset from a Coordinate System To access datum points offset from the coordinate system, do one of the following:
Click Insert > Model Datum > Point > Offset Coordinate System. On the Datums toolbar, click . the arrow to open the datum point palette
. Then click About the User Interface Feature Icon
The icon for the offset coordinate system datum point on the Datums toolbar. Offset CSys Datum Point Dialog Box The Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box has two tabs:
is located on the datum point palette
o o o
PlacementDefines the point location by specifying the following: Reference coordinate system Type of the offset method for placing points Point's coordinates along the axes of the selected coordinate system
In addition, the Placement tab has the following buttons:
o o o o
ImportImports a data file into the model. SaveSaves points coordinates to a .pts file. Convert to Non Parametric ArrayRemoves dimensions and converts point data into a nonparametric, non-modifiable array. OKAccepts the points you have created and exits the dialog box. PropertiesRenames the feature and displays feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser.
To Create Datum Points Offset from the Coordinate System You can start creating points by activating the tool first and then selecting a coordinate system, or by first selecting a coordinate system and then activating the tool. 1. 2. 3. 4. on the datum point palette ( Click dialog box opens. ). The Offset CSys Datum Point
In the graphics window, select a coordinate system that you want to use for points placement. Select the type of coordinate system from the Type list. Choose from Cartesian, Cylindrical, Spherical. To start adding points, click a cell in the points table. Type the point's coordinates for each of the required axes. For example, for the Cartesian coordinate system, you must specify distances in the x, y, and z directions.
22/ 375
After you specified the point's coordinates, the new point appears in the graphics window, with a drag handle attached (identified by a white rectangle). The new point is dimensioned along the designated axes. Tip: You can add a point by positioning the mouse pointer in the graphics window, right-clicking, and selecting New Point from the shortcut menu. This adds another row to the points table. Tip: You can manually adjust the point's location by dragging the point's handle along each of the axes of the coordinate system. 5. 6. To add another point, click the next row in the table and type the point's coordinates. When finished creating points, you can accept the points and exit by clicking OK, or you can do the following:
o o
To save points to a separate file, click Save. Specify the file name and location. To convert points to a non-parametric array by stripping dimensions, click Convert to Non Parametric Array. Note: You can convert a non-parametric array back to a parametric one by editing the feature definition and selecting Convert to Parametric Array from the Offset CSys Datum Point dialog box .
To Import a Data File 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. on the datum point palette ( Click dialog box opens. ). The Offset CSys Datum Point
In the graphics window, select a coordinate system that you want to use for points placement. Select the offset method from the Type list. Choose from Cartesian, Cylindrical, and Spherical. Click Import. Using the Open dialog box, select a *.pts file that you want to import. The points that you have imported are added to the table. Each row contains a point. Click OK to accept the points and exit the dialog box.
About Field Points A field point is a type of datum point intended for use in conjunction with user-defined analysis (UDA). A field point defines a domain from which it was selectedcurve, edge, surface, or quilt. The field point does not require dimensions because it belongs to the entire domain. To change the domain of the field point, you must edit the feature's definition. Note: You can use a field point only as a reference for features that are required to define a user-defined analysis . Do not use a field point as a reference for regular modeling. Field points have names FPNT# in parts and AFPNT# in assemblies. Accessing a Field Point To access a field point, do one of the following:
Click Insert > Model Datum > Point > Field. On the Datums toolbar, click the . arrow to open the datum point palette
. Then click
23/ 375
To Create a Field Point Object/Action (Streamlined) Workflow 1. In the graphics window, select a curve, edge, surface of a solid, or quilt where you want to place a point. On the Datums toolbar, click an arrow to open the datum point palette Click . A point with a name FPNT# is added to the selected reference. .
2. 3.
Action/Object Workflow The following procedure presents an Action/Object workflow. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. On the Datums toolbar, click an arrow to open the datum point palette Click . The Field Datum Point dialog box opens. .
In the graphics window, select a curve, edge, surface of a solid, or quilt where you want to place a point. A point is added to the selected reference. To change the name of the field point, click the Properties tab on the dialog box. Click OK.
About Datum Curves With the exception of imported geometry, the foundation of all 3d geometry in Pro/ENGINEER starts with a 2-D section. Datum curves allow you to create a 2-D section that can be used to create many other features such as an extrusion or a revolve. Also Datum curves can be used to create a trajectory for swept features. The Datum Curve tool can be accessed by clicking the About Sketched Datum Curves You can sketch datum curves in the same manner as any other features. Sketched curves can consist of one or more sketched segments and of one or more open or closed loops. However, using datum curves for other features is usually restricted to a single curve (which can consist of many segments) of an open or closed loop. To activate the Sketch Datum Curve tool, click the About The Sketch Dialog Box UI The Sketch dialog box consists of: button in the Datum toolbar. button on the Datum toolbar.
The Placement tabbed page The Properties tabbed page The Placement tabbed page contains the following sections:
Sketch PlaneThis section of the dialog box contains the sketch plane reference collector. Click on the collector to select or redefine the sketch plane reference at any time. Sketch OrientationBefore you start sketching, you must orient the sketching plane to the screen normal axis. To do this you must set the following:
o o
Flip buttonClick the Flip button to toggle the sketch orientation between the two sides of the sketch plane. Reference Plane collectorThe reference plane is a plane normal to the sketch plane that is used to orient your view of the sketch plane. Click on the collector to select or redefine the reference plane at any time.
24/ 375
Orientation listUse this list to select an orientation for the reference plane. You can choose the have the reference plane facing Right, Left, Top, or Bottom.
In the Properties tabbed page you can view information about the current sketched datum curve feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Additionally, you can use the Properties tabbed page to rename the datum feature, set cross hatch lines, and set the spacing between cross hatch lines. To Create a Sketched Datum Curve 1. 2. Choose Insert > Model Datum > Sketched Curve or click the The Sketch dialog box opens with the Placement tab active. You can select from the following options on the Placement tab: button on the Datum toolbar.
Sketch PlaneThis section of the dialog box contains the sketch plane reference collector. Click on the collector to select or redefine the sketch plane reference at any time. Sketch OrientationBefore you can sketch the datum curve you must orient the sketching plane so that it is normal this section of the dialog box contains the Flip button, the Reference Plane collector and the Orientation list.
o o o
Click the Flip button to toggle the sketch orientation between the two sides of the sketch plane. Click on the Reference Plane collector to select or redefine the sketch plane. Select an Orientation reference from the Orientation list.
Note: If you select a plane before clicking the button, the system will attempt to find a default sketch orientation, which would allow you to skip step 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the Sketch button. The sketch window opens. Sketch the datum curve. Click Done to exit Sketcher. The new sketched datum curves appears in the graphics window and the Model Tree.
About Imported Datum Curves An imported datum curve can consist of one or more segments. Multiple segments are not necessarily connected. The From File option imports a datum curve from a Pro/ENGINEER ".ibl", IGES, SET, or VDA file format. Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically combine the curves imported using From File into a composite curve. Pro/ENGINEER reads all the curves from an IGES or SET file, then converts them to spline curves. When you import a VDA file, the system reads the VDA spline entities only. The ".ibl" file format is very much like that of a blend file, except you should precede the coordinates of each segment of the curve with both "begin section" and "begin curve". Two points in a section define a line, while more than two define a spline. To connect curve segments, make sure the coordinates of the first point are the same as the last point in the previous section. You can redefine datum curves that are created from a file and you can trim or split them with other curves that are imported from a file. To Create a Datum Curve Using a Cross Section You can use the Use Xsec option to create a datum curve from a planar cross section boundary (that is, the intersection of the planar cross section with the part outline). 1. 2. Click Insert > Model Datum > Curve or click the button on the Datums toolbar.
In the menu manager, click Use Xsec and Done from the OPTIONS menu.
25/ 375
3. 4.
Select a planar cross section from the namelist menu of all the available cross sections. The cross-section boundary is used to create a datum curve. If a cross section has more than one chain, each chain has a composite curve.
Note: You can not use a boundary from an offset cross section to create a datum curve.
To Create a Datum Curve From Equations You can create a datum curve from an equation using the option From Equation as long as the curve does not intersect itself. 1. 2. 3. Click Insert > Model Datum > Curve or click the Click From Equation and Done. A curve creation dialog box open with the following elements: button on the Datum toolbar.
o o o
4. 5. 6.
CsysDefines the coordinate system. Csys TypeSpecifies the type of the coordinate system. EquationEnters an equation.
Use options in the GET COORD S menu to create or select a coordinate system. Use options in the SET CSYS TYP menu to specify the type of the coordinate system. The options are: Cartesian, Cylindrical, Spherical. The system displays an editor window so that you can enter the curve equation as a regular feature relation. The editor window header contains instructions for specifying the equation, depending on the type of coordinate system you have chosen. The equation is specified in terms of parameter t, which varies from 0 to 1, and three coordinate system parameters: X, Y, and Z for Cartesian; r, theta, and Z for cylindrical; and, r, theta, and phi for spherical.
Note: You cannot use the following statements in an equation that defines a datum curve: abs, ceil, floor, else, extract, if, endif, itos, and search. To Create a Datum Curve Through Points You can create a Thru Points datum curve as a spline, or a sequence of alternating tangent lines and arcs. 1. 2. 3. Choose Insert > Model Datum > Curve or click the In the menu manager, choose Thru Points, then Done. Pro/ENGINEER displays the Datum Curve dialog box with the following elements: button on the Datums toolbar.
o o o o
4. 5.
Attributes Specify whether the curve should lie on a selected surface. Curve Points Select points for the curve to connect. Tangency (Optional) Set up tangency conditions for the curve. Note: The Tangency element can be defined only if at least one end segment of the curve is a spline. Tweak (Optional) Modify the shape of the curve that goes through two points by using the polyhedron manipulation.
Use the CONNECT TYPE menu options to select and connect points. When finished, choose Done from the CONNECT TYPE menu to create the curve, or Quit to abort the process.
6. To define tangency conditions, select the Tangency element and Define in the dialog box. Use the options in the DEF TAN menu to define tangency at the ends of the curve.
26/ 375
7. 8.
Specify the direction for the curve at this tangency location by choosing Flip or Okay from the DIRECTION menu. The system displays an arrow at the end of the curve. If you created a datum curve through two points, you can "tweak" the curve in 3D space and dynamically update its shape. To manipulate the curve, choose the Tweak element in the dialog box and click on Define.
Creating a Curve by Connecting Points The CONNECT TYPE and DEF TAN menus are used to create a curve and define tangency at the ends. Using the CONNECT TYPE Menu To create a curve, you select and connect points using options in the CONNECT TYPE menu. The options are as follows:
o o o
SplineConstructs a curve using a three-dimensional spline that passes through the selected datum points and vertices. Single RadConstructs a curve using the same radius through all the bends. Multiple RadConstructs a curve by specifying a radius for each bend. Note: The Attributes element of the curve defined with either the Single Rad or Multiple Rad option cannot be changed to On Surface.
o o o o o
Single PointSelects individual datum points and vertices. You could have created these points individually or as a datum point array. Whole ArraySelects all the points in a Datum Point/Offset Csys feature, in consecutive order. Add PointAdds to the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve will pass. Delete PointDeletes from the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve currently passes. Insert PointInserts a point between already selected points, vertices, and curve ends. This option modifies the curve definition to pass through the inserted point. The system prompts you to select a point or vertex before which to insert the point. Note: You can add, delete, or insert points during the creation or redefinition of the curve.
Using the DEF TAN Menu Options Use the DEF TAN menu options to define tangency at the ends of the curve. The options are as follows:
o o o o o o
StartApplies tangency condition at the start point of the curve. The system displays a red point or circle cross-hair at the start of the curve. EndApplies tangency condition at the end point of the curve. The system displays a red circle cross-hair at the endpoint of the curve. Crv/Edge/AxisSelects an edge, curve, or axis to specify tangency or normal direction at the start or end point, as prompted. Create AxisCreates an axis to specify tangency or normal direction at the start or end point using the DATUM AXIS menu. SurfaceSelects a surface or plane to specify the tangent or normal direction. Srf Nrm EdgeSelects a surface to which the curve will be tangent at its start or end point. Select an edge of that surface to which the curve will be perpendicular at its start or end point. Note: The start or end point of the curve must lie on the surface edge used for the normal reference.
27/ 375
o o o o
ClearRemoves the current tangency constraint at the selected end. To have no tangency constraint at either end, choose Clear for both ends. TangentMakes the curve tangent to the reference at this end. NormalMakes the curve normal to the reference at this end. CurvatureSets continuous curvature for the curve end where the tangency condition is specified. Activate this option by placing a checkmark in front of it. This makes the curvature at the end of the curve equal to that of the connecting end of the tangent entity.
To Create a Datum Curve Through Points that Lie on a Surface To Create a Datum Curve Through Points that Lie on a Surface 1. 2. To create a curve that lies on a specific surface, redefine the Attributes element in the dialog box. Choose Attributes and click Define. Choose the On Surface option from the CRV TYPE menu, followed by Done. The options in the CRV TYPE menu are:
o o
FreeConnects the points without requiring the curve to lie on a surface. This option is set by default. On SurfaceCreates the curve so that it lies on a specific surface patch. Specify the surface to which the curve will belong using options in the GET SELECT menu. Select a surface or a datum plane.
Rules for Creating a Datum Curve with the On Surface Option Consider the following rules for a curve through points:
The On Surface attribute does not apply to a curve defined with the Single Rad or Multiple Rad option. Setting the On Surface attribute may conflict with some of the previous conditions that you defined for that curve. For example, the points selected to define the curve lie on the surface, and the tangency conditions must be possible for the selected surface. When the system detects a conflict, it prompts you to resolve it by removing invalid references. When you change the attribute from Free to On Surface, any tweaking of the curve is removed. About Coordinate Systems Coordinate systems are reference features that can be added to parts and assemblies to do the following:
Calculate mass properties. Assemble components. Place constraints for Finite Element Analysis (FEA). Provide manufacturing operation reference for tool paths. Use as a reference for locating other features (coordinate systems, datum points, planes, imported geometry, and so on). For most common modeling tasks you can use coordinate systems as direction reference. Cartesian, Cylindrical, and Spherical Coordinate Systems Pro/ENGINEER always displays coordinate systems with an X-, Y-, and Z-axis. When referencing a coordinate system to make other features (for example, a datum point array), the system can interpret the coordinate system in three ways:
CartesianThe system interprets the coordinate values as X, Y, and Z. CylindricalThe system interprets the coordinate values as radius, theta (q), and Z. SphericalThe system interprets the coordinate values as radius, theta (q), and phi (f).
28/ 375
The following figure illustrates how these values are applied to the standard X, Y, and Z coordinate system.
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
About Datum Coordinate System Names Pro/ENGINEER names datum coordinate systems CS#, where # is the number of datum coordinate systems that have been created. If desired, you can set an initial name for a datum coordinate system during the creation process by using the Properties tab in the Coordinate System dialog box. Or if you desire to change the name of an existing datum coordinate system, you can right-click on the datum feature in the model tree and select Rename from the shortcut menu. About Coordinate Systems UI The Coordinate System dialog box consists of:
The Origin tabbed page The Orientation tabbed page The Properties tabbed page The Origin tabbed page contains the following sections:
ReferencesThis section of the dialog box contains the coordinate system reference collector. Click on the collector to select or redefine the placement references for the coordinate system at any time. Offset TypeThis list allows you to offset a coordinate system in the following ways:
o o o o
CartesianAllows you to offset a coordinate system by setting X, Y and Z values. CylindricalAllows you to offset a coordinate system by setting Radius, Theta and Z values. SphericalAllows you to offset a coordinate system by setting Radius, Theta and Phi values. From FileAllows you to import a coordinate system's location from a transformation file.
In the Orientation tabbed page you can set the position of the coordinate system's axes, it contains the following options:
References selectionThis option allows you to orient the coordinate system by selecting direction references for any 2 of the coordinate system's axes.. Selected CSYS axesThis option allows you to orient the coordinate system by rotating it about the axes of the coordinate system that is used as a placement reference. Z Normal to ScreenThis button allows you to quickly orient the z axis to be perpendicular to your view screen. In the Properties tabbed page you can view information about the current datum curve feature in the Pro/ENGINEER embedded browser. Additionally you can also use the Properties tabbed page to rename the datum feature.
29/ 375
To Locate a Coordinate System 1. 2. 3. Click Insert > Model Datum > Coordinate System or click the The Coordinate System dialog box opens with the Origin tab active. button on the Datum toolbar.
Select up to 3 placement references in the graphics window. These references can include planes, edges, axes, curves, datum points, vertices or a coordinate system. Click the OK button to create the new coordinate system with the default orientation or click on the Orientation tab to manually orient the new coordinate system (see: To Orient a Coordinate System). Note: If you have select a vertex as an origin reference, the system will not be able to provide you with a default orientation and you will have to manually orient your coordinate system.
To Create an Offset Coordinate System 1. 2. 3. Click Insert > Model Datum > Coordinate System or click the The Coordinate System dialog box opens with the Origin tab active. Select a coordinate system in the graphics window. In the Offset type list, select one of the following offset types: button on the Datum toolbar.
o o o o
4.
CartesianIf you select a Cartesian offset, enter values for X, Y and Z. CylindricalIf you select a Cylindrical offset, enter values for Radius, Theta and Z. SphericalIf you select a Spherical offset, enter values for Radius, Theta and Phi. From FileAllows you to import a coordinate system's location from a transformation file.
To adjust the offset distance, you can:
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually position the coordinate system to your desired location. Note: The drag handle at the center of the coordinate system allows you to drag the coordinate system along each of the reference coordinate system's axes. To change directions, hover the cursor over the drag handle and then move the cursor toward one of the axes. As you move the cursor toward the axes, the drag handle changes direction.
o
5.
In the Origin tab of the Coordinate System dialog box, type a distance value in the Offset Translation value box or select a value from a list of the most recently used values.
Click the OK button to create the offset coordinate system with the default orientation or click on the Orientation tab to manually orient the new coordinate system (see: To Orient a Coordinate System).
To Orient a Coordinate System 1. If you are currently creating a coordinate system and have the Coordinate System dialog box open, then skip to step 2. Otherwise, in the Model Tree, right-click on a coordinate system, and select Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Coordinate System dialog box opens with the Origin tab active. Click the Orientation tab. In the Orient by section, click one of the following options:
2. 3.
References selectionThis option allows you to orient the coordinate system by selecting references for 2 of the axes. For each of the direction collectors, select a reference and select a direction name from the dropdown list. Note: By default, the system assumes that the first direction of the coordinate system will be parallel to the first origin reference. If the reference is a straight edge, curve or axis then the coordinate system axis will be oriented parallel to that reference. If a plane is selected then the first
30/ 375
direction of the coordinate system will be oriented normal to the plane. The system calculates the second direction by projecting the second reference to be orthogonal to the first direction.
Selected CSYS axesThis option allows you to orient the coordinate system by rotating it about the axes of the coordinate system that is used as a placement reference. For each of the axes, enter a desired degree value or right-click in the graphics window and select Orient from the shortcut menu. Then use the drag handle to manually position each axis. Note: The drag handle at the center of the coordinate system allows you to rotate the coordinate system about each of the reference coordinate system's axes. To change directions, hover the cursor over the drag handle and then move the cursor toward one of the axes. As you move the cursor toward the axes, the drag handle changes direction.
o
4.
Set Z Normal to ScreenThis button allows you to quickly orient the z axis to be perpendicular to your view screen.
Click the OK button to finish orientating coordinate system.
About Creating a Coordinate System from a File A coordinate system that is created using a transformation matrix uses a data file to construct a new coordinate system relative to an existing coordinate system. The file data defines two vectors, as follows:
The first vector specifies the X-axis direction. The second vector, which is in the XY-plane (in the general direction of the new Y-axis), determines the new coordinate system origin. Pro/ENGINEER constructs the Z-axis using the right-hand rule. The following figure illustrates the transformation of the coordinate system. Coordinate System Transformation
The X-axis direction is determined from the matrix file and is then translated to the new coordinate system origin. The XY-plane is constructed from the second vector in the file and translated to the new coordinate system origin. To Create a Coordinate System from a File 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the graphics window, select an existing coordinate system. Click Insert > Model Datum > Coordinate System or click the The Coordinate System dialog box opens with the Origin tab active. In the Offset type list, select From File. The Open dialog box opens. Select the transformation file (.trf) that you want to load and click the Open. The system shows you a preview of the new coordinate system at the location specified in the transformation file. Click the OK to create the new coordinate system button on the Datum toolbar.
Example: Transformation File Format The transformation file, with the name filename.trf, has the following format: Transformation File Format
31/ 375
a. Determines the X-axis direction. b. Determines the vector that lies in the XY-plane and the general direction of the Y-axis. c. Can be anything, because the Z-axis is determined using the right hand rule. d. Translation coordinate locates the origin of the new coordinate system. For example, the following file creates a new coordinate system with the origin at (200, 0, 150), as determined from the reference coordinate system. The new X-axis is pointing in the negative X-direction and the new Y-axis is pointing in the positive Z-direction, all relative to the reference coordinate system. Sample Transformation File
Note: The coordinate system offset type is Cartesian. About Datum Reference Features Datum reference features are a set of user-defined surface sets or edge chains. You can construct one or more edge chains to create a chain datum reference feature. Construct one or more surface sets to create a surface datum reference feature. You can edit the definition of the selected datum reference feature, modify references, and change their properties. You can redefine datum reference features created in an earlier version of Pro/ENGINEER. However, you cannot switch from a chain datum reference feature to a surface datum reference feature, or vice versa, during the redefining process. Accessing the Datum Reference Features User Interface The creation of datum reference features follows the object-action workflow. To access the Datum Reference user interface, first select an edge or a surface or quilt, and then do one of the following:
Click Insert > Model Datum > On the Datum toolbar, click .
Reference.
Note: Neither Insert > Model Datum > Reference nor on the Datum toolbar are available if invalid objects or a combination of valid and invalid objects exist in the selection buffer. Additionally, neither of them are available if the selection consists of both the valid objects, that is, a surface and an edge. About the Datum References User Interface Feature Icon The icon for the datum references tool features are represented by is located on the Datum toolbar. Additionally, datum reference
in the Model Tree.
32/ 375
Datum Reference Dialog Box The Datum Reference dialog box has the following tabs:
PlacementConsists of the Reference collector that displays the type of selection. PropertiesAllows you to view information about the Pro/ENGINEER browser and rename the datum reference features. Using the Placement Tab Use the Reference collector in the Placement tab to construct or redefine edge chains or surface sets. The Reference collector displays the type of selection, such as a one-by-one chain of edges, single surfaces, loop surfaces, seed and boundary surfaces, and so on. Additionally, you can use Details on the Placement tabbed page and the Chain or Surface Sets dialog box that opens to add or remove references or redefine the properties of the selected edge chains or surface sets, manipulating them in the graphics window. You can also add or remove an edge chain in the Reference collector without using Details. Shortcut Menus When you right-click in the graphics window, the shortcut menu lists the following options: datum reference features in the
NextSelects the next surface or edge. PreviousSelects the previous surface or edge. Pick From ListLists surfaces or edges to select. Solid SurfacesSelects solid surfaces in the model and is available only if solid surfaces exist in the model. ClearClears all selected surfaces and chains from the Reference collector. When you right-click in the Reference collector, the shortcut menu lists the following options:
RemoveClears the selected reference in the Reference collector. Remove AllClears all references from the Reference collector. Available only when the Reference collector lists more than one reference. To Create a Chain or Surface Datum Reference Feature 1. 2. Select an edge, a surface, or one or more edge chains, or surface sets. on the Datum toolbar or click Insert > Model Datum > Reference. The Datum Click Reference dialog box opens. The Reference collector in the Datum Reference dialog box lists the selection as Edge Chains or Surface Sets, depending on whether you have selected edge chains or surface sets, respectively. The Reference collector displays the type of selection, such as a one-by-one chain of edges, single surfaces, loop surfaces, seed and boundary surfaces, and so on. Click OK to create the chain or the surface datum reference feature.
3.
To Edit References of a Datum Reference Feature 1. 2. Select a datum reference feature in the graphics window. Click Edit > Reference. Alternatively, select the datum reference feature in the Model Tree, rightclick, and select Edit References on the shortcut menu. The REROUTE REFS menu appears. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to roll back the model. Click YES or NO. The REROUTE menu appears. Alternate reference to reroute is the default.
3.
o o
4.
If you accept Alternate, select an alternate reference to reroute. If you click Same Ref, you are allowed to retain the original references.
Click Done on the REROUTE menu. The model regenerates automatically.
33/ 375
To Redefine a Datum Reference Feature 1. 2. 3. Select a datum reference feature in the graphics window. Click Edit > Definition. Alternatively, select the datum reference feature in the Model Tree, rightclick, and select Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. The Datum Reference dialog box opens. Select edge chains or surface sets to redefine or add references. The Reference collector shows the added reference type. Additionally, you can click Details. The Chain or Surface Sets dialog box opens displaying the edge chains or the surface sets. Add or remove references or redefine the properties of the selected edge chains or surface sets manipulating them in the graphics window. 4. Click OK. The model regenerates automatically.
Note: You cannot switch the feature type from a chain datum reference to a surface datum reference, or vice versa, when redefining datum reference features. Selecting Valid Edges and Surfaces for Referencing A valid selection can consist of one or more surface sets or one or more edge chains. Valid surface types are quilts, surfaces of quilts, and solid surfaces. Valid edge types are quilt and solid edges. References nor on the Datum toolbar are available if you Neither Insert > Model Datum > selected invalid objects or a combination of valid and invalid objects. You can set up the selection filter to exclusively select objects. The selected datum references are highlighted and can be previewed. The selected edges are highlighted in red and the selected surfaces appear with a red mesh or red shading, depending on the selected display style. About the Extruded Feature Extrusion is a method of defining three-dimensional geometry by projecting a two-dimensional section at a specified distance normal to the sketching plane. as one of the basic creation methods that allows you to create a solid or surface, Use the Extrude tool and to add or remove material. You can create the following extrusion types with the Extrude tool:
ProtrusionSolid, Thickened CutSolid, Thickened Extruded surface Surface trimRegular, Thickened Typically, to create an extrusion, you select a sketched datum curve that you want to use as a section and then activate the Extrude tool. Pro/ENGINEER shows you preview of the feature. You can adjust the feature as needed by changing the extrusion depth, switching between a solid or surface, protrusion or cut, or assigning a thickness to the sketch to create a thickened feature. Note: You can only create a solid cut, surface, or surface trim in Assembly mode. Creating a Two-Sided Feature You can create a two-sided feature that is constructed on both sides of the sketching plane, with a depth option defined for each side. To create a two-sided feature, start creating an extrusion with a depth option defined for one side. Then click the Options slide-up panel and define the depth option for the second side. Accessing the Extrude Tool To access the Extrude tool, click on the Base Features toolbar or click Insert > Extrude.
34/ 375
There are several ways to activate the Extrude tool:
(Preferred) Select an existing sketched datum curve and click object-action. Click
. This method is referred to as
and create a sketch to extrude. This method is referred to as action-object. .
Select a datum plane or planar surface to use as the sketching plane and then click About the Extrude User Interface Feature Icon To access the Extrude tool, click Dialog Bar The dialog bar consists of the following elements: Common Extrusion options on the Base Features toolbar or click Insert > Extrude.
Creates a solid. Creates a surface. Depth optionsConstrains the depth of the feature. Depth box and Reference collectorSpecifies a depth value for the extrusion that is controlled by the depth dimension. If a depth reference is required, the text box acts as a collector and lists the reference summary. Flips the direction of feature creation with respect to the sketching plane. Options used for creating a cut
Creates a cut using the extruded volume. Changes the side to be removed when creating a cut. Options used with the Thicken Sketch option
Creates a feature by assigning a thickness to the section outline. Changes the side where a thickness is added, or adds a thickness to both sides. Thickness boxSpecifies a thickness value to apply to the section outline. Options used for creating a Surface Trim
Trims a surface using a projected section. Changes the side of the quilt to be removed, or keeps both sides. Quilt collectorIf both sides of the quilt are kept, specifies the side to retain the quilt id of the original quilt. Slide-up Panels The Extrude tool provides the following slide-up panels:
PlacementUse this slide-up panel to redefine the feature section. Click Define to create or change the section. Click Unlink to make the section independent of the sketched datum curve.
35/ 375
o o
OptionsUse this slide-up panel to do the following: Redefine the depth of the feature for each side of the sketching plane. Create a surface feature with capped ends by selecting the Capped Ends option.
PropertiesUse this slide-up panel to edit the feature name and open feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Shortcut Menus When you right-click an extruded feature, the shortcut menu lists the following feature options:
SurfaceSwitches from solid geometry to surface. SolidSwitches from surface geometry to solid. Remove MaterialSwitches the extrusion between protrusion and cut. Thicken SketchCreates the extrusion by adding a thickness to the sketched section. Define Internal SketchCreate a feature section or select a different section. Flip Depth DirectionSwitches the direction of the feature creation with respect to the sketching plane. Flip Material SideSwitches the side of the sketch where material will be removed when creating a cut or where material will be added when creating a thickened feature. ClearClears the active collector. When you right-click an extruded feature, you can access the following collectors:
Placement collectorSelects another sketched datum curve to extrude. Depth side 1 collectorChanges a reference for the To Selected or Through Until depth option for Side 1. Depth side 2 collectorChanges a reference for the To Selected or Through Until depth option for Side 2. Trim Quilt collectorSelects another quilt to trim. Intersection Components CollectorIn Assembly mode, defines the feature visibility and select the components that the feature will intersect. When you right-click a directional arrow, the shortcut menu lists Flip, allowing you to switch the direction of feature creation. When you right-click a drag handle, the shortcut menu lists the following depth options:
Flip Depth DirectionSwitches the direction of the feature creation with respect to the sketching plane. BlindExtrudes a section from the sketching plane by the specified depth value. SymmetricExtrudes a section on each side of the sketching plane by half of the specified depth value. To NextExtrudes a section up to the next surface. Use this option to terminate a feature at the first surface it reaches. Through AllExtrudes a section to intersect with all surfaces. Use this option to terminate a feature at the last surface it reaches. Through UntilExtrudes a section to intersect with a selected surface or plane. To SelectedExtrudes a section to a selected point, curve, plane, or surface.
36/ 375
Example: Different Types of Extrude Feature The next table shows different types of geometry that you can create with the Extrude tool. Extruded Solid Protrusion
Extruded Solid Protrusion with an assigned thickness (Thickened) Extruded Cut, created with Through Next
Extruded Surface
Extruded Surface Trim A section is projected onto quilt to cut out a hole in the quilt. Surface trim with an open section A section is projected on the quilt to create a trim line and cut the quilt. a) original
b) resulting
37/ 375
About Sections Used for Extrusions The Extrude tool requires you to define a section to extrude. You can define a section using one of the following methods:
Select a sketched datum curve before activating the Extrude tool. Activate the Extrude tool and sketch a section. To create a section, click the Placement slide-up panel, and then click Edit. While in the Extrude tool, create a sketched datum curve for use as a section. To create a datum curve, click on the Base Features toolbar.
Activate the Extrude tool and select a sketched datum curve. Sections for Solid Extrusions Note: These rules do not apply to cuts, thickened features, and surfaces. Consider the following rules for creating sections:
o o
Extruded sections can be open or closed. Open sections can have only one contour. All open ends must be aligned to the part edges. Closed sections may consist of the following: Single or multiple closed loops that do not overlap. Nested loops, where the largest loop is used as an outside loop and each other loop is considered to be a hole in the larger loop. The loops can not intersect each other.
Sections for Cuts and Thickened Extrusions Consider the following rules for creating sections:
You can use an open or closed section. You can use an open section with ends that are not aligned. A section cannot have intersecting entities. Sections for Surfaces Consider the following rules for creating sections:
You can use an open or closed section. A section can have intersecting entities. Using Sections with Multiple Contours When you add an extrusion to an existing part geometry, you can sketch several contours on the same sketching plane. These contours may not overlap, but they can be nested. All extruded contours share the same depth option and are always selected together. You can also sketch multiple loops within the section outline to create voids (islands) inside a protrusion. Preselecting a Sketching Plane You can select a sketching plane before you enter the Extrude or Revolve tool.
38/ 375
When you select a datum plane or a planar surface and activate the Extrude or Revolve tool, the selected planar reference is used as the default sketching plane. Therefore, when you enter Sketcher, the Section dialog box opens with the sketching plane defined. You can change the selected sketching plane if needed. Note: If you select a planar reference and then select a sketched datum curve for use as a feature section, only the datum curve selection is used by the feature tool. Using a Sketched Datum Curve as a Feature Section You can use an existing sketched datum curve as a section for the extruded or revolved feature. The default feature type depends on the selected geometry:
If you select an open sketched datum curve, the Extrude or Revolve tool by default creates a surface. If you select a closed sketched datum curve, the Extrude or Revolve tool by default creates a solid protrusion. You can later change solid geometry to surface geometry. Note: In Assembly mode, the default feature type is solid cut. Consider the following rules on using an existing sketched datum curve as a feature section:
You cannot select a copied sketched datum curve. If more than one valid sketched datum curve was selected or if the selected geometry was invalid, the Extrude or Revolve tool opens with no geometry collected. The system displays an error message and asks you to select new references. Associativity between the Selected Curve and the Feature By default, when you select a sketched datum curve to use as a feature section, the section becomes associative with the original curve. You can break this associativity and make the curve independent by clicking the Placement slide-up panel, and then clicking Unlink. When you unlink the section, the sketched datum curve is copied into the feature and becomes and an internal sketch. The Model Tree reflects whether the sketch used is internal or external. If you selected a datum curve to use as the feature section, clicking on the feature node shows the node for the sketched datum curve. If you redefine the feature and unlink the datum curve, its node under the feature node changes to that of an internal sketch. If you created a sketched datum curve while in the Extrude or Revolve tool, Pro/ENGINEER creates a group that includes the curve and the feature. About the Depth Options You can specify the depth of an extruded feature by selecting one of the following depth options: BlindExtrudes a section from the sketching plane by the specified depth value. Note: Specifying a negative depth value flips the depth direction. SymmetricExtrudes a section on each side of the sketching plane by half of the specified depth value. Through UntilExtrudes a section to intersect with a selected surface or plane. For a terminating surface, you can select the following:
o o o o
A part surface, which is not required to be planar A datum plane, which is not required to be parallel to the sketching plane A quilt composed of one or several surfaces In an assembly, you can select geometry of another component.
To NextExtrudes a section to the next surface. Use this option to terminate a feature at the first surface it reaches. Note: You cannot use a datum plane as a terminating surface.
39/ 375
Through AllExtrudes a section to intersect with all surfaces. Use this option to terminate a feature at the last surface it reaches. To SelectedExtrudes a section to a selected point, curve, plane, or surface. Rules for Terminating Features Using the Part Entities
For Through Until and To Next depth options, the outline of the extrusion must lie within the boundaries of the terminating surface. Features that terminate at the intersection with another entity do not have a depth parameter associated with them. Modifying the terminating surface alters the depth of the feature. Tips for Changing the Depth Options Using Snapping You can use snapping to the nearest reference to change the depth option from Blind to To Selected. Hold down SHIFT and drag the depth handle to a reference that you want to use to terminate the feature. You can change the depth option back to Blind by holding down SHIFT and dragging the depth handle. As you drag the handle, the depth dimension is displayed. About the Thicken Sketch Command Use the Thicken Sketch command to create a thin solid by applying a specified thickness to the section outline. The Thicken Sketch command is useful when creating simplified features with a uniform thickness. Consider these rules for adding a thickness:
You can apply the thickness value to either side of the sketch or to both sides. For the thickness dimension, you can specify only a positive value. Note: You cannot include text in a section sketch. About an Extruded Cut You can use the Extrude tool to remove material by projecting a sketched section normal to the sketching plane. You can use open or closed sections to create a cut. Removing material using a closed section creates a slot. To create a cut, use the same depth options as for extruded protrusions. While defining a cut, you can switch between the following feature attributes:
Cut and protrusion by clicking
Remove Material Flip Material Side
The side where material is removed by clicking Solid and thin cut by clicking About an Extruded Surface Thicken Sketch
With the Extrude tool, you can create an extruded surface by extruding a sketched section to a specified depth in the direction normal to the sketching plane. To define the depth of the extruded surface, use one of these depth options: BlindExtrudes a section from the sketching plane by the specified depth value. SymmetricExtrudes a section on both sides of the sketching plane by half of the specified depth value. To SelectedExtrudes a section to a selected point, curve, plane, or surface.
40/ 375
Creating an Extruded Surface with an Open or Closed Volume An extruded surface can have open or closed ends. To create an extruded surface with a closed volume, select the Capped Ends option in the Options slide-up panel to create an additional surface to close off the feature. Note: The Capped Ends option requires a closed section.
About a Surface Trim Created with the Extrude Tool You can use the Extrude tool to trim a quilt by projecting a sketched section onto a quilt normal to the sketching plane. Note: To create a surface trim, you must have a quilt in your model. A section outline defines the trim boundary in a quilt. A section can be open or closed. Consider the following rules about sections:
A closed section can lie within or intersect the quilt boundaries. An open section must intersect the quilt boundaries. Depth Options for Trim Surface To define the depth of the extruded surface trim, use one of these depth options:
BlindExtrudes a section from the sketching plane by the specified depth value. SymmetricExtrudes a section on each side of the sketching plane by half of the specified depth value. To NextExtrudes a section to the next surface. Use this option to terminate a feature at the first surface it reaches. Note: You cannot use a datum plane as a terminating surface. Through AllExtrudes a section to intersect with all surfaces. Use this option to terminate a feature at the last surface it reaches. To SelectedExtrudes a section to a selected point, curve, plane, or surface. Note: The terminating plane must be parallel to the sketching plane. Selecting the Portion of the Quilt to Keep When you trim a quilt with a projected section, you can choose which portion of the quilt to keep, or you can keep both portions of the quilt. Note: If you keep both sides of the quilt, you must select which portion of the trimmed quilt inherits the quilt ID. To Create a Solid Protrusion 1. 2. 3. Select a sketched datum curve to use for extrusion. on the Base Features toolbar. The system creates a default solid extrusion using the Blind Click depth option. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. You can now adjust the geometry as needed:
To flip the direction of feature creation with respect to the sketching plane, click bar.
on the dialog
Tip: Alternatively, you can right-click the feature and click Flip Depth Direction on the shortcut menu.
41/ 375
To change the depth dimension, double-click the depth dimension in the graphics area and type a new one in the dimension box. Tip: To manually adjust the feature depth, click and hold the depth handle and drag it up to the desired depth.
To change the depth option from the default Blind option, click the appropriate depth icon on the dialog bar. For example, to switch to To Selected, click surface that will intersect the feature. and select a point, curve, plane, or
Tip: Alternatively, you can right-click the depth handle and select a different depth option form the shortcut menu. Tip: You can use snapping to any valid entity with the To Selected option. Hold down the SHIFT key and drag the depth handle until you reach a reference that you want to use to terminate the feature. When the system highlights the desired reference, you can release the handle. 4. (Optional) The section used for the extrusion is associative with the sketched datum curve you selected. If you want to break this associativity and copy the section into the extrusion, click the Placement slideup panel and then click Unlink. To verify the feature, click . .
5. 6.
If you are satisfied with the geometry you created, click
To Create a Thickened Extrusion Note: If you want to use an open section to create a thin extrusion that is the first feature in the model, click before you start sketching the section. Otherwise, Sketcher will consider the open section invalid. 1. 2. Select a sketched datum curve to use for extrusion. Click on the Base Features toolbar. The system creates a default extrusion using the Blind depth option. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. on the dialog bar or right-click the feature and select To add thickness to the sketch, click Thicken Sketch on the shortcut menu. Type the thickness value in the dimension box to the right of the icon. 4. To change the side where the thickness is added, click box. You can toggle between three modes: to the right of the thickness dimension
3.
o o o
Add thickness to Side 1 Add thickness to Side 2 Add thickness to both sides
10. You can now adjust the geometry as needed:
on the dialog
To change the depth dimension, double-click the depth dimension in the graphics area and type a new one in the dimension box.
42/ 375
Tip: To manually adjust the feature depth, click and hold the depth handle and drag it up to the desired depth.
To change the depth option from the default Blind option, click the appropriate depth icon on the dialog bar. For example, to switch to To Selected, click surface that will intersect the feature. and select a point, curve, plane, or
Tip: Alternatively, you can right-click the depth handle and select a different depth option form the shortcut menu. Tip: You can use snapping to the nearest entity with the To Selected option. Hold down the SHIFT key and drag the depth handle until you reach a reference that you want to use to terminate the feature. When the system highlights the desired reference, you can release the handle. 11. To verify the feature, click . .
12. If you are satisfied with the geometry you created, click To Create a Cut 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select a sketched datum curve to use for extrusion. Click Click on the Base Features toolbar. on the dialog bar.
The system creates a default solid cut using the Blind depth option. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. You can now adjust the geometry as needed:
on the dialog
To flip the side where material is removed, click
on the dialog bar to the right of
Tip: Alternatively, you can right-click the feature and click Flip Material Side on the shortcut menu.
o o
To change the depth dimension, double-click the depth dimension in the graphics area and type a new one in the dimension box. To change the depth option from the default Blind option, click the appropriate depth icon on the dashboard. Tip: You can use snapping to the nearest entity with the To Selected option. Hold down the SHIFT key and drag the depth handle until you reach a reference that you want to use to terminate the feature. When the system highlights the desired reference, you can release the handle.
6. (Optional) The section used for the cut is associative with the sketched datum curve you selected. If you want to break this associativity and copy the section into the extrusion, click the Placement slide-up panel and then click Unlink. 7. (Optional) The section used for the extrusion is associative with the sketched datum curve you selected. If you want to break this associativity and copy the section into the extrusion, click the Placement slideup panel and then click Unlink. To verify the feature, click .
8.
43/ 375
9.
To Create an Extruded Surface 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select a sketched datum curve to use for extrusion. Click Click on the Base Features toolbar. on the dialog bar.
The system creates a default surface extrusion using the Blind depth option. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. You can now adjust the geometry as needed:
on the dialog
o o
To change the depth dimension, double-click the depth dimension in the graphics area and type a new one in the dimension box. To create a double-sided feature, click the Options slide-up panel on the dialog bar and define the depth for the second side. To do this, select the depth option for Side 2 and select an intersecting reference, if needed.
6. 7.
If you used a closed section for the extrude feature, you can close the ends of the extruded surface. Click the Options slide-up panel on the dialog bar and select Capped Ends. (Optional) The section used for the extrusion is associative with the sketched datum curve you selected. If you want to break this associativity and copy the section into the extrusion, click the Placement slideup panel and then click Unlink. To verify the feature, click . .
8. 9.
To Create a Surface Trim Note: To create a surface trim, you must have a quilt present in your model. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select a sketched datum curve to use for extrusion. Click Click Click on the Base Features toolbar. on the dialog bar or click Surface on the shortcut menu. to create a surface trim or click Remove Material on the shortcut menu. on the dialog bar or on the
To define a trim boundary, create a section to extrude. Click Placement slide-up panel.
Select a sketching plane and specify its orientation or accept the default orientation. Click Sketch. You are now placed in Sketcher. Accept the default references or select different references for dimensioning the section. When finished, click Close on the References dialog box.
44/ 375
9. 10. 11.
Sketch a section. Click Select a quilt to trim.
to exit Sketcher.
The system extrudes a section to intersect the selected quilt. Spin the model to see the feature in a 3D view. To preview how the quilt will be trimmed, click .
12. 13.
To change the depth option from the default Blind option, click the appropriate depth icon on the dialog bar. To change the portion of the quilt to be removed, click on the dialog bar to the left of the Quilt collector. Notice that the arrow that lies within the sketching plane points to the side that will be removed. Click to toggle between three modes:
14.
o o o
Remove Side 1 Remove Side 2 Keep both sides
Tip: Alternatively, you can change the portion of the quilt to be removed by right-clicking the feature and clicking Flip Material Side on the shortcut menu. 15. If both sides are kept, you must select the side that will inherit the original quilt ID by clicking (located to the right of the Quilt collector). 16. (Optional) The section used for the extrusion is associative with the sketched datum curve you selected. If you want to break this associativity and copy the section into the extrusion, click the Placement slideup panel, and then click Unlink. 17. To verify the feature, click . .
18. If you are satisfied with the geometry you created, click To Create an Internal Sketch
Follow this procedure to create an internal sketch while you are in the Extrude or Revolve tool. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Activate the tool. Click the Placement slide-up panel. Click Define. Select the sketching plane and specify its orientation, or accept the default orientation. Click Sketch on the Sketch dialog box. You are now in Sketcher. Accept the default references or select different references for dimensioning the section. When finished, click Close on the References dialog box. Sketch a section. For the revolved feature, sketch a centerline. Click to exit Sketcher. A preview of the feature geometry appears.
Adjust the feature geometry as needed.
Tip: Creating a Datum Curve While in the Feature Tool Occasionally, you may need to create a sketched datum curve to use as a feature section after you have already activated the Extrude or Revolve tool.
45/ 375
1. 2. 3. 4.
With the feature tool active, click Create a sketched datum curve. When finished sketching, click
on the Datums toolbar.
to exit Sketcher.
at the bottom-right corner of the graphics To reactivate the Extrude or Revolve tool, click window. Pro/ENGINEER uses newly created sketched datum curve as the feature section and creates default geometry. Adjust the feature as needed.
5.
Making Changes to an Extruded Feature With the Extrude tool, you can switch between different feature options while creating an extrusion. You can also edit the feature after it has been created using one of the editing tools:
Edit DefinitionRedefine the feature. Edit ReferencesChange the existing references by replacing them with new. EditModify feature dimensions. Note: When you redefine the feature type from solid to surface or vice versa, these changes are not propagated to the dependent copies of that feature. Using Direct Section Edit You can access a feature section in the Model Tree and make changes to the section without entering the feature Edit mode. This lets you work directly with the section and its placement references without opening the Extrude tool. To edit a section from the Model Tree: 1. 2. Click the feature icon in the Model Tree. The section subnode ( ) appears in the Model Tree.
Right-click the section subnode and choose one of the options:
o o
EditModify the section dimensions. Edit DefinitionModify the section placement and the section geometry.
Redefining a Copied Feature If you edit a section while redefining a copied extruded feature, the redefined feature is no longer associative with the original feature. About the Revolved Feature creates a feature by revolving a sketched section around a centerline. Use the Revolve The Revolve tool tool as one of the basic creation methods that allows you to create a revolved geometry as a solid or surface, and to add or remove material. You can create different types of revolved feature with the Revolve tool:
Revolved protrusionSolid, Thickened Revolved cutSolid, Thickened Revolved surface Revolved surface trimRegular, Thickened Typically, to create a revolved feature, you activate the Revolve tool and specify the feature type, solid or surface. Then you select or create a sketch. A revolved section requires an axis of revolution that can be created either with the section or defined by selecting model geometry. After the Revolve tool shows you
46/ 375
preview of the feature geometry, you can change the angle of revolution, switch between a solid or surface, protrusion or cut, or assign a thickness to the sketch to create a thickened feature. Note: Legacy revolved features that were defined using the Constant angle option are automatically converted to Variable. Creating a Two-Sided Feature You can create a two-sided feature that is constructed on both sides of the sketching plane, with a depth option defined for each side. To create a two-sided feature, start creating a revolved feature with an angle option defined for one side. Then select the Options slide-up panel and define the angle of revolution for the second side. Accessing the Revolve Tool To access the Revolve tool, click on the Base Features toolbar or click Insert > Revolve.
There are several ways to activate the Revolve tool:
(Preferred) Preselect a sectionCreate a section to use and then click to as object-action. Click
. This method is referred
and create a sketch to revolve. This method is referred to as action/object.
Preselect a datum planeSelect a datum plane or planar surface to use as the sketching plane and then click .
About the Revolve User Interface Feature Icon To access the Revolve tool, click Dialog Bar The dialog bar consists of the following elements: Common Revolve options on the Base Features toolbar, or click Insert > Revolve.
Creates a solid feature. Creates a surface feature. Angle optionsLists options to constrain the angle of revolution for the feature. Choose one of these options: Variable, Symmetric, or To Selected.
Angle box/Reference collectorSpecifies an angle value for the revolved feature. If a reference is required, the text box acts as a collector and lists the reference summary. Flips the direction of feature creation with respect to the sketching plane. Options used for creating a cut
Creates a cut using the revolved feature volume. Changes the side to be removed when creating a cut. Options used with the Thicken Sketch option
Creates a feature by assigning a thickness to the section outline.
47/ 375
Changes the side where a thickness is added or adds a thickness to both sides. Thickness boxSpecifies a thickness value to apply to the section outline. Options used for creating a Revolved Surface Trim
Trims a surface using a revolved section. Changes the side of the quilt to be removed, or keeps both sides. Quilt collectorIf both sides of the quilt are kept, select the side to retain the quilt id of the original quilt. Slide-up Panels The Revolve tool provides the following slide-up panels:
PlacementUse this slide-up panel to redefine the feature section and specify the axis of revolution. Click Define to create or change the section. Click inside the Axis collector to define the axis of revolution. Click Unlink to make the section independent of the sketched datum curve. OptionsUse this slide-up panel to do the following:
o o
Redefine the angle of revolution for one or both sides of the sketch. Create a surface feature with capped ends by selecting the Capped Ends option.
PropertiesUse this slide-up panel to edit the feature name and open feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Shortcut Menus When you right-click a revolved feature, the shortcut menu lists the following feature options:
SurfaceSwitches from solid geometry to surface. SolidSwitches from surface geometry to solid. Remove MaterialSwitches the feature between protrusion and cut. Thicken SketchApplies a thickness to the sketch. Define Internal SketchCreate a feature section or select a different section. Flip Angle DirectionSwitches the direction of the feature creation with respect to the sketching plane. Flip Material SideSwitches the side of the sketch where material will be removed when creating a cut, or adds material when creating a thickened feature. ClearClears the active collector. When you right-click an extruded feature, you can access the following collectors:
Placement collectorSelects another sketched datum curve to use as a section. Angle side 1 collectorChanges a reference for the To Selected option for Side 1. Angle side 2 collectorChanges a reference for the To Selected option for Side 2. Trim Quilt collectorSelects another quilt to trim. Intersection Components CollectorIn Assembly mode, defines the feature visibility and select the components that the feature will intersect. When you right-click a drag handle, the shortcut menu lists the following angle options:
Flip Angle DirectionSwitches the direction of the feature creation with respect to the sketching plane.
48/ 375
VariableRevolves the section from the sketching plane by the specified angle value. Type the angle value in the text box, or select one of predefined angles (90, 180, 270, and 360). SymmetricRevolves the section on each side of the sketching plane by half of the specified angle value. To SelectedRevolves the section up to a selected point, curve, plane, or surface. Example: Different Types of Revolved Feature The next table shows different types of geometry that you can create with the Revolve tool. Revolved Solid Protrusion
Revolved Protrusion with an assigned thickness (created using a closed section)
Revolved Protrusion with an assigned thickness (created using an open section)
Revolved Cut
Revolved Surface
About Sections Used for Revolved Features Creating a revolved feature requires you to define a section that you want to revolve and the axis of revolution. The axis can be a linear reference or a Sketcher centerline. Consider the following rules for defining revolved sections:
You can use open or closed sections to create revolved surfaces. Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution. About the Axis of Revolution To define an axis of revolution for a revolved feature, you can use one of the following:
49/ 375
External referenceUse an existing part geometry of a valid type. Internal centerlineUse a centerline created in Sketcher. While defining a revolved feature, you can change the axis of revolution, for example, select an external axis instead of the centerline. Consider these rules for defining the axis of revolution:
Geometry must be sketched only on one side of the axis of revolution. The axis of revolution (a geometric reference or a centerline) must lie in the sketching plane of the section. Using Model Geometry as an Axis of Revolution You can select an existing linear geometry as an axis of revolution. You can use the following entities as a reference:
Datum axis Straight edge Straight curve An axis of a coordinate system Using a Sketcher Centerline as the Axis of Revolution In Sketcher, you can draw a centerline to use as the axis of revolution. Consider the following information about a centerline:
If a section contains one centerline, the centerline is used as the axis of revolution. If a section contains more than one centerline, the system uses the first centerline as the axis of revolution. You can declare any centerline as the axis of revolution. About the Angle of Revolution In a revolved feature, a section is revolved around an axis of revolution to a specified angle. You can define the angle of revolution by selecting one of the following angle options: Variable Revolves a section from the sketching plane by the specified angle value. Type the angle value in the text box, or select one of predefined angles (90, 180, 270, 360). If you select one of the predefined angle values, the system creates an angle dimension. SymmetricRevolves a section on each side of the sketching plane by half of the specified angle value. To SelectedRevolves a section up to a selected datum point, vertex, plane, or surface. Note: The terminating plane or surface must contain the axis of revolution. Tips for Changing the Angle Option Using Snapping You can use snapping to the nearest reference to change the angle option from Variable to To Selected. Hold down SHIFT and drag the handle to a reference that you want to use to terminate the feature. You can change the angle option back to Variable by holding down SHIFT and dragging the handle. As you drag the handle, the angle dimension is displayed. About a Revolved Cut You can use the Revolve tool to remove material by revolving a sketched section about a centerline. To create a cut, use the same angle options as for protrusions. For solid cuts, use closed sections. For cuts created with Thicken Sketch, you can use both closed and open sections. While defining a cut, you can switch between the following feature attributes:
50/ 375
Cut and protrusion by clicking
Remove Material Flip Material Side
The side where material is removed by clicking Solid and thin cut by clicking About a Revolved Surface Thicken Sketch
With the Revolve tool, you can create an extruded surface by revolving a sketched section about a centerline. To define the depth of the extruded surface, use one of these depth options: BlindExtrude a section from the sketching plane by the specified depth value. SymmetricExtrude a section on both sides of the sketching plane by half of the specified depth value. To SelectedExtrude a section to a selected point, curve, plane, or surface. Creating an Extruded Surface with an Open or Closed Volume An extruded surface can have open or closed ends. To create an extruded surface with a closed volume, select the Capped Ends option in the Options slide-up panel. The system creates an additional surface to close off the feature. To Define an Axis of Revolution You can use one of the following methods to define an axis of revolution:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Select model geometry to use as an external axis of revolution Sketch a centerline when you sketch a section Using an external axis of revolution Make sure the model contains geometry that you want to use as an axis of revolution. Create a section that you want to revolve. Click on the Base Features toolbar. .
Click the Axis collector
Select a feature or geometric reference to use as an axis of revolution. Continue defining the revolved feature.
Using an internal centerline as an axis of revolution 1. 2. 3. Create a sketch that includes a section and a sketched centerline. Click on the Base Features toolbar.
Continue defining the revolved feature.
To Create a Revolved Solid Use this procedure when you want to create a revolved solid using an existing sketched datum curve as a feature section and a linear reference as an axis of revolution. 1. 2. 3. Select a sketched datum curve to use as a revolved section. Click on the Base Features toolbar. .
If the section did not contain a centerline, click the Axis collector
51/ 375
4. 5.
Select a linear reference to use as the axis of revolution. The system by default creates a solid feature that is revolved by 360. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. You can now adjust the geometry as needed:
o o
You can create a solid feature from an open section by using the Thicken Sketch (
) option.
To adjust the angle of revolution, double-click the angle dimension on the model and type a new one in the dimension box. Tip: To manually adjust the feature depth, click the angle handle and drag it up to the desired angle.
To change the angle option, click the appropriate angle icon on the dashboard. For example, to switch to To Selected, click feature. and select a point, curve, plane, or surface that will intersect the
To flip the direction of feature creation with respect to the sketching plane, click bar. . .
on the dialog
6. 7.
To verify the feature, click
To Create a Thickened Revolved Feature Note: To create a thin solid using an open section, click Otherwise, Sketcher will consider the open section invalid. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click on the Base Features toolbar. before you start sketching the section.
To create a section to revolve, click the Placement slide-up panel on the dashboard. Then click Define. The Sketch dialog box opens. Select a sketching plane, specify its orientation, or accept the default orientation. Click Sketch. You are now placed in Sketcher. Accept the default references or select different references for dimensioning the section. When finished, click Close on the References dialog box. Sketch an open or closed section. Sketch a centerline to use as an axis of revolution. Click to exit Sketcher. The system creates default geometry using the Blind depth option. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. on the dialog bar or right-click the feature and select To add thickness to the sketch, click Thicken Sketch on the shortcut menu. Type the thickness value in the dimension box to the right of the icon.
8.
9.
To change the side where the thickness is added, click box. You can toggle between three modes:
to the right of the thickness dimension
o o o
Add thickness to Side 1 Add thickness to Side 2 Add thickness to both sides
10. You can now adjust the geometry as needed:
52/ 375
To adjust the angle of revolution, double-click the angle dimension on the model and type a new one in the dimension box. Tip: To manually adjust the feature depth, click the angle handle and drag it up to the desired angle.
To change the angle option, click the appropriate angle icon on the dashboard. For example, to switch to To Selected, click feature. and select a point, curve, plane, or surface that will intersect the
To change the thickness, double-click the thickness dimension in the graphics area and type a new value. To flip the direction of feature creation with respect to the sketching plane, click bar. . . on the dialog
11. To verify the feature, click
12. If you are satisfied with the geometry you created, click To Create a Revolved Cut 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Click Click on the Base Features toolbar. on the dialog bar.
To create a section to revolve, click the Placement slide-up panel, and then click Edit. Select a sketching plane and specify its orientation, or accept the default orientation. Click Sketch. You are now placed in Sketcher. Accept the default references, or select different references for dimensioning the section. When finished, click Close on the References dialog box. Sketch a closed section that you want to revolve. Using on the Sketcher toolbar, sketch a centerline to use as the axis of revolution.
Click to exit Sketcher. The system creates a default solid cut using the Variable angle option. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. You can now adjust the geometry as needed: To flip the direction of feature creation with respect to the sketching plane, click dashboard. To flip the side where material is removed, click on the dialog bar. on the
Tip: Alternatively, you can right-click the feature and click Flip Material Side on the shortcut menu.
To change the angle dimension, double-click the angle dimension in the graphics area and type a new one in the dimension box. . .
12. If you are satisfied with the geometry you created, click To Create a Revolved Surface Note: A revolved section must contain an axis of revolution.
53/ 375
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Click Click
on the Base Features toolbar. on the dialog bar.
To create a section to revolve, click the Placement slide-up panel, and then click Edit. Select a sketching plane and specify its orientation, or accept the default orientation. Click Sketch. You are now placed in Sketcher. Accept the default references or select different references for dimensioning the section. When finished, click Close on the References dialog box. Sketch an open or a closed section that you want to revolve. Using on the Sketcher toolbar, sketch a centerline to be used as the axis of revolution.
When you finish creating both the section and the centerline, click to exit Sketcher. The system creates a surface feature that is revolved by 360. Spin the model to see it in a 3D view. You can now adjust the geometry as needed:
o o o
on the dialog
To adjust the angle dimension, double-click the angle dimension on the model and type a new one in the dimension box. To create a double-sided feature, click the Options slide-up panel on the dialog bar and define the angle for the second side. To do this, select the angle option for Side 2 and select an intersecting reference, if needed. If you used a closed section for the revolved feature, you can close the ends of the revolved surface. Click the Options slide-up panel on the dashboard and select Capped Ends. . .
11. If you are satisfied with the geometry you created, click To Create a Revolved Surface Trim
Note: To create a surface trim, you must have a quilt present in your model. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click Click Click on the Base Features toolbar. on the dialog bar or click Surface on the shortcut menu. to create a surface trim or click Remove Material on the shortcut menu.
To define a trim boundary, create a section to revolve. Click the Placement slide-up panel, and then click Edit. Select a sketching plane and specify its orientation or accept the default orientation. Click Sketch. You are now placed in Sketcher. Accept the default references or select different references for dimensioning the section. When finished, click Close on the References dialog box. Sketch a section and centerline. Click Select a quilt to trim. to exit Sketcher.
8. 9.
54/ 375
10.
The system revolves a section to intersect the selected quilt. Spin the model to see the feature in a 3D view. To verify how the quilt will be trimmed, click .
11. 12. 13.
To change the default angle option, click the appropriate angle icon on the dialog bar. To change the portion of the quilt to be removed, click on the dialog bar to the left of the Quilt collector. Notice that the arrow that lies within the sketching plane points to the side that will be removed. Click to toggle between three modes:
o o o
Remove Side 1 Remove Side 2 Keep both sides
Tip: Alternatively, you can change the portion of the quilt to be removed by right-clicking the feature and clicking Flip Material Side on the shortcut menu. 14. If both sides are kept, you must select the side that will inherit the original quilt id by clicking (located to the right of the Quilt collector). 15. To verify the feature, click . .
16. If you are satisfied with the geometry you created, click Making Changes to a Revolved Feature
With the Revolve tool, you can switch between different feature options while creating the feature. You can also edit the feature after it has been created using one of the editing tools:
Edit DefinitionRedefine the feature. Edit ReferencesChange the existing references by replacing them with new. EditModify feature dimensions. Note: When you redefine the feature type from solid to surface or vice versa, these changes are not propagated to the dependent copies of that feature. Using Direct Section Edit You can access a feature section in the Model Tree and make changes to the section without entering the feature Edit mode. This lets you work directly with the section and placement references without opening the Revolve tool. To edit a section from the Model Tree: 1. 2. Click the feature icon in the Model Tree. The section subnode ( ) appears in the Model Tree.
Right-click the section subnode and choose one of the options:
o o
EditModify the section dimensions. Edit DefinitionModify the section placement and the section geometry.
Redefining a Copied Feature If you edit a section while redefining a copied revolved feature, the redefined feature is no longer associative with the original feature.
55/ 375
About the Variable Section Sweep Feature With the Variable Section Sweep feature, you can create a solid or surface feature. You add or remove material while sweeping a section along one or more selected trajectories by controlling the sections orientation, rotation, and geometry. You can create a sweep using a constant section or a variable section.
Variable SectionConstrains the sketch entities to other trajectories (pivot plane or existing geometry) or use section relations with the trajpar parameter to make the sketch variable. The references to which the sketch is constrained changes the shape of the section. Also, defining the dimensioning scheme by a graph or relations (with trajpar) makes the sketch variable. Sketch regenerates at points along the trajectory and updates its shape accordingly. Constant SectionSketch does not change its shape as its being swept along the trajectories. Only orientation of the frame on which the section lies changes. The main components of the variable section sweep tool are the section trajectories. The sketched section sits on a frame that is attached to the Origin trajectory and moves along its length to create geometry. The Origin trajectory, along with the other trajectories and other references such as the planes, axes, edges, or coordinate system define the orientation of the section along the sweep. The frame is essentially a coordinate system that slides along the origin trajectory and carries with itself the section to be swept. Axes of the coordinate system are defined by auxiliary trajectories and other references. The Frame is important because it determines the orientation of the sketch as it is being moved along the origin trajectory. The Frame is oriented by additional constraints and references such as the Normal to Trajectory, Normal to Projection, and the Constant Normal Direction (along an axis, edge, or plane). Pro/ENGINEER places the sketched section in a certain orientation with respect to these references and attaches it to a coordinate system that moves along the Origin trajectory and sweeps the section. When creating cut, trim, or thin features, use the arrows in the graphic window to indicate the direction of the tool operation. About the Variable Section Sweep User Interface Feature Icon To access the Variable Section Sweep tool, click Section Sweep. Dialog Bar The Variable Section Sweep dialog bar consists of the following elements: SolidSweep as solid. SurfaceSweep as a surface. Open the internal section sketcher to create or edit sweep section. Solid or Surface Cut. Thin Protrusion, Thin Solid or Surface Cut. Change the direction of the operation to add or remove material. Most recently used value boxType or select a thickness value. Trim quilt boxContains quilt references you selected to be trimmed. Note: A flip button appears after the trim quilt collector if you decide to keep both sides of the quilt after the trim operation. Use the flip button to specify which side retains or inherits the quilt ID from the trim quilt in the collector. in the Feature toolbar or click Insert > Variable
56/ 375
Slide-up Panels The Variable Section Sweep dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
References
Trajectories CollectorDisplays the trajectory that you selected as the origin and allows you to specify types of trajectories.
DetailsOpens the Chain dialog box so you can modify the chain properties.
Section Plane ControlDetermines how the section plane is oriented.
Normal to TrajectoryMoving frame is always normal to a specified trajectory. Normal to ProjectionY axis of moving frame is parallel to a specified direction and Z axis is tangent to the projection of the original trajectory along the specified direction. The direction reference collector allows you to add or delete references. Constant Normal DirectionZ axis of moving frame is parallel to a specified direction. The direction reference collector allows you to add or delete references.
Horizontal/Vertical ControlDetermines how the frame rotation around the sketch plane's normal is controlled along the variable section sweep.
AutomaticThe section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction. Pro/ENGINEER calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the swept geometry is minimally twisted. Automatic is the default for an origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces. The direction reference collector allows you to define the initial section or frame x-axis orientation at the start of the sweep. Sometimes it is necessary to specify the X-axis direction, for example, for straight line trajectories or trajectories that have a straight segment at the start. Normal to SurfaceY-axis of the section plane is normal to the surface on which the Origin trajectory lies. This is the default option when the Origin trajectory reference is a curve on surface, one sided edge of a surface, two sided edge of surface or solid edge, curve created though intersection of surfaces, or two projection curves. Next allows you to move to the next normal surface. X-TrajectoryX-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection point of the specified X-trajectory and the section plane along the sweep.
OptionsSelect variable or constant sweeps. Variable SectionConstrains the sketch entities to other or use section relations with the trajpar parameter to which the sketch is constrained changes the shape of scheme by a graph or relations (with trajpar) makes the along the trajectory and updates its shape accordingly. trajectories (pivot plane or existing geometry) make the sketch variable. The references to the section. Also, defining the dimensioning sketch variable. Sketch regenerates at points
Constant SectionSketch does not change its shape as its being swept along the trajectories. Only orientation of the frame on which the section lies changes. Cap ends check boxAdd capped ends to the sweep. Note that you must select a surface reference with a closed section to use this option. Merge ends check boxMerge the ends of the sweep. There must be a solid surface at the ends of the sweep in order to perform a merge. Additionally, the sweep must have Constant Section selected with a single planar trajectory.
57/ 375
Sketch placement pointSpecify the point on the Origin Trajectory where you want to sketch the section. The start point of the sweep is not affected. The start point of the sweep is used as the default location where you sketch the section if Sketch placement point is empty.
TangencySelection and control of surfaces with tangent trajectories. NoneDisable the tangent trajectory. Side 1Sweep section is tangent to surfaces on side 1 of the trajectory. Side 2Sweep section is tangent to surfaces on side 2 of the trajectory. SelectedManually specify tangent surfaces for the sweep section.
PropertiesRename the sweep feature or view information about the sweep feature in the Pro/ENGINEER embedded browser. Shortcut Menus In the graphics window, right-click for the Variable Section Sweep shortcut menu commands:

trajectory.
TrajectoryShow and select the trajectory use for the variable section sweep. Start X DirectionSelect up to 2 references to define the initial section x-axis direction. Placement PointSelect a datum point along the origin trajectory for sketch placement. ClearClear any active collector. You cannot clear the Origin Trajectory reference or Normal, X, and Tangent trajectories. Normal to TrajectoryMoving frame is always normal to a specified trajectory. Normal to ProjectionY axis of moving frame is parallel to a specified direction and Z axis is tangent to the projection of the original trajectory along the specified direction. Constant Normal DirectionZ axis of moving frame is parallel to a specified direction. AutomaticThe section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction. SketchOpen the internal section sketcher. Variable SectionSpecify that the shape of the section can be changed as it is swept along the trajectory Constant SectionSpecify that the section shape does not change as it is swept along the RemoveRemove a reference for the selected Trajectories collector. You cannot remove the Origin Trajectory reference. However, you can replace it by selecting a new Origin Trajectory reference in the graphics window. Next SurfaceMove to the next normal surface. To Create a Variable Section Sweep 1. 2. Click or Insert > Variable Section Sweep. The dashboard appears.
Click one of the following using the variable section sweep to create a:
o o
3. 4.
(default) surface solid
Click to use the Thin Trim options. These options are only available when trimming a quilt or creating a solid protrusion and cut. Select a trajectory to be used for the variable section sweep.
58/ 375
Note: You can also select the trajectory or trajectories before using Insert > Variable Section Sweep. Use CTRL to select multiple trajectories. Use SHIFT to select multiple entities in a chain. 5. Click Options and specify the following: Click Variable Section to specify that the shape of the section can be changed as it is swept along the trajectory or
Click Constant Section to specify that the section shape does not change as it is swept along the trajectory. Click the Cap ends check box to create the swept geometry with a capped ended surface. Click the Merge ends check box to merge geometry with the solid surface at the ends of the sweep. Note that there must be a solid surface at the ends of the sweep in order to perform a merge. There must be a solid surface at the ends of the sweep in order to perform a merge. Additionally, the sweep must have Constant Section selected with a single planar trajectory. Click inside the Sketch placement point box and select a point on the Origin Trajectory where you want to sketch the section. The start point of the sweep is not affected. The start point of the sweep is used as the default location where you sketch the section if Sketch placement point is empty. 5. 6. Click References. Under Trajectories, Pro/ENGINEER displays the trajectory that you selected as the origin trajectory. The selected trajectory is highlighted in red in the graphics window. Select another trajectory or select multiple trajectories using the CTRL key.
Note: Right-click and select Remove to remove the trajectories for creating a variable section sweep. This is valid for all the trajectories except the Origin trajectory. Also, to remove trajectories selected as X-trajectory or Normal trajectory, clear the check boxes to remove the attributes for these and then remove the trajectory. You cannot replace or remove trajectories where tangent references exist. 7. Under Section plane control, the option that you select determines how the section plane is oriented, that is the Z direction of the sweeping coordinate system. Select one of the following from the list: Normal to trajectorySection plane is normal to the selected trajectory. This is the default for variable section sweep. If you select this option and Automatic horizontal and vertical control, specify XDirection reference at Start. You can select any datum plane or a datum curve, linear edges, a coordinate system, or an individual axis of a coordinate system. Normal to projectionSection plane is normal to the projection of the Origin trajectory along a specified direction reference. If you select this option, select a Direction reference for the projection. To reverse the direction of the reference, click click Next. . If you selected a coordinate system as the reference, to select the next axis,
Constant normal directionSection plane normal vector is parallel to the direction reference that you select. If you select this option, select Direction reference for the projection. To reverse the direction of the reference, click .
An arrow at the sketch placement point indicates the current direction for section plane control. The Horizontal direction for the section is decided by Automatic orientation or the X Direction reference at Start. You can select any datum plane or a datum curve, linear edges, a coordinate system or an individual axis of a coordinate system.
59/ 375
8.
Under Horizontal/Vertical control the option that you select determines how the section plane (the XY axis of the sweeping coordinate system) is oriented along the variable section sweep. Select one of the following from the list: Normal to surfaceY-axis of the section plane is normal to the surface on which the Origin trajectory lies. This is the default option when the Origin trajectory reference is a curve on surface, one sided edge of a surface, two sided edge of surface or solid edge, curve created though intersection of surfaces, or two projection curves. AutomaticThe section plane is automatically oriented in the XY direction. Pro/SURFACE calculates the direction of the x-vector such that the swept geometry is minimally twisted. For an Origin trajectory without any referenced surfaces, Automatic is the default.
Note: You cannot orient the sketched section for Automatic for straight edges unless they are sketched and X Direction reference at Start is specified.
X-TrajectoryX-axis of the section plane passes through the intersection point of the specified Xtrajectory and the section plane along the sweep. 9. Click to open Sketcher and sketch the section for sweeping along the selected trajectories. Click to exit sketcher.
Note: If Pro/ENGINEER does not start Sketcher, it means that the references chosen cannot successfully orient the sketch plane. 10. Click to preview geometry or click to complete the feature.
Note: If Pro/ENGINEER does not display the preview geometry, it means that the geometry cannot be constructed. About Specifying the Variable Section Sweep Trajectories The Variable Section Sweep tool can have various types of trajectories such as:
Origin trajectory Normal trajectory X-Trajectory To select and change the type of a trajectory, click References from the dashboard. Under Trajectories, the selected trajectories are listed. You can change the type of the selected trajectories as follows:
Click the X check box next to a trajectory to make that trajectory an X-Trajectory. The trajectory that you select first cannot be the X-trajectory. Click the N check box next to a trajectory to make that trajectory a normal trajectory. Note: It is a good practice to keep the origin trajectory as the Normal trajectory. In some cases if the normal trajectory geometry conflicts with the flow of the sweep frame along the original trajectory, the section plane does not get oriented.
When one or more tangent surfaces exist for the trajectory, the T check box is selected. When there are two tangent surfaces, change the tangency condition for the trajectory, click Next. Notes:
All trajectories other than the Origin trajectory are auxiliary trajectories by default until you click the T, N, or X check boxes. Only one trajectory can be an X-Trajectory Only one trajectory can be a Normal trajectory.
60/ 375
The same trajectory can be Normal and X-Trajectory at the same time. Any trajectory with a neighbouring surface can be a Tangent trajectory. You cannot remove the Origin trajectory. However, you can replace the Origin trajectory. Workflow for Variable Section Sweeps The following is the basic workflow for using using the Variable Section Sweep Tool: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the origin trajectory. Open the Variable Section Sweep tool. Add trajectories as required. Specify the section plane and the horizontal and vertical direction controls. Sketch a section for sweeping. Preview geometry and complete the feature.
Workflow for a Normal Trajectory 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the origin trajectory. Enter the Variable Section Sweep tool. Select additional trajectory. Make the additional trajectory a normal trajectory. Preview updates to the geometry as the frame changes. Sketch a section for sweeping.
Note: It is good practice to keep the origin trajectory as the normal trajectory. In some cases, if normal trajectory geometry conflicts with the flow of the sweep frame along the original trajectory, the section plane does not get oriented. Workflow for Constant Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select the origin trajectory. Open the Variable Section Sweep tool. The origin trajectory is in the first row of the Trajectories collector and the N checkbox is selected. Assuming the trajectory has a neighboring surface, Normal to trajectory and Normal to Surface are selected. If the trajectory has no neighboring surface, Automatic is selected. Set the Constant section in the Options slide-up panel. Sketch a section for sweeping. Preview geometry and complete the feature.
Workflow for Section Plane at a Constant Normal Direction 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the origin trajectory. Open the Variable Section Sweep tool. Change the Section Plane Control to Constant Normal Direction and select a direction reference. Sketch a section for sweeping. Preview geometry and complete the feature.
Workflow for Sweeping with Default Settings - X-Trajectory 1. 2. Select the origin trajectory. Enter the Variable Section Sweep tool.
61/ 375
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Preview geometry. Select additional trajectory Make the additional trajectory an x-trajectory Change the Horizontal/Vertical control to x-trajectory. Sketch a section for sweeping. Preview geometry and complete the feature.
Note: If the section plane's horizontal direction is changed drastically and the section is too constrained (for example, section entities aligned to some trajectory intersection point), this might cause a loss of references. Start Sketcher to resolve the references. Workflow for the Section Plane Normal to the Trajectory Projection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sketch or select the origin trajectory. Enter the Variable Section Sweep tool. Change the Section plane control to Normal to projection and select a direction reference. Sketch a section for sweeping. Preview geometry and complete the feature.
To Create a Variable Section Sweep Using Relations You can use section relations with the trajpar parameter to make the sketch variable. The references to which the sketch is constrained changes the shape of the section. Also, defining the dimensioning scheme by a graph or relations (with trajpar) makes the sketch variable. Sketch regenerates at points along the trajectory and updates its shape accordingly. 1. 2. 3. Click Click or Insert > Variable Section Sweep. The dashboard appears. (default) to create a surface or to create a solid using a variable section sweep.
Select a trajectory to be used for the variable section sweep.
Note: You can also select the trajectory or trajectories before using Insert > Variable Section Sweep. Press CTRL to select multiple trajectories. Use SHIFT to select multiple entities in a chain. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Specify the variable section option (default). Specify variable section sweep references. Click to open Sketcher and sketch the section for sweeping along the selected trajectories.
Click Tools > Relations. The Relations dialog box opens. Type section relations with the trajpar parameter to make the sketch variable. Click to exit sketcher.
Example: Using Relations to Create a Variable Section Sweep 1. 2. 3. Click Click or Insert > Variable Section Sweep. The dashboard appears. (default) to create a surface or to create a solid using a variable section sweep.
Select a trajectory to be used for the variable section sweep.
Note: You can also select the trajectory or trajectories before using Insert > Variable Section Sweep. Use CTRL to select multiple trajectories. Use SHIFT to select multiple entities in a chain.
62/ 375
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Specify a variable section option. Specify variable section sweep references. Click to open Sketcher and sketch a circle for sweeping along the selected trajectories.
Click Tools > Relations. The Relations dialog box opens. Type the following section relations with the trajpar parameter to make the sketch variable:
sd3=50*(1+2*trajpar) Note: sd3 is an example of the name assigned to the circle by Pro/ENGINEER. 9. Click OK to close the Relations dialog box.
10. Click to exit sketcher. The sweep contains the characteristics specified by the established options and relations. Normal to Trajectory (Automatic) The Z axis is tangent at all points to the trajectory. X and Y are calculated by Pro/ENGINEER along the trajectory. Note that you can orient the X direction at the start as an option.
Normal to Trajectory (Automatic): Start X Direction The Z axis is tangent at all points to the origin trajectory. You can select the X direction at the start to sketch the section in a preferred orientation. For some trajectories, for example, some straight lines (or non sketched lines), there is no intrinsic default orientation. Therefore, you must select an X direction at the start. Pro/ENGINEER cannot automatically set the initial X axis position. The X-Y direction is determined by the projection of the direction defined by the reference along the Z axis.
1. Straight datum curve selected as an X direction reference and projected on the sketch plane along the Z axis. Normal to Trajectory - Normal to Surface The Z axis is tangent at all points to the origin trajectory. The Y direction is set by the surface normal direction. Therefore, the X axis is determined by the intersection of the section plane and the surface tangent plane at each point.
63/ 375
Normal to Trajectory - X Trajectory The positive X axis goes through the intersection of the section plane (normal to the tangent at the point) and the X trajectory.
1. Origin Trajectory 2. X Trajectory Normal to Other Trajectory (Automatic) The normal direction is set to a trajectory other than the origin trajectory. The Z axis is parallel to the tangent of the normal trajectory. The X-Y axis is calculated by the system along the trajectory. You can select the X direction at the start to sketch the section in a preferred orientation.
1. Origin Trajectory 2. Other Trajectory Normal to Projection The Z axis is tangent at all points to the projected curve along the projection direction. The Y axis of the section plane is always normal to the defined referenced plane.
1. Projection Direction Reference 2. Projected Curve 3. Origin Trajectory Constant Normal (Automatic) The Z axis is along the direction defined by the constant normal reference. X and Y are calculated by Pro/ENGINEER along the trajectory. For some trajectories, for example, some straight lines (or non sketched lines), there is no intrinsic default orientation. Therefore, you must select an X direction at the start. Pro/ENGINEER cannot automatically set the X axis.
64/ 375
1. Constant Normal Reference
2. Origin Trajectory
Constant Normal (X Trajectory) The Z axis is along the direction defined by the constant normal reference. The X axis goes through the intersection of the section plane (normal to the tangent at the point) and the X trajectory.
1. Constant Normal Reference 2. Origin Trajectory Constant Normal (Automatic) - Start X Direction The Z axis is along the direction defined by the constant normal reference. The X and Y orientation is determined by the projection of the direction defined by the reference along the Z axis.
1. Constant Normal Reference 2. Origin Trajectory 3. Straight datum curve selected as an X direction reference. Projected on a sketch plane along the Z axis. Constant Normal (Normal to Surface) The Z axis is along the direction defined by the constant normal reference. The Y direction is set by the projection of the surface normal in the constant normal direction.
1. Constant Normal Plane 2. Projected surface is normal along the constant normal reference. 3. Actual surface normal direction. 4. Origin Trajectory About Blends A blended feature consists of a series of at least two planar sections that Pro/ENGINEER joins together at their edges with transitional surfaces to form a continuous feature.
65/ 375
Blend Types
ParallelAll blend sections lie on parallel planes in one section sketch. RotationalBlend sections are rotated about the Y-axis, up to a maximum of 120 degrees. Each section is sketched individually and aligned using the coordinate system of the section. GeneralSections of a general blend can be rotated about and translated along the X-, Y-, and Zaxes. Each section is sketched individually, and aligned using the coordinate system of the section. To Create a Blend (basic) 1. 2. Click Insert > Blend and then click the type of blend you want. The BLEND OPTS menu appears. Click one of the following commands from the BLEND OPTS menu, then click Done.
o o o o o o o
ParallelAll blend sections lie on parallel planes in one section sketch. RotationalThe blend sections are rotated about the Y-axis, up to a maximum of 120. Each section is sketched individually and aligned using the coordinate system of the section. GeneralThe sections of a general blend can be rotated about and translated along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. Each section is sketched individually and aligned using the coordinate system of the section. Regular SecThe feature uses the sketching plane. Project SecThe feature uses the projection of the section on the selected surface. This option is used for parallel blends only. Select SecSelect section entities. This option is not available for parallel blends. Sketch SecSketch section entities.
Example: Different Blend Geometries Starting Points and Blend Shape
1 Start points Smooth Blend Straight Blend
Modifying Blends Consider the following when modifying blends:
Pro/ENGINEER displays general blend sections, other than the first section, in a subwindow. You can modify rotation angles for all blend sections except the first. The first section is fixed in the sketching plane. To move the complete blend feature at one time, modify the location of the coordinate system relative to the part. If you did not use the coordinate system to locate the dimensions, use Redefine > Scheme to change the dimensioning scheme of the coordinate system.
66/ 375
To Add a Blend Vertex 1. 2. 3. Choose Adv Geometry from the GEOMETRY menu in Sketcher. Choose Blend Vertex from the ADV GEOMETRY menu. Select the vertex of an existing geometry entity. A circle will be placed there. More than one blend vertex can be created at the same point. Each additional vertex will create a concentric circle of increasing diameter.
Using a Blend Vertex With the exception of capping a blend, each section of a blend must always contain the same number of entities. For sections that do not have enough geometric entities, you can add blend vertices. Each blend vertex adds one entity to the section. However, a blend surface can be made to disappear using a blend vertex on a sketched or selected section. A blend vertex acts as a terminator for the corresponding surface of the blend, but is counted in the total number of entities for a section. You can use a blend vertex in either a straight or smooth blend (including parallel smooth blends), but only in the first or last section. Example: Adding a Blend Vertex
To Import a Blend 1. 2. 3. Click ADV FEAT OPT > From File. Select or create a coordinate system to locate the imported blend data. Enter the file name. The file's extension must be .ibl.
Importing a Blend Feature Blends can be created by reading in data points from an ASCII file. The data file defines the type of blend, as well as the Cartesian coordinates of all the blend section points. All blend section points are located relative to a single coordinate system. Notes on Creating Blends:
Two points in a curve define a line; more than two points define a spline. The endpoint of one curve and the start point of the next curve must be coincident. For closed sections, this is true for the last point of the last curve and the first point of the first curve. There can be only one closed curve for each section, and that curve must consist of at least two segments. When the points that are used to create a blend section from a file do not all lie on a plane, the system creates the best fit plane and projects the points down onto the plane. Modifying an Imported Blend To modify the blend created from the imported data, choose Modify and edit the blend data file. This creates a new file, feat_#.ibl, in your current working directory. Modifications of a blend feature do not affect the original file from which it was created. Creating a Blend from Imported Curves If you are importing data points from a measuring device, you should import them as curves first to insure smoothness. You can then make the imported curves smooth and create a blended surface from the smoothed curves.
67/ 375
Example: Importing Blend File Sample Blend File
The following figure shows the resulting imported blend.
About Sections in Sketch-based Features Sketch-based features use a Sketch feature (sketched datum curve) to define their shape, dimensions, and general placement. You use a Sketch feature to create sketch-based features in the following ways:
Create an Internal SectionYou can create an internal section (also known as a section) while the sketch-based feature tool is open. Using the Sketch dialog box, you use Sketcher to sketch the datum curve, thus defining the internal section. This internal section is independent and is not associative with any Sketch features. So, the changes that you make to an independent internal section affect only the sketch-based feature using that internal section. This independence is further indicated by a unique name that is assigned to each independent internal section. Select a Sketch FeatureYou can select an existing Sketch feature (sketched datum curve) to create a sketch-based feature. The Sketch feature can reside in the current model or in a different model. You can also use a Sketch feature that has already been used as a reference for a different sketch-based feature. After you create a sketch-based feature by selecting a Sketch feature, Pro/ENGINEER uses the Sketch feature placement, orientation, and sketch references to create a dependent internal section for the sketch-based feature. This dependent internal section is fully associative with the parent (referenced) Sketch feature. It also shares its name with the parent. So, if you redefine the parent Sketch feature, all dependent internal sections (children) that reference this Sketch feature will dynamically change. This changes the respective sketch-based features. Conversely, if you redefine a dependent internal section, Pro/ENGINEER automatically rolls back to the parent Sketch feature enabling you to redefine it.
68/ 375
Valid and Invalid Sections Sketch-based features may have requirements such as a closed loop section (sketched datum curve), a vertical axis, or a coordinate system. Pro/ENGINEER tracks these feature-specific requirements against the section that you are using. If the section does not satisfy these requirements, Pro/ENGINEER does one of the following:
If you are creating an independent section, Pro/ENGINEER warns you that the section is invalid. If you are creating a dependent section by attempting to select an invalid Sketch feature, the Pro/ENGINEER selection filters will prohibit the Sketch feature from being selected. Note:
If you delete a parent Sketch feature (one that is being used as a reference for a dependent section), Pro/ENGINEER displays a warning and provides options for you to resolve the broken parent-child relationships resulting from deleting a parent feature. You can use sketch-based features from previous Pro/ENGINEER releases. However, if an older sketch-based feature cannot be fully referenced, the Section Selection dialog box opens warning you that Use Edge technology will be used to acquire the necessary sketch geometry for the internal section. About the Section User Interface The Section user interface consists of:
Section Icons Dialog boxes Dialog bar Slide-up panels Shortcut menus Section Icons Sections for sketch-based features use the following Model Tree icons:
Indicates a Sketch feature (sketched datum curve) that has not being referenced by a section. Indicates a Sketch feature that is being referenced by a section. Indicates a section for a sketched-based feature. Note that the section is always (indented) within the sketch-based feature. You may need to expand the sketch-based feature to view the section. Dialog Boxes Pro/ENGINEER uses the following dialog boxes that inform you about a section or enable you to create or redefine a section for a sketch-based feature:
SketchEnables you to use Sketcher to create an independent section or to redefine an independent or a dependent section. Refer to About Sketched Datum Curves UI topic in the Datum Curves book for UI descriptions. Note: If you want to use the Pro/ENGINEER Sketcher default orientation settings in the Sketch dialog box, set the activate_sketch_with_dflt configuration option to yes (default is no). Section SelectionOpens if you are using a Sketch feature to create a sketch-based feature. The following two types of Section Selection dialog boxes can open:
Warns that you have selected a Sketch feature that will replace the existing section. If you click OK, Pro/ENGINEER deletes the existing section and creates a new section based on the data from the selected Sketch feature. Note that this warning displays only if you are working with a sketch-based feature that uses an independent section and you select a (parent) Sketch feature (in the Model Tree) to use as the new reference for the section. This results in a dependent section.
69/ 375
Warns that you have selected a Sketch feature that cannot be referenced fully. In this case, Pro/ENGINEER uses Use Edge technology to acquire the necessary sketch geometry for the section. This situation may occur if you are using sketch-based features from previous Pro/ENGINEER releases.
UnlinkInforms that you are about to break the association between the dependent section and the parent Sketch feature. After you click OK, Pro/ENGINEER copies the references from the parent Sketch feature and creates an independent section. You can then change this section without changing the Sketch feature. You must click Unlink from the slide-up panel to display this dialog box. Dialog Bar In some sketch-based feature tools such as Fill, Pattern, and Intersect, Pro/ENGINEER displays the following section UI element on the dialog bar: Sketch collectorIndicates that a valid Sketch feature has been selected for the sketch-based feature. You can use Remove from the shortcut menu (pointer in the collector) to remove the indicator. The corresponding section reference in the slide-up panel collector is also removed. Slide-Up Panels You can use the following sketch-based feature slide-up panels to redefine sections or to obtain section and parent Sketch feature information. Remember that the sketch-based feature tool must be open to access slide-up panels. Placement, Reference, or Options slide-up panels
Sketch collectorContains the section references for the sketch-based feature. The collector can contain dependent or independent sections. Note that dependent sections have the same name as its parent Sketch feature. Pro/ENGINEER assigns unique names to independent sections. The No Items label in the collector indicates that the sketch-based feature tool was opened without defining a section. You can use the following shortcut menu command from within the Sketch collector: RemoveRemoves the section from the collector and removes the corresponding indicator from the dialog bar collector in tools that display this dialog bar collector. The following options are available only under certain conditions:
Define buttonOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to define an independent section. Note that Define is available only if the Sketch collector is empty (no section defined or sketch selected). You can also use the Define Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. Edit buttonOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to redefine the independent section. Note that Edit is available only for sketch-based features that use an independent section. If you want to edit a dependent section, you can either edit the parent sketch or break the section dependency by using Unlink. You can also use the Edit Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. Unlink buttonBreaks the association between the dependent section and the parent Sketch feature. Pro/ENGINEER copies the Sketch feature references to the new independent section. Note that Unlink is available only if the sketch-based feature uses a dependent section. Properties slide-up panel Provides detailed sketch-based feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. The following tables pertain to sections:
ParentsContains the parent Sketch feature name. Note that a parent Sketch feature is listed only for sketch-based features that use dependent sections. If you open a sketch-based feature tool and create an independent section, this table will not list a parent Sketch feature because one simply does not exist.
70/ 375
o o o
ChildrenLists the child features. This includes child sketch-based features. Dependent sections are not listed here. Feature Element DataIndicates if the section is defined or not. Section DataLists the dependent or independent section name.
Shortcut Menus You can use shortcut menu commands to quickly perform an action. Different sketch-based feature section shortcut menu commands appear depending on the following conditions:
A sketch-based feature tool is open and you place your pointer anywhere in the graphics window except over a handle, and right-click. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following section shortcut menu command:
o o
Define Internal SketchOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to define an independent section. Edit Internal SketchOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to redefine an independent section. Note that the sketch-based feature tool must be open and you must be working with an independent section.
A sketch-based feature tool is closed and you select a section from the Model Tree and right-click. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following section shortcut menu commands:
o o
EditChanges only the section dimensions for the sketch based feature. Note that for dependent sections, the parent Sketch feature dimensions also changed. Edit DefinitionOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to redefine the section. Note that for dependent sections, Pro/ENGINEER rolls back to the parent Sketch feature. So, all changes are applied to the parent Sketch feature and then copied to the dependent section.
Sketch-based Features in the Model Tree If you create a section or select a parent Sketch feature, the resulting independent or dependent section resides within its respective sketch-based feature. This is illustrated in the table below: Model Tree Description Sketch 2 is the parent Sketch feature to the Fill feature, Fill 1. Notice that the different sketch icon indicating a parent (referenced) Sketch feature. Sketch 1 is not being referenced by a sketch-based feature. Protrusion id 39 uses an independent section (S2D0012). Notice the section name is different. Fill 1 (Fill feature) uses a dependent section (Sketch 2) copied from the parent Sketch feature having the same name.
Customizing the Model Tree Display For Sketch-based Features As you work with sketch-based features, you may want to view only certain types of Sketch features in the Model Tree. In the Model Tree Items dialog box (in the Model Tree pane, click Settings > Tree Filters) click the General tab. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following Sketch feature check boxes:
SketchDisplays or hides all Sketch features that have not been referenced by sketch-based features.
71/ 375
Used SketchDisplays or hides all parent Sketch features. Those Sketch features that have been referenced by sketch-based features.
To Create a Section Using this topic, you can create a sketch-based feature that uses an independent section. This section is not associative with any Sketch feature. If you want to create a dependent (associative) section, refer to To Select a Sketch Feature under See Also. 1. 2. Open the sketch-based feature tool. The Dashboard appears. Place your pointer in the graphics window, right-click, and select Define Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. The Sketch dialog box opens. Note that you can also use Define from either the Placement or Reference slide-up panel, depending on the tool used. In the dialog box, define the sketch plane and the sketch orientation, and click Sketch. Sketcher activates and the model orients. Note: To use the default Sketcher settings, set the activate_sketch_with_dflt configuration option to yes (default is no). In Sketcher, sketch and constrain the desired section. Make sure you include any feature specific requirements, such as a closed loop, vertical axis, or a coordinate system. on the Sketcher toolbar. The sketched-based feature tool resumes After the sketch is complete, click and preview geometry appears in the graphics window. Notice that an independent section is created and placed in the Sketch collector on the slide-up panel and on the Model Tree (under the new sketched based feature).
3.
4.
5.
6. Continue designing the sketch-based feature as necessary. 7. After you finish, click . Pro/ENGINEER creates the sketch-based feature and the section, and closes the tool. Remember that this section is not associative with any Sketch feature.
Tip:
If you want to undo or redo any or all changes, simply press CTRL+Z or CTRL+Y respectively. You can always identify the section type from the Model Tree. Dependent sections share the same name of the parent Sketch feature. Independent sections have unique names. To Select a Sketch Feature Using this topic, you can create a sketch-based feature that uses a dependent section. This section is fully associative with the parent Sketch feature. 1. If you want to select an existing Sketch feature to use as a reference, select one of the following Sketch feature types and then proceed to step 3. Note: The Sketch feature must be valid for the type of sketch-based feature that you want to create. You can use the following types of Sketch features:
o o
2.
Non-parent Sketch feature that is currently in your model (displays in the Model Tree) or that resides in a different model. Parent Sketch feature that is currently in your model or that resides in a different model.
If you want to create a new Sketch feature, you need to use the Sketch tool ( ). Refer to To Create a Sketched Datum Curve in the Datum Curves book for more information on creating a Sketch feature. Remember that you need to select the new Sketch feature before open the sketch-based feature tool. Open a sketch-based feature tool. Pro/ENGINEER immediately displays preview geometry of the feature and displays the feature in the Model Tree. Continue to define the sketch-based feature.
3. 4.
72/ 375
5.
After you finish, click . Pro/ENGINEER creates the sketch-based feature and the section, and closes the tool. This section is dependent and fully associative with the parent Sketch feature. So, if you redefine the section, Pro/ENGINEER rolls back to the parent Sketch feature enabling you to redefine it.
Tip:
If you want to undo or redo any or all changes, simply press CTRL+Z or CTRL+Y respectively. If you want to select a different Sketch feature on-the-fly while working in a sketch-based feature tool, simply select the new Sketch feature from the Model Tree. Pro/ENGINEER dynamically displays preview geometry for the feature. You can always identify the section type from the Model Tree. Dependent sections share the same name of the parent Sketch feature. Independent sections have unique names. You can quickly select geometry and references from the graphics window by using the selection filters. These filters are located in the Filter box at the bottom of the Pro/ENGINEER interface. To Redefine a Section A sketch-based feature tool must be closed to redefine a section using this topic. If you want to work within a sketch-based feature tool, see Tip below. 1. 2. With a sketch-based feature tool closed, select the section to redefine in the Model Tree and rightclick. The shortcut menu appears. If you want to change only the section dimensions, follow the steps below:
o o
3.
Click Edit. Pro/ENGINEER displays the section dimensions in the graphic window. Double-click the dimension to redefine and type a new dimension in the box or select a recently used dimension from the list. Pro/ENGINEER dynamically redefines the section to the new dimensions.
If you want to redefine the section, follow the steps below:
Click Edit Definition. Pro/ENGINEER opens the Sketch dialog box. Notice that for dependent sections, Pro/ENGINEER rolls back to the parent Sketch feature in the Model Tree enabling you to redefine the parent feature. In the Sketch dialog box, select the sketch plane and the sketch orientation, and click Sketch. Sketcher opens and orients the model. Note: To use the default Sketcher settings, set the activate_sketch_with_dflt configuration option to yes (default is no). Using Sketcher, redefine the section. After you finish, click closes and the new section is highlighted. on the Sketcher toolbar. Sketcher
o o
Note:
Click OK in the Sketch dialog box. Pro/ENGINEER closes the dialog box and displays the feature geometry in the graphics window. The section is also displayed in the Model Tree.
If you want to redefine a dependent section by redefining the parent Sketch feature, refer to To Create a Sketched Datum Curve in the Datum Curves book. When redefining a dependent section, all changes are applied to the parent Sketch feature and then copied to the dependent section. Tip:
You can redefine the section as you work within a sketch-based feature tool. Simply, click Edit from the References slide-up panel to use Sketcher. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Remember that if you are redefining a dependent section, you must click Unlink from the slide-up panel to break the association with the parent Sketch feature. Otherwise, Edit will not be available and you must exit the tool to redefine the section.
73/ 375
You can use sketch-based features from previous Pro/ENGINEER releases. However, if an older sketch-based feature cannot be fully referenced, the Section Selection dialog box opens warning you that Use Edge technology will be used to acquire the necessary sketch geometry for the section. To apply the new dimensions to the feature geometry, simply regenerate the feature (Edit > Regenerate). If you want to undo or redo any or all changes, simply press CTRL+Z or CTRL+Y respectively. You can double-click a section (in the graphics window) to quickly display its dimensions. You can quickly select geometry and references from the graphics window by using the selection filters. These filters are located in the Filter box at the bottom of the Pro/ENGINEER interface. To Make a Dependent Section Independent Dependent sections are fully associative with their parent Sketch feature. If you redefine a dependent section, Pro/ENGINEER rolls back enabling you to make all changes to the parent Sketch feature. Pro/ENGINEER then links the dependent section to the parent Sketch feature. Because you can use previously referenced Sketch features as references for other sketch-based features, you may not want to change the parent Sketch feature. If this case arises, you need to make the dependent section independent in order to redefine your sketch-based feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. From the graphics window or from the Model Tree, select a sketch-based feature that uses a dependent section, and right-click. Click Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER opens the sketch-based feature tool and highlights the feature. In the slide-up panel, click Unlink. The Unlink dialog box opens informing you that you are about to break the association between the dependent section and the parent Sketch feature. Click OK. Pro/ENGINEER breaks that association and copies the Sketch feature references to the new independent section. This enables you to use the references as the basis for further redefinition. Notice that the Edit replaces Unlink in the slide-up panel. Note: If you select a Sketch feature as the parent feature to the independent section, the Section Selection dialog box opens to inform you that the selected Sketch feature will replace the independent section. If this occurs, click Cancel. In the slide-up panel, click Edit. The Sketch dialog box opens containing the section references. You can change these references if needed. You can also use the Edit Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. Note: To use the default Sketcher settings, set the activate_sketch_with_dflt configuration option to yes (default is no). Click Sketch. After Sketcher opens, redefine the section as needed. After you finish, click Sketcher toolbar. Sketcher closes and the new section is highlighted. on the
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Click OK in the Sketch dialog box. Pro/ENGINEER closes the dialog box and displays the feature preview geometry in the graphics window. Continue to redefine the sketch-based feature as needed. When finished, click . Pro/ENGINEER redefines the sketch-based feature using the new independent section, and closes the tool. Notice that the new independent section is displayed in the Model Tree with a unique name.
Tip:
If you want to undo or redo any or all changes, simply press CTRL+Z or CTRL+Y respectively. You can always identify the section type from the Model Tree. Dependent sections share the same name of the parent Sketch feature. Independent sections have unique names.
74/ 375
You can quickly select geometry and references from the graphics window by using the selection filters. These filters are located in the Filter box at the bottom of the Pro/ENGINEER interface. To Delete a Section Both dependent and independent sections function as the blueprint for a sketch-based feature. The sketchbased feature cannot exist without the section. So, in order to delete the section, you must delete the sketch-based feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tip: From the graphics window or the Model Tree, select the sketch-based feature to delete. Right-click and select Delete from the shortcut menu. The Delete dialog box opens. If child features exist for the sketch-based feature, click Options. In the Children Handling dialog box, resolve the child feature dependencies. Click OK. Pro/ENGINEER deletes the selected sketch-based feature and its section.
If you want to undo or redo any or all changes, simply press CTRL+Z or CTRL+Y respectively. You can quickly select geometry and references from the graphics window by using the selection filters. These filters are located in the Filter box at the bottom of the Pro/ENGINEER interface. To Delete a Sketch Feature 1. 2. 3. 4. From the graphics window or the Model Tree, select the Sketch feature to delete. Right-click and select Delete from the shortcut menu. The Delete dialog box opens. If the selected Sketch feature is a parent feature to one or more sketch-based features, click Options. In the Children Handling dialog box, resolve the child feature dependencies. Click OK. Pro/ENGINEER deletes the selected Sketch feature.
To Report Sketch-based Feature Information 1. If you are not working in a sketch-based feature tool, select a sketch-based feature (not a section) from the graphics window or from the Model Tree. Right-click and select Info > Feature. Proceed to step 3. If you working in a sketch-based tool, click the Properties tab. After the Properties slide-up panel appears, click 3. .
2.
The Pro/ENGINEER browser opens providing many tables including the following that pertain to sections:
ParentsContains the parent Sketch feature name. Note that a parent Sketch feature is listed only for sketch-based features that use dependent sections. If you open a sketch-based feature tool and create an independent section, this table will not list a parent Sketch feature because one simply does not exist.. ChildrenLists the children (dependent) features including child sketch-based features. Note that dependent sections are not listed. Feature Element DataIndicates if the section is defined or is undefined. Section DataLists the dependent or independent section name.
o o o
Tip: You can quickly select geometry and references from the graphics window by using the selection filters. These filters are located in the Filter box at the bottom of the Pro/ENGINEER interface. About Copying and Pasting You can use the Copy, Paste, and Paste Special commands to duplicate and place features, geometry, curves, and edge chains. Using this functionality, you can copy and paste features between two different
75/ 375
models or between two different versions of the same part. When copying between two versions, use the same procedure as for two different models. Both Copy, Paste, and Paste Special are accessible from the Edit menu in the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar. You can also use the menu bar icons for Copy , Paste , and Paste Special can invoke the copy and paste functions by using the traditional keyboard commands: . Alternatively, you
CTRL+ CCopies the select items into the clipboard. CTRL+ VPastes the selected items. The paste user interface is slightly different depending on whether you are attempting to paste features, geometry or a chain. Two Methods for Pasting Features There are two workflows for pasting:
When you use Edit > Paste, the system opens the feature creation tool, so you can redefine the copied feature. When you use Edit > Paste Special, the system allows you to map references of the copied features by replacing the original references with the new ones. About Dependent and Independent Copies You can create a copy as dependent or independent from the original feature. Copying with dimension dependency is available only with the Paste Special command. Note: It is recommended to use Paste Special with the sketched-based features to preserve the association with the sketch. When copying with Paste Special, select the option Make copies dependant on dimensions of original in the Paste Special dialog box. Dependent Copies When you create a dependent copy, the dimensions of the copied feature depend on the original feature. If you change dimensions of the original feature, the copied feature changes also. Likewise, if you change dimensions of the copy, the original feature changes also. To create a dependent copy, select the Make copies dependant on dimensions of original option in the Paste Special dialog box. Independent Copy When you create an independent copy, the copied feature is not associative with the original feature. Breaking Dependency Between the Copy and the Original If a copy was created as dependent, you can break dependency using one of the following methods:
In Edit mode, use Make Independent while editing the property of the dimension. If you modify dimensions in the dashboard environment when you paste a feature, the dimensions become independent. About the Paste User Interface for Features Using the Edit > Paste command, invokes the feature creation tool of the feature type that you are trying to paste. For example, if you are trying to paste an extrusion, the extrusion creation tool opens, if you are trying to paste a hole, the hole creation tool opens. The dashboard of each feature creation tool contains one slide-up panel highlighted in RED. You need to modify the settings of the red slide-up panel to place the pasted feature. If you are pasting a datum feature, the appropriate datum creation dialog box opens. Pasting Multiple Features When copying multiple features, the first feature in the group determines the user interface that opens:
If the first feature is a dashboard feature, then feature tool opens for each feature in the group sequentially, so you can paste the copied feature. If the first feature is an old style feature, then the old style Copy UI (the COPY FEATURE menu) opens, so you can define all placement references of the copied features.
76/ 375
Note: If you change a reference during the paste process and other features are using it, the new reference is propagated to all features that depend on it. If you change this reference for the second time, only the feature for which you changed it is updated, while other copied features that use this reference are unaffected. Pasting with the Same or New References Consider these rules for pasting using the same or new references:
When you paste a feature and selected the same primary reference as the one used for the original feature, the system places the feature using the "same references" method. You can then adjust the placement dimensions as needed. If the default collector is empty or an invalid reference was selected, the system pastes the feature without any references. The missing references are marked as a red dot in the collectors. If you selected a different valid primary reference, the system uses the new reference, but other references will be missing. Pasting Using the Object-Action Workflow You can preselect references before you use the Paste command. This method is referred to as objectaction. To copy a feature using the object-action method: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select a feature to copy. Click Edit > Copy. Select a primary reference (for example, for a hole, select a placement surface). Click Edit > Paste. If you selected the same primary reference as the one used for the original feature, the system places the feature using the "same references" as the original feature. If you selected a different primary reference, the system lets you place the feature using new references.
To Copy and Paste a Feature 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the feature you want to copy. Click Edit > Copy. The feature is copied into the clipboard. Click Edit > Paste. The feature creation tool of the original feature opens. Edit the placement settings as you see fit. on the dashboard (or dialog box if the paste item is a datum). Pro/ENGINEER copies the Click original feature and places it according to the references specified.
To Copy and Paste Multiple Features 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select a set of feature you want to copy. Click Edit > Copy. The features are copied into the clipboard. Click Edit > Paste. The feature creation tool of the first original feature opens. Edit the placement settings as you see fit. Click on the dashboard.
Repeat steps 4 - 5 for each of the features that you are pasting. When finished with the final feature, click on the dashboard. Pro/ENGINEER copies the original features and places them according to the references specified.
77/ 375
To Copy and Paste Between two Different Sources When copying and pasting between two different parts you may encounter a situation where the two different parts use two different systems of measurement units (one part may be in inches the other in centimeters). Pro/ENGINEER takes this into account when pasting a feature and provides you with several different scaling options. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the feature you want to copy. Click Edit > Copy. The feature is copied into the clipboard. Open the target model or activate the window with a model in which you want to paste the copied features. Click Edit > Paste. The Scale dialog box opens. Select one of the following options in the Scale dialog box:
o o
Keep Dimensions valueselect to keep the dimension values of the copied feature. For example, a dimension value of 1 will remain 1 regardless of the differing measurement systems. Keep Features Sizesselect to convert the dimension values of the copied feature to the measurement system used in the window in which you are pasting. For example if the copied feature uses inches as units and the paste window uses centimeters, a dimension value of 1 inch is converted to 2.54 centimeters. Scale by Valueselect to scale the paste item by a specified value.
o
6. 7. 8.
Click OK in the Scale dialog box. The feature creation tool of the feature type you are trying to paste opens. Edit the placement settings as you see fit. on the dashboard. Pro/ENGINEER copies the original feature and places it according to the Click references specified.
To Create an Independent Copy of Sketch-Based Features Use this procedure to paste a sketch-based feature that uses an internal sketch. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Select a sketch-based feature to copy. Click Edit > Copy. Click Paste. The feature creation tool of the feature being copied opens. In the dashboard, click the Placement slide-up panel. Click Edit. The Sketch dialog box opens. Specify the sketching plane and the view orientation reference. Click Sketch. Drag the section to new location or create a new section. Click to exit Sketcher.
Use this procedure to paste a sketch-based feature that uses an external sketch. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a sketch-based feature to copy. Click Edit > Copy. Click Paste. The feature creation tool of the feature being copied opens. Select a new sketch.
78/ 375
5.
Click
to compete the copy.
To Cancel a Paste Operation button. You can cancel the paste operation at anytime during the paste process by clicking the Pro/ENGINEER opens the Cancel Paste dialog box. The Cancel Paste dialog box contains the following options:
Quit pasting this feature and continueIf you are pasting multiple features, select this option to cancel the current feature and continue on to the next feature in the clipboard. Keep already pasted features and quite paste operationIf you are pasting multiple features, select this option to keep all features that have been previously pasted and to cancel paste of the remaining features in the clipboard. Remove already pasted features and continueIf you are pasting multiple features, select this option to cancel all features that have been previously pasted and continue pasting the remaining features in the clipboard. Cancel the paste operationCancel everything. About Copying and Pasting Surfaces and Curves The paste user interface is slightly different depending on whether you are pasting a surface or a curve. In Copy Surface mode, you can create a quilt directly on top of selected surfaces. The resulting quilt contains surfaces that are the same shape and size as their parent surfaces. In Copy Curve mode, you can create an exact or approximate copy of a selected datum curve. About the Paste User Interface for Surfaces and Curves Feature Icon All copied surfaces and curves are represented in the Model Tree by the Dialog Bar icon.
In Copy Surface mode, the dialog bar consists of one collector that contains the Copy reference. You can click the collector to select or replace the Copy reference at any time. In Copy Curve mode, the dialog bar contains the Curve Type list. You can select one of the following options:
o o
ExactCreates an exact copy of the selected datum curve. ApproximateCreates a datum curve that approximates a chain of tangent curves by a single continuous curvature spline. Note: Approximate curves cannot be created on joint angles greater then 5 degrees.
Slide-up Panels In Copy Surface mode, the dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesIn the References slide-up panel you can change the copy reference. OptionsIn the Options slide-up panel you can:
Copy all surfaces as is Exclude surfaces and fill holesWhen this command is selected, the following two collectors become active: Exclude surfaces collectorSelects surfaces to exclude from the current copy feature. Fill holes/surfaces collectorSelects holes to fill on the selected surfaces. Copy inside boundaryWhen this command is selected, the following collector becomes active:
79/ 375
Boundary collectorDefines a boundary containing the surfaces to copy. PropertiesIn the Properties slide-up panel, you can View information about the current Copy Surface feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser Rename the Copy Surface feature In Copy Datum Curve mode, the dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
o o
ReferencesIn the References slide-up panel, you can change the copy reference. PropertiesIn the Properties slide-up panel, you can View information about the current Copy Curve feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser Rename the Copy Curve feature
Shortcut Menu Right-click to access the shortcut menu with the following commands: Copy Surface Mode
Solid SurfacesSelects individual surfaces to copy on the model. Use the Solid Surfaces command to select all surfaces of a solid object at once. Copy all surfaces as isCreates an exact copy of the selected surfaces. Exclude surfaces and fill holesCopies some of the selected surfaces with an option to fill holes within the surface. This option is useful if you need a refined version of the original surface. Copy inside boundaryCopies only the surfaces that lie within a boundary. This option is useful if you need to copy only a portion of the original surfaces. Copy Datum Curve Mode
ExactCreates an exact copy of the selected datum curve. ApproximateCreates a datum curve that approximates a chain of tangent curves by a single continuous curvature spline. Note: Approximate curves cannot be created on joint angles greater then 5 degrees. To Copy a Surface 1. 2. 3. In the graphics window, select the surface or surfaces to copy. Click Edit > Copy. The selected surfaces Note: You can also copy the surface by pressing CTRL+C. Click Edit > Paste. The copy Note: You can also paste the surfaces by pressing CTRL+V. Click the are copied to the clipboard. opens.
surface
dashboard
4.
button on the dashboard. Pro/ENGINEER creates an exact copy of the selected surfaces.
To Copy a Surface Excluding Patches and Holes 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the graphics window, select the surface or surfaces to copy. Click Edit > Copy. The selected surfaces Note: You can also copy the surface by pressing CTRL+C. Click Edit > Paste. The copy Note: You can also paste the surfaces by pressing CTRL+V. are copied to the clipboard. opens.
surface
dashboard
Right-click in the graphics window, and select Exclude Surfaces and Fill Holes from the shortcut menu. Note: You can also select this command from the Options slide-up panel in the dashboard. Select a closed loop of edges surrounding the hole you want to exclude.
80/ 375
6.
Click on the dashboard. Pro/ENGINEER copies the selected surface or surfaces and excludes the specified holes.
To Copy Surfaces Inside a Closed Sketched Curve 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the graphics window, select the surface or surfaces to copy. Click Edit > Copy. The selected surfaces Note: You can also copy the surface by pressing CTRL+C. Click Edit > Paste. The copy Note: You can also paste the surfaces by pressing CTRL+V. are copied to the clipboard. opens.
surface
dashboard
Right-click in the graphics window, and click Copy Inside Boundary from the shortcut menu. Note: Alternatively, you can select this command from the Options slide-up panel in the dashboard. Select a closed curve, or set of curves that will close, that lies on a quilt. Click on the dashboard. Pro/ENGINEER copies the specified inside boundary.
To Convert a Copied Surface to an Inner Boundary Copy 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select an existing copied surface in the Model Tree. Right-click the Copy Surface and Curve feature, and click Edit Definition from the shortcut menu. The Copy Surface and Curve tool opens. Click the Options slide-up panel in the dashboard, and click Copy Inside Boundary. Select a closed curve, or set of curves that will close, that lies on a quilt. Click on the dashboard. Pro/ENGINEER copies the specified inside boundary.
To Copy Curves or Edges 1. 2. 3. 4. In the graphics window, select the curves or edges to copy. Click Edit > Copy. The selected items Note: You can also copy the items by pressing CTRL+C. Click Edit > Paste. The copy Note: You can also paste the items by pressing CTRL+V. are copied curves to the clipboard. opens.
dashboard
By default, the curve type is set to Exact. To change the curve type to Approximate, right-click in the graphics window, and click Approximate from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can click Approximate from the Curve type list in the dashboard. Click on the dashboard. Pro/ENGINEER copies the specified curve or edge.
5.
About the Advanced Reference Configuration User Interface The Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box allows you to paste a feature by mapping references of the original feature to the new references. The Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box contains the following elements:
References of Original Features listLists external references of the original feature. You can select a reference to replace it with a new one. You can also choose to preserve an original reference. Use Original ReferenceIndicates whether you want to keep an original or select a new reference. Clear this option if you want to replace an original reference with a new one. By default, this option is off. Replace With CollectorLists a selected reference. To remove the current item, right-click in the collector and click Remove. To obtain information about the selected item, right-click in the collector and click Information. Note: If you leave the Replace With Collector empty, the pasted feature that uses this reference fails, and the system opens the feature creation tool to resolve the reference.
81/ 375
Used ByLists the features that use selected reference. To Copy Features Using the Advanced Reference Configuration Use this technique to copy features by changing the placement references of the original feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a feature to copy or move. Click Edit > Copy, the entire feature is copied into the clipboard. Click Edit > Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens. Click Advanced reference configuration and click OK. The ADVANCED REFERENCE CONFIGURATION dialog box opens. The placement references of the original feature are listed in a table. You can now replace the original placement references with the new ones, or keep some of the original references. To replace a reference, select a row from a list of References of Original Features, clear the checkmark for the option Use Original Reference, and select a new reference in the graphics window. Continue to define the new references. When finished, click .
5.
6.
Note: If you leave references as not defined (the feature does not use the original references, and you have not specified the new ones), the pasted feature fails, and the system places you in the feature creation tool. To Create a Dependent Copy of Sketch-Based Features Use this procedure to paste a sketch-based feature that uses an internal sketch. This method allows you to preserve the dependency of the section dimensions. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a sketch-based feature to copy. Click Edit > Copy. Click Edit > Paste Special. In the Paste Special dialog box, select two options:
o o
5.
Make copies dependant on dimensions of original Advanced reference configuration
In the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box, replace the original references with new as needed or keep original references. Note: It is important to specify the sketching plane, view orientation, and sketch dimensional references using the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box. Otherwise, the section dimension dependency is not preserved.
Use this procedure to paste a sketch-based feature that uses an external sketch. This method allows you to preserve the dependency of the section dimensions. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a sketch-based feature to copy. Click Edit > Copy. Click Edit > Paste Special. In the Paste Special dialog box, select two options:
o o
5.
Make copies dependant on dimensions of original Advanced reference configuration
In the Advanced Reference Configuration dialog box, select the sketch in the References of Original Features list, and then select the Use Original Reference option.
82/ 375
About The Mirror Tool The Mirror tool enables you to create copies of features and geometry that are mirrored about a planar surface. You can use this tool to save time by mirroring simple parts into more complex designs. In addition to part geometry, the Mirror tool allows you to copy surfaces, curves, and datum features about a mirror plane. There are several methods of creating a mirror:
Feature MirrorAllows you to mirror features using two methods: All FeaturesThis method duplicates features and creates a merged feature that contains the geometry of all features of the model. To use this method, you must select all features and the part node in the Model Tree. Selected Features
Geometry MirrorAllows you to mirror geometry items such as datums, quilts, and surfaces. You can also mirror an entire part by selecting its node in the Model Tree. The following examples show how you can use the Mirror tool to create a complex design from a relatively small amount of geometry: All Feature Method Original part Original Part Mirrored using the All Feature method
1. Mirror plane Selected Feature Method Original part with a single feature selected. Single feature mirrored using the selected Feature method
1. Original feature 2. Mirror plane 3. feature Mirrored
83/ 375
About the Mirror User Interface The Mirror user interface consists of the following:
Feature icon Dialog bar Slide-up panels Shortcut menu Feature Icon All Mirrored features are represented in the Model Tree by in the Edit Features toolbar. Dialog Bar The Mirror dialog bar consists of the Mirror Plane collector. You can click the collector to select or replace the mirror plane reference at any time. Slide-up Panels The slide-up panels available on the Mirror dashboard vary depending on the type of object selected and the method in which it was selected. If you are mirroring a feature or a group of features the dashboard contains the following: . Additionally, the Mirror tool is represented by
o o o o o o o o o o
ReferencesUse this panel to change the Mirror plane reference. OptionsUse this panel to make the mirror feature's dimensions independent of the original item by clearing the checkmark from the Copy as dependent option. PropertiesIn the Properties slide-up panel, you can: View information about the Mirror feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Rename the feature.
If you are mirroring geometry the dashboard contains the following: ReferencesIn the References slide-up panel, you can: Change the Mirror Items reference. Change the Mirror Plane reference.
OptionsUse this panel to select Hide original geometry. If it is selected, upon completion of the mirror feature, the system shows only the new mirrored geometry and hides the original geometry. PropertiesIn the Properties slide-up panel, you can: View information about the Mirror feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Rename the feature.
If you are mirroring all the geometry in part, the dashboard contains the following: ReferencesIn the References slide-up panel, you can: Change the Mirror Items reference. Change the Mirror Plane reference. PropertiesIn the Properties slide-up panel, you can: View information about the Mirror feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Rename the feature.
Note: The Options slide-up panel is not available for this operation.
84/ 375
Shortcut Menu If you are mirroring all the geometry in a part you can right-click in the graphics window to access the following commands:
Mirror ItemSelects or redefines an item to be mirrored. You can select a part, surface, axis, or datum curve. Mirror PlaneSelects or redefines the mirror plane about which the mirror item is copied. To Mirror Selected Features Note: You must select the items you wish to mirror before you can invoke the Mirror tool. 1. 2. Select one or more features to mirror. Pro/ENGINEER highlights each feature in the graphics window. Click in the Edit Features toolbar. The Mirror tool opens.
Note: You can also click Edit > Mirror to invoke the Mirror tool. 3. Select a mirror plane. Tip: You can redefine the Mirror Plane by clicking on any other plane in the graphics window. 4. (Optional) If you want to make mirrored features independent of the original, open the Options slide-up panel and clear the Copy as dependent box. Click in the dashboard to accept and create the new Mirror feature.
5.
Note: To redefine the mirror item, you must cancel the current mirror operation. Select alternate items to mirror and then restart the mirror tool. To Mirror All the Geometry in a Part Note: You must select the items you wish to mirror before you can invoke the Mirror tool. 1. 2. Select the part name at the top of the Model Tree. Click in the Edit Features toolbar.
Note: You can also click Edit > Mirror to invoke the Mirror tool. 3. Select a mirror plane. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the new Mirror feature in the graphics window. Note: You can redefine the Mirror Plane by clicking on any other plane in the graphics window. 4. Click in the dashboard to accept and create the new mirror feature.
Tip: To switch the mirror item from part geometry to a surface, plane, or axis, you must first open the References slide-up panel in the dashboard, right-click the part reference in the Mirrored Items table, and click Remove from the shortcut menu. After the Mirrored Item reference is removed, you can select a plane, surface, or axis to mirror. Alternatively, you can do it using the shortcut menu and activating the Mirror Items collector. Then you can open the shortcut menu again and click Clear. To Mirror Geometry Note: You must select the items you wish to mirror before you can invoke the Mirror tool. 1. 2. 3. Select either Geometry or Datums from the selection filter in the bottom right of the Pro/ENGINEER window. Select any geometry or datum. in the Edit Features toolbar. Click Note: You can also click Edit > Mirror to invoke the Mirror tool. The mirror tool opens.
85/ 375
4.
Select a mirror plane. Pro/ENGINEER displays a preview of the new Mirror feature in the graphics window. Note: You can redefine the Mirror Plane by clicking on any other plane in the graphics window. (Optional) In the Options slide-up panel check the Hide Original Geometry box. If selected, upon completion of the mirror feature, the system shows only the new mirrored geometry and hides the original geometry. Click in the dashboard to accept and create the new Mirror feature.
5.
6.
Note: To redefine the mirror item, use the Mirror Items collector in the References slide-up panel. Select alternate items to mirror and then restart the mirror tool. About the Move Tool The Move tool is only accessed through the Copy and Paste Special functions. With the Move tool, you can:
Translate features, surfaces, quilts, datum curves, and axes in a direction specified by a reference. You can translate along a linear edge or curve, axis, perpendicular to a plane or planar surface, or along one of the axes of the coordinate system. Rotate features, surfaces, quilts, datum curves, and axes about an existing axis, linear edge, curve, or about one of the axes of the coordinate system. Apply multiple translation and rotation transformations in a single move feature. You can also use the Move tool to create and move a copy of an existing surface or curve rather than moving the original. To move an item relative to its original position, you must first select the item to move, activate the Move tool, and then select the direction reference. You can also use asynchronous datums as direction references. When translating an object, the direction reference is typically a plane or edge that determines the direction in which you want to translate the moved feature. When rotating an object, the direction reference is typically an axis or edge about which you want to rotate the moved feature. The following items can be used as direction references:
o o o o o o o o o o
In Translate mode you can choose: Linear curve Linear edge Planar surface Datum axis Datum plane Axis of datum coordinate system In Rotate mode you can choose: Linear curve Linear edge Datum axis Axis of datum coordinate system
Note: You cannot select a coordinate system or two datum points or vertices as direction references. Instead, you can directly select an axis of the datum coordinate system as the direction reference or create an asynchronous datum axis that passes through these two datum points or vertices.
86/ 375
About the Move User Interface Feature Icon Moved features are represented in the Model Tree by Dialog Bar The Move dialog bar consists of the following elements: .
(Translate)Switches the Move tool from the Rotate mode to the Translate mode. (Rotate)Switches the Move tool from Translate mode to Rotate mode. Direction reference collectorSpecifies the direction reference at any time during creation or redefinition. You can select the x-, y-, or z-axis of the datum coordinate system in the graphics window to specify the direction of translation or rotation. The Direction reference collector shows which of the axes is used. For a feature created in an earlier release of Pro/ENGINEER, that uses a coordinate system as the reference direction, the Direction reference collector shows the used axis of that coordinate system. For a legacy feature that uses two datum points or vertices as the direction reference, if you remove one of the datum points or vertices, Pro/ENGINEER removes both the datum points or vertices and clears the Direction reference collector. If you choose to retain the datum points or vertices, the Direction reference collector shows both the datum points or vertices as the direction references.
Value listSpecifies the move value. In Translate mode the value represents the distance you wish to translate the moved feature. In Rotate mode, the value represents the angle in degrees that you wish to rotate the moved feature about the move reference. Slide-up Panels The Move dashboard has two modes, a Geometry mode and a Features mode. When moving geometry the Move dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesIn the References slide-up panel, you can select or change the items you wish to move. TransformationsIn the Transformations slide-up panel, you can:
o o o o o o o o
Create additional translations and rotations Create or change the direction reference Switch between Translate and Rotate mode Enter values for each translation or rotation movement
OptionsIn the Options slide-up panel, you can choose whether to hide or display the original geometry. PropertiesIn the Properties slide-up panel, you can: View information about the current moved feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser or the Information Window. Rename the moved feature
When moving entire features, the Move dashboard displays the following slide-up panels: TransformationsIn the Transformations slide-up panel, you can: Create additional translations and rotations Create or change the direction reference
87/ 375
o o o o
Switch between Translate and Rotate mode Enter values for each translation or rotation movement PropertiesIn the Properties slide-up panel, you can: View information about the current moved feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser Rename the moved feature
Shortcut Menu In the graphics window, right-click to access the Move shortcut menu. The following options are available on the Move shortcut menu in the Geometry mode:
Move ItemsActivates the Reference collector and specifies the selection of one or more items as references to move or rotate. Direction ReferenceActivates the Direction reference collector and specifies the direction reference that is an edge, curve, surface, plane, axis, or axis of a datum coordinate system. ClearDeletes the references in the active Direction reference collector. MoveTranslates the move item perpendicular or parallel to the direction reference. RotateRotates the move item about the direction reference. New MoveApplies another translation or rotation move to the move item. The following options are available on the Move shortcut menu in the Features mode:

1. 2.
ClearDeletes the references in the active Direction reference collector. MoveTranslates the move item perpendicular or parallel to the direction reference. RotateRotates the move item about the direction reference. New MoveApplies another translation or rotation move to the move item. To Move Geometry Set the selection filter to Geometry. Select the following geometry:
o o o o o o
3. 4. 5.
Datum planes Datum points Datum axes Datum coordinate systems Datum curves Quilts or surfaces
Click Edit > Copy. The selected geometry is copied to the clipboard. Click Edit > Paste Special. The Move dashboard opens. Click to translate the move item or click to rotate the move item.
6. Select a direction reference:
o o o o
Datum axis Linear edge Plane or flat surface Straight curve
88/ 375
o o
Datum plane Axis of datum coordinate system
Note: When translating, the direction reference is perpendicular to the direction in which you want to move when you specify a plane or flat surface as the direction reference. If you select an edge, curve, or axis, the direction reference is parallel to the selected edge, curve, or axis. When rotating, the direction reference is usually an axis or straight edge about which the move item pivots. 7. To move the selected item:
o o
8.
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually translate/rotate the move item to the desired distance. In the Move dashboard, type a distance or angle value in the value box, or select a value from a list of the most recently used values.
If you want to create additional translation or rotation transformations, see To Create Multiple Moves. Otherwise, click to complete the move feature.
To Move Features 1. 2. 3. In the Model Tree, select the item that you want to move. Click Edit > Copy, the entire feature is copied into the clipboard. Click Edit > Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens. The Paste Special dialog box contains the following options:
Make copies dependent on dimensions of originalMakes the copied feature's dimensions dependent on the original item. Any changes to the dimensions of the original item is propagated to the copy. Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copiesMoves the selected feature. Advanced reference configurationThis option is not available when you select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies option.
o o
4. With the Apply Move/Rotate transformation to copies option selected, click the OK button. The Move dashboard opens. 5. Click to translate the move item or click to rotate the move item.
o o o o o
Datum axis Edge Plane or flat surface Straight curve Axis of datum coordinate system
Note: When translating, the direction reference is perpendicular to the direction in which you want to move when you specify a plane or flat surface as the direction reference. If you select an edge, curve, or axis, the direction reference is parallel to the selected edge, curve, or axis. When rotating, the direction reference is usually an axis or straight edge about which the move item pivots. 7. To move the selected item:
o o
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually translate/rotate the move item to the desired distance or angle. In the Move dashboard, type a distance or angle value in the value box, or select a value from a list of the most recently used values.
89/ 375
8.
To Move all Features in a Part 1. 2. 3. In the Model Tree, select all features in the part and the part header. Click Edit > Copy. The entire feature is copied into the clipboard. Click Edit > Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens. The Paste Special dialog box contains the following options:
Make copies dependent on dimensions of originalMakes the copied feature's dimensions dependent on the original item. Any changes to the dimensions of the original item will be propagated to the copy. Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copiesMoves the selected features appears selected. Advanced reference configurationChanges the references of the copied feature and is not available because Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies option is selected by default.
o o
4. 5.
You can choose whether to make the copy dependent or not. The Move dashboard opens. Click to translate the move item or click to rotate the move item.
o o o o o
Note: You cannot select a plane or flat surface if you are rotating the selected item. When translating, the direction reference is perpendicular to the direction in which you want to move when you specify a plane or flat surface as the direction reference. If you select an edge, curve, or axis, the direction reference is parallel to the selected edge, curve, or axis. When rotating, the direction reference is usually an axis or straight edge about which the move item pivots. 7. To move the selected item:
o o
8.
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually translate/rotate the move item to the desired distance or angle. In the Move dashboard, type a distance or angle value in the value box, or select a value from a list of the most recently used values.
To Create Multiple Moves The Move tool allows you to create multiple translation and rotation transformations in a single move feature. To create multiple moves: 1. 2. 3. Click the Transformations tab on the Move dashboard. The Transformations slide-up panel appears. Click New Move in the Move list. A new move is added to the Move list. Select a transformation type from the Type list, either Move (to translate) or Rotate.
90/ 375
4.
Select a direction reference:
o o o o o
Note: You cannot select a plane or flat surface if you are rotating the selected item. 5. 6. 7. Use the drag handle in the graphics window to manually translate or rotate the move item or enter a distance or angle value in the value box. Repeat steps 1-5 to create additional transformations Click to complete the move feature.
About Redefining Legacy Data that Uses Coordinate System or Two Datum Points as Direction Reference Features created in an earlier release of Pro/ENGINEER can have the following as direction references:
Two datum points or vertices Datum coordinate system Legacy parts with such features are redefined when opened in the current release of Pro/ENGINEER. Redefining a Feature with Two Datum Points or Vertices as Direction Reference When you open a part with a feature that uses two datum points or vertices as the direction reference in the current version of Pro/ENGINEER, the Reference Selection dialog box opens stating that the use of two datum points or vertices as references is not supported. If you have deleted one of the datum points, it warns you that you have deleted one of the datum points. If you click OK in the Reference Selection dialog box to remove one of the datum points or vertices, Pro/ENGINEER removes both the datum points or vertices and clears the Direction reference collector. You can directly select a datum axis that passes through these two datum points or vertices. If you click Cancel in the Reference Selection dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER analyzes if either the datum points or vertices are used or both, datum points and vertices are used as the direction reference. The Direction reference collector displays the two datum points or vertices as the direction reference. Both the datum points or vertices are redefined such that the direction reference passes through these two datum points or vertices. Redefining a Feature with a Datum Coordinate System as Direction Reference When you open a part with a feature that uses the datum coordinate system as the direction reference in the current version of Pro/ENGINEER, the Direction reference collector displays the used axis of that datum coordinate system as the direction reference. You can also set the Direction reference collector to define an axis of a coordinate system as the direction reference. About the Merged Feature ) to merge two quilts by intersecting or joining them. The resulting quilt is a You can use the Merge tool ( separate quilt coincident with the two original quilts. If the merged feature is deleted, the original quilts remain. There are two methods for merging quilts:
Use intersect to create a quilt that consists of the trimmed portions of two intersecting quilts. Use join if the edges of one quilt lie on the surfaces of the other quilt.
91/ 375
Note: In Assembly mode, you can merge only assembly-level quilts. If you want to make component-level merged features, you must activate the component first, and then merge the quilts in that component. Parental Hierarchy of Quilts A merged quilt consists of three elements: two or more original quilts that provide the geometry, and a merged feature that contains the information for the surface intersection or joining. When you merge two quilts, both reference quilts become the parents of the merged feature. By default, the first quilt you select becomes the primary reference quilt, which determines the merged quilt ID. may be important for operations such as suppress and resume or layer blanking. For example, if suppress the primary reference quilt (for example, by selecting in the Model Tree), the merged quilt is suppressed. that This you also
You can control which quilt is used to determine the merged quilt ID. To change the default primary quilt, click the Swap command on the References slide-up panel on the dashboard. Note: The primary quilt is the first quilt listed under Quilts on the References slide-up panel. Accessing the Merge Tool To access the Merge tool, select two quilts and click About the Merged Feature User Interface The user interface for the Merge tool includes: on the Edit Features toolbar or click Edit > Merge.
Feature icon Dialog bar Slide-up panels Shortcut menus Feature Icon To access the Merge tool, select two quilts and click Dialog Bar The dialog bar consists of the following elements: For the first quilt, changes the side to be included in the merge. For the second quilt, changes the side to be included in the merge. Slide-up Panels The Merge tool provides the following slide-up panels: on the Edit Features toolbar or click Edit > Merge.
ReferencesLists quilts selected for the merge. The Swap command allows you swap the primary and secondary quilts in the quilt collector. OptionsSpecifies the method: Intersect or Join. PropertiesLets you edit the feature name and open feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Shortcut Menus When you right-click a merged feature, you can change the method of merging quilts by choosing one of these options on shortcut menu:
IntersectMerges two quilts at the intersection. JoinJoins two quilts.
92/ 375
To Create a Merged Feature Note: To access the Merge tool, you must first select two quilts to merge. 1. 2. on the Edit Features toolbar. The first quilt selected becomes the Select two quilts and click default primary quilt, which provides the quilt ID for the merged quilt. To select the method for merging, click the Options slide-up panel. Click Intersect or Join. Note: To be joined, the one-sided edges of one quilt must lie on the other quilt. 3. The arrows at the intersection of two quilts point to the sides of the quilts that will be included in the merged quilt. You can change the sides of the quilts to include in the resulting feature by doing the following:
When merging by intersectingFor each quilt, you can change the side of the quilt to include by clicking . Notice how the arrows flip as you change the sides to keep.
When merging by joining If one quilt extends beyond the other one, you can specify which side of the quilt is included by clicking .
4.
(Optional) To change the primary quilt, click the References slide-up panel and click Swap. The two quilts under Quilts switch places. The top quilt is the primary quilt. To verify the feature, click Click . .
5. 6.
Example: Merging Two Quilts The next example illustrates merging two intersecting quilts.
1 Select these two quilts The next figure illustrates how to define which portion of the quilt to keep.
1 Keep this surface The next figure shows the resulting merged quilt.
93/ 375
About the Trim Feature With the Trim tool you can cut or split a quilt or curve. A quilt is a collection of surfaces. Use the Trim tool to remove material from quilts or curves to create a certain shape or to split material. You can trim quilts by:
Trimming at an intersection with another quilt or datum plane Using a datum curve that lies on a quilt You can trim a curve by clipping or splitting the curve at the point of an intersection with a surface, another curve, or datum plane. To trim a quilt or curve, select the quilt or curve to trim, activate the Trim tool, and then specify the trimming object. You can specify and change the trimming object during creation or redefinition. During the trimming process, you can specify what part of the trimmed surface or curve you want to keep. In addition, you can use the Thin Trim when you trim a quilt with another quilt. Thin Trim allows you to specify trim thickness dimensions and control fitting requirements for surfaces. To access the Trim tool, select the surface or curve to trim, then click About the Trim User Interface Feature Icon To access the Trim tool, click Dialog Bar The Trim dialog bar consists of three elements: .on the Feature toolbar or click Edit > Trim. or click Edit > Trim.
Trimming Object CollectorAdds, removes, or redefines the trimming object reference. Flips between one side, other side, or both sides of the trimmed surface to keep. Switches the Silhouette Trim option on or off. Slide-up Panels The Trim dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesAdds or replaces the trimming objects references.
o SwapSelects which side of the result quilt takes the trimmed quilt ID. This button is enabled when
the trimming directions are on both sides.
o DetailsOpens the Chain dialog box so you can modify the chain set properties. o
OptionsSpecifies trim thickness dimensions, surfaces to exclude from thin trim, and controlled fitting requirements for surfaces:
Normal to SurfaceThickens the surface in a direction normal to surface. Automatic FitDetermines the scaling coordinate system and fit along all three axes.
Controlled FitThickens the surface by a specific scaling coordinate system and controlled fitting motion.
PropertiesRenames the feature or displays information about the feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Note: Thin Trim options are only available if you use a surface as your trimming object. Exclude SurfaceLists surfaces from the original quilt excluded from the Thin Trim operation. AutoAutomatically excludes surfaces to result in a successful implementation of the trim feature.
94/ 375
Original Quilt Side (Side 1 or 2)Selects the primary quilt when both sides of the surface are kept after trimming. Shortcut Menus The Trim tool has shortcut menus for collectors and for direction arrows. For the collector shortcut menu, right-click in the graphics window for the following commands:
Trimmed QuiltActivates the collector to specify the quilt to be trimmed. Trimming ObjectActivates the collector to specify the object used as the trimmer. ClearClears the current active collector to make another choice. FlipSpecifies the direction of the arrow to indicate the portion of the surface to keep or where to apply the thickness value. Thin TrimSelects the Thin Trim options. These options are only available when trimming a quilt. Note: When Thin Trim is selected, use the drag handles and the most recently used dimension box to:
o o
Resize the thickness of the trim surface Change a value. Changes are displayed in the graphics window and in the dialog bar.
For the direction-arrow shortcut menu, right-click the direction arrow for the following commands: FlipRedirects the direction of the arrow to indicate the side of the surface to keep after trimming. Both sidesAdds another arrow and keeps both sides of the trimmed surface or applies the thickness value to both sides. To Trim a Curve or Quilt 1. 2. 3. Select the curve or quilt to trim. Click or Edit > Trim. The Trim dashboard appears.
Select any curve, plane, or quilt to use as the trimming object.
Note: You can trim a curve with a datum point sitting on that particular curve. 4. Click or the direction arrow located in the graphics window to specify the side of the trimmed surface to keep. You can keep a specific side or both sides of the trimmed surface. Click to preview the trim geometry or click to accept and save changes.
5.
To Trim Surfaces with a Quilt 1. 2. 3. Select the surface to trim. Click or Edit > Trim. The Trim dashboard appears.
Select the quilt to use as the trimming object. The Trim dashboard appears. Note: Thin Trim options are available only if you use a quilt as your trimming object.
4. 5. 6.
Click Options. Select the Thin Trim checkbox. Specify the trim thickness dimensions and controlled fitting requirements. Alternatively, use the drag handles and the most recently used dimension box to specify the trim thickness. Click value. or in the graphics window, click the direction arrow to indicate which side to apply the thickness
7.
95/ 375
8.
Click
to preview the trim geometry or click
to accept and save changes.
To Trim Surfaces with Thin Trim 1. 2. 3. 4. Right-click the feature to redefine in the Model Tree. Click Redefine. The Trim dashboard appears with the trimming object collector as the active collector. Select the quilt to use as the trimming object.
Note: You can click References in the Dashboard dialog bar to see the trimming object change. About Silhouette Trim The silhouette command allows you to view the outline edge of a curved surface in a particular view. You can use the silhouette command when selecting one of the following as a trimming object:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Datum plane Planar surface To Trim Using Silhouette Edges Select the curved surface to trim. Click or Edit > Trim. The Trim Dashboard appears.
Select any datum plane or planar surface to use as the trimming object. Click Click . The silhouette of the curved surface appears. to preview the trim geometry or click to accept and save changes.
About the Pattern Feature When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader. Patterns offer the following benefits:
Creating a pattern is a quick way to reproduce a feature. A pattern is parametrically controlled. Therefore, you can modify a pattern by changing pattern parameters, such as the number of instances, spacing between instances, and original feature dimensions. Modifying patterns is more efficient than modifying individual features. In a pattern, when you change dimensions of the original feature, the system automatically updates the whole pattern. It may be easier or more effective to perform operations once on the multiple features contained in a pattern, rather than on the individual features. For example, you can easily suppress a pattern or add it to a layer. The system allows you to pattern a single feature only. To pattern several features, create a "local group", then pattern this group. After the group pattern is created, you can unpattern and ungroup the instances to make them independently modifiable. Notes:
The system does not transfer the line style attributes of a datum curve to its patterns. A thin feature "remembers" the surface to which it is attached and patterns to this surface. Pattern Types There are several ways to pattern a feature:
96/ 375
DimensionControl the pattern by using driving dimensions and specifying the incremental changes to the pattern. Dimensional patterns can be unidirectional and bidirectional. DirectionCreate a free-form pattern by specifying direction and using drag handles to set the orientation and increment of pattern growth. Direction patterns can be unidirectional and bidirectional. AxisCreate a free-form radial pattern by using drag handles to set the angular and radial increments of the pattern. The pattern can also be dragged into a spiral. TableControl the pattern by using a pattern table and specifying the dimension values for every pattern instance. ReferenceControl the pattern by referencing another pattern. FillControl the pattern by filling an area with instances according to a selected grid. Pattern creation methods are different, depending on the pattern type. in the Edit Features To access the Pattern functionality, select the feature you want to pattern and click toolbar or click Edit > Pattern, or right-click on the feature name in the model tree and select the Pattern command from the shortcut menu. About Dimension Patterns When you create a Dimension pattern, you select feature dimensions and specify the incremental changes to these dimensions and the number of instances of the feature in the pattern. Dimension patterns can be unidirectional (such as a linear pattern of holes) or bidirectional (such as a rectangular array of holes). In other words, bidirectional patterns place instances in rows and columns. Depending on what dimensions are chosen to vary, patterns can be linear or angular. When you create Dimension patterns, remember these tips:
You can use a feature as a pattern leader for a single pattern only. After you create the pattern, the leader becomes part of the pattern and can no longer act independently. When you create a pattern leader, think of the dimensions you may need to specify the location of the increments. Keep in mind that for rotational patterns, a feature must have a built-in angular dimension. For other patterns, create a pattern leader with meaningful dimensions that will be used later to control the location and size of the increments. An angular dimension controlling a centerline of a sketched feature should not be used to establish an angular reference. Use an asynchronously created datum plane to set an angular dimension of the feature. Asynchronous datum features are automatically grouped with the feature. You can then create the angular pattern of this group. When you select the pattern type, consider the regeneration time. For simple patterns, use the Identical or Variable options to speed up the regeneration of the model. Use relations to control the location of instances when you expect the number of instances to vary. In this case, whenever you modify the number of instances, the system calculates the spacing according to the formula you entered. About Direction Patterns Use the Direction pattern to add pattern members in one or two selected directions. In the Direction pattern, you can drag the placement handle in each direction to adjust the distance between pattern members or to flip the pattern in the opposite direction. While creating or redefining the Direction pattern, you can vary the following items:
Spacing in each directionDrag each placement handle to adjust spacing, or type the increment in the dashboard text box.
97/ 375
Number of pattern members in each directionType the number of members in the dashboard text box or edit it by double-clicking in the graphics window. Feature dimensionsYou can vary dimensions of the patterned feature by using the Dimension slide-up panel on the dashboard. For example, you can vary the hole diameter or depth. Skip pattern membersTo skip a pattern member, click the black dot identifying that pattern member. The black dot turns white. To restore the member, click the white dot. Direction of pattern membersTo change the direction of the pattern, drag the placement handle in the opposite direction, click About Axis Patterns Use the Axis pattern to create a pattern by revolving a feature around a selected axis. An axis pattern allows you to place members in two directions: , or type a negative number for the increment in the dashboard text box.
Angular(First direction) Pattern members are revolved around the axis. The default Axis pattern places members equally spaced in the counterclockwise direction. Radial(Second direction) Pattern members are added in the radial direction. There are two ways to place pattern members in the angular direction:
Specify the number of members, including the first member, and the distance between the members (increment). Specify the angular extent and the number of members, including the first member. The range for the angular extent is from 360 to +360 degrees. Pattern members are equally spaced within the specified angular extent. While creating or redefining the Axis pattern, you can vary the following items:
Spacing in the angular directionDrag the placement handle in the angular direction or type the increment in the dashboard text box. Spacing in the radial directionDrag the placement handle in the radial direction or type the increment in the dashboard text box. Number of pattern members in each directionType the number of members in the dashboard text box or edit it by double-clicking in the graphics window. The angular extent of the membersType the angular extent in the text box. Feature dimensionsYou can vary dimensions of the patterned feature by using the Dimension slide-up panel. For example, you can vary the hole diameter or depth. Tip: You can create a spiral pattern by varying the radial placement dimension. Skip pattern membersTo skip a pattern member, click the black dot identifying that pattern member. The black dot turns white. To restore the member, click the white dot. Direction of pattern membersTo change the direction of the pattern, drag the placement handle in the opposite direction, click About Table Patterns You can pattern features using pattern tables. Pattern tables allow you to create complicated or irregular patterns of features or groups by letting you specify unique dimensions for each instance in the pattern through an editable table. Multiple tables can be established for a pattern, so you can change the pattern by switching the table that drives it. You can modify a pattern table at any time after you create the pattern. Suppressing or deleting a tabledriven pattern suppresses or deletes the pattern leader, as well. , or type a negative number for the increment in the dashboard text box.
98/ 375
You can use pattern tables in Assembly mode to pattern assembly features and components. Pattern tables are not family tables. Pattern tables can only drive pattern dimensions, and unless they are unpatterned, pattern instances cannot be made independent. You can also include pattern tables in family tables so a particular family instance can use a specified pattern table. About Reference Patterns A reference pattern patterns a feature "on top of" any other patterned feature. Some references to locate the new reference pattern feature must be to the original patterned feature only. The instance number is always the same as the original pattern; therefore, the pattern parameter is not used to control this pattern. If you add a feature that does not use the originally patterned feature to get its geometry references, you can not use reference patterning for the new feature. About Fill Patterns When you create a Fill pattern, you fill an entire area with instances of the feature, positioned in a grid. You can select one of several grid templates (such as rectangular, circular, triangular) and specify the grid parameters, such as the spacing between pattern member centers, radial spacing for circular and spiral grids, the minimum distance between the pattern member centers and the area boundary, and the rotation of the grid about its origin. To define the area to be filled by the pattern, you can either sketch it or select a sketched datum curve. Instead of filling the whole area with the pattern instances, you can also select the Curve grid to locate the pattern members along the border of the area. Fill patterns are created by transforming the member locations out from the origin according to the grid, the grid orientation, and the spacing between members. The sketched area and the border allowance determine which members are created. Any member whose center is within the border allowance from the sketch boundary will be created. The border allowance does not change the position of the members. About Pattern Regeneration Options Pro/ENGINEER defines patterns based on the complexity of features and surfaces involved in the pattern creation. Moreover, the system makes certain assumptions for each type of pattern. The less complex the pattern is, the more assumptions Pro/ENGINEER can make and the faster it creates the pattern. Pro/ENGINEER categorizes patterns into three types, using the options Identical, Variable, and General (available in the Options slide-up panel). Identical Patterns Identical patterns, the most simple, have the following restrictions:
All instances are identical in size. All instances are placed on the same surface. No instance intersects the edges of the placement surface, any other instance, or any feature other than the placement surface. Identical patterns regenerate the fastest of the three options. For an identical pattern, the system generates the first feature, then copies it exactly, including all the intersections. Note: In identical patterns, the system does not check to make sure that there will be no overlap among the instances of the pattern. This kind of check would slow the regeneration of the pattern and defeat the advantage of using an identical pattern. You must check for overlaps yourself. To avoid having to check yourself, use a general pattern.
99/ 375
Variable Patterns Variable patterns are more complicated than identical patterns. The system makes the following assumptions about variable patterns:
Instances can vary in size. Instances can be placed on different surfaces. No instance intersects any other instance. For variable patterns, Pro/ENGINEER generates geometry for each feature individually, then generates all the intersections at one time. A variable pattern intersects part geometry as a whole group. As a result, if you were to use a varying pattern on a feature extruded up to the next surface, there would be only one creation direction for determining which is the next surface and you could get undesired results. To avoid this, use only general or identical patterns with features extruded up to the next surface. General Patterns General patterns allow you to create the most complex patterns. The system makes no assumptions about the instances of general patterns. Therefore, Pro/ENGINEER calculates the geometry of each individual instance and intersects each feature separately. Use this option when you expect the feature to touch other instances, intersect itself, or cross surface boundaries as it gets patterned. General patterns are required even if instances intersect inside the base feature and the intersection is not visible. Example: Patterns Pattern Directions Unidirectional Bidirectional
1. direction 1
1. direction 1 2. direction 2
Pattern Configurations Linear Rotational
About the Pattern User Interface Procedures related to Pattern are listed under Feature Icon Patterns are identified by the icon in the Edit Features toolbar and by the icon in the model tree.
100/ 375
Dialog Bar The Pattern dialog bar contains a drop-down list box of pattern types:
DimensionCreate the pattern by using driving dimensions and specifying the incremental changes to the pattern. Dimensional patterns can be unidirectional and bidirectional. DirectionCreate the pattern by specifying direction and using drag handles to set the orientation and increment of pattern growth. Direction patterns can be unidirectional and bidirectional. AxisCreate the radial pattern by using drag handles to set the angular and radial increments of the pattern. The pattern can also be dragged into a spiral. TableCreate the pattern by using a pattern table and specifying the dimension values for every pattern instance. ReferenceCreate the pattern by referencing another pattern. FillCreate the pattern by filling an area with instances according to a selected grid. The rest of the dialog bar contents depends on the type of pattern selected. For Dimension patterns, the Pattern dialog bar consists of the following:
User interface for patterning in the first direction, indicated by number 1: A text box with a number of pattern members in the first direction, including the pattern leader. The default is 2. You can type any number. This text box becomes available after you select at least one dimension for patterning in this direction. A collector of dimensions for patterning in the first direction. Click the collector to activate it, then select the dimensions. Similarly, user interface for patterning in the second direction (optional), indicated by number 2:
o o o o o
A text box with a number of pattern members in the second direction. A collector of dimensions for patterning in the second direction.
For Direction patterns, the Pattern dialog bar consists of the following: User interface for patterning in the first direction, indicated by number 1: The first direction reference collector. Click the collector to activate it, then select the reference. You can select a plane (in which case the direction is normal to the plane), a straight edge, a datum axis, or a coordinate system axis. The icon, which flips the direction of pattern increment in the first direction.
o o o o o o o o
A text box with a number of pattern members in the first direction, including the pattern leader. The default is 2. You can type any number. This text box becomes available after you specify the direction. A combo box for specifying the first direction increment value. This box also becomes available after you specify the direction. Similarly, user interface for patterning in the second direction (optional), indicated by number 2: The second direction reference collector. Click the collector to activate it, then select the reference. The icon, which flips the direction of pattern increment in the second direction.
A text box with a number of pattern members in the second direction. A combo box for specifying the second direction increment value.
For Axis patterns, the Pattern dialog bar consists of the following: User interface for patterning in the first direction, indicated by number 1:
101/ 375
The first direction reference collector. Click the collector to activate it, then select an axis to be the center of the pattern. The icon, which flips the direction of pattern increment in the first direction.
o o o
A text box with a number of pattern members in the first direction, including the pattern leader. The default is 2. You can type any number. This text box becomes available after you specify the direction. A combo box for specifying the first direction increment value. This box also becomes available after you specify the direction. The icon, which allows you to switch between two methods for specifying the placement in the angular direction. Similarly, user interface for patterning in the second direction (optional), indicated by number 2:
o o o o o o o
The second direction reference collector. Click the collector to activate it, then select the reference. The icon, which flips the direction of pattern increment in the second direction.
A text box with a number of pattern members in the second direction. A combo box for specifying the second direction increment value.
The icon icon, which allows you to control whether pattern members are oriented normal to the radial direction.
For Table patterns, the Pattern dialog bar consists of the following:
A collector of dimensions to be included in the pattern table. Click the collector to activate it, then select the dimensions. The Active table listLets you select the active table. The active table is the table that drives the pattern. Initially this list contains only one table. Use the Tables slide-up panel to create additional tables. The Edit commandLets you edit the active table. For Reference patterns, the Pattern dialog bar consists of the Reference type drop-down list. This list is available only if the pattern is part of a group that is also patterned. The options allow you to reference the feature pattern, the group pattern, or both patterns.
For Fill patterns, the Pattern dialog bar consists of the following:
A collector of sketched sections indicating the area to be filled by the pattern. Can contain only one sketch. Lets you select the grid template for the pattern:
o o o o o o
SquareSpace the member in a square pattern. DiamondSpace the member in a diamond pattern. TriangleSpace the member in a triangular pattern. CircleSpace the member in a circular pattern. CurveSpace the member along the fill area boundary. SpiralSpace the member in a spiral pattern.
102/ 375
o o
Sets the spacing between pattern member centers. Sets the minimum distance between the pattern member centers and the sketch boundary. Negative value allows centers to lie outside the sketch. Sets the rotation of the grid about the origin. Sets the radial spacing for circular and spiral grids.
o o
Slide-up Panels The Pattern dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
DimensionsContains the collectors of dimensions used for patterning in the first and second direction. This slide-up panel is available only for Dimension patterns. Table DimensionsContains the collector of dimensions included in the pattern table. This slide-up panel is available only for Table patterns. ReferencesContains the name of the sketch used in the pattern and the Define button, which lets you sketch the area to be filled by the pattern. This slide-up panel is available only for Fill patterns. TablesContains the collector of tables used for patterning. This slide-up panel is available only for Table patterns. OptionsContains the pattern regeneration options. PropertiesContains the feature name and an icon to access feature information. The Dimensions slide-up panel contains the following elements:
The Direction 1 collectorContains the dimensions and increments used to pattern in the first direction. You have to include at least one dimension and specify the increment to create a pattern. You can also use the following to control dimension increments:
o o o
The Define increment by relation checkboxLets you define the dimension increment by using a relation instead of a constant value. The Edit buttonLets you edit the relation driving the increment of selected dimension. This button is available only if the Define increment by relation checkbox is selected.
The Direction 2 collectorContains the dimensions and increments used to pattern in the second direction. Use this collector if you want to create a bidirectional pattern. This collector also has associated controls for specifying dimension increments by using relations, similar to the Direction 1 collector. To activate the Direction 2 collector, use the Direction 2 Dimensions option on the shortcut (right-click) menu.
The Table Dimensions slide-up panel contains the collector of dimensions to be included in the pattern table. The References slide-up panel contains the collector for the sketch used to define the Fill area of the pattern. It also contains the Define button that lets you sketch the area to be filled by the pattern. The Tables slide-up panel contains the collector of tables used for patterning. Each line contains a table index entry (starting with 1) and an associated table name. You can change the table name by typing a new one. If you right-click on a table index entry in the collector, the shortcut menu contains the following commands:
AddLets you edit another table for the pattern. When you exit the editor, the new table is added at the bottom of the collector list. RemoveRemoves the selected table from the collector. ApplyActivates the selected table. The active table is the table that drives the pattern.
103/ 375
EditLets you edit the selected table. While you are editing the table, you can save it on disk in a .ptb file, or read a previously saved .ptb file into it, by using the appropriate options under File. When you are done editing the table, click File > Exit. The table is then saved in the pattern. ReadLets you read in a previously saved pattern table (a .ptb file). WriteLets you save the selected pattern table. The table is saved in the current working directory in a file named <TableName>.ptb, where <TableName> is the name of the pattern table.
The Options slide-up panel contains the pattern regeneration options:
IdenticalThe system assumes that all the pattern members are identical in size, are placed on the same surface, and do not intersect each other or part boundaries. VariableThe system assumes that the pattern members can vary in size, or be placed on different surfaces, but they can not intersect each other or part boundaries. GeneralThis is the default. The system does not make any assumptions about the pattern members. The Properties slide-up panel contains the Name text box, where you can type a custom name for the pattern feature, to replace the automatically generated name. It also contains the to display information about the feature. Shortcut Menus Right-click anywhere in the graphics window to access the Pattern shortcut menu, which contains the following commands: icon that you can click
Direction 1 DimensionsActivates the collector of dimensions used for patterning in the first direction. Available only for Dimension and Direction patterns. Direction 2 DimensionsActivates the collector of dimensions used for patterning in the second direction. Available only for Dimension and Direction patterns. Direction 1 ReferenceActivates the collector for selecting a direction reference in the first direction. Available only for Direction patterns. Direction 2 ReferenceActivates the collector for selecting a direction reference in the second direction. Available only for Direction patterns. Axis ReferenceActivates the collector for selecting an axis. Available only for Axis patterns. ClearRemove all references from the collector that is currently active. Dimension and Table patterns. Available only for
Show DimensionsDisplays dimensions of the feature being patterned (for example, after repainting the screen). To Create a Dimension Pattern This procedure describes how to pattern a feature by using driving dimensions and specifying the incremental changes to the pattern. Dimensional patterns can be unidirectional and bidirectional. 1. in the Edit Features toolbar. The Pattern Select the feature you want to pattern and click Dashboard opens, with the default pattern type set to Dimension. The collector of dimensions for patterning in the first direction is active. Select a dimension for patterning in the first direction. A combo box opens in the graphic window, with the dimension increment initially equal to the dimension value. Type or select a value for the dimension increment.
2.
104/ 375
Note: Once specified, the dimension increment can not be accessed from the graphic window. To modify it, use the appropriate Increment field in the Dimensions slide-up panel. 3. To select more dimensions for patterning in the first direction, hold the control key. Specify the increment for each selected dimension.
4. Type the number of pattern members in the first direction (including the pattern leader) in the text box in the dialog bar (located between the label 1 and the collector of dimensions for patterning in the first direction). The default number of pattern members is 2. 5. To create a bidirectional pattern, click on the collector of dimensions for patterning in the second direction to activate it, select the dimensions, specify the dimension increments, and type the number of pattern members in the second direction in the text box located between the label 2 and the collector of dimensions for patterning in the second direction. Click in the dialog bar. The system patterns the selected feature.
6.
Varying the Location and Size of Instances The following diagram shows how to vary both the location and size of instances when creating a Dimension pattern of holes:
To locate the holes horizontally, select d5 as the driving dimension and enter the value for d6 (the incremental dimension). To locate the holes vertically, select d4 as the driving dimension and enter the value for d7 (the incremental dimension). To vary the diameter, select d3 as the driving dimension and enter the value for the increment in the diameter (d8 - d3). Enter the total number of instances (including the original) in this direction.
Use a bidirectional pattern to locate instances in rows and columns.
Using Negative Increment in a Dimension Pattern A positive or negative value for the increment determines the direction in which pattern instances are added:
A positive increment causes the system to place instances in the same direction as the initial feature was placed.
A negative increment reverses this direction.
105/ 375
You can reverse the direction in which instances are added to the pattern leader by specifying a negative increment. Using Relations in Dimension Patterns You can use relations to drive pattern increments. At the time you select a dimension to drive the pattern in a specific direction and specify the dimension increment, you can add a relation for that increment. This allows the incremental value to vary for each instance of the pattern. You can use the following pattern parameters inside a pattern relation:
LEAD_VParameter symbol for the leader value (the dimension you just selected to determine the direction) MEMB_VParameter symbol to locate the instances with respect to the reference entity of the pattern leader MEMB_IParameter symbol to locate an instance with respect to the previous instance IDX1 and IDX2 Pattern instance index values, which are incremented for each calculated pattern instance. Note: MEMB_V and MEMB_I are mutually exclusivethey cannot appear in the same pattern relation together. Example: Creating a Unidirectional Linear Pattern This example shows creating a unidirectional pattern of holes. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2.
Select the Hole feature and click that control the Hole feature.
in the Edit Features toolbar. The system displays dimensions
Select dimension (1), which controls the distance from the hole axis to the left edge of the part, as shown in the next illustration.
3. 4.
A combo box opens in the graphic window, with the dimension increment initially equal to 3.00 (the dimension value). Type 7 for the dimension increment. To specify the number of pattern members in the first direction, type 3 in the text box in the dialog bar that is located between the label 1 and the collector of dimensions for patterning in the first direction. Click in the dialog bar. The system patterns the hole, as shown in the following illustration.
5.
106/ 375
Example: Creating a Bidirectional Linear Pattern This example shows creating a bidirectional pattern. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2.
Select the protrusion (1) and click that control the selected feature.
For the first direction, select dimension (1), which controls the distance from the protrusion to the left edge of the part, as shown in the next illustration.
3. 4. 5.
A combo box opens in the graphic window, with the dimension increment initially equal to 1.50 (the dimension value). Type 3.1 for the dimension increment. To specify the number of pattern members in the first direction, type 6 in the text box in the dialog bar that is located between the label 1 and the collector of dimensions for patterning in the first direction. Click the collector of dimensions for patterning in the second direction. Select dimension (2), which controls the distance from the protrusion to the front edge of the part. Type 3.5 for the dimension increment. Hold down the CTRL key and select dimension (3), which controls the height of the protrusion. Type 1 for the dimension increment. To specify the number of pattern members in the second direction, type 3 in the text box in the dialog bar that is located between the label 2 and the collector of dimensions for patterning in the second direction. Click in the dialog bar. The system creates the pattern, as shown in the following illustration.
6. 7.
8.
Example: Creating a Rotational Pattern of Holes To create a rotational pattern of holes, place the hole using the Radial placement option. This way, the hole has an angular dimension controlling its location, and you can use this dimension for patterning, as shown in this example. 1. Create the first hole. Select the top surface of the disk as the primary reference for hole placement. Open the Placement slide-up panel, select Radial as the placement option, click the Secondary references collector, and select the central axis and the FRONT datum plane as secondary references, as shown in the following illustration.
107/ 375
2.
Select the Hole feature and click control the Hole feature.
in the Edit Features toolbar. The system displays dimensions that
3. 4.
Select the angular dimension (30.00 degrees) and type 60 for the dimension increment. To specify the number of pattern members, type 6 in the text box in the dialog bar that is located between the label 1 and the collector of dimensions for patterning in the first direction. Click in the dialog bar. The system patterns the hole, as shown in the following illustration.
5.
Example: Creating a Rotational Pattern of Sketched Features To create a rotational pattern of a feature, the feature must have an angular placement dimension. Use a datum plane located at an angle as a sketching or reference plane for creating the sketched feature. Then use the angular dimension of the datum plane to create the rotational pattern. This example shows creating a rotational pattern of a sketched protrusion by pausing the Extrude tool to create the angular datum plane, then patterning the resulting group of features. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2.
Click
to start creating the protrusion.
Pause the tool to create a datum plane. Click in the Datum toolbar. Select the datum axis A_2 as the first reference. Hold the CTRL key and select the FRONT datum plane as the second reference. The system creates the datum plane DTM1 at a default angle of 45 degrees, as shown in the next illustration. Click OK.
108/ 375
3.
Resume the paused tool. Click . Select the datum plane DTM1 as the sketching plane and the datum plane TOP as the reference plane, and sketch a circle, as shown in the following illustration. Exit Sketcher.
4.
Adjust the depth of protrusion, as shown in the next illustration.
5.
Click display.
. The system groups the protrusion and the datum plane, and blanks the datum plane from
6.
. The system displays the dimensions of Select the group PROTRUSION in the model tree and click all the features in the group, as shown in the following illustration.
7. 8.
Select the angular dimension (45.00 degrees) and accept the value 45 for the dimension increment. To specify the number of pattern members, type 8 in the text box in the dialog bar that is located between the label 1 and the collector of dimensions for patterning in the first direction. Click in the dialog bar. The system patterns the protrusion group. The final part geometry is shown in the next illustration.
9.
Note: Another way to create this rotational pattern is to create the angular datum plane prior to creating the protrusion. Use this datum plane as a sketching plane for the protrusion. Pattern the datum plane by
109/ 375
selecting the angular dimension and specifying the dimension increment. Then create a reference pattern of protrusion by referencing the datum plane pattern. Example: Creating a Dimension Pattern Using Relations This example shows using pattern parameters, such as MEMB_V and MEMB_I, to control the location of pattern members. When you are including other pattern parameters, such as the number of instances (p#) in the relation, you must build the relation in two steps. When you first define the pattern, you do not know the symbol that the system is going to assign to the number of pattern instances (in this example, p9). You can include the p9 parameter in the relation only after the pattern is created. Therefore, you can use a placeholder, such as 10 in the example below, and then redefine the pattern and change the relation to include p9. The original part, with all dimension symbols, is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2. 3.
Select the Hole feature and click
in the Edit Features toolbar.
Select dimension d5, which controls the distance from the hole axis to the left edge of the part. Accept the default value of the dimension increment. Open the Dimension slide-up panel and click the Increment cell for the dimension. Select the Define increment by relation option below the collector. The dimension increment value changes to the word Relation. Click Edit. The editor window opens. Add the following relation: memb_i = (d1-(2*d5))/10 Exit the relations editor.
4. 5.
6.
Hold the CTRL key and select dimension d4, which controls the distance from the hole axis to the front edge of the part. Repeat the steps to define the dimension increment by relation. Add the following relations: incr=10 memb_v = lead_v + 5 * sin(incr*idx1)
7.
Click
in the dialog bar to create the pattern.
8. Display the pattern dimensions. Place your cursor over the dimension that controls the number of pattern members (2 HOLES), the dimension symbol appears in the pop-up balloon. In this example, it is p9. 9. Edit the pattern definition. Modify the relation for d5 as follows: memb_i = (d1-(2*d5))/(p9-1) Modify the first line of the relation for d4 as follows: incr = 180/(p9-1) 10. Change the number of pattern members to 10. 11. Click in the dialog bar. The resulting pattern for these relations is shown in the next illustration.
110/ 375
The pattern maintains the same relationship to the part, regardless of the change in the length d1, or the change to the number of instances in the pattern. If you modify the number of pattern members to 5, the resulting pattern is shown in the following illustration.
To Create a Direction Pattern You can pattern a feature by using directional references and dragging the patterned features. Directional patterns can be unidirectional and bidirectional. 1. 2. 3. Select the feature you want to pattern and click dashboard opens. in the Edit Features toolbar. The Pattern
To set the pattern type to Direction, select Direction from the list box of pattern types in the dialog bar. The layout of the dialog bar changes. The collector of first direction becomes active. Select one of the following entities to use as a direction reference: Straight edge Plane or planar surface Linear curve Coordinate system Datum axis The system creates a default pattern of two members, indicated by a black dot, in the selected direction.
1. 2. 3.
Type the number of pattern members in the first direction. To change the distance between the pattern members, drag the placement handle. Tip: You can also type the distance between the pattern members in the increment text box. To add pattern members in another direction, click the second direction collector and select the second direction reference. Tip: You can select a collector by right-clicking in the in the graphics window and selecting from the shortcut Type the number of pattern members in the second direction in the box, preceded by the label 2. Adjust the distance between the members in the second direction by dragging the placement handle in the second direction or by typing the increment. To reverse the direction of the pattern, click value. for each direction, or enter a negative increment
4. 5.
6. 7. 3.
(Optional) To create a variable pattern, add dimensions to vary in the Dimension slide-up panel. Click in the dialog bar. The system patterns the selected feature.
Example: Creating a Direction Pattern Use the Direction pattern to create the hole pattern shown in the next figure.
111/ 375
1.
When patterning the hole in the first direction, select the highlighted edge as the pattern direction.
2.
Specify the number of members and adjust the distance between the members by dragging the placement handle along the selected edge.
4.
To add members in the second direction, select another edge to use as the pattern direction. Specify the number of edges and adjust the distance between members by dragging the handle along the second direction. Note: You can flip the direction of the pattern by entering a negative value for the increment, or by dragging the placement handle in the opposite direction.
To Create an Axis Pattern You can create a pattern by revolving a feature around an axis. Tip: You can create a datum axis while inside the Pattern tool by selecting 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. from the Datum Features toolbar. in the Edit Features toolbar. The Pattern
Select the feature you want to pattern and click dashboard opens.
To set the pattern type to Axis, select Axis from the list of pattern types in the dialog bar. The layout of the dialog bar changes. Select or create a datum axis to be the center of the pattern. The system creates a default pattern in the angular direction. The pattern members are indicated by black dots. You can adjust the pattern according to your design. To specify the number of pattern members in the angular direction, type the number in the text box on the dashboard. Use one of these methods to space pattern members in the angular direction:
112/ 375
To specify the angle between pattern members, type the angle in the number box, or select from the list or predefined angles. To specify the angular extent within which all pattern members are equally spaced, click type the angle extent in the text box, or choose from a list of predefined angles. and
o
7. 8. 9.
To add pattern members in the radial (second) direction, type the number of members in the text box, preceded by the label 2. To space members in the radial direction, type the distance between members in the text box. To reverse the direction of the pattern, click for each direction, or enter a negative increment value.
10. (Optional) To create a variable pattern, add dimensions to vary in the Dimension slide-up panel.
11. To orient the pattern members perpendicular to the radial direction, click 12. Click in the dialog bar. The system creates the pattern.
Example: Creating an Axis Pattern Pattern Directions The next figure shows an axis pattern created in the angular (first direction). The axis A-4 was selected as the central axis for the pattern.
The next figure shows how the previous pattern was modified to add holes in the radial (second) direction.
Two Methods for Locating Members in the Angular Direction Method 1: Using the number of members and increment The next figure shows how a hole is patterned by specifying the number of members (8) and the angle between two members (increment of 30 degrees).
Method 2: Using the number of members and angular extent of the pattern The next figure shows how a hole is patterned by specifying the number of members (8) and the angular extent (270 degrees). The 8 pattern members are equally spaced within 270 degrees.
113/ 375
Example: Creating a Spiral Pattern To create a spiral pattern, use the Axis pattern and vary the radial placement dimension of each member (the distance between the member and the central axis of the pattern). 1. 2. 3. 4. Define the pattern as usual by specifying the number of members and the increment between the members. Click the Dimension slide-up panel. On the panel, click the cell under Dimension to activate the selection. On the model, select the radial placement dimension that you want to vary. In this case, it is R100.09.
5.
Type the increment that will be used to increase the radial dimension for each member. In this example, enter 15. The resulting pattern appears as in the next figure.
To Create a Table Pattern This procedure describes how to pattern a feature by using a pattern table and specifying the dimension values for every pattern instance. 1. 2. in the Edit Features toolbar. The Pattern Select the feature you want to pattern and click Dashboard opens, with the default pattern type set to Dimension. To set the pattern type to Table, select Table from the drop-down list box of pattern types in the dialog bar. The layout of the dialog bar changes. The collector of dimensions to be included in the pattern table becomes active. Select dimensions to be included in the pattern table. Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple dimensions. Click Edit in the dialog bar. The table editor window opens. The table contains an index column, for specifying the index for each pattern member, and a column for each dimension selected in Step 3. The header for a dimension column contains the dimension symbol, with the default value, equal to the dimension value of the pattern leader, next to the symbol in parenthesis. For each pattern member, add a row in the table, starting with the index number, and specify the dimension values for this pattern member. Use an asterisk (*) to retain the default dimension value. The pattern indices start from 1. They must be unique, but do not have to be sequential. You can import a previously saved pattern table by clicking File > Read in the top menu bar in the table
3. 4.
5.
114/ 375
editor window and typing the name of the table file. You can also save the current table for future use by clicking File > Save or by clicking File > Save As and typing the file name. 6. 7. When finished editing the pattern table, click File > Exit in the top menu bar in the table editor window. To create additional pattern tables, open the Tables slide-up panel, right-click in it, and select Add from the shortcut menu. The table editor window opens to let you edit the new table. When finished editing the pattern table, click File > Exit. If you have more than one pattern table defined, select the active table from the Active table dropdown list in the dialog bar. Click in the dialog bar. The system patterns the selected feature.
8.
9.
Example: Creating a Table Pattern This example shows creating a table pattern. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2. 3.
Select the protrusion (1) and click that control the selected feature.
Select Table from the drop-down list box of pattern types in the dialog bar. Select dimensions to be included in the pattern table, as shown in the next illustration. Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple dimensions.
4. 5.
Click Edit in the dialog bar. The table editor window opens. For each pattern member, add a row in the table, specifying its dimension values. The finished pattern table is shown in the following illustration.
6. 7.
Click File > Exit in the top menu bar in the table editor window. Click in the dialog bar. The system creates the pattern, as shown in the following illustration.
115/ 375
To Modify a Table Pattern by Editing its Tables 1. Click Edit > Pattern Table. The TABLES dialog box opens. The TABLES dialog box shows all of the modifiable pattern tables in the current active object. The active object can be the top-level assembly, a subassembly, a part, or a feature. You can change the active object by using the active object menu. Depending on the active object selected, you may be required to make a selection on the screen (for example, in a part, if the active object is feature, you must select a feature that belongs to a table driven pattern). Use icons at the bottom of the dialog box to modify the table pattern as follows:
2.
To add another table to the pattern, select the pattern or one of its tables in the Pattern Table Tree, and click . .
o o
To activate a table, select its name in the Pattern Table Tree and click To edit a table, select its name and click name in the Pattern Table Tree. To delete a table, select its name and click To rename a table, select its name and click
. You can also select a table by double-clicking on its
o o o o
. . .
To save a table to disk in a separate file, select its name and click
To retrieve a table from disk, select a pattern or one of its tables in the Pattern Table Tree, click , and then select a .ptb file from the Open dialog box.
4. If you want to save the changes and continue working with the TABLES dialog box, click Apply. To finish and save changes to the pattern tables, click OK. To cancel and remove any changes press Cancel. To Create a Reference Pattern This procedure describes how to pattern a feature by referencing another pattern. 1. in the Edit Features toolbar. The selected Select the feature you want to pattern and click feature must reference another patterned feature. If the selected feature is of a type that can not be patterned any other way, such as a round or chamfer, the system immediately creates a Reference pattern of this feature. If the selected feature can be patterned independently, such as a coaxial hole, the Pattern Dashboard opens, with the default pattern type set to Reference. Click the selected feature. Example: Creating a Reference Pattern This example shows chamfering the edges of a pattern of holes by creating a reference pattern. The original part, containing a pattern of holes, is shown in the following illustration. in the dialog bar. The system patterns
2.
116/ 375
1.
Create a Chamfer feature and select one of the hole edges. The system chamfers the selected hole, as shown in the next illustration.
2.
Select the Chamfer feature and click in the Edit Features toolbar. The system creates a reference pattern of the Chamfer feature based on the Hole pattern and, as a result, chamfers all the holes in the pattern, as shown in the following illustration.
To Create a Fill Pattern This procedure describes how to pattern a feature by filling an area with pattern members according to a selected grid. 1. 2. 3. in the Edit Features toolbar. The Pattern Select the feature you want to pattern and click Dashboard opens, with the default pattern type set to Dimension. To set the pattern type to Fill, select Fill from the drop-down list box of pattern types in the dialog bar. The layout of the dialog bar changes. Select an existing sketched curve, or click References > Define and sketch the area to be filled by the pattern. Note: When you enter Sketcher, you cannot see the pattern leader. If you want to use the pattern leader location to dimension the sketch, make sure to locate the leader to references, such as datum planes. Then you can use these references to create the sketch. As soon as you select a curve or exit Sketcher, the system displays a preview of the pattern grid, based on the default values. Each member location is indicated by a hot spot. 4. The default grid type is Square. If you want to use another grid type, select its name from the dropdown list in the dialog bar. To change the spacing between pattern member centers, type or select a new value in the box. combo
5. 6.
To change the minimum distance between the pattern member centers and the sketch boundary, type or select a new value in the combo box. A negative value allows centers to lie outside the sketch. combo
7.
To specify the rotation angle of the grid about the origin, type or select a new value in the box.
8. To change the radial spacing for circular and spiral grids, type or select a new value in the box.
combo
117/ 375
9.
To omit a pattern member at a certain location, click the corresponding hot spot on the grid. The hot spot changes color to show that the pattern member will be omitted. You can click the hot spot again at any time when redefining the pattern to restore the pattern member at this location. in the dialog bar. The system patterns the selected feature.
10. Click
Example: Creating a Fill Pattern This example shows creating a fill pattern to drill a pattern of holes in a plate. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Select the hole and click
in the Edit Features toolbar.
Select Fill from the drop-down list box of pattern types in the dialog bar. Click References > Define to sketch the fill area. Select the top surface of the part as the sketching plane. Use the edges of the part to create the sketch. If you are using the Intent Manager in Sketcher, click Sketch > Edge > Use > Loop and select an edge of the part. This way, the fill area includes the whole part. When you exit Sketcher, the system displays the default grid, as shown in the next illustration.
6.
Select Diamond from the drop-down list box of grid types in the dialog bar. Modify the value that sets the spacing between pattern member centers, if needed. Specify the minimum distance between the pattern member centers and the sketch boundary, equal to the distance of the original hole feature from the part edges. The system updates the pattern grid, as shown in the following illustration.
7.
Click
in the dialog bar. The system creates the pattern, as shown in the next illustration.
About the Project Feature You can use the Project tool to create a projected datum curve on solid and nonsolid surfaces, quilts, or datum planes. You can then use the projected datum curve to trim a surface, to contour a sweep trajectory, or to create a cut in Pro/SHEETMETAL. If you create a curve by sketching on a plane, it can be patterned. Projected curves cannot be crosshatched. If you select a crosshatched datum curve for projection, the system ignores the cross-hatching. There are two methods of projecting a curve:
118/ 375
Project a SketchCreates a sketch or copies an existing sketch into the model to project. Project ChainsSelects a curve or chain to project. To access the Project tool, click or click Edit > Project.
About the Project User Interface Feature Icon All Project features are represented on the Model Tree by Additionally, .
identifies the Project tool in the Edit toolbar.
You can also click Edit > Project to start the Project tool. Dialog Bar The Project dialog bar consists of five elements:
Surfaces collectorSpecifies the destination of the projection. Direction optionsSets the direction type to be in a specified direction or normal to the target surfaces. Direction reference summary collectorSpecifies the direction reference. Flips the direction of the projection. Selects or changes the required axis when the direction reference is a coordinate system. Slide-up Panels The Project dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
o o
In the References panel, you can: Choose whether you select a chain or create a sketch to project. When Project chains is selected, use Define to open the Sketch dialog box to create a sketch to project, or copy one into the feature by selecting an existing sketched curve feature. You can also use Define Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Use Edit (after defining a sketch) to open the Sketch dialog box so you can edit the internal sketch. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Use Details to open the Surface Sets dialog box or Chain dialog box, so you can modify the surface set properties or chain properties. Specify the direction reference of the projected datum curve feature. Flip the direction of the projected datum curve.
o o o o
In the Properties panel, you can view information about the Project feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser and enter a user-defined name for the feature. Shortcut Menus In the graphics window, you can use the shortcut menu to access the following options. Collectors
Select SketchActivates the sketch collector if Project a Sketch is selected in the References slide-up panel. Select ChainActivates the chain collector to select the chain or chains to project. Select SurfacesActivates the surface collector to select the surfaces or datum planes on which to project the curve.
119/ 375

Actions
Select Direction ReferenceSelects the reference for the direction of the projection.
ClearClears the contents of the active collector. Define Internal SketchWhen Project a Sketch is selected, opens the Sketch dialog box so you can define an internal sketch. Edit Internal SketchWhen Project a Sketch is selected, opens the Sketch dialog box so you can edit an internal sketch. Options

1. 2. 3. 4.
Along directionProjects the selected chains or sketch in a specified direction. Normal to surfaceProjects the selected chains or sketch normal to the target surface. To Create a Projected Datum Curve by Sketching With a model open, click Edit > Project. The Project dashboard appears. Click the References tab. The Reference panel opens. Select Project a sketch from the list. Click the Sketch collector, and either select a sketched curve in the graphics window or click Define and use the Sketch dialog box to create a sketched curve to project. Note: If you are using an internal sketch and you want to modify it, click Edit on the References slideup panel and use the Sketch dialog box. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. 5. 6. Click the Surfaces collector, and click a surface in the graphics windows on which to project the sketched curve. The sketch plane is selected as the direction reference by default. To change the direction reference, click the Direction Reference collector, and select a plane, axis, or coordinate system to use as the projection direction reference. Click . The sketched curve is projected onto the selected surface. or Edit > Project.
7.
Note: You can also start the Project tool by selecting a sketch and clicking To Create a Projected Datum Curve by Selecting Chains 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Select the curve or curves or chain or chains in the graphics windows that you want to project. Click Edit > Project. The Project dashboard appears. Click the References tab. The References panel opens. Select Project chains from the list. Click a surface in the graphics windows on which to project the curve or chain. Click the Direction Reference collector, and select a plane, axis, or coordinate system to use as the projection direction reference. In the Direction box on the dialog bar, select the projection direction:
o o
7.
Along directionProjects the curve along a specified direction. Normal to SurfaceProjects the curve normal to the curve plane or a specified plane or surface. . The sketched curve is projected onto the selected surface.
Click
Example: Creating a Projected Datum Curve
120/ 375
The next figure shows a sketched datum curve and an extruded surface:
1 Surface 2 Datum curve In the next figure, the datum curve has been selected to be projected onto the extruded surface:
1 Surface 2 Original datum curve 3 Preview of projected datum curve The next figure shows the projected datum curve on the extruded surface:
1 Surface 2 Original datum curve 3 Projected datum curve About the Wrap Feature You can use the Wrap tool to create formed datum curves on destinations. You can then use the formed datum curves to simulate items such as labels or screw threads. The formed datum curve preserves the length of the original sketched curve, when possible. Origin of Wrapped Datum Curve The origin of a wrapped datum curve is the reference point around which the sketch is wrapped onto a destination. This point must be able to be projected onto the destination. Otherwise, the Wrap feature fails. You can select either the geometric center of the sketch or any coordinate system in the sketch as the origin. When you select the origin, one of the following symbols is displayed at the selected origin:
Yellow arrowIndicates that the Wrap feature can be created only in one direction. HandleIndicates that the Wrap feature can be created in either the selected direction or in the opposite direction. The destination of the wrapped curve must be developable, that is, some type of ruled surface. Pro/ENGINEER automatically selects the first available destination. You can select another destination, if desired.
121/ 375
Options Slide-up Panel When creating a new Wrap feature, you can define whether the wrapped curve should ignore any intersection surface by clicking Ignore intersection surface in the Options panel. If you do not select this option, separated curves will be wrapped on the intersecting surface. Also when creating a new Wrap feature, you can trim the portion of the curve that cannot be wrapped by clicking Trim at boundary in the Options panel. To access the Wrap tool, click About the Wrap User Interface Feature Icon All Wrap features are represented on the Model Tree by Additionally, . or click Edit > Wrap.
identifies the Wrap tool in the Edit toolbar.
You can also click Edit > Wrap to start the Wrap tool. Dialog Bar The Wrap dialog bar consists of the following elements:
Specifies the destination of the wrap. Sets the origin of the wrap. Reverses the direction of the wrap. Slide-up Panels The Wrap dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
o o o o
In the References panel, you can: Create or select a sketch to wrap. Specify the destination of the wrap. Break the association between the feature and a sketch. Use Edit to open the Sketch dialog box so you can edit an internal sketch. This is available only if you first break (unlink) the association between the feature and the external sketch. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. In the Options panel, you can specify the following characteristics:
Whether to ignore any intersection surface. Whether to trim a curve when the curve is too large to wrap on the destination object. Note: This panel is unavailable when you redefine features created in Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire and earlier versions.
In the Properties panel, you can view information about the Wrap feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser and enter a user-defined name for the feature. Shortcut Menus In the graphics window, you can use the Wrap shortcut menu to access the following options. Collectors
Select SketchActivates the sketch collector to select the sketch to wrap. Select DestinationActivates the destination collector to select the surface on which to wrap.
122/ 375

Actions
Edit Internal SketchOpens the Sketch dialog box so you can edit an internal sketch.
ClearClears the active collector. List of Possible Origins (Center is the default if there are no coordinate systems in the sketch. Otherwise, a list of Sketcher coordinate systems is present.)
CenterSpecifies the center of the sketch as the origin. In the graphics window, you can use the handle shortcut menu to access the following option:
FlipReverses the direction of the wrap. In filled collectors on the dashboard, you can use the Wrap shortcut menu to access the following options:

1. 2. 3.
RemoveClears the active collector. InformationDisplays a window with information about the item that you right-clicked. To Create a Wrapped Datum Curve Select the sketched datum curve that you want to wrap onto another surface. Click Edit > Wrap. The Wrap dashboard appears. Preview geometry shows the wrapped datum curve on the first solid or quilt the tool finds in the default wrapping direction. Click Select Destination from the shortcut menu and select a different surface, if desired. The Wrap feature is displayed in preview geometry. Click . The sketched datum curve is wrapped on the surface that you selected.
4.
Tip: If you click Unlink on the References slide-up panel, the association between the feature and the sketch is broken, and an internal sketch is created. To modify the internal sketch, click Edit and use the Sketch dialog box. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. To Create a Wrapped Datum Curve 1. 2. 3. Select the sketched datum curve that you want to wrap onto another surface. Click Edit > Wrap. The Wrap dashboard appears. Preview geometry shows the wrapped datum curve on the first solid or quilt the tool finds in the default wrapping direction. Click Select Destination from the shortcut menu and select a different surface, if desired. The Wrap feature is displayed in preview geometry. Click . The sketched datum curve is wrapped on the surface that you selected.
4.
Tip: If you click Unlink on the References slide-up panel, the association between the feature and the sketch is broken, and an internal sketch is created. To modify the internal sketch, click Edit and use the Sketch dialog box. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Example: Creating a Wrapped Datum Curve The next figure shows a sketched datum curve and a solid surface:
1 Datum curve 2 Solid surface In the next figure, the datum curve has been selected to be wrapped onto the solid surface:
123/ 375
1 Original datum curve 2 Preview of wrapped datum curve 3 Solid surface The next figure shows the wrapped datum curve on the solid surface:
1 Original datum curve 2 Wrapped datum curve Using the Options Panel Note: This panel is unavailable when you redefine features created in Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire and earlier versions. When you create a Wrap feature, you can use the Options panel to specify whether or not to ignore intersection surfaces and to trim a curve at a boundary.
Ignoring Intersection Surfaces When wrapping separated curves, select the Ignore intersection surface check box to ignore any intersecting surface, if possible. If you do not select this check box, separated curves will be wrapped onto the intersecting surface. This check box is selected by default. The following figures show the results of selecting and not selecting the Ignore intersection surface check box. Ignore intersection surface check box selected
Ignore intersection surface check box not selected
124/ 375
Trimming at Boundary Select the Trim at boundary check box to trim the portion of a curve that cannot be wrapped. The following figure shows the result of selecting the Trim at boundary check box:
1 Wrapped curve with portions of original curve trimmed at boundaries 2 Datum curve About the Extend Feature To activate the Extend tool, you must first select the boundary edge chain to be extended and then click Edit > Extend. You can extend a quilt by at a specified distance or up to a plane. Specify the desired method by selecting from the Extend dashboard:
Along Surface ( To Plane ( this plane.
)Extends the surface boundary edge chain along the original surface.
)Extends the boundary edge chain up to a specified plane in the direction normal to
When Along Surface is used to create an Extend feature, choose one of the following options to determine how the extension is done:
Same(Default) Creates the extension of the same type as the original surface (for example, plane, cylinder, cone, or spline surface). The original surface is extended past its selected boundary edge chain. TangentCreates the extension as a ruled surface that is tangent to the original surface. ApproximateCreates the extension as a boundary blend between the boundary edges of the original surface and the edges of the extension. This method is useful when extending the surface up to a vertex that does not lie along a straight edge. When extending quilts, consider the following information:
You can indicate whether you want to measure the extension distance along the extended surface or along a selected datum plane. You can add measurement points to the selected edge so you can vary the extension distance at different points along the boundary edge. You can enter a positive or negative value for extension distance. If the configuration option show_dim_sign is set to no, entering a negative value flips the extension direction. Otherwise, entering a negative value sets the extension direction pointing to the inner side of the boundary edge chain. Entering a negative value causes a surface to be trimmed. About the Extend User Interface Feature Icon All Extend features are represented in the Model Tree by Dialog Bar The Extend dialog bar consists of the following elements: .
125/ 375
Extends along the original surface. When selected, you can specify the extension distance in the text box for a constant extension. This is not available for variable extension. Extends to a reference plane. When selected, you can select a reference plane using the reference plane collector. Flips the direction of the extension relative to the boundary edge chain. This is not available for variable extensions. Slide-up Panels The Extend dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesLets you change the edge/chain reference. To redefine the selection options, click Details. MeasurementsThis slide-up panel is enabled when Along Surface is selected. Lets you create a variable extension by adding and adjusting measurement points along the selected edge chain. By default, the system adds only one measurement point, which extends the entire chain by the same distance to create a constant extension. In addition, use this panel to specify how you want to measure the extension:
o o o o
Measure the extension distance along the extended surface. Measure the extension distance in the selected datum plane. OptionsThis slide-up panel is enabled when Along Surface is selected. Lets you do the following: Under Method, select the extension method by choosing Same, Tangent, or Approximate from a list. Under Extension side 1 or Extension side 2, for each side of the extension define the extension side by choosing from a list: AlongChoose this option to create the extension side along the selected side edge. If more than one side edges are available, use the next collector to select one. Normal toChoose this option to create the extension side normal to the connected boundary edge.
o o
PropertiesLets you do the following: View information about the current Extend feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Rename the Extend feature.
Shortcut Menu Right-click to access the Extend shortcut menu with the following commands:
extension.
Boundary Edge Activate the boundary edge collector for Along Surface or To Plane Measurement PointActivate the measurement point collector for the Along Surface extension. If there are more than one measurement point collectors, the last active measurement point collector is activated. This menu item is available only when the Measurements panel is open. Measurement EdgeActivate the measurement edge collector for the Along Surface extension. If there are more than one measurement edge collectors, the last active measurement edge collector will be activated. This menu item is available only when the Measurements panel is open and one or more measurement edge collectors are present.
126/ 375
Measurement PlaneActivate the measurement plane collector for Along Surface extension. This menu item is available only when extension distance is measured in the measurement plane. Side Edge 1Activate the side edge one collector for the Along Surface extension. This menu item is available only when more than one side edges exist for extension Side 1. Side Edge 2Activate the side edge two collector for the Along Surface extension. This menu item is available only when more than one side edges exist for extension Side 2. Reference PlaneActivate the reference plane collector for To Plane extension. ClearEmpty the active collector. Normal to EdgeExtend the surface normal to the selected edge. Along EdgeExtend the surface along the side edge. To Vertex ParallelExtend the surface at the vertex and parallel to the boundary edge. To Vertex TangentExtend the surface at the vertex and tangent to the next one-sided edge. FlipChange the direction of the extension. To Create a Same Surface Extension Use this procedure to create an Along Surface extension using the Same option. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the boundary edge chain of the surface that you want to extend. Click Edit > Extend. The Extend dashboard opens. Using the Options slide-up panel, you can specify whether you want the extension side along the side edge or normal to the boundary edge. Select Along or Normal to for each extension side. To extend the surface, you can:
o o
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually extend the selected boundary chain to the desired distance. In the dashboard, type a distance value in the value box or select a value from a list of the most recently used values. at any time to toggle between extending or trimming the original surface.
Note: You can click 5.
To add measurement points, click the Measurements slide-up panel. Right-click inside the panel and click Add. Define the point's location and use the point to drag the extension in the graphics window or set the location and extension in the Measurements panel. You can add multiple points for finer control. Tip: You can also do it using the shortcut menu by right-clicking the handle. Click to complete the Extend feature.
6.
To Create a Tangent Surface Extension Use this procedure to create an Along Surface extension using the Tangent option. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the boundary edge chain of the surface that you want to extend. Click Edit > Extend. The Extend dashboard opens. Click the Options slide-up panel, and then select Tangent from a list under Method. Using the same slide-up panel, you can specify whether you want the extension side along the side edge or normal to the boundary edge. Select Along or Normal to for each side. To extend the surface you can:
127/ 375
o o
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually extend the selected boundary edge chain to the desired distance. In the dashboard, type a distance value in the value box or select a value from a list of the most recently used values. at any time to toggle between extending or trimming the original surface.
Note: You can click 6.
7.
To Create an Approximate Surface Extension Use this procedure to create an Along Surface extension using the Approximate option. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the boundary edge chain of the surface that you want to extend. Click Edit > Extend. The Extend dashboard opens. Click the Options slide-up panel, and then select Approximate from a list under Method. Using the same slide-up panel, you can specify whether you want the extension side along the side edge or normal to the boundary edge. Select Along or Normal to for each side. To extend the surface you can:
o o
In the graphics window, use the drag handle to manually extend the selected boundary edge chain to the desired distance. In the dashboard, type a distance value in the value box or select a value from a list of the most recently used values. Note: You can click at any time to toggle between extending or trimming the original surface.
6.
7.
To Create a To Plane Surface Extension Use this procedure to extend a surface to a reference plane. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the boundary edge chain of the surface that you want to extend. Click Edit > Extend. Click .
Select a plane to which to extend the surface. Click to complete the Extend feature.
To Create a Multi-point Extension You can use multiple measurement points to create a variable distance extension. 1. Select the boundary edge chain of the surface that you want to extend.
128/ 375
2. 3. 4. 5.
Click Edit > Extend. The Extend dashboard opens. Click the Options slide-up panel, select the extension method. Drag the edge to create the extension. To add measurement points, click the Measurements slide-up panel. Initially, the system adds only one measurement point, which extends the entire chain by the same distance to create a constant extension. Right-click inside the panel and click Add. Specify the points's location by typing a distance along the edge (from the first point to the point being added) under Location. Type the extension distance under Distance or drag the point. From the Distance Type list, select one of the extension options:
6. 7. 8. 9.
o o o o
Normal to EdgeExtend the surface normal to the selected edge. Along EdgeExtend the surface along the side edge. To Vertex ParallelExtend the surface at the vertex and parallel to the boundary edge. To Vertex TangentExtend the surface at the vertex and tangent to the next one-sided edge.
10. To continue adding points, right-click again and select Add. To delete one of the measurement points, right-click that row, and then click Delete. About the Intersect Feature With the Intersect tool you can create a curve where a surface intersects with other surfaces or a datum plane. You can also create a curve at the intersection of two sketches or sketched datum curves that become surfaces after they are extruded. You can use the Intersect feature in the following ways:
Create three-dimensional curves that can be used for other features such as sweep trajectories. Show if two surfaces are intersecting to avoid possible gaps. Diagnose unsuccessful cross sections and cuts. Surfaces can only be intersected with other surfaces or datum planes and the same rule applies to two sketches. The option to specify or change the intersection object or reference is only available during redefinition. However, you should select the first intersection reference prior to activating the Intersect tool. The Intersect feature automatically completes after the steps are performed without opening the Intersect dashboard. Automatic completion occurs because the Intersect process is fully defined by preselecting references, and no tool progression or optional settings are possible. About the Intersect User Interface Feature Icon To access the Intersect tool, click click Edit > Intersect. Dialog Bar The Intersect dialog bar consists of a message area. Slide-up Panels The Intersect dashboard displays the following Intersect slide-up panels: in the Feature toolbar or select the surface to intersect, then
ReferencesActivates the References collector.
129/ 375
o o
For SketchesSelects an existing sketch to be copied into the feature. Unlink breaks the association with the sketch and allows you to make a copy as an internal sketch. For SurfacesSelects surfaces or datum planes to intersect. To produce a curve, the surfaces must come from two different quilts that are intersecting, a quilt and a solid, or a datum plane with surfaces from a quilt or solid.
You must query and select SolidGeom in the smart filter to intersect all solid geometry with a datum plane, quilt, or specific surfaces of a quilt.
PropertiesDisplays or renames the intersect feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Shortcut Menus In the graphics window, right-click to use the Intersect shortcut menu to quickly perform actions:

1. 2.
Select sketches in the collector Clear selections in the collector To Intersect Sketches or Surfaces Select the sketch or surface. Select the other sketch or surface to intersect while keeping both in selection.
Note: Press Ctrl to select more than one sketch or surface. 3. Click Edit > Intersect.
To Redefine Intersecting Sketches or Surfaces 1. 2. Click Edit > Definition to redefine the feature. The Intersect Dashboard appears. Collect the new sketch or surface. The new sketch or surface is used for the intersection, generating new preview geometry. Click to accept and save changes.
3.
To Unlink and Edit Sketches in the Intersect Feature You can unlink reference sketches and edit internal sketches in the intersect feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Edit > Definition to redefine the feature. The Intersect Dashboard appears. Click References. The collector appears with the two intersected sketches. Click Unlink to break the association with the sketch and make a copy as an internal sketch. Unlink changes to Edit. Click Edit. The Sketch dialog box opens. Click Sketch. Sketcher opens allowing you to edit the internal sketch.
About the Fill Feature You can create and redefine flat surface features called Fill features using the Fill tool (Edit > Fill). A Fill feature is simply a flat surface, closed-loop feature that is defined by its boundaries and is used to thicken surfaces. You create a Fill feature by doing one of the following:
Select an existing Sketch feature (sketched datum curve). You can select a Sketch feature from the current model or from another model. The resulting Fill feature uses a dependent section as a reference. This section is fully associative with the parent Sketch feature. Create an independent section for the Fill feature by using Sketcher. You create this section while the Fill tool remains open.
130/ 375
For more information about sections, refer to About Sections in Sketched-based Features in the Sections in Sketch-based Features book. Note: All Fill features must be based on a flat, closed-loop sketched section. Fill Feature
1 Closed-loop section (sketched datum curve) 2 Fill feature About the Fill User Interface Feature Icon The Fill tool uses the following icon:
Indicates a Fill feature in the Model Tree. This icon also identifies the Fill tool in the menu bar and the Fill mode in the dashboard. Indicates a sketched section. Note that the section is always (indented) within the Fill feature. You may need to expand the Fill feature to view the section. Dialog Bar The Fill dialog bar consists of the following: Sketch collectorIndicates that a valid sketched section has been selected for the Fill feature. Slide-up Panels The Fill dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesThe References slide-up panel contains the following: Sketch collectorContains the section references for the sketch-based feature. The collector can contain dependent or independent sections. Note that dependent sections have the same name as its parent Sketch feature. Pro/ENGINEER assigns unique names to independent sections.
The following options are available only under certain conditions:
Define buttonOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to define an independent section. Note that Define is available only if the Sketch collector is empty (no section defined or sketch selected). You can also use the Define Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. Edit buttonOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to redefine the independent section. Note that Edit is available only if the Fill features use independent sections. If you want to edit a dependent section, you can either edit the parent sketch or break the section dependency by using Unlink. You can also use the Edit Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. Unlink buttonBreaks the association between the dependent section and the parent Sketch feature. Pro/ENGINEER copies the Sketch feature references to the new independent section. Note that Unlink is available only if the Fill features use dependent sections. PropertiesThe Properties slide-up panel contains the following:
Name boxDisplays the current Fill feature name. You can type a new name to modify it. Provides detailed Fill feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser.
131/ 375
To Create a Fill Feature Using this topic, you can create a Fill feature that uses an independent section. This section is not associative with any Sketch feature. If you want to Fill feature that references a parent Sketch feature, refer to To Create a Fill Feature by using a Sketch Feature under See Also. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Edit > Fill from the menu bar. The Fill tool opens and dashboard appears. Click the References tab. The References slide-up panel appears. Click Define. The Sketch dialog box opens. Notice that you can also use the Define Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. In the Sketch dialog box, define the sketch plane and the sketch orientation, and click Sketch. Sketcher activates and the model orients. Note: To use the default Sketcher settings, set the activate_sketch_with_dflt configuration option to yes (default is no). In Sketcher, sketch a flat, closed-loop section. Note that the section must be a flat, closed-loop section. on the Sketcher toolbar. Preview geometry appears in the graphics window and Pro/ENGINEER Click displays the independent section in the Model Tree.
5. 6.
7. You can use the Properties slide-up panel to do the following:
Review and modify the Fill feature nameThe Name box displays the current Fill feature name. You can type a new feature name to modify it. Display detailed Fill feature informationYou can click the Pro/ENGINEER browser for the selected Fill feature. and detailed information displays in
8.
. Pro/ENGINEER creates the Fill feature including the section, and closes the tool. Remember Click that this section is not associative with any Sketch feature.
Tip:
If you want to undo or redo any or all changes, simply press CTRL+Z or CTRL+Y respectively. You can always identify the section type from the Model Tree. Dependent sections share the same name of the parent Sketch feature. Independent sections have unique names. To Create a Fill Feature by using a Sketch Feature You can create a Fill feature that references a parent Sketch feature. The resulting Fill feature uses a dependent (associative) section. If you want to create a Fill feature that uses an independent section, refer to To Create a Fill Feature under See Also. 1. Select a flat, closed loop Sketch feature (sketched datum curve) from the graphics window or from the Model Tree. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selection. If a valid Sketch feature is unavailable, you can create one using Sketcher. Click Edit > Fill from the menu bar. Pro/ENGINEER creates the Fill feature. Note that if the Fill tool opens and No Items displays in the Sketch collector, you selected an invalid Sketch feature. Make certain that you select a flat, closed-loop feature.
2.
Note: If you opened the Fill tool using Edit > Fill before selecting a Sketch feature, or you did not select a valid Sketch feature, simply select a valid Sketch feature in the graphics window and click Pro/ENGINEER creates the Fill feature. Redefining a Fill Feature You can redefine a Fill feature in the following ways: .
132/ 375
Redefine the section while the Fill tool is closedThis includes changing the section geometry and making a dependent section independent. Refer to To Redefine a Section in the Sections in Sketch Based Features book for more information. This is the recommended method. Redefine the section while the Fill tool is openSimply, click Edit from the References slideup panel to use Sketcher. You can also use the Edit Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. Remember that if you are redefining a dependent section, you must click Unlink from the slide-up panel to break the association with the parent Sketch feature. Otherwise, Edit will not be available and you must exit the tool to redefine the section. Redefine the parent Sketch feature (sketched datum curve)This method can be used only for Fill features that use a dependent section. Refer to To Create a Sketched Datum Curve in the Datum Curves book for more information. Note that after you redefine the parent Sketch feature, Pro/ENGINEER automatically redefines all other features that reference the parent Sketch feature. Note: You cannot redefine the Fill feature itself. Pro/ENGINEER always redefines the section. Properties Slide-up Panel During redefinition, you can use the Properties slide-up panel to do the following: Because Fill features are sketch-based features,
Review and modify the Fill feature nameThe Name box displays the current Fill feature name. You can type a new feature name to modify it. Display detailed Fill feature informationYou can click the Pro/ENGINEER browser for the selected Fill feature. About the Offset Feature You can use the Offset tool to create a new feature by offsetting either a surface or a curve with a constant or variable distance. You can then use offset surfaces to build up geometry or to create patterned geometry, or you can use offset curves to build up a set of curves that you can then use to build a surface. Various options are available from within the Offset tool, such as adding drafts to offset surfaces and offsetting curves within a surface. You can create the following types of Offset features using the Offset tool: and detailed information displays in
StandardOffsets a single quilt, surface, or solid face. ExpandCreates a continuous volume between the selected faces of a closed quilt or solid sketch or, when using the Sketched region option, of an open quilt or solid surface. With DraftOffsets the region of the quilt or surface that is included inside a sketch, and drafts the side surfaces. You can also create straight or tangent side surface profiles with this option. ReplaceReplaces a solid face with a quilt or datum plane. CurveOffsets a curve or the one-sided edge of a surface in a specified direction. About the Offset Surface User Interface Feature Icon Offset Surface features are represented on the Model Tree by the following icons: Offset (Standard) Offset (With Draft) Offset (Expand) Offset (Replace) Additionally, identifies the Offset tool in the Edit toolbar.
133/ 375
Select a surface and click either Dialog Bar
or Edit > Offset to start the Offset tool.
The Offset Surface dialog bar consists of the following elements: Lists the types of offset feature you can create:
Standard Expand With Draft Replace Specifies the offset value and provides a list of recently used values (Standard, Expand, and With Draft). Flips the direction of the offset (Standard, Expand, and With Draft). Activates the sketch collector (Expand and With Draft). Activates the Replace quilt collector (Replace). Specifies the angle for the offset (With Draft). Slide-up Panels The Offset Surface dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
o o o o o o o o
In the References panel, you can Use Details (Expand and With Draft) to open the Surface Sets dialog box so you can modify the surface set properties. Use Define (With Draft) to open the Sketch dialog box so you can define an internal sketch. You an also use Define Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. After defining an internal sketch, use EDIT (With Draft) to open the Sketch dialog box so you can edit the internal sketch. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Specify the surface to offset and the loops or patches to exclude from the offset (Expand). Specify the replacement quilt (Replace) in this slide-up panel. In the Options panel, you can: Specify that the offset be normal to the reference surface. Use Define (Expand, with Sketched Region selected) to open the Sketch dialog box so you can define an internal sketch. You an also use Define Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. After defining an internal sketch, use EDIT (Expand, with Sketched Region selected) to open the Sketch dialog box so you can edit the internal sketch. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Create side surfaces between the reference surface and the offset surface (Standard). Offset a specified region of a sketch (Expand and With Draft). Specify the side surface type and profile (With Draft).
o o o
134/ 375
o o o
Specify the method of transformation for the offset surface. Keep a quilt as a separate feature from the offset feature (Replace).
In the Properties panel, you can view information about the Offset feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser and enter a user-defined name for the feature.
Shortcut Menus In the graphics window, you can use the Offset Surface shortcut menu to access the following options: Collectors
Offset ReferenceActivates the primary surface collector to select the surface to offset (Expand, With Draft, Replace). Surface CollectionActivates the surface collector (Expand, With Draft). Sketch ReferenceSpecifies a sketch to contain the offset area (Expand, With Draft). Replace ReferenceActivates the Replace quilt collector. Actions
ClearClears the contents of the active collector. Define Internal SketchOpens the Sketch dialog box so you can define an internal sketch (Expand and With Draft). Edit Internal SketchOpens the Sketch dialog box so you can edit an internal sketch (Expand and With Draft).
To Create Standard Offset Surfaces 1. Select a surface, and click Edit > Offset. The default offset value is displayed in preview geometry, and the Offset dashboard appears. Select as the type of offset. This is the default offset type.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Enter the required offset value in the offset value box. An offset surface is shown in preview geometry parallel to the referenced surface. Adjust the offset distance and direction by dragging the handle or by double-clicking the dimension and entering a new dimension in the box. To reverse the direction of the offset, right-click and click Flip from the shortcut menu. To define the direction in which to offset the surface, select one of the following options from the Options tab:
o o o
7.
Normal to SurfaceOffsets surface normal to the reference surface or quilt. Automatic FitAutomatically determines a coordinate system and offsets the surface along its axes. Controlled FitScales the offset surface along the axes of a custom coordinate system.
If you want to create the offset surface with side quilts, click the Create side surface check box in the Options panel. Click to finish the feature.
8.
Example: Creating an Offset Surface with Side Surfaces The next figure shows a part whose top surface is selected for the offset operation:
135/ 375
The next figure shows the offset feature without side surfaces:
The next figure shows the offset feature with side surfaces: To Create Offset Surfaces by Expansion Use the Expand option to create a continuous volume between the selected faces of a closed quilt or surface. You can also constrain the offset area of an open quilt or solid surface with a sketch. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a surface, and click Edit > Offset. The Offset dashboard appears. Select as the type of offset.
Type the required offset value in the offset value box. An offset surface is created parallel to the reference surface. Click the Options tab to specify the offset method:
o o
Normal to Surface(default) Offsets the surface normal to the original surface. TranslateTranslates the surface along the specified direction. Click the direction reference collector and select a plane, a flat face, a linear curve or edge, an axis, or a coordinate system as the reference.
Note: Changing the offset type from Normal to Surface to Translate, and vice versa, causes all children of the offset feature to fail. 5. Click to finish the offset.
Tip:
You can also open the Expand dashboard by selecting multiple surfaces and clicking Edit > Offset. If you select solid surfaces and closed quilt surfaces, the default Expand area type is Whole Surface. If you select open quilt surfaces, the default Expand area type is Sketched Region. If Sketched Region is selected, you can click Define on the Options slide-up panel and use the Sketch dialog box. After defining an internal sketch, click EDIT (With Draft) to open the Sketch dialog box so you can edit the internal sketch. You can also use Define Internal Sketch and Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. If you are using a surface set as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the References slide-up panel and use the Surface Sets dialog box. To Constrain an Offset with a Sketch 1. Select a surface, and click Edit > Offset. The Offset dashboard appears, and the surface is highlighted. Select as the type of offset.
2. 3.
Type the required offset value in the offset value box. An offset surface is created parallel to the reference surface.
136/ 375
4.
Click the Options tab to specify the offset method:
o o
Normal to Surface(default) Offset the surface normal to the reference surface. TranslateTranslates the surface along the specified direction. Click the direction reference collector and select a plane, a flat face, a linear curve or edge, an axis, or a coordinate system as the reference.
5.
Also on the Options panel, specify the Expand area type:
Sketched RegionOffsets only the region inside the sketched boundary. Click Define to enter Sketcher or use Define Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu, and sketch a closed section for offsetting. You can also select an existing sketched datum curve. Whole SurfaceOffsets the entire surface. This option is applicable only to a closed quilt surface or a solid surface.
o
6.
To specify the Side surface type:
o o
7.
SurfaceOffsets the side surface normal to the surface. SketchOffsets the side surface normal to the sketching plane of the sketch. to finish the offset.
Click
To Create Offset Surfaces with a Draft 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select a surface, and click Edit > Offset. The Offset dashboard appears. Select as the type of offset.
Select an existing sketch or click Define on the References slide-up panel and use the Sketch dialog box. You can also use Define Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Enter the required offset value in the offset value box. An offset surface is shown in preview geometry parallel to the referenced surface. Specify the offset method in the Options panel:
o o
6.
Normal to Surface(default) Offsets the surface normal to the reference surface. TranslateOffsets the surface and retains the shape and size of the reference surface.
Also in the Options panel, specify the side surface type:
o o
7.
SurfaceOffsets the side surface normal to the surface. SketchOffsets the side surface normal to the sketch.
Specify the side profile type
o o
8. 9.
StraightCreates straight side surfaces. TangentCreates fillets for the side surfaces and neighboring surfaces.
Enter a value for the draft angle in the Draft Angle box, or drag the handle in the graphics window. Adjust the dimensions and options, and click to finish the offset.
Note: You can also open the With draft dashboard by selecting a collection of surfaces and clicking Edit > Offset. The surface collection can include single surfaces, loop surfaces, boundary surfaces, intent surfaces, or any combination of these surfaces. Tip:
If you are using a surface set as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the References slide-up panel and use the Surface Sets dialog box.
137/ 375
If you want to modify an internal sketch click Edit on the References slide-up panel and use the Sketch dialog box. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Working with Draft Offsets With Draft option to create an area offset with drafted side surfaces. The With Draft option Use the is available for solid surfaces and quilts. You can apply a bevel angle to the side surfaces of the draft offset. Pro/ENGINEER uses the specified angle to draft all side surfaces relative to their default position, defined by either Surface or Sketch. The range for the draft angle is from 0 to 60 degrees. Several closed loops can be selected for the With Draft option, as shown in the next figure:
When creating a With Draft offset, consider these recommendations:
When a With Draft offset spans several surfaces, the surfaces should be tangent. Otherwise, the top surface of the draft will be split by an edge. When you draft a section that has rounds, consider the height of the offset in relation to the draft angle. If the angle is too small, the drafted surfaces may overlap at corners and cause the feature to fail. Example: Normal Offset and Translate Offset When you offset a surface either with a draft or by expansion, you can specify the offset method as Normal to Surface or Translate. These options are available in the Options slide-up panel. Choosing Normal to Surface creates an offset surface that is normal to the reference surface. Choosing Translate creates an offset surface in that specific direction while retaining the size and shape of the reference surface The next figure shows an offset surface with Normal to Surface selected:
1 Reference surface 2 Resulting surface The next figure shows an offset surface with Translate selected:
1 Reference surface 2 Resulting surface To Create an Offset Using Replace 1. 2. 3. Select a solid surface, and click Edit > Offset. The Offset dashboard appears. Select as the type of offset.
Select a quilt or datum plane in the model.
138/ 375
4.
If you want to keep the selected quilt in the model, click the Keep replace quilt check box on the Options panel. Note: If you select a datum plane as the replace quilt, the Keep replace quilt check box is unavailable.
5.
Click
. The offset is created by replacing the solid surface with the quilt.
Using Replace Offsets Replace option to replace a specified surface on a solid with a datum plane or quilt. A surface Use the replacement differs from an extrusion or a cut because it can add material in some places and remove it in others. Quilts used to replace surfaces are consumed by the replacement feature unless you click the Keep replace quilt check box on the Options panel. The Keep replace quilt check box is not available when you select a datum plane for the replacement operation. A quilt that has replaced a feature's surface cannot in turn be replaced by another quilt. The replacement surface must be deleted first.
Example: Creating an Offset Using Replace The next figure shows a solid part and a quilt:
The next figure shows the quilt selected for the replace offset:
The next figure shows the replaced surface with the quilt consumed by the offset:
The next figure shows the Replace Offset feature with the Keep replace quilt check box selected: About the Offset Curve User Interface Feature Icon Offset Curve features are represented on the Model Tree by Additionally, identifies the Offset tool in the Edit toolbar. .
Select a curve and click Edit > Offset to start the Offset tool.
139/ 375
Dialog Bar The Offset Curve dialog bar consists of the following elements: Specifies whether the curve is offset along the reference surface or normal to the reference surface. collectorIndicates that a valid reference was selected. boxContains the graph scale values. You can select a most recently used value from the list or type a new value and press ENTER. Flips the direction of the offset (Along Surface) or flips the start point of the graph (Normal to Surface). Activates the second reference curve collector (Fan curve) Activates the measure plane collector (Fan curve) Activates the value box for the number of curves (Fan curve)
Slide-up Panels The Offset Curve dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
In the References panel, you can specify the curve or curve chain to offset as well as the reference plane for the offset. You can also click Details (Along Surface, and Fan Curve) to open the Chain dialog box so you can modify the chain properties. In the Measurements panel, you can specify the offset distance in a direction normal to the curve or parallel to a selected plane. You can also add, edit, or delete reference points on the curve (Along Surface). In the Options panel, you can specify a graph and offset value (Normal to Surface). In the Fan panel, you can specify the number of fan curves you wish to create (Fan Curve). In the Properties panel, you can view information about the Offset feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser and enter a user-defined name for the feature. Shortcut Menus In the graphics window, you can use the Offset shortcut menu to access the following options. Collectors

Actions
Offset CurveActivates the curve collector to select the curve to offset. Reference QuiltActivates the surface collector to select a reference quilt, plane, or surface. Measurement PointEdits the distances and locations of reference points. GraphActivates the graph collector for normal to surface offset curves. Second Offset CurveActivates the curve collector to select a second curve (Fan curve). Measurement PlaneActivates the surface collector to select a reference plane (Fan curve).
ClearClears the contents of the active collector. FlipFlips the direction of the offset when there is more than one valid direction possible.
140/ 375
To Offset a Curve Normal to Surface 1. Select a curve and click Edit > Offset. The curve is highlighted, and the Offset dashboard appears. The selected curve appears in the Offset curve collector on the References panel. Select to offset the curve in a direction normal to the reference surface.
2. 3.
Select a quilt or surface to act as a reference for the offset curve. By default, the quilt or surface on which the offset curve is located is selected as the reference. Enter an offset value in the Click Click box.
4. 5. 6.
to flip the direction of the offset. to complete the offset curve.
To Offset a Curve Along a Surface 1. Select a curve and click Edit > Offset. The surface is highlighted, and the Offset dashboard appears. The selected curve appears in the Offset curve collector on the References panel. Select to offset the curve in the direction along the reference surface.
2. 3.
Select a quilt or surface to act as a reference for the offset curve. By default, the quilt or surface on which the offset curve is located is selected as the reference. Enter an offset value in the Click box.
4. 5. 6.
to flip the direction of the offset, if necessary. (normal to curve) or
In the Measurements panel, specify the measurement type as either (parallel to plane). If you select , you must select a reference plane.
7.
Click
to complete the offset curve.
Tip: If you are using a chain set as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the References slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. Using Graphs to Offset a Curve When you offset a curve normal to the reference surface, you can select a graph as a reference for the offset. On the Options panel, activate the Graph collector and either select a graph or pause the Offset Curve tool and create a graph. The default graph, the unit graph, is a constant line with a value of 1. to reverse the direction of the After you select or create a graph, enter a value in the Scale box. Click graph, if necessary. The following figure shows a curve offset using the unit graph as a reference:
1 Reference curve 2 Offset curve You can also create a graph to use as a reference for the offset curve. The graph, which you create by pausing the Offset tool and entering Sketcher, does not appear in the graphics window but is represented in the Model Tree as a group ( ) with the offset curve.
141/ 375
The following figure shows a user-defined graph:
The following figure shows a curve offset using a custom graph as a reference:
1 Reference curve 2 Offset curve Example: Offsetting a Curve You can offset a curve in two directions, normal to a surface and along a surface. The following figure shows a curve offset normal to a surface:
1 Offset curve 2 Original curve The following figure shows a curve offset along a surface:
1 Original curve 2 Offset curve Measurement Types for Offset Curves You can measure the distance that a curve is offset either normal to the curve or parallel to a selected plane. The next figure shows a curve offset normal to the curve (the default setting):
1 Reference curve 2 Offset curve The next figure shows a curve offset parallel to a selected plane:
142/ 375
1 Reference curve 2 Offset curve To Create a Fan Curve Offset Note: To create a fan curve offset, you must first set the configuration option enable_offset_fan_curve to yes. It is set to no by default. 1. Select a curve and click Edit > Offset. The curve is highlighted, and the Offset dashboard appears. The selected curve appears in the Offset curve collector on the References panel. Click to create a fan curve offset.
2. 3. 4.
Select a quilt or surface to act as a reference for the offset curve. Select a second curve as a reference. Note: To create another curve, pause the Offset Curve tool by pressing press to resume the Offset Curve tool. . Create another curve and
5. 6. 7.
Select a measurement plane. Type the number of curves you want to create in the Click to complete the offset curve. box.
Tip: If you are using a chain set as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the References slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. About the Offset Boundary Curve User Interface Feature Icon Offset features are represented on the Model Tree by Additionally, .
identifies the Offset tool in the Edit toolbar.
You can also click Edit > Offset to start the Offset tool. Dialog Bar The Offset Boundary Curve dialog bar consists of the following elements: Specifies the offset value and provides a list of recently used values. Flips the direction of the offset. Note: Neither element is available for a variable boundary curve offset. Slide-up Panels The Offset dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
In the References panel, you can specify the boundary edge chain to offset. In the Measurements panel, you can specify measurement points and references for the points of variable offsets. The choices for Distance type follow:
143/ 375
o o o
Normal to EdgeMeasures the offset distance in the direction normal to the boundary edge. Along EdgeMeasures the offset distance in the direction along the measurement edge. To VertexCreates an offset to the vertex, parallel to the boundary edge.
A shortcut menu in the Measurements table allows you to add or delete measurement points from the table.
In the Properties panel, you can view information about the Offset feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser and enter a user-defined name for the feature. Shortcut Menu In the graphics window, you can use the Offset shortcut menu to access the following options: Collectors

Actions
Boundary EdgeActivates the boundary edge chain collector. Measurement EdgeActivates the measurement edge collector. Measurement PointActivates the Measurement Point collector.
ClearClears the contents of the active collector. Shortcut Menu on the Handle of a Measurement Point
FlipFlips the direction of the offset. Normal to EdgeChanges the distance type to Normal to Boundary Edge. Along EdgeChanges the distance type to Along Measurement Edge. To VertexSpecifies the distance between points or vertices on a boundary curve offset. Next EdgeSelects the next available boundary edge or measurement edge. Shortcut Menu on the Dragger of a Measurement Point

1.
AddAdds a new measurement point with reference to the current measurement point. DeleteDeletes the current measurement point. To Offset a Boundary Curve Select a one-sided edge, such as the edge of a quilt, and click Edit > Offset. The edge is highlighted, and the Offset dashboard appears. The selected curve appears in the Boundary edge collector on the References panel. Drag the handle to change the offset distance You can also enter a value in the value box or doubleclick the dimension and enter a new value. Click Click to flip the direction of the offset. to complete the boundary offset curve.
2.
3. 4.
To Create a Variable Offset Surface Boundary Curve 1. 2. 3. Select a one-sided edge, such as the edge of a quilt, and click Edit > Offset. The Offset dashboard appears. The selected curve appears in the Boundary Edge collector on the References panel. Click the Measurements tab. The Measurements panel opens. Right-click inside the table, and click Add from the shortcut menu to add a point or vertex to the selected edge chain. A point appears on the selected edge chain.
144/ 375
4. 5.
Drag the point to the desired position. You can also enter a value for the point in the Location cell, if the handle is not located on a vertex. Drag the handles for a point to change the offset distance. You can also enter the offset distance for a point in the Distance cell. Click to complete the offset surface boundary curve.
6.
Using the Measurements Table The table is available on the Measurements panel when you select an edge chain for offsetting. Use this table to create, modify, and view information about a boundary offset. The table contains six columns:
PointLists the points used in the boundary offset. Right-click and click Add or Delete to add or delete a point. DistanceSpecifies the offset distance. You can either drag the handle in the graphics window or click the Distance cell to enter a new value. If you select To Vertex as the Distance Type, this cell is unavailable. Distance TypeSpecifies the type of offset:
o o o
Normal to EdgeMeasures the offset distance in the direction normal to the boundary edge. Along EdgeMeasures the offset distance in the direction of along the measurement edge. To VertexCreates an offset to the vertex, parallel to the boundary edge.
Click the Distance Type cell to change the value. EdgeDisplays the boundary edge for this point. ReferenceActivates the reference collector for this point. LocationSpecifies the length ratio of the point or snapped object. This cell can contain three types of value:
o o o
When a point is not snapped to a reference, the numerical value of the length ratio is displayed in the cell. If the point is at a vertex, no value is shown in this cell. If the point is at the beginning of the boundary edge chain, "End 1" is shown in this cell. If the point is at the end of the boundary edge chain, "End 2" is shown in this cell.
About the Thicken Feature Thicken features use predetermined surface features or quilt geometry to either add or remove thin material sections in your designs. The surface features or quilt geometry provide you with greater flexibility within your design and enable you to transform that geometry to better meet your design needs. Typically, Thicken features are used to create complex thin geometry that would be more difficult, if not impossible, to create using regular solid features. Designing Thicken features requires you to:
Select an open or closed quilt as a reference. Determine how you want to use the reference geometry: to add or remove thin sections of material. Define the thickness direction for the thicken feature geometry You can enter the Thicken tool either by clicking the main menu. on the Feature toolbar or by clicking Edit > Thicken on
In order to enter the Thicken tool, you must have a surface feature or quilt selected. Only valid geometry can be selected before entering the Thicken tool. As you enter the tool, your surface feature selection is examined and, if it satisfies one of the Thicken feature conditions, it is placed in the Quilt collector. While the
145/ 375
tool is active you can select a new surface or quilt reference. The Quilt collector only accepts one valid surface or quilt reference at a time. After you specify a valid surface or quilt for the Solidify feature, the resulting geometry is previewed in the graphics window. You can modify attributes of the Thicken feature by using shortcut menus in the graphics window, the dashboard, or a combination of the two. You can also directly control the material direction using the direction arrow. The preview geometry automatically updates, reflecting any modifications. You can toggle between and create the following Thicken feature types: Protrusion Add a thin section of solid material using the surface feature or quilt geometry as the boundary.
Cut Remove a thin section of solid material using the surface feature or quilt geometry as the boundary. As you are defining your Thicken feature you can alter the resulting geometry by excluding surfaces from the intended protrusion or cut operation. You can also add controls to drive the thickness direction with respect to coordinate systems, axes, and surfaces. Thicken features are subject to normal feature operations, including patterning, modifying, rerouting, and redefining. Note:
You can place
on the Feature toolbar by customizing your screen (Tools > Customize Screen).
If model changes cause the selected surface feature or quilt geometry to become invalid, the Thicken feature fails during regeneration of model. While in Assembly mode you can only create Thicken features that remove material. About the Thicken Feature User Interface Feature Icon You can enter the Thicken tool by either:
Clicking
on the feature toolbar.
Clicking Edit > Thicken on the top-level menu. Dialog Bar The dialog bar consists of commands positioned from left to right guiding you through the design process. Depending on your design situation, options that are not valid are made unavailable. The dialog bar consists of:
Creates solid volume using the selected surface or quilt Removes material using the selected surface or quilt Changes the material direction of the thicken feature. Clicking the button cycles the material side from one side to the other, and then both sides. Dimension boxControls the material thickness of the thickness feature. The dimension box contains the most recently used dimension values.
146/ 375
Slide-Up Panels Slide-up panels contain information about your Thicken feature references and properties, and also enable you to apply controls to the feature behavior. Thicken features use the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesContains information about and enables you to modify the references for your Thicken feature. The slide-up panel consists of:
Quilt collectorIndicates the name of the surface or quilt reference used to define the Thicken feature. The quilt box (primary collector) can only contain one Thicken feature reference at a time. While the tool is active you have the ability to select a new valid surface or quilt reference.
ControlContains controls for creating and scaling your Thicken features with respect to coordinate systems, axes, and surfaces. The slide-up panel consists of:
Normal to Surface(Default) Offsets the Thickened surface normal to the original surface. You can select individual or multiple surfaces to exclude from the Thicken operation. The surfaces to exclude appear in the Exclude list. Note: The Exclude list is not available for design situations involving quilts made of unique surfaces and quilts where all but one of the quilt surfaces have been excluded (You cannot exclude the last remaining quilt surface).
o o
Auto FitScales and translates the thickened surface with respect to an automatically determined coordinate system. Control FitCreates a "best fit" scenario by scaling the original surface about a selected coordinate system and then translating it along a specified axis. The Control Fit option consists of: Cys referenceIndicates the name of the coordinate system reference for the Thicken feature. The coordinate system box (collector) can only contain one coordinate system reference at a time. While the tool is active you have the ability to select a new valid coordinate system reference. AxisIndicates the axes used to control the scaling and behavior of material for the Thicken feature. By default the x, y, and z-axes are selected as the translation axes. If you do not want to allow translation along a certain axis clear the appropriate check box.
PropertiesContains the property name for and enables you to obtain information about your Thicken feature. The slide-up panel consists of:
o o
Name boxEnables you to customize the solidify feature name by typing a new name in the box. Opens a browser window containing solidify feature information.
Note: The Intersection slide-up panel is available while in Assembly mode. See <topic title>for more information. Shortcut Menus The following shortcut menu appears when you right-click anywhere in the graphics window while defining, redefining, or modifying a Thicken feature: Context Define the Thicken Attributes Menu Commands
Quilt ReferenceEnables the collector for the surface feature or quilt reference. Exclude SurfacesEnables the collector for the surfaces to exclude from the Thicken feature. Flip DirectionChanges the material direction of the Thicken feature. Remove MaterialRemoves material using the surface or quilt
147/ 375
geometry as the boundary.
Add MaterialAdds material using the surface or quilt geometry as the boundary.
The following shortcut menu appears when you right-click on the direction arrow while defining, redefining, or modifying a Thicken feature: Context Set the Material Side Menu Commands
FlipChanges the material direction of the Thicken feature. Both SidesCreates the Thicken feature symmetrically about the quilt reference.
To Create a Thicken Feature Before continuing with the following steps, make sure an appropriate surface or quilt is available in your design. 1. 2. 3. Select the quilt or surface geometry you want to thicken. On the Edit menu, click Thicken. The Dashboard opens and default preview geometry appears in the graphics window. Define what type of geometry to create. The default option is to add a thin section of solid material. If you want to remove a thin section of material, click 4. on the Dashboard.
Define the quilt or surface geometry side to thicken: one side or symmetric about both sides. To change the material side, right-click on the preview geometry and click Flip Direction. You cycle from one side, to symmetrical, to the other side. Set the thicken feature thickness by dragging the thickness handle. You can also enter the thickness in the dimension box on the Dashboard or directly in the graphics window. Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the thicken feature. to the engineering feature toolbar (Tools >
5. 6.
Note: If you create Thicken features often, consider adding Customize Screen). To Create a Scaled Thicken Feature
Scaling your thicken feature enables you to further control the direction and behavior of the resulting geometry. You can scale the geometry with respect to coordinate systems, axes, and surfaces. 1. 2. 3. Select the quilt or surface geometry you want to thicken. On the Edit menu, click Thicken. The Dashboard opens and default preview geometry appears in the graphics window. Define what type of geometry to create. The default option is to add a thin section of solid material. If you want to remove a thin section of material, right-click on the preview geometry and click Remove Material. Define the quilt or surface geometry side to thicken: one side or symmetric about both sides. To change the material side, click other side. 5. on the Dashboard. You cycle from one side, to symmetrical, to the
4.
Set the thickness of the thicken feature by dragging the thickness handle. You can also enter the thickness in the dimension box on the dashboard or directly in the graphics window.
148/ 375
6.
Open the Control slide-up panel to scale the direction of the thicken feature. Depending on the type of scale you need, do one of the following: Normal to Surface(Default) Offsets the Thickened surface normal to the original surface. You can select individual or multiple surfaces to exclude from the Thicken operation. The surfaces to exclude appear in the Exclude list. Note: The Exclude list is not available for design situations involving quilts made of unique surfaces and quilts where all but one of the quilt surfaces have been excluded (You cannot exclude the last remaining quilt surface).
Auto FitScales and translates the thickened surface with respect to an automatically determined coordinate system. Control FitCreates a "best fit" scenario by scaling the original surface about a selected coordinate system and then translating it along a specified axis. The Control Fit option consists of:
Cys referenceIndicates the name of the coordinate system reference for the Thicken feature. The coordinate system box (collector) can only contain one coordinate system reference at a time. While the tool is active you have the ability to select a new valid coordinate system reference. AxisIndicates the axes used to control the scaling and behavior of material for the Thicken feature. By default the x, y, and z-axes are selected as the translation axes. If you do not want to allow translation along a certain axis clear the appropriate check box.
7.
Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the thicken feature.
To Create a Scaled Thicken Feature Scaling your thicken feature enables you to further control the direction and behavior of the resulting geometry. You can scale the geometry with respect to coordinate systems, axes, and surfaces. 1. 2. 3. Select the quilt or surface geometry you want to thicken. On the Edit menu, click Thicken. The Dashboard opens and default preview geometry appears in the graphics window. Define what type of geometry to create. The default option is to add a thin section of solid material. If you want to remove a thin section of material, right-click on the preview geometry and click Remove Material. Define the quilt or surface geometry side to thicken: one side or symmetric about both sides. To change the material side, click other side. 5. 6. on the Dashboard. You cycle from one side, to symmetrical, to the
4.
Set the thickness of the thicken feature by dragging the thickness handle. You can also enter the thickness in the dimension box on the dashboard or directly in the graphics window. Open the Control slide-up panel to scale the direction of the thicken feature. Depending on the type of scale you need, do one of the following: Normal to Surface(Default) Offsets the Thickened surface normal to the original surface. You can select individual or multiple surfaces to exclude from the Thicken operation. The surfaces to exclude appear in the Exclude list.
Note: The Exclude list is not available for design situations involving quilts made of unique surfaces and quilts where all but one of the quilt surfaces have been excluded (You cannot exclude the last remaining quilt surface).
Auto FitScales and translates the thickened surface with respect to an automatically determined coordinate system.
149/ 375
Control FitCreates a "best fit" scenario by scaling the original surface about a selected coordinate system and then translating it along a specified axis. The Control Fit option consists of:
Cys referenceIndicates the name of the coordinate system reference for the Thicken feature. The coordinate system box (collector) can only contain one coordinate system reference at a time. While the tool is active you have the ability to select a new valid coordinate system reference. AxisIndicates the axes used to control the scaling and behavior of material for the Thicken feature. By default the x, y, and z-axes are selected as the translation axes. If you do not want to allow translation along a certain axis clear the appropriate check box.
7.
Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the thicken feature.
About the Solidify Feature Solidify features use predetermined surface features or quilt geometry and convert them into solid geometry. You can use Solidify features to add, remove, or replace solid material in your designs. The quilt geometry provides you with greater flexibility within your design, and the Solidify feature enables you to transform that geometry to meet your design needs. Typically, Solidify features are used to create complex geometry that would be more difficult, if not impossible, to create using regular solid features. Designing Solidify features requires you to:
Select a surface feature or quilt as a reference Determine how you want to use the reference geometry: add solid material, remove solid material, or patch a surface Define the material direction for the geometry You can enter the solidify tool either by clicking the main menu. on the Feature toolbar or by clicking Edit > Solidify on
To enter the Solidify tool, you must have a surface feature or quilt selected. Only valid geometry can be selected before entering the Solidify tool. As you enter the tool your surface feature or quilt selection is automatically placed in the collector. While the tool is active you can select a new reference. The reference collector only accepts one valid surface feature or quilt reference at a time. After you specify a valid surface feature or quilt for the Solidify feature, if the resulting geometry is possible, preview geometry is displayed in the graphics window. You can modify attributes for the Solidify feature by using shortcut menus directly in the graphics window, the dashboard, or a combination of the two. You can also directly control the material direction using the direction arrow. The preview geometry automatically updates, reflecting any modifications. The following Solidify feature types are available: Protrusion Add solid material using the surface feature or quilt geometry as the boundary. (Always available.) Cut Remove solid material using the surface feature or quilt geometry as the boundary. (Always available.)
150/ 375
Patch Replace a specified portion of a surface using surface feature or quilt geometry. (Only available if the selected surface or quilt boundaries lie on solid geometry.) Solidify features are subject to normal feature operations, including patterning, modifying, rerouting, and redefining.
Note:
If you create Solidify features often, consider adding Customize Screen).
to the Engineering Feature toolbar (Tools >
If model changes cause the selected surface feature or quilt to become invalid, the Solidify feature fails during regeneration of model. While in Assembly mode you can only create solidify features that remove material. About the Solidify Feature User Interface Feature Icon You can enter the solidify tool by either:
Clicking
Clicking Edit > Solidify on the top-level menu. Dialog Bar The dialog bar consists of commands positioned from left to right guiding you through the design process. Depending on your design situation, invalid options are not available. The dialog bar consists of:
Creates solid volume using the selected surface or quilt Removes material using the selected surface or quilt Patches the selected surface or quilt to a solid Changes the material direction of the solidify feature Slide-Up Panels Slide-up panels contain information about your solidify feature references and properties. Solidify features use the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesContains information about and enables you to modify the references for your solidify feature. The slide-up panel consists of:
Quilt boxIndicates the name of the quilt reference used to define the solidify feature. The quilt box (primary collector) can only contain one solidify feature reference at a time. While the tool is active you have the ability to select a new valid quilt reference.
PropertiesContains the property name for and enables you to obtain information about your solidify feature. The slide-up panel consists of:
o o
Name boxEnables you to customize the solidify feature name by typing a new name in the box. Opens a browser window containing solidify feature information.
151/ 375
Note: The Intersect slide-up panel is available only in Pro/Assembly. Refer to the About Intersect from the Subtractive Feature Dashboard topic in the Intersected Components book under Assembly Operations (Pro/Assembly documentation) for more information. Shortcut Menus The following shortcut menu appears when you right-click anywhere in the graphics window while defining, redefining, or modifying a solidify feature: Context Define Attributes Solidify Menu Commands
Add MaterialAdds material using the surface feature or quilt geometry as the boundary Remove MaterialRemoves material using the surface feature or quilt geometry as the boundary PatchReplaces a specified portion of a surface with a quilt ClearClears the selected reference from the active collector. Note: At any given time only one of the Add Material, Remove Material, and Patch commands can be selected.
The following shortcut menu appears when you right-click on the direction arrow in the graphics window while defining, redefining, or modifying a solidify feature: Context Set the Material Side Menu Commands
FlipChange the material direction of the solidify feature.
To Create a Solidify (Protrusion) Feature Before continuing with the following steps, make sure an appropriate surface or quilt is available in your design. 1. 2. Select the quilt or surface geometry you want to create a solid protrusion with. On the Edit menu, click Solidify. The Dashboard opens and default preview geometry highlights in the graphics window. The solidify (protrusion) option is the default. Make sure is selected on the Dashboard.
3. 4.
Determine the quilt or surface material side to create the geometry. To change the material side, click the direction arrow on the preview geometry. The material side dynamically highlights. You can also change the direction by clicking on the Dashboard.
5.
Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the solidify (protrusion) feature. to the engineering feature toolbar (Tools >
Note: If you create Solidify features often, consider adding Customize Screen). To Create a Solidify (Cut) Feature
Before continuing with the following steps, make sure an appropriate surface or quilt is available in your design. 1. Select the quilt or surface geometry you want to create a cut with.
152/ 375
2. 3.
On the Edit menu, click Solidify. The Dashboard opens and default preview geometry highlights in the graphics window. The solidify (protrusion) option is the default. Right-click on the preview geometry and click Remove Material from the shortcut menu. You can also click on the Dashboard.
4. 5.
Determine the quilt or surface material side to create the geometry. To change the material side, click the direction arrow on the preview geometry. The material side dynamically highlights. Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the solidify (cut) feature. to the engineering feature toolbar (Tools >
Note: If you create Solidify features often, consider adding Customize Screen). To Create a Solidify (Patch) Feature
In order for the patch option to become available, your design must have a quilt or surface that meets the solidify (patch) feature conditions. 1. 2. 3. Select the quilt or surface geometry you want to create a patch with. On the Edit menu, click Solidify. The Dashboard opens and default preview geometry highlights in the graphics window. If the quilt or surface meets the patch feature conditions, the solidify (patch) option is the default. Make sure 4. 5. is selected on the Dashboard.
Determine the quilt or surface material side to create the geometry. To change the material side, click the direction arrow on the preview geometry. The material side dynamically highlights. Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the solidify (patch) feature.
Solidify (Patch) Feature Conditions Because the solidify (patch) feature will often simultaneously add and remove material, additional conditions are required to create the feature. To define a solidify patch feature your quilt selection must satisfy one of the following conditions, otherwise the patch option is not available. Condition Open Quilt All boundaries lie on solid surfaces Solid geometry does not intersect quilt Quilt is totally outside solid geometry Example
Open Quilt All boundaries lie on solid surfaces Quilt is totally inside solid geometry
All boundaries lie on solid surfaces Solid geometry intersects quilt
153/ 375
About the Hole Feature The Hole tool enables you to add simple, custom, and industry-standard holes to your models. You add holes by defining a placement reference, setting secondary (offset) references, and defining the specific characteristics of the hole. As you work, Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the hole. Notice that a hole always begins at the placement reference and extends to the specified depth. You can directly manipulate and define the hole in the graphics window and in the dashboard. You can create the following hole types:
StraightConsists of a revolved cut with a rectangular section. You can create the following Straight holes types:
SimpleUses (straight) geometry predefined by Pro/ENGINEER. By default, Pro/ENGINEER creates 1-sided Simple holes. However, you can create 2-sided Simple Straight holes by using the Shape slide-up panel. 2-sided Simple holes are typically used in assemblies and enable you to simultaneously format both hole sides. SketchedUses a sketch profile that you create in Sketcher.
StandardConsists of an extruded cut based on industry-standard fastener tables. Pro/ENGINEER provides industry-standard hole charts and tapped or clearance diameters for the selected fastener. You can also create your own hole charts. Note that thread notes are automatically created for Standard holes. Hole Features vs Cut Features Hole features are different from cut features in the following ways:
Hole features use a predefined placement scheme that can be more desirable than the dimensioning scheme of the cut. Simple Straight holes and Standard holes do not require a sketch unlike cut features. About the Hole Feature User Interface Feature Icon The Hole tool uses the following icon:
Indicates a Hole feature in the Model Tree and it is displayed on the dashboard to indicate that the Hole tool is open. This icon identifies the Hole tool on the Insert menu and on the Feature toolbar. Dialog Bar The Hole dialog bar displays the following options: Straight Holes
Displays the Straight hole options enabling you to create Simple and Sketched Straight holes. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. Hole profile boxContains drill hole profiles enabling you to define the Straight hole geometry. This box contains the following hole profiles:
o o
SimpleCreates Simple holes using pre-defined geometry. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. SketchedCreates Sketched holes using a sketched profile that you create in Sketcher.
The following Straight hole options are available only for Simple holes:
Diameter boxControls the diameter of the Simple hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. The Diameter box corresponds to the first direction (side 1) Diameter box on the Shape slide-up panel.
154/ 375
Depth options listDisplays the first direction (side 1) drill depth options for the Simple hole enabling you to change the drill depth. You can also select these drill depth options from the Shape slideup panel Side 1 depth options list. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following drill depth options. Note: If you want to control the second direction (side 2) depth independently, you can use the Side 2 depth option list on the Shape slide-up panel.
Drills the hole in the first direction from the placement reference to a specified depth. The Side 1 Depth box displays on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. You can also select this depth option by using Variable from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER select this depth option by default. Drills the hole on both sides of the placement reference by half the specified depth value in each direction. The Depth box displays on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. You can also select this depth option by using Symmetric from the shortcut menu. Drills the hole in the first direction up to the next surface. You can also select this depth option by using To Next from the shortcut menu. This option is not available in Assembly. Drills the hole in first direction to intersect with all surfaces. You can also select this depth option by using Through All from the shortcut menu. Drills the hole in first direction to intersect with the selected surface. The Side 1 Depth Reference collectors on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel activate. You can also select this depth option by using Through Until from the shortcut menu. This option is not available in Assembly. Drills the hole in the first direction to the selected point, curve, plane, or surface. The Side 1 Depth Reference collectors on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel activate. You can also select this depth option by using To Selected from the shortcut menu.
Depth boxControls the Simple hole first direction drill depth. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. You must select the Variable or Symmetric depth option to display this box. This Depth box corresponds to the first direction (side 1) Depth box on the Shape slide-up panel. Depth reference collectorIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the Simple hole drill depth reference. This collector is available if you snap the depth handle to a reference or select the To Selected or Through Until depth option. This collector corresponds to the Depth Reference collector on the Shape slide-up panel. The following Straight hole options are available only for Sketched holes:

hole.
Enables you to use an existing sketched profile (sketched section) to create a Sketched hole. Opens Sketcher enabling you to create a hole profile (sketched section) for the new Sketched Standard Holes Displays the Standard hole options enabling you to create holes using industry-standard thread data. Thread type boxContains hole charts that enable you to define the Standard hole profile. These hole charts consist of industry-standard thread type and diameter information. Pro/ENGINEER provides hole charts and you can create custom charts to meet your specific design needs. Note that you must not edit the provided hole charts. The following hole charts are provided:
o o
ISO UNC
155/ 375
UNF
Screw size boxContains the screw sizes for the hole chart that you selected in the Thread Type box. You can type a new screw size or select a most recently used screw size from the list. If you type a new size that is not in the list, Pro/ENGINEER selects the nearest thread size. The screw size controls the thread depth in the Thread Depth box on the Shape slide-up panel. Depth options listDisplays the depth options for the Standard hole enabling you to change the drill depth. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following drill depth options:
Drills the hole from the placement reference to a specified depth. The Depth box displays in the dialog bar. You can also select this depth option by using Variable from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER select this depth option by default when you create a Standard hole. Drills the hole up to the next surface. You can also select this depth option by using To Next from the shortcut menu. This option is not available in Assembly. Drills the hole to intersect with all surfaces. You can also select this option by using Through All from the shortcut menu. Drills the hole to intersect with the selected surface. The Depth Reference collectors activate on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. You can also select this depth option by using Through Until from the shortcut menu. This option is not available in Assembly. Drills the hole to the selected quilt. The Depth Reference collectors activate on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. You can also select this depth option by using To Selected from the shortcut menu.
Depth boxControls the Standard hole drill depth. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. You must select the Variable depth option to display this box. Depth reference collectorIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the Standard hole drill depth reference. This collector is available if you snap the depth handle to a reference or select the To Selected or Through Until depth option. This collector corresponds to the depth reference collector on the Shape slide-up panel. Taps threads in the Standard hole. You can clear this option to create a clearance hole. Pro/ENGINEER selects this option by default if the Variable or To Next depth option is selected. Note that you cannot clear this option for holes using the Variable depth option. Creates a countersink for the Standard hole. The countersink angle and diameter boxes display on the Shape slide-up panel enabling you to define the countersink. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. Creates a counterbore for the Standard hole. The counterbore diameter and depth boxes display on the Shape slide-up panel enabling you to define the counterbore. Slide-Up Panels The Hole dashboard tabs activate the following slide-up panels: Placement Slide-up Panel The Placement slide-up panel contains the Straight or Standard hole placement information enabling you to verify and modify it. This slide-up panel contains the following options:
Primary reference collectorContains the primary placement reference that you selected to place the hole. You can click in this collector to activate it or use Placement Reference Collector from the shortcut menu.
156/ 375
FlipReverses the placement direction of the hole. You can also use Flip from the shortcut menu. Note that Flip is available only for Simple and Standard holes that use the Variable, To Next, or Through All depth option. Placement type boxDisplays hole placement types enabling you to define the way in which the hole is placed. Note that you must select a primary placement reference on the model to display the hole placement types. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following placement types:
LinearPlaces the hole on a surface by using two linear dimensions. This type is available if you select a planar, cylindrical, or conical solid surface; or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. You can also use Linear from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER selects this placement type by default if you select a surface or datum plane as the primary placement reference. RadialPlaces the hole by using a linear and an angular dimension. This type is available if you select a planar, cylindrical, or conical solid surface; or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. You can also use Radial from the shortcut menu. DiameterPlaces the hole by rotating the hole around a diameter reference. This placement type uses an axis in addition to linear and angular dimensions. This type is available if you select a planar solid surface or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. You can also use Diameter from the shortcut menu. CoaxialPlaces the hole at the intersection of an axis and a surface. This placement type uses a linear and axial reference. This type is available if you select a surface, datum plane, or axis as the primary placement reference. You can also use Coaxial from the shortcut menu. Note: If you select an axis as the primary placement reference, Coaxial becomes the only placement type available and Pro/ENGINEER selects this type by default. Secondary placement reference handles and the Coaxial shortcut menu command are not available when using this placement type. On PointAligns the hole to a datum point that is located on or offset from a surface. The type does not require secondary placement references. This placement type is available only if you select a datum point as the primary placement reference. Note: If you select a datum point as the primary placement reference, Pro/ENGINEER selects On Point by default and it is the only placement type available. Pro/ENGINEER does not provide a shortcut menu command for this type.
Secondary references tableContains the secondary placement (offset) reference information for the Straight or Standard hole enabling you to constrain the hole. Note that this table is not available if the primary placement reference is a datum point (On Point placement type). The Secondary References table contains the following options:
Secondary references collector (left column)Contains the secondary placement (offset) references that you selected for the hole. Notice that if the primary placement reference changes, Pro/ENGINEER uses the existing secondary references only if they are valid for the new hole placement. You can click in this collector to activate it or use Secondary References Collector from the shortcut menu. Reference type box (middle column)Contains the secondary (offset) reference types enabling you to define the secondary reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the types based on the primary placement type selected. The box contains the following options: OffsetOffsets the hole from the secondary reference. This option is displayed if you select the Linear primary placement reference and a secondary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER selects this option by default. AlignAligns the hole center to the secondary reference. This option is displayed if you select the Linear primary placement reference. AngleUses the secondary reference to determine the hole angle. This option is displayed if you select the Radial or Diameter primary placement reference type and a secondary reference (not including an axis).
157/ 375
RadiusUses the secondary reference to determine the hole radius. This option is displayed if you select the Radial primary placement reference and select an axis as the secondary reference. DiameterUses the secondary reference to determine the hole diameter. This option is displayed if you select the Diameter primary reference and an axis as a secondary reference.
Reference value box (right column)Controls the secondary placement (offset) reference for the hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list.
Shape Slide-up Panel The Shape slide-up panel enables you to define the current hole geometry and provides an illustration of the hole geometry to guide you. Pro/ENGINEER provides different Shape slide-up panel options for the following hole types:
Simple (Straight) holesThe Shape slide-up panel contains the following options for Simple holes:
Side 2 depth options boxDisplays the second direction (side 2) depth options for the Simple hole enabling you to change the drill depth. Note that you can also use these depth options from the shortcut menu. Refer to the Shortcut Menus section for more information. The Side 2 box contains the following drill depth options: BlindDrills the hole in the second direction from the placement reference to a specified depth. The Side 2 Depth box displays. To NextDrills the hole in the second direction up to the next surface. Note that this option is not available in Assembly. Through AllDrills the hole in the second direction to intersect with all surfaces. Through UntilDrills the hole in the second direction to intersect with the selected surface. The Side 2 Depth Reference collector activates. This depth option is not available in Assembly. To SelectedDrills the hole in the second direction to the selected point, curve, plane, or surface. NoneDoes not drill the hole in the second direction. The Side 2 Depth Reference collector activates. Pro/ENGINEER selects this depth option by default.
Side 2 depth boxControls the second direction (side 2) drill depth for the 2-sided Simple hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. You must select the Blind depth option from the Side 2 box to display this box. Side 2 depth reference collectorContains the second direction (side 2) depth reference that you selected for the 2-sided Simple hole. You must select the Through Until or To Selected depth option on the Side 2 box to display this collector. You can click the collector to activate it or use Depth2 References Collector from the shortcut menu. Side 1 depth options boxDisplays the first direction (side 1) depth options for the Simple hole enabling you to change the drill depth. Note that the Side 1 Depth Options box and the Depth Options box on the dialog bar are similar boxes and contain the same depth options. Refer to the Dialog Bar section for more information about these options. Side 1 depth boxControls the first direction (side 1) drill depth for the Simple hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. You must select the Blind (Variable) or Symmetric depth option to display this box. Side 1 depth reference collectorContains the first direction (side 1) depth reference that you selected for the Simple hole. You must select the Through Until or To Selected depth option in the Side 1 box or on the dialog bar to display this collector. You can click the collector to activate it or use Depth1 Reference Collector from the shortcut menu.
158/ 375
Diameter boxControls the diameter of the Simple hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list.
Sketched (Straight) holesPro/ENGINEER displays only the sketch geometry in an embedded window in the Shape slide-up panel for Sketched holes. Standard holesThe Shape slide-up panel contains various options for Standard holes depending on the following conditions: The Standard hole is tapped. You must click Pro/ENGINEER selects on the dialog bar to display these options. Note that
by default as you create a new hole. The following options are provided:
o o o o o
Thru ThreadTaps threads through all surfaces in the Standard hole. This thread depth option is not available for the Variable and Thru Next depth options, or in Assembly. VariableTaps threads to a specified depth in the Standard hole. This thread depth option activates the Variable Thread Depth box. Variable thread depth boxControls the thread depth for the Standard hole. Variable threads. You must select Variable to activate this box. Drill point angle boxControls the angle of the drill point for the Standard hole. This box is available only if the Variable (Blind) depth option is selected. Include thread surface check boxCreates a thread surface to represent the internal threads of the Standard hole.
The Standard hole is a clearance (non tapped) hole. You must click on the dialog bar to turn off the tap option. Note that holes using the Variable (Blind) depth option must be tapped. The following options are provided:
Fit boxDisplays fit options enabling you to define the hole clearance diameter. The box displays the following options: Close FitCreates a fit that is intended for the accurate location of parts which must assemble without perceptible play. Medium FitCreates a fit that is suitable for ordinary steel parts or for shrink fits on light sections. The medium fit is about the tightest fit that can be used with high-grade cast iron external members. This option is available only if you select the ISO thread type from the Thread Type box on the dialog bar. Free FitCreates a fit that is intended for use where accuracy is not essential or where large temperature variations are likely to be encountered, or both.
Diameter boxControls the diameter of the Standard clearance (non tapped) hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. This box is available by selecting certain screw sizes from the Screw Size box on the dialog bar. on the dialog bar to display the following
The Standard hole contains a countersink. You must click options:
o o
Countersink angle boxControls the countersink angle for the Standard hole. You can type a value or select a most recently used value from the list. Countersink diameter boxControls the countersink diameter for the Standard hole. You can type a value or select a most recently used value from the list. on the dialog bar to display the following
The Standard hole contains a counterbore. You must click options:
159/ 375
o o
Counterbore diameter boxControls the counterbore diameter for the Standard hole. You can type a value or select a most recently used value from the list. Counterbore depth boxControls the counterbore depth for the Standard hole. You can type a value or select a most recently used value from the list.
You select the following depth options for your Standard hole:
Through AllThis depth option displays the following: Exit Countersink check boxCreates a countersink at the bottom of the Standard hole. This option displays the Countersink Angle and Countersink Diameter boxes. The Exit Countersink check box is available only if you select the Through All depth option and if the hole exit surface is parallel to the primary placement reference surface. This check box is not available in Assembly. Exit countersink angle boxControls the countersink angle for the Standard hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. This box is available only if the Exit Countersink check box is selected. Exit countersink diameter boxControls the countersink diameter for the Standard hole. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. This box is available only if the Exit Countersink check box is selected.
Through Until or To SelectedThese depth options display the following: Depth reference collectorContains the depth reference that you selected for the Standard hole. You can click the collector to activate it or use Depth Reference Collector from the shortcut menu.
Intersect Slide-up Panel The Intersect slide-up panel is available only in Assembly. Refer to the Assembly documentation for more information. Note Slide-up Panel The Note slide-up panel enables you to view thread notes for a Standard hole. Pro/ENGINEER also displays the thread notes in the Model Tree and in the graphics window after you create the hole. Note that to view the notes in the Model Tree, you must click Settings > Tree Filters in the Model Tree. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, click the Notes check box under Display and click OK. The Note slide-up panel is available only for Standard holes. Properties Slide-up Panel The Properties slide-up panel enables you to obtain general and parameter information for a Straight or Standard hole. This slide-up panel contains the following:
Name boxDisplays the current hole feature name enabling you to rename it. Provides detailed hole feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Parameters TableDisplays hole chart data that you have customized enabling you to view the customized hole data in the Standard hole chart (.hol) file that is being used. Note that to modify parameter names and values, you must modify the hole chart file. This table is available only for Standard holes. The Parameters table contains the following options:
o o
Name columnContains the name of each customized column in the hole chart file. Value columnContains the value associated with the corresponding Name column.
Shortcut Menus You can use shortcut menu commands to quickly perform an action. Different commands appear depending on the location of your pointer. Place your pointer anywhere in the graphics window except over a handle and right-click to display the following shortcut menu commands:
160/ 375
Placement Reference CollectorActivates the Primary reference collector located on the Placement slide-up panel enabling you to select a primary placement reference for a Straight or Standard hole. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. Secondary References CollectorActivates the Secondary reference collector located on the Placement slide-up panel enabling you to select secondary placement (offset )references for a Straight or Standard hole. FlipReverses the placement direction of the hole. Flip is available only for Simple and Standard holes that use the Variable, To Next, or Through All depth option. ClearClears the reference from the active collector. Depth1 Reference CollectorActivates the first direction (side 1) Depth Reference collector located on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel enabling you to select a depth reference. This command is available only for Simple holes that use the Through Until or To Selected depth option. Depth2 Reference CollectorActivates the second direction (side 2) Depth Reference collector located on the Shape slide-up panel enabling you to select a depth reference. This command is available only for 2-sided Simple holes that use the Through Until or To Selected depth option from the Side 2 depth options box. Depth Reference CollectorActivates the Depth Reference collector located on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel enabling you to select a depth reference. This command is available only for Standard holes that use the Through Until or To Selected depth option. Intersecting Components CollectorActivates the Intersecting Component collector located on the Intersect slide-up panel. This command is available only in Assembly and Auto Update is cleared. Place your pointer over the depth handle and right-click to display the following depth option shortcut menu commands. These commands are not available for Sketched holes. Note: For 1-sided Simple holes, a shortcut menu command drills the hole in first direction (Side 1). For 2sided Simple holes, you must place your pointer over the Side 2 depth handle, right-click and use a shortcut menu command to drill the hole in the second direction (Side 2).
FlipReverses the depth of the hole. Flip is available only for Simple and Standard holes that use the Variable, To Next, or Through All depth option. VariableDrills the hole from the placement reference to a specified depth. Pro/ENGINEER select this command by default. SymmetricDrills the hole on both sides of the placement reference by half the specified depth value in each direction. This command is available only for 1-sided Simple holes. To NextDrills the hole up to next surface. This command is not available in Assembly. Through AllDrills the hole to intersect with all surfaces. Through UntilDrills the hole up to next surface. This command activates the Depth Reference collectors enabling you to select a depth reference. This command is not available in Assembly. To SelectedDrills the hole to the selected point, curve, plane or surface for Simple holes. For Standard holes, drills the hole to the selected quilt. This command activates the Depth Reference collectors enabling you to select a depth reference. Place your pointer over a secondary placement reference handle and right-click to display the following shortcut menu commands:
LinearPlaces the hole on a surface by using two linear dimensions. This command is available if you select a planar, cylindrical, or conical solid surface; or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER selects this command by default if you select a surface or datum plane as the primary placement reference.
161/ 375
RadialPlaces the hole by using a linear and an angular dimension. This command is available if you select a planar, cylindrical, or conical solid surface; or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. DiameterPlaces the hole by rotating the hole around a diameter reference. This placement type uses an axis in addition to linear and angular dimensions. This command is available if you select a planar solid surface or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. CoaxialPlaces the hole at the intersection of an axis and a surface by using a linear and axial reference. This placement type uses a linear and axial reference. This command is available if you select a surface, datum plane, or axis as the primary placement reference. Note: If you select an axis as the primary placement reference, Coaxial becomes the only placement type available and Pro/ENGINEER selects this type by default. Secondary placement reference handles and the Coaxial shortcut menu command are not available when using this placement type. Place you pointer in a collector that contains a reference (collectors on slide-up panels) or a reference indicator (collectors on the dialog bar) and right-click to display the following shortcut menu commands:
RemoveRemoves the selected reference or the reference indicator from the active collector. Remove AllRemoves all references from the active collector. InformationOpens the INFORMATION WINDOW to display detailed reference information pertaining to the selected reference in the collector. Hole Placement References Placing hole features in your design requires that you select a primary placement reference to place the hole, and secondary (offset) references to constrain the hole position with respect to selected references. You can verify and modify the hole placement references at any time as you create your hole. Primary Placement Reference The primary placement reference enables you to place the hole on the model. You can relocate the hole by dragging the primary placement handle on the hole preview geometry, or snapping the handle to a reference. You can also click the handle and then select the primary placement reference. The hole preview geometry relocates. Secondary Placement References Secondary placement references enable you to utilize additional references to constrain the hole position with respect to selected edges, datum planes, axes, points, or surfaces. You can define the secondary (offset) references by snapping the secondary placement handles to references. The secondary (offset) reference value appears in the graphics window as shown below: Setting Secondary References
Note:
You cannot use two edges as one secondary (offset) reference. You cannot select an edge that is normal to the primary reference. Although secondary references are needed for coaxial holes, Pro/ENGINEER does not provide secondary placement handles. Simple activate the secondary collector and select the references.
162/ 375
You cannot select an edge to define an internal datum plane. You need to create a new datum plane. You can do this in the Hole tool by clicking Plane tool opens. on the Datum toolbar. The Hole tool pauses and the Datum
Verifying and Modifying Hole Placement References You can verify your placement references using the preview geometry in the graphics window or by using the Placement slide-up panel. This panel contains the primary and secondary reference information. You can also change the placement type in the Placement Type box. While the Hole tool is open, you can select new placement references or modify the secondary (offset) placement reference values. Note: If the primary placement reference changes, Pro/ENGINEER uses the existing secondary references only if they are valid for the new hole placement. Hole Placement Types After you select the primary placement reference, you can define the hole placement type. Hole placement types enable you to define the way in which the hole is placed. You can select a placement type by selecting a type from the Placement Type box on the Placement slide-up panel or by placing your pointer over a secondary placement handle, right-click and select a placement type shortcut menu command. The following table lists the placement types for the Hole tool: Hole Placement Type Linear: Places the hole on a surface by using two linear dimensions. This type is available if you select a planar, cylindrical, or conical solid surface; or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER select this type by default if you select a surface or datum plane as the primary placement reference. Radial: Places the hole by using a linear and an angular dimension. This type is available if you select a planar, cylindrical, or conical solid surface; or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. Diameter: Places the hole by rotating the hole around a diameter reference. This placement type uses an axis in addition to linear and angular dimensions. This type is available if you select a planar solid surface or a datum plane as the primary placement reference. Coaxial: Places the hole at the intersection of an axis and a surface. Note that the surface must be normal to the Example
163/ 375
axis. This placement type uses a linear and axial reference. This type is available if you select a surface, datum plane, or axis as the primary placement reference. Note: If you select an axis as the primary placement reference, Coaxial becomes the only placement type available and Pro/ENGINEER selects this type by default. Secondary placement reference handles and the Coaxial shortcut menu command are not available when using this placement type. On Point: Aligns the hole to a datum point that is located on or offset from a surface. This placement type is available only if you select a datum point as the primary placement reference. Note: If your primary placement reference is a datum point, this is the only placement type available. To Create a Simple Hole You can create a 1-sided or 2-sided Simple holes by using this procedure. 1. Select the approximate hole location on the model. This is your primary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selection. (Insert > Hole) on the Feature Toolbar. The Hole tool opens and preview geometry of the Click hole displays. Click to create a Straight hole. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default.
2.
3. 4. 5.
If you need to relocate the hole, drag the primary placement handle to the new location or snap it to a reference. If necessary, you can change the hole placement type by selecting a new type from the Placement Type box on the Placement slide-up panel. Refer to Hole Placement Types under See Also for more information. Drag the secondary placement (offset) reference handles to the appropriate references to constrain the hole. As you drag each handle, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights the available references as your pointer moves over them. This enables you to target the correct reference. Pro/ENGINEER automatically snaps the handle to the reference and populates the corresponding Secondary references collector on the Placement slide-up panel with the reference information. Note: Secondary placement reference handles are not available if you selected the Coaxial hole placement type. Simply activate the Secondary references collector and select a reference, or snap the placement handle to a reference. If you want to align the hole with a secondary reference, select the secondary reference from the Secondary references collector (on the Placement slide-up panel) and change Offset to Align. Note that this applies only to holes using the Linear placement type. To modify the hole diameter, drag the diameter handle to the preferred diameter. You can also doubleclick the diameter dimension and either type a new diameter value or select a most recently used value from the list. Pro/ENGINEER dynamically updates the preview geometry. To define the hole depth, you can select a depth option from the Depth Options list on the dialog bar or drag the depth handle. Note that if you want to drag the depth handle, or type or select a new value, you
6.
7.
8.
9.
164/ 375
must select the Variable or Symmetric depth option. The following depth options are available (shortcut menu commands appear in parentheses):
(Variable)Drills the hole in the first direction from the placement reference to a specified depth. The Side 1 Depth box displays on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. Pro/ENGINEER select this option by default. (Symmetric)Drills the hole on both sides of the placement reference by half the specified depth value in each direction. The Depth box displays on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. (To Next)Drills the hole in the first direction up to the next surface. This option is not available in Assembly. (Through All)Drills the hole in first direction to intersect with all surfaces. (Through Until)Drills the hole in first direction to intersect with the selected surface. The Side 1 Depth Reference collectors on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel activate. This option is not available in Assembly. (To Selected)Drills the hole in the first direction to the selected point, curve, plane, or surface. The Side 1 Depth Reference collectors on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel activate.
o o
Note that both Variable and Symmetric depth options enable you to drag the depth handle to define the drill depth. All other depth options automatically snap the handle to a reference. If you unsnap a snapped depth handle, Pro/ENGINEER selects the Variable depth option by default. 10. If you want to define a second side for the hole, click the Shape tab. On the Shape slide-up panel, select the second side drill depth option from the Side 2 box. These options are similar to the list in the (Symmetric) depth option is not available. You can modify the second previous step except that the side drill depth in the slide-up panel or in the graphics window. 11. The Simple hole is finished. Click Tip: enabling Pro/ENGINEER to create the hole and close the Hole tool.
If you want to reverse the hole depth direction, click Flip from the shortcut menu or from the Placement slide-up panel. Note that Flip is only available for Simple holes that use the Variable), To Next, or Through All depth option. You can also relocate the hole by clicking the primary placement handle and then clicking the new placement reference such as a surface or a datum plane. Notice that after you snap a handle, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the default handle ( ) with the snapped handle ( ). To unsnap a snapped drill depth handle, press SHIFT and drag the handle from the reference. You can now redefine the depth by dragging the handle, or by typing or selecting a new depth value from the graphics window. To unsnap a secondary placement handle, simple drag it. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select a reference in a collector, right-click, and select Remove from the shortcut menu. You can always increase or limit the available references being highlighted by using the Selection Filter box on the dashboard. You can also click the middle mouse button to create the hole.
165/ 375
To Define Simple Hole Depth by Snapping to a Reference In addition to dragging depth handles, or typing or selecting depth values, Pro/ENGINEER enables you to define Simple hole depth by snapping to a reference. Note that this procedure does not apply to Sketched or Standard holes. 1. Select the approximate hole location on the model. This is your primary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selection. (Insert > Hole) on the Engineering Features Toolbar. The Hole tool opens and preview Click geometry of the hole displays. Click to create a Straight hole. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default.
2.
3. 4.
Press SHIFT and drag the depth handle and snap it to a reference. As you drag, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights each available reference as your pointer moves over it. This enables you to target the correct reference. After you snap the handle, Pro/ENGINEER does the following:
o o o
5.
Replaces the default depth handle ( ) with the snapped depth handle ( ). Selects the (To Selected) depth option on the dialog bar and the Shape slide-up panel.
Populates the Depth Reference collector on the dialog bar to indicate that an item has been selected. The same collector on the Shape slide-up panel contains the selected reference.
To redefine the depth, press SHIFT and drag the depth handle to unsnap it from the reference. Notice (Variable) default depth option on the dialog bar and replaces the that Pro/ENGINEER selects the snapped depth handle ( ) with the default depth handle ( ). You can now snap the depth handle to another reference, drag the handle to a preferred depth, or type or select a new depth value using the depth boxes from either the graphics window or from the dialog bar.
6.
To define the hole depth for a second side (side-2), repeat the previous two steps using the side-2 depth handle. The Simple hole depth is defined. Click tool. enabling Pro/ENGINEER to create the hole and close the Hole
7.
Tip:
If you want to reverse the hole depth direction, click Flip from the shortcut menu or from the Placement slide-up panel. Note that Flip is only available for Simple holes that use the Variable, To Next), or Through All depth option. If you want to use a datum point or datum plane as a reference, but one is not present, you can create one without closing the Hole tool by opening the Datum Point tool or the Datum Plane tool on the Datum Toolbar. Pro/ENGINEER pauses the Hole tool. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select a reference in a collector, right-click, and select Remove from the shortcut menu. You can always increase or limit the available references being highlighted by using the Selection Filter box on the dashboard. You can also click the middle mouse button to create the hole. To Create a Sketched Hole Note: You cannot create 2-sided Sketched holes. 1. Select the approximate hole location on the model. This is your primary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selection.
166/ 375
2.
Click (Insert > Hole) on the Engineering Features Toolbar. The Hole tool opens and preview geometry of a Simple hole displays. Click to create a Straight hole. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default.
3. 4. 5.
Select Sketched from the Hole profile box on the dialog bar. Pro/ENGINEER displays the Sketched hole options. Do one of the following on the dialog bar:
Click . The OPEN SECTION dialog box opens enabling you to select an existing sketch (.sec) file. Click Open. Note that you need to select a sketch that is appropriate for your model geometry. Click . Sketcher opens enabling you to create a new sketched section (sketch profile) for the hole. In the empty window, sketch and dimension the sketched section Refer to Sketched Hole Requirements under See Also for more information. Click section and closes Sketcher. and Pro/ENGINEER creates the sketch
6. If you need to relocate the hole, drag the primary placement handle to the new location or snap it to a reference. 7. If necessary, you can change the hole placement type by selecting a new type from the Placement Type box on the Placement slide-up panel. Refer to Hole Placement Types under See Also for more information. 8. Drag the secondary placement (offset) reference handles to the appropriate references to constrain the hole. As you drag each handle, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights the available references as your pointer moves over them. This enables you to target the correct reference. Pro/ENGINEER automatically snaps the handle to the reference and populates the corresponding Secondary references collector on the Placement slide-up panel with the reference information. After you define the secondary references, the Sketched hole preview geometry displays. Note: Secondary placement reference handles are not available if you selected the Coaxial hole placement type. Simply activate the Secondary references collector and select a reference. If you want to align the hole with a secondary reference, select the secondary reference from the Secondary references collector (on the Placement slide-up panel) and change Offset to Align. Note that this applies only to holes using the Linear placement type.
9.
. Sketcher opens with the sketched section 10. If you want to modify the sketched section, click displayed. Note that hole diameter and depth are driven by the sketch. The Shape Slide-up panel only displays the sketched section. 11. The Sketched hole is finished. Click tool. Tip: enabling Pro/ENGINEER to create the hole and close the Hole
If you want to reverse the hole direction, click Flip from the shortcut menu or from the Placement slide-up panel. You can also relocate the hole by clicking the placement handle and then clicking the new placement reference such as a datum plane. Notice that after you snap a handle, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the default handle ( ) with the snapped handle ( ). To unsnap a secondary placement handle, simple drag it. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector.
167/ 375
To remove a reference from within a collector, select a reference in a collector, right-click, and select Remove from the shortcut menu. You can always increase or limit the available references being highlighted by using the Selection Filter box on the dashboard. You can also click the middle mouse button to create the hole. Sketched Hole Requirements Pro/ENGINEER enables you to create two types of Straight holes, Simple and Sketched. You create Simple holes by using geometry that has been predefined by Pro/ENGINEER. However, to create Sketched holes, you must either select an existing sketch profile (sketched section) or create a new sketched section in Sketcher. The sketched section must:
Contain geometric entities. Be a closed loop with no intersecting entities. Contain a vertical axis of revolution (you must sketch a centerline). Have all entities on the one side of the axis of revolution (centerline) with at least one entity normal to the axis of revolution. To Relocate a Hole by Snapping to a Reference In addition to dragging the primary placement handle, or typing or selecting secondary placement (offset) reference values, Pro/ENGINEER enables you to relocate a hole by snapping to a datum point or an axis. 1. Select the approximate hole location on the model. This is your primary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selection. Click (Insert > Hole) on the Engineering Features Toolbar. The Hole tool opens and preview geometry of the hole displays. Click to create a Straight hole or to create a Standard hole.
2.
3. 4.
Press SHIFT and drag the primary placement handle to snap it to a datum point or axis. Note that an axis cannot be normal to the axis of the current hole. As you drag, notice that Pro/ENGINEER prehighlights each available reference as your pointer moves over it. This enables you to target the correct reference. After you snap the handle, Pro/ENGINEER does the following:
o o o o
Populates the Primary reference collector on the Placement slide-up panel with the selected reference. If you selected a datum point, Pro/ENGINEER selects the On Point placement type on the Placement slide-up panel. If you selected an axis, Pro/ENGINEER selects the Coaxial placement type on the Placement slideup panel. Replaces the default depth handle ( ) with the snapped depth handle ( ).
5. To unsnap the primary placement handle, press SHIFT and drag the primary placement handle from the reference. Pro/ENGINEER selects the Linear (default) placement type on the Placement slide-up panel and replaces the snapped handle ( ) with the default handle ( ). You can now drag or snap the primary placement handle to another reference, or type or select a new secondary placement values to relocate the hole. 6. The hole is relocated. Click enabling Pro/ENGINEER to create the hole and close the Hole tool.
168/ 375
Tip:
If you want to snap to a datum point or axis as a reference, but one is not present, you can create one without closing the Hole tool by opening the Datum Point tool or Datum Axis tool on the Datum Toolbar. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select a reference in a collector, right-click, and select Remove from the shortcut menu. You can always increase or limit the available references being highlighted by using the Selection Filter box on the dashboard. You can also click the middle mouse button to create the hole. To Create a Standard Hole 1. Select the approximate hole location on the model. This is your primary placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selection. (Insert > Hole) on the Engineering Features Toolbar. The Hole tool opens and preview Click geometry a hole displays. Click dashboard. to create a Standard hole. Pro/ENGINEER displays the Standard hole options on the
2.
3. 4. 5.
If you need to relocate the hole, drag the primary placement handle to the new location or snap it to a reference. If necessary, you can change the hole placement type by selecting a new type from the Placement Type box on the Placement slide-up panel. Refer to Hole Placement Types under See Also for more information. Drag the secondary placement (offset) reference handles to the appropriate references to constrain the hole. As you drag each handle, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights the available references as your pointer moves over them. This enables you to target the correct reference. Pro/ENGINEER automatically snaps the handle to the reference and populates the corresponding Secondary references collector on the Placement slide-up panel with the reference information. Note: Secondary placement reference handles are not available if you selected the Coaxial hole placement type. Simply activate the Secondary references collector and select a reference. If you want to align the hole with a secondary reference, select the secondary reference from the Secondary references collector (on the Placement slide-up panel) and change Offset to Align. Note that this applies only to holes using the Linear placement type. Select the desired hole chart from the Thread Type box on the dialog bar. This box enables you to select industry-standard hole charts (UNC, UNF, and ISO) and any custom hole charts. (Screw Size) box. Note that if you type a screw size that is Type or select a screw size from the not listed, Pro/ENGINEER selects the closest screw size. You can also drag the hole diameter handle to select a screw size. To define the hole depth, select a depth option from the Depth Options list on the dialog bar, or drag the depth handle in the graphics window. Note that if you want define a new depth by dragging the depth handle, or by typing or selecting a new value, you must select the Variable depth option. The following depth options are available (shortcut menu commands appear in parentheses): (Variable)Drills the hole from the placement reference to a specified depth. The Depth box displays in the dialog bar. Pro/ENGINEER select this by default.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
169/ 375
(To Next)Drills the hole up to the next surface. Note that this option is not available in Assembly. (Through All)Drills the hole to intersect with all surfaces. (Through Until)Drills the hole to intersect with the selected surface. The Depth Reference collectors activate on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. This depth option is not available in Assembly. (To Selected)Drills the hole to the selected quilt. The Depth Reference collectors activate on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel.
o o
Note that the Variable depth option enables you to drag the depth handle to define the drill depth. All other depth options automatically snap the handle to a reference. If you unsnap a snapped depth handle, Pro/ENGINEER selects the Variable depth option by default. 11. Pro/ENGINEER selects (countersink) by default. Do one of the following: to remove the countersink.
o o
If the hole does not require a countersink, click
If you want to define the countersink diameter or angle, click the Shape tab. On the Shape slide-up panel, type or select a new countersink diameter or countersink angle from the corresponding boxes.
12. If you hole requires any of the following additional treatments, do the following:
Taps threads in the hole. You can clear this option to create a clearance hole. Pro/ENGINEER selects this option by default if the Variable or To Next depth option is selected. Note that you cannot clear this option for holes using the Variable depth option. Creates a counterbore for the hole. You can define the counterbore diameter and depth from the corresponding counterbore boxes on the Shape slide-up panel. enabling Pro/ENGINEER to create the hole and close the Hole tool.
13. The Standard hole is finished. Click Tip:
If you want to reverse the hole depth direction, click Flip from the shortcut menu or from the Placement slide-up panel. Note that Flip is only available for Standard holes that use the Variable, To Next, or Through All depth option. You can also relocate the hole by clicking the primary placement handle and then clicking the new placement reference such as a datum plane. Notice that after you snap a handle, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the default handle ( ) with the snapped handle ( ). To unsnap a snapped drill depth handle, press SHIFT and drag the handle from the reference. Pro/ENGINEER selects the Variable depth option enabling you to redefine the depth by dragging the handle, or by typing or selecting a new depth value from the graphics window. To unsnap a secondary placement handle, simple drag it. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select a reference in a collector, right-click, and select Remove from the shortcut menu. You can always increase or limit the available references being highlighted by using the Selection Filter box on the dashboard. You can also click the middle mouse button to create the hole.
170/ 375
To Create a Standard Coaxial Hole 1. Select an axis on the model. This is your primary placement reference for the Coaxial hole. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selection. If you need to create an axis, use the Datum Axis tool on the Datum Toolbar. (Insert > Hole) on the Engineering Features Toolbar. The Hole tool opens and Click Pro/ENGINEER performs the following:
2.
o o
3. 4.
Automatically selects the Coaxial placement type in the Placement slide-up panel. Aligns the hole preview geometry to the selected axis. to create a Standard hole. Pro/ENGINEER displays the Standard hole options on the dashboard.
Click
Click the Placement tab. On the Placement slide-up panel, click the Secondary references collector and select a surface or a datum plane as the secondary placement (offset) reference to constrain the hole. Pro/ENGINEER populates this collector with the selected reference. You can also use Secondary References Collector from the shortcut menu to activate this collector, or snap the placement handle to a reference.
5. Select the desired hole chart from the Thread Type box on the dialog bar. This box enables you to select industry-standard hole charts (UNC, UNF, and ISO) and any custom hole charts. (Screw Size) box. Note that if you type a screw size that is not 6. Type or select a screw size from the listed, Pro/ENGINEER selects the closest screw size. You can also drag the hole diameter handle to select a screw size. 7. To define the hole depth, select a depth option from the Depth Options list on the dialog bar, or drag the depth handle in the graphics window. Note that if you want define a new depth by dragging the depth handle, or by typing or selecting a new value, you must select the Variable depth option. The following depth options are available (shortcut menu commands appear in parentheses):
(Variable)Drills the hole from the placement reference to a specified depth. The Depth box displays in the dialog bar. Pro/ENGINEER select this by default. (To Next)Drills the hole up to the next surface. Note that this option is not available in Assembly. (Through All)Drills the hole to intersect with all surfaces. (Through Until)Drills the hole to intersect with the selected surface. The Depth Reference collectors activate on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel. This depth option is not available in Assembly. (To Selected)Drills the hole to the selected quilt. The Depth Reference collectors activate on the dialog bar and on the Shape slide-up panel.
o o
Note that the Variable depth option enables you to drag the depth handle to define the drill depth. All other depth options automatically snap the handle to a reference. If you unsnap a snapped depth handle, Pro/ENGINEER selects the Variable depth option by default. 8. Pro/ENGINEER selects (countersink) by default. Do one of the following: to remove the countersink.
o o
9.
If the hole does not require a countersink, click
If you want to define the countersink diameter or angle, click the Shape tab. On the Shape slide-up panel, type or select a new countersink diameter or countersink angle from the corresponding boxes.
If you hole requires any of the following additional treatments, do the following:
171/ 375
Taps threads in the hole. You can clear this option to create a clearance hole. Pro/ENGINEER selects this option by default if the Variable or To Next depth option is selected. Note that you cannot clear this option for holes using the Variable depth option. Creates a counterbore for the hole. You can define the counterbore diameter and depth from the corresponding counterbore boxes on the Shape slide-up panel. enabling Pro/ENGINEER to create the hole and close the
10. The Standard Coaxial hole is finished. Click Hole tool.
Note: If you prefer to create a Coaxial hole by using a non axial primary placement reference, simply select the non axial primary placement reference and follow steps 2. and 3. Then, from the Placement slide-up panel, select the Coaxial placement type and activate the Secondary references collector. Now, select an axis as the secondary placement reference. Follow steps 5. and so forth to complete the hole. Tip:
If you want to reverse the hole depth direction, click Flip from the shortcut menu or from the Placement slide-up panel. Note that Flip is only available for Standard holes that use the Variable, To Next, or Through All depth option. You can also relocate the hole by clicking the primary placement handle and then clicking the new placement reference. Notice that after a handle is snapped, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the default handle ( ) with the snapped handle ( ). To unsnap a snapped drill depth handle, press SHIFT and drag the handle from the reference. Pro/ENGINEER selects the Variable depth option enabling you to redefine the depth by dragging the handle, or by typing or selecting a new depth value from the graphics window. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select a reference in a collector, right-click, and select Remove from the shortcut menu. You can always increase or limit the available references being highlighted by using the Selection Filter box on the dashboard. You can also click the middle mouse button to create the hole. Using Hole Charts Hole charts are space-delimited text files that contain fastener size diameter values. The hole charts enable you to standardize the available thread, diameter, countersink, and counterbore options when creating Standard hole features in your designs. Industry-standard hole charts (UNC, UNF, and ISO) are supplied with Pro/ENGINEER in the load point, however these charts must not be changed. You can create custom hole charts to meet your specific design needs. Hole charts naming convention can contain no more than four characters and uses the .hol file name extension. Typically, the four characters are the thread series for the chart. Use the HOLE_PARAMETER_FILE_PATH configuration option to specify the directory for your customized hole charts. Available hole charts are listed in the thread type box on the Dashboard. Hole charts have two main portions, TABLE_DATA and THREAD_DATA. Keep the following in mind as you use and customize your hole charts:
172/ 375
TABLE_DATA PROE_VERSION THREAD_SERIES THREAD_CLASS The release for which the hole chart was created (for example, 2002) The name of the hole chart; this usually corresponds to the filename. The tolerance class for the hole chart and a parameter that will be visible in the Thread Note (for example, 2b or H). The measurement system for the hole chart; value is either inch or metric. The relationship between the thread depth and the drill depth (for example, 1.25). When you enter either the thread depth or the drill depth on the Dashboard, the other value is calculated automatically using this ratio. Drill Depth is Thread Depth multiplied by Depth Ratio. Note: You can override the default relationship of the depth ratio by entering both the Drill Depth and the Thread Depth values on the Dashboard, under the condition that the drill depth value is greater than or equal to the thread depth. CALLOUT_FORMAT The format of thread notes created or shown in the model and drawing. This is not a place to add text to a note, but a place to define the way that the text of a note appears.
TABLE_UNITS
DEPTH_RATIO
THREAD_DATA (hole parameter values) Any column you define is considered a hole parameter. The parameter name and value are stored and displayed in the Parameters table in the Properties slide-up panel on the Dashboard. Each row requires a value in each column. If a value requires spaces, fill the space with a dash. For example, format the screw size 1.125 inch (1 and 1/8 inch) as 1-1/8. FASTENER_ID BASIC_DIAM THREAD TAP_DR TAP_DEC Displays in the Screw Size list on the Dashboard. The fastener diameter. Threads per inch, or pitch (if metric). Letter, fraction, number, or metric drill standard size. Decimal size in inch or metric of the tap drill. This value appears in the diameter list box in the Dimension area on the Dashboard. (See Note below.) Ratio describing the actual engagement of fastener threads. Clearance drill, for close clearances.
PERCENT_THREAD CLEAR_DR_CLOSE
173/ 375
CLOSE_DEC
Decimal size in inch or metric of the close clearance drill. This value appears in the diameter list box in the Dimension area on the Dashboard. (See Note below.) Clearance drill, for medium clearances. Decimal size in metric of the medium clearance drill. This value appears in the diameter list box in the Dimension area on the Dashboard. (See Note below.) Counterbore diameter Counterbore depth Countersink diameter Countersink angle Bottom countersink diameter Bottom countersink angle Clearance drill for free clearances. Decimal size in inch or metric of the free clearance drill. This value appears in the diameter list box in the Dimension area on the Dashboard. (See Note below.)
CLEAR_DR_MED MEDIUM_DEC
CBOREDIAM CBOREDEPTH CSINKDIAM CSINKANGLE BOTCSINKDIAM BOTCSINKANGLE CLEAR_DR_FREE FREE_DEC
Note: For the TAP_DEC, CLOSE_DEC, MEDIUM_DEC, and FREE_DEC values, you cannot edit the value on the Dashboard unless the HOLE_DIAMETER_OVERRIDE configuration option is set to yes (the default is no). To prevent overrides of the system setting, include the HOLE_DIAMETER_OVERRIDE configuration option in a config.sup file. Formatting Thread Notes Thread notes provide information about standard hole features in your design, including the values listed in the hole chart for that hole. You can customize the format and information to display in your thread notes by modifying the CALLOUT_FORMAT field in the Hole Chart. Use the following principles to customize your thread note format:
Each parameter is preceded by an ampersand (&). A space should always follow a parameter name. Note: An on-screen space that follows a parameter value should have two spaces in the formatting. Indicate line breaks with a slash (/). Use control characters (for example, <CTRL+A>) to get an extended ASCII character. If the hole is a member of a pattern, use the Pattern_No parameter in the thread note to indicate the number of pattern holes in the pattern. Note: You can also edit thread notes after exiting the HOLE dialog box. They are the 3-D notes attached to the hole features (Tools > Environment). You can preview the thread note for a hole in the Notes slide-up panel when you are defining or redefining a standard hole.
174/ 375
UNC Note To display the following note, use the following text in the CALLOUT_FORMAT field of the hole chart: &Screw_size &Thread_Series - &Thread_Class TAP <CTRLa>x<CTRL-b> &Thread_depth / &Number_Size DRILL (&Diameter ) <CTRL-a>x<CTRL-b> &Drill_Depth -(&Pattern_No ) HOLE Metric Countersink Note Use the following text in the CALLOUT_FORMAT field of the hole chart: &Diameter DRILL THRU, <CTRL-a>n<CTRL-b> &Csink_diameter x &Csink_angle <CTRL-a>w<CTRL-b> / &Metric_size x &Pitch PLUG TAP <CTRL-a>x<CTRL-b> &Thread_Depth Metric Counterbore Note Use the following text in the CALLOUT_FORMAT field of the hole chart: &Diameter DRILL THRU, <CTRL-a>n<CTRL-b> &Cbore_diameter x &Cbore_depth<CTRL-a>v<CTRL-b> / &Metric_size x &Pitch PLUG TAP <CTRL-a>x<CTRL-b> &Thread_Depth
About the Shell Feature The Shell feature hollows out the inside of the solid, leaving a shell of a specified wall thickness. It lets you specify a surface or surfaces that you want to remove from the shell. If you do not select a surface to remove, a "closed" shell is created, with the whole inside of the part hollowed out and no access to the hollow. In this case, you can later add the necessary cuts or holes to achieve proper geometry. If you flip the thickness side (for example, by entering a negative value, or by clicking thickness is added to the outside of the part. on the dialog bar), the shell
When defining a shell, you can also select surfaces where you want to assign a different thickness. You can specify independent thickness values for each such surface. However, you cannot enter negative thickness values, or flip the thickness side, for these surfaces. The thickness side is determined by the default thickness of the shell. When Pro/ENGINEER makes the shell, all the features that were added to the solid before you created the Shell feature are hollowed out. Therefore, the order of feature creation is very important when you use Shell (see example). To access the Shell feature user interface, click Shell. Example: Shell and Feature Order The order of feature creation is very important when you use Shell. When Pro/ENGINEER makes the shell, all the features that were added to the solid before you created the Shell feature are hollowed out. For example, the part shown in the following illustration consists of an extruded solid and a through hole. in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert >
175/ 375
If you create a Shell feature and select the extruded spline surface (1) to be removed, the system creates a shell of constant thickness around all existing features, as shown in the next illustration.
To achieve proper geometry, reorder the Hole feature to come after Shell in the model tree. The result is shown in the following illustration.
About the Shell User Interface Procedures related to Shell are listed under See Also. Feature Icon Shell features are identified by the Dialog Bar The Shell dialog bar consists of the following: icon both in the Engineering Features toolbar and in the model tree.
The Thickness combo boxLets you change the value for default shell thickness. You can type the new value, or select one of the recently used values from the drop-down list. Lets you flip the side that the shell is created. Slide-up Panels The Shell dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesContains the collectors of references used in the Shell feature. PropertiesContains the feature name and an icon to access feature information.
The References slide-up panel contains the following elements:
The Removed surfaces collectorLets you select the surfaces to be removed. If you do not select any surfaces, a "closed" shell is created, with the whole inside of the part hollowed out and no access to the hollow. The Non-default thickness collectorLets you select surfaces where you want to assign a different thickness. For each surface included in this collector, you can specify an individual thickness value. The Properties slide-up panel contains the Name text box, where you can type a custom name for the shell feature, to replace the automatically generated name. It also contains the display information about the feature. icon that you can click to
176/ 375
Shortcut Menus Right-click anywhere in the graphics window to access the Shell shortcut menu, which contains the following commands:
Remove SurfacesActivates the collector of surfaces to be removed. Non Default ThicknessActivates the collector of surfaces with a different thickness. ClearRemoves all references from the collector that is currently active. FlipFlips the shell side. If you right-click on the handle or value connected to the O_THICK label, the shortcut menu contains only the Flip command, which flips the shell side. If you right-click on the handle or value connected to a THICK label, the shortcut menu contains only the Remove command, which removes the current surface from the collector of surfaces with non-default thickness. To Create a Shell Feature 1. in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert > Shell. The system applies a default Click thickness on the inside of all the surfaces, creating a "closed" shell, and displays the preview geometry. The default thickness value is displayed on the screen, preceded by the O_THICK label and connected to a drag handle, and in the combo box in the dialog bar. Select a surface, or multiple surfaces, that you want to remove during the Shell feature creation. The system removes the selected surfaces and updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also select the surfaces to remove before you enter the Shell tool. While creating or redefining the Shell feature, you can at any time select additional surfaces to remove, or deselect some of the previously selected surfaces, by activating the Removed surfaces collector in the References slide-up panel. This collector is always active when you start to create or redefine a Shell feature. 3. To modify the shell thickness, type or select the new value in the combo box in the dialog bar. You can also drag the handle connected to the O_THICK label, or double-click the thickness value next to the O_THICK label and type or select the new value. To flip the shell side, click shortcut menu. in the dialog bar. You can also use the Flip command on the Shell
2.
4. 5.
To specify surfaces with a different thickness, open the References slide-up panel and activate the Nondefault thickness collector by clicking in it. You can also use the Non Default Thickness command on the Shell shortcut menu. Select the surfaces. For each selected surface with a non-default thickness, the system displays a handle and an associated thickness value preceded by the THICK label. It also adds a line with the surface name and thickness value (initially equal to the default shell thickness) in the Non-default thickness collector on the References slide-up panel. To modify a non-default thickness, drag the handle connected to the THICK label and attached to the surface. You can also type or select a new value in the appropriate combo box in the Non-default thickness collector or in the graphic window, next to the THICK label.
6.
When satisfied with the feature geometry, click
in the dialog bar.
Restrictions on Creating Shell Features Note the following restrictions on creating Shell features:
You cannot add shells to any part that has a surface that moves from tangency to a point. You cannot select a surface to be removed that has an adjacent surface to which it is tangent.
177/ 375
You cannot select a surface to be removed that has a vertex created by the intersection of three curved surfaces. If the part has a corner between more than three surfaces, the Shell feature may be geometrically undefined; in this case, Pro/ENGINEER highlights the trouble area. The surface to be removed must be surrounded by edges (a fully revolved surface of revolution is not valid) and the surfaces that intersect the edge must form an angle through the solid geometry of less than 180 degrees. As long as this condition is met, you can select any sculpted surfaces as the surface to be removed. When you select surfaces that have other surfaces tangent to them for independent thickness, all surfaces that are tangent must have the same thickness, or the Shell feature fails. For example, if you shell a part that contains a hole and you want the thickness of the hole wall to be different from the overall thickness, you must pick both surfaces (cylinders) that make up the hole, then offset them the same distance. By default, a shell creates geometry with constant wall thickness. If the system cannot create a constant thickness, the Shell feature fails. Example: Creating a Shell Feature This example shows creating a Shell feature. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2. 3.
in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert > Shell. The system applies a default Click thickness on the inside of all the surfaces, creating a "closed" shell, and displays the preview geometry. Select the top surface as a surface to remove. To modify the shell thickness, type 7 in the combo box in the dialog bar. The system updates the preview geometry, as shown in the following illustration.
4. 5.
To specify that the bottom surface should have a different thickness, open the References slide-up panel and activate the Non-default thickness collector by clicking in it. Select the bottom surface. It also adds a line with the surface name and thickness value (initially equal to the default shell thickness) in the Non-default thickness collector. Click the combo box and type 14 to specify the thickness at the bottom. The system updates the preview geometry, as shown in the next illustration.
6.
Click
to create the Shell feature. The final geometry is shown in the following illustration.
178/ 375
About the Rib Feature A Rib feature is a thin fin or web protrusion that attaches to solid surfaces in your design. Typically, ribs are designed to strengthen parts in your design and are often used to prevent unwanted bending. The Rib tool enables you to quickly develop both simple and complex rib features. Designing Rib features requires you to:
Create a dependent section by selecting a valid Sketch feature (sketched datum curve) from the Model Tree, or sketch a new independent section. A section outlines the rib feature. Refer to About Sections in Sketch-based Features in the Sections in Sketch-based Features book for more information on sections. Determine the rib material side with respect to the sketching plane and desired rib geometry Set the appropriate thickness dimensions on the Features toolbar or by clicking Insert > Rib on the You can enter the Rib tool either by clicking main menu. You can enter the tool and begin designing your Rib feature under the following conditions:
Sketch Not SelectedEntering the Rib tool and then selecting an existing sketch or creating a new sketch for the Rib feature. Sketch SelectedSelecting an existing sketch for the Rib feature and then entering the Rib tool. In either case, after you designate a sketch for the rib, the validity of your sketch is examined and, if valid, it is placed in the collector. The reference collector only accepts one valid rib sketch at a time. After you specify a valid sketch for the Rib feature, preview geometry appears in the graphics window. You can directly manipulate and define your model either in the graphics window, in the dashboard, or a combination of the two. The preview geometry automatically updates, reflecting any modifications. There are two types of Rib feature available. However, the type is automatically set according to the attaching geometry: Straight Attaches to straight surfaces. Extrudes either to symmetrically about plane. one side or the sketching
179/ 375
Rotational
Attaches to surfaces of revolution. The angled surface of the rib is conical, not planar. Revolves the section about the axis of the parent, making a wedge either to one side or symmetrically about the sketching plane. The wedge is then trimmed with two planes parallel to the sketching surface. The distance between the planes corresponds to the thickness of the rib and attaching geometry.
Rib features are subject to normal feature operations, including patterning, modifying, rerouting, and redefining. Note: You must place Rib features while designing in Part mode. You can not create ribs as an Assembly feature. About the Rib Feature User Interface Feature Icon You can enter the rib feature tool by either:
Clicking
Clicking Insert > Rib on the top-level menu. Dialog Bar The dialog bar consists of commands positioned from left to right guiding you through the design process. The dialog bar consists of:
Thickness boxControls the material thickness of the rib feature. The dimension box contains the most recently used dimension values. Enables you to switch the thickness side of the rib feature. Clicking the button cycles you from one side to the other, and then symmetric about the sketching plane. Slide-Up Panels Slide-up panels contain information about your rib feature references and properties. Rib features use the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesContains the following options so that you can view and modify the references for your rib feature:
Sketch collectorContains the valid Sketch feature reference that you selected for the rib feature. You can use Remove from the shortcut menu (pointer in the collector) to remove the sketch reference. Notice that the sketch collector can only contain one rib feature sketch reference at a time. Flip buttonEnables you to switch the material direction for the rib feature sketch. Clicking the button changes the direction arrow from one side to the other.
The following options are available only under certain conditions:
Define buttonOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to define an independent section. Note that Define is available only if the Sketch collector is empty (no section defined or sketch selected). You can also use the Define Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window.
180/ 375
Edit buttonOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to redefine the independent section. Note that Edit is available only for sketch-based features that use an independent section. You can also use the Edit Internal Sketch shortcut menu command from the graphics window. Unlink buttonBreaks the association between the dependent section and the parent Sketch feature. Pro/ENGINEER copies the Sketch feature references to the new independent section. Note that Unlink is available only if the rib feature uses a dependent section.
PropertiesEnables you to obtain information about and rename your rib feature. The slide-up panel consists of:
Name boxEnables you to customize the rib feature name by editing the name box. Slides open the embedded browser containing rib feature information.
Shortcut Menus The following shortcut menus appear when you right-click a rib feature item in the graphics window while defining, redefining, or modifying your rib feature: Context Set Rib Thickness Menu Commands Right-click anywhere on the rib feature.

Set the Sketch Material Side
FlipChanges the thickness of material side to the opposite side of the sketching plane. SymmetricMakes the rib symmetric about the sketching plane. Right-click the direction arrow.
FlipChanges the sketch material side. Right-click anywhere on the rib feature.
Handle the sketch
Edit SketchOpens the Sketch dialog box enabling you to use Sketcher to redefine an independent section. Note that the rib tool must be open and you must be working with an independent section. ClearDeletes the sketch reference for the rib feature. Right-click the Sketch collector in the References slide-up panel.
Sketching Rib Features
RemoveDeletes the sketch reference for the rib feature.
When creating rib features you sketch a section of the rib to the silhouette of the parent feature. You then thicken the sketch to either one side or both sides of the sketching plane. As you define your rib feature you can either sketch the rib after entering the rib tool or pre-sketch the rib before entering the rib tool. In either case, the reference collector will only accept one valid rib sketch at a time. Valid rib feature sketches must meet the following criteria:
Single open loop Contiguous and non intersecting sketch entities Sketch ends must align to attachment surfaces forming a closed area While the work-flow for straight and rotational rib features is the same, each rib type has specific sketch requirements. Keep the following in mind as you sketch your rib features:
181/ 375
Rib Type Straight
Sketch Requirement Sketch can be created on any point as long as its line ends attach to surfaces, providing an area to fill.
Valid Sketch Example
Rotational
Sketch must be created on a plane that passes through the axis of revolution for the revolved surface. Its line ends must attach to surfaces, providing an area to fill.
Whether you create an internal sketch or you seed your rib feature with an external sketch, you can easily modify your rib feature sketch because it lives inside the rib feature. Any modifications you make to an original seed sketch, including deletion, do not affect the rib feature because an individual copy of the sketch is stored in the feature. In order to modify the rib sketch geometry you must modify the internal sketch feature, which is a sub-node of the rib feature in the Model Tree. Defining Rib Features In order to define the Rib feature thickness you must:
Set a numeric value for the rib thickness Determine the rib material side with respect to the sketching plane You can set a numeric value for the rib thickness either by dragging the handles to the desired length or by typing or selecting a real number value in the dimension box. The dimension box contains the most recently used dimension values. You can determine the accurate material side for the rib using the preview geometry. Setting the rib feature material side is a two step process. First, you must point the direction arrow towards the side of the sketch line to fill. In most cases you will accept the default direction. Accept Default Direction Optional Direction Arrow
You must accept this direction so the rib feature is filling an enclosed area.
You can choose either direction because both options fill an enclosed area.
Second, you must determine how to thicken the rib features about the sketching plane: symmetrical or towards one side of the sketching plane. The default material side is both sides, however, as you define and redefine your rib features you can change material sides using either the shortcut menus, the dimension box, or the dashboard:
182/ 375
Side One (one side)
Side Two (one side)
Both Sides (symmetrical)
The following table displays the processes for changing material sides. Clicking through the three material side options: Material Side Change Both sides -to- Side one or Side two
on the dialog bar rotates
How to Set the New Material Side Do one of the following while defining or redefining:

Side one or Side two -to- Both sides
Right-click the rib feature in the graphics window and clear Symmetric on the shortcut menu. Click on the dialog bar.
Do one of the following while defining or redefining:

Side one -to- Side two (and vice versa)
Right-click the rib feature in the graphics window and click Symmetric on the shortcut menu. Click on the dialog bar.
Do one of the following while defining or redefining:
Right-click the Rib feature in the graphics window and click Flip on the shortcut menu. Drag the preview geometry to the opposite side. Type a negative value in the dimension box. Click on the dialog bar.
To Create a Rib Feature by Creating an Internal Section The work-flow for designing both straight and rotational rib types is the same because the rib type is automatically determined by the attaching geometry. 1. 2. Click on the Engineering Feature toolbar. You can also click Insert > Rib. The Rib tool opens.
Click the References tab on the dashboard. After the References slide-up panel appears, click Define. You can also use Define Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. The Sketch dialog box opens enabling you to use Sketcher. Refer to To Create a Section in the Sections in Sketch-based Features book for more information on creating sections. Note: To use the default Sketcher settings, set the activate_sketch_with_dflt configuration option to yes (default is no). . Sketcher closes and the Rib tool resumes. In Sketcher, sketch the desired side-section and click Notice that preview geometry appears in the graphics window and a direction arrow indicates the sketch side to fill.
3.
183/ 375
4.
If you want to change the fill side, click the direction arrow. The arrow indicates the fill side. You can also use Flip from the References slide-up panel or from the shortcut menu (pointer over the arrow and right-click). Define the thickness of the rib by dragging the handle to the desired distance. By default the thickness is symmetrical about the sketching plane. Note that if you want to thicken only one side of the sketching plane, place your pointer over the thickness handle, right-click, and select Symmetric from the shortcut menu (check mark cleared). You can then drag the handle to change define the thickness. Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the rib feature.
5.
6.
Note:
You can also define the rib thickness by directly modifying the dimension in the graphics window or by entering a value in the dimension box on the Dashboard. The dimension box contains the most recently used dimension values and accepts real number inputs. If you want to redefine the independent section, click Edit in the References slide-up panel and use Sketcher. You can also use Edit Internal Sketch from the shortcut menu. Refer to To Redefine a Section in the Sections in Sketched-based Features book for more information. To Create a Rib Feature by Using a Sketch feature The work-flow for designing both straight and rotational rib types is the same because the rib type is automatically determined by the attaching geometry. 1. To use an existing Sketch feature (sketched datum curve) as the basis for the rib section, select the existing Sketch feature from the Model Tree and click on the Engineering Feature toolbar. You can also click Insert > Rib. The Rib tool opens, preview geometry appears in the graphics window, and a direction arrow indicates the sketch side to fill. Notice that a section is created and placed in the Sketch collector on the Reference slide-up panel. This section is dependent (references the Sketch feature). 2. If you want to change the fill side, click the direction arrow. The arrow indicates the fill side. You can also use Flip from the References slide-up panel or from the shortcut menu (pointer over the arrow and right-click). Define the thickness of the rib by dragging the handle to the desired distance. By default the thickness is symmetrical about the sketching plane. Note that if you want to thicken only one side of the sketching plane, place your pointer over the thickness handle, right-click, and select Symmetric from the shortcut menu (check mark cleared). You can then drag the handle to change define the thickness. Double check your references and modify any properties using the appropriate slide-up panels. Click the middle mouse button to complete the rib feature.
3.
4.
Note:
You can also define the rib thickness by directly modifying the dimension in the graphics window or by entering a value in the dimension box on the Dashboard. The dimension box contains the most recently used dimension values and accepts real number inputs. If you want to redefine the rib section, you can either redefine the parent Sketch feature that the section is referencing, or you can redefine the section itself. Refer to To Redefine a Section in the Sections in Sketched-based Features book for more information. About the Draft Feature The Draft feature adds a draft angle between -30 and +30 to individual surfaces or to a series of surfaces. You can draft only the surfaces that are formed by tabulated cylinders or planes. You cannot draft surfaces with fillets around the edge boundary. However, you can draft the surfaces first, then fillet the edges. You can draft either solid surfaces or quilt surfaces, but not a combination of both. When you select surfaces to be drafted, the first selected surface determines the type of additional surfaces, solid or quilt, that can be selected for this feature.
184/ 375
For drafts, the system uses the following terminology:
Draft surfacesThe surfaces of the model that are being drafted. Draft hingesLines or curves on the draft surfaces that the surfaces are pivoted about (also called neutral curves). Draft hinges can be defined by selecting a plane, in which case the draft surfaces are pivoted about their intersection with this plane, or by selecting individual curve chains on the draft surfaces. Pull direction (also called draft direction)Direction that is used to measure the draft angle. This is usually the direction of mold opening. You can define it by selecting a plane (in which case the pull direction is normal to this plane), a straight edge, a datum axis, or a coordinate system axis. Draft angleThe angle between the draft direction and the resulting drafted surfaces. If the draft surfaces are split, you can define two independent angles for each side of the drafted surface. Draft angles must be within the range of 30 to +30 degrees. Draft surfaces can be split either by the draft hinge or by a different curve on the draft surface, such as an intersection with a quilt, or a sketched curve. If you are splitting by a sketch that does not lie on the draft surface, the system projects it on the draft surface in the direction normal to the sketching plane. If the draft surfaces are split, you can:
Specify two independent draft angles for each side of the drafted surface Specify a single draft angle, with the second side drafted in the opposite direction Draft only one side of the surface (either one), with the other side remaining in the neutral position To access the Draft feature user interface, click Draft. About Split Draft Split draft enables you to apply different draft angles to different portions of a surface. Draft surfaces can be split either by the draft hinge or by a different curve on the draft surface, such as a sketched curve. If the draft surfaces are split, you can: in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert >
Specify two independent draft angles for each side of the drafted surface. Specify a single draft angle, with the second side drafted in the opposite direction. This option is available either for a draft split by a draft hinge, or for a split draft with two hinges. Draft only one side of the surface (either one), with the other side remaining in the neutral position. This option is not available for a split draft with two hinges. The following illustration shows examples of split draft. Each example uses the draft hinge (datum plane) as a split object.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Original part (before draft) Using the Draft sides independently option Using the Draft sides dependently option Using the Draft first side only option
185/ 375
The next illustration shows an example of split draft using a sketched curve chain as a split object.
1. 2.
Draft hinge (datum plane, side view) Split object (sketched curve chain)
About Variable Draft When you first define a Draft feature, a constant draft angle is applied to the whole draft surface. This is called Constant draft. An example of Constant draft is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Draft surface Draft hinge (sketched curve) Surface selected to define Pull Direction Draft angle
In Variable draft, you apply a variable draft angle at various control points along the draft surface:
If the draft hinge is a curve, the angle control points lie on the draft hinge If the draft hinge is a plane, the angle control points lie on the contour of the draft surface An example of Variable draft is shown in the next illustration.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Draft surface Draft hinge (sketched curve) Surface selected to define Pull Direction Draft angles Draft angle locations (control points)
About the Draft User Interface Procedures related to Draft are listed under Feature Icon Draft features are identified by the Dialog Bar The Draft dialog bar consists of the following: icon both in the Engineering Features toolbar and in the model tree.
186/ 375
The Draft hinges collectorLets you specify the neutral lines or curves on the draft surfaces, that is, the lines or curves that the surfaces are pivoted about. Click the collector to activate it. You can select up to two planes or curve chains. To select a second hinge, you must first split the draft surfaces by a split object. The Pull direction collectorLets you specify the direction that is used to measure the draft angle. Click the collector to activate it. You can select a plane, a straight edge or a datum axis, or a coordinate system. The arrow). Reverse pull direction iconLets you reverse the pull direction (indicated by a yellow
The Angle combo boxLets you change the value for draft angle. You can type the new value, or select one of the recently used values from the drop-down list. The Reverse angle to add or remove material iconLets you reverse the direction of draft angle, to switch between adding and removing the material. For Split Drafts with independently drafted sides, the dialog bar contains a second Angle combo box and Reverse angle icon, to control the draft angle on the second side. Note: For Variable drafts, the Angle combo box and Reverse angle icon are not available in the dialog bar. Slide-up Panels The Draft dashboard displays the following slide-up panels:
ReferencesContains the collectors of references used in the draft feature. SplitContains the split options. AnglesContains a table of draft angle values and their locations. OptionsContains the options defining draft geometry. PropertiesContains the feature name and an icon to access feature information.
The References slide-up panel contains the following elements:
The Draft surfaces collectorLets you select the draft surfaces. You can draft only the surfaces that are formed by tabulated cylinders or planes. You can select individual surfaces or continuous chains of surfaces. The type of the first selected surface, solid or quilt, determines the type of other surfaces that can be selected as draft surfaces for this feature. The Details button next to the Draft surfaces collectorOpens the Surface Sets dialog box, which lets you add and remove draft surfaces. The Draft hinges collectorLets you specify the neutral curves on the draft surfaces, that is, the lines or curves that the surfaces are pivoted about. You can select up to two draft hinges. To select a second hinge, you must first split the draft surfaces by a split object. For each draft hinge, you can select one of the following:
o o o o
A plane, in which case the draft surfaces are pivoted about their intersection with this plane A curve chain located on the draft surfaces
The Details button next to the Draft hinges collectorOpens the Chain dialog box, which lets you manipulate the draft hinge chains. The Pull direction collectorLets you specify the direction that is used to measure the draft angle. You can select one of the following:
187/ 375
o o o
A plane, in which case the pull direction is normal to this plane A straight edge or a datum axis, in which case the pull direction is parallel to this edge or axis A coordinate system axis, in which case the pull direction is parallel to this axis. Select the particular axis of a coordinate system, rather that the coordinate system name.
The Flip button next to the Pull direction collectorLets you reverse the pull direction (indicated by a yellow arrow). The Split slide-up panel contains the following elements:
o o o
The Split options menu with the following options: No splitDo not split the draft surfaces. The whole surface pivots about the draft hinge. Split by draft hingeSplit the draft surfaces along the draft hinge. Split by split objectSplit the draft surfaces by using a quilt or sketch. If you are splitting by a sketch that does not lie on the draft surface, the system projects it on the draft surface in the direction normal to the sketching plane. If you select this option, the system activates the Split object collector.
The Split object collectorYou can either sketch the split curve by using the Define button next to the collector, or select one of the following:
o o o
A surface quilt, in which case the split object is the intersection of this quilt with the draft surface. An external (preexisting) sketched curve.
The Define buttonSketch the split curve on the draft surface or on another plane. If the sketch does not lie on the draft surface, the system projects it on the draft surface in the direction normal to the sketching plane. The Side options menu with the following options:
o o o
Draft sides independentlySpecify two independent draft angles for each side of the drafted surface. Draft sides dependentlySpecify a single draft angle, with the second side drafted in the opposite direction. This option is available only if the draft surfaces are split by the draft hinge, or for a split draft with two hinges. Draft first side onlyDraft only the first side of the surface (determined by the positive pull direction from the split object), with the second side remaining in the neutral position. This option is not available for split draft with two hinges. Draft second side onlyDraft only the second side of the surface, with the first side remaining in the neutral position. This option is not available for split draft with two hinges.
The Split object collector and Side options menu are not available for No split drafts. The Angles slide-up panel contains the following elements:
For Constant draft, a single line containing an Angle combo box with the value of the draft angle. For Variable draft, additional lines for each additional draft angle. Each line contains an Angle combo box with the value of the draft angle, a Reference box with the name of the reference, and a Location combo box specifying the location of the draft angle control along the reference. For Split draft with independently drafted sides (both Constant and Variable), each line contains two combo boxes, Angle 1 and Angle 2, instead of the Angle box. The Adjust angles to keep tangency checkboxForces the resultant draft surfaces to be tangent. Not available for Variable draft (Variable draft always keeps surfaces tangent). If you right-click on the Angles slide-up panel, the shortcut menu contains the following commands:
188/ 375
Add AngleAdds another angle control at a default location and with a most recently used draft angle value. You can modify both the angle value and location. Delete AngleDeletes the selected angle control. Available only if there is more than one angle control specified. Flip AngleFlips the direction of the draft at the selected angle control location. For a Split draft with independently drafted sides, you have to right-click in an individual angle cell for this option to be available. Make ConstantDeletes all the angle controls except the first one. This option is available for Variable draft only.
The Options slide-up panel contains the following elements:
The Exclude loops collectorLets you select the contours to be excluded from draft surfaces. Available only when the selected surface contains more than one loop. The Draft tangent surfaces checkboxIf selected, the system automatically extends the draft to include surfaces tangent to the selected draft surfaces. This checkbox is selected by default. Clear it if the resulting geometry is invalid. The Extend intersect surfaces checkboxIf selected, the system tries to extend the draft to meet the adjacent surface of the model. If the draft cannot extend to the adjacent model surface, then the model surface extends into the draft surface. If neither of these cases exist, or if you did not select the checkbox, the system creates a draft surface that overhangs the edge of the model. The Properties slide-up panel contains the Name text box, where you can type a custom name for the draft feature, to replace the automatically generated name. It also contains the display information about the feature. Shortcut Menus Right-click anywhere in the graphics window to access the Draft shortcut menu, which contains the following commands: icon that you can click to
Solid SurfacesAllows you to select all the solid surfaces of the model. This command is available only when the model has solid surfaces and one of the solid surfaces is already selected. Draft SurfacesActivates the draft surfaces collector and lets you select surfaces to be drafted. You can draft only the surfaces that are formed by tabulated cylinders or planes. You can select any number of individual surfaces or continuous chains of surfaces. The type of the first selected surface, solid or quilt, determines the type of other surfaces that can be selected as draft surfaces for this feature. Draft HingesActivates the draft hinges collector. You can select up to two planes or curve chains. To select a second hinge, you must first split the draft surfaces by a split object. Pull DirectionActivates the pull direction collector. This direction is used to measure the draft angle. You can select a plane, a straight edge or a datum axis, or a coordinate system axis. Split by draft hingeIf this checkbox is selected, the system automatically uses the draft hinge as the split object. Make ConstantThis option is available for Variable draft only. It makes the draft Constant. If you right-click on the round handle connected to a draft angle, the shortcut menu contains the Add Angle and Delete Angle commands. If you right-click on the square handle connected to a draft angle, the shortcut menu contains the Flip Angle command. These commands are the same as when you right-click on the Angles slide-up panel. Another way to add a draft angle is to hold down the CTRL key, click on the round handle connected to a draft angle and drag it along the edge to the desired location.
189/ 375
If you right-click on a pull direction arrow in the graphics window, the shortcut menu contains the Flip command. To Create a Draft Feature This procedure describes the steps necessary to create a basic Draft feature. All other procedures for creating Draft features are based on this one. For information on how to create more complex Draft features, follow the links under See Also. 1. 2. Click in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert > Draft.
Select surfaces that you want to draft. To select multiple surfaces, hold down the CTRL key. You can also use other means of surface collection. To access the Surface Sets dialog box, open the References slide-up panel and click the Details button next to the Draft surfaces collector. Note: You can also select some or all of the draft surfaces before entering the Draft tool.
3.
Specify the draft hinge. Click the Draft hinges collector in the dialog bar to activate it and select a plane or a curve chain located on the draft surfaces. Note: If you do not have a plane or curve to use as a draft hinge, you can pause the Draft tool and create one asynchronously, then resume the Draft tool.
4.
If you selected a plane as a draft hinge, the system automatically uses it to determine the pull direction as well. To change the pull direction, or to specify the pull direction if you are using a curve as a draft Pull direction collector in the dialog bar to activate it and select a plane (in which hinge, click the case the pull direction is normal to this plane), a straight edge, a datum axis, or a coordinate system axis.
5. The system indicates the pull direction by a yellow arrow and displays the preview geometry for a constant draft with the default angle of 1 degree. The default draft angle value is displayed on the screen and in the combo box in the dialog bar. The system also displays two drag handles: a round one, located on the draft hinge or on the draft surface contour, and a square one, connected to the draft angle. 6. To modify the draft angle, type or select the new value in the combo box in the dialog bar. You can also drag the square handle connected to the draft angle, or double-click the draft angle value in the graphic window and type or select the new value. Reverse angle to add or remove material icon in the dialog bar. To flip the draft angle, click the You can also drag the square handle connected to the draft angle to the other side of the part surface to which it is attached, or type a negative draft angle value. To flip the pull direction, click on the pull direction arrow in the graphic window. You can also click the Reverse pull direction icon in the dialog bar or on the Flip button in the References slide-up panel. Note: Flipping the pull direction affects the direction of the draft angle. 9. Use other options in the Draft User Interface to create more complex draft geometry, if necessary. For more information, follow the appropriate link under See Also. in the dialog bar.
7.
8.
10. When satisfied with the feature geometry, click Example: Creating a Basic Draft
This example shows creating a basic Draft feature to add a draft angle of 5 degrees to all sides of the part shown in the following illustration.
190/ 375
1. 2.
Click
in the Engineering Features toolbar.
Select any side surface. Because all the side surfaces are tangent to each other, the draft automatically extends to all the surfaces around the part. Click the Draft hinges collector in the dialog bar to activate it and select the top plane as the draft hinge. The system automatically uses it to determine the pull direction as well, and displays the preview geometry, as shown in the next illustration.
3.
4.
Type 5 in the combo box in the dialog bar. The system updates the preview geometry, as shown in the following illustration.
5. It is now easy to see that the draft removes material from the part surfaces. To flip the draft angle, click the Reverse angle to add or remove material icon in the dialog bar. The draft now adds material, as shown in the next illustration.
6.
Click
to create the Draft feature. The final geometry is shown in the following illustration.
Example: Excluding Surface Loops The Exclude loops collector in the Options slide-up panel lets you select the contours to be excluded from draft surfaces. In the example shown in the following illustration, the two contours are considered a single surface because they were formed by splitting a single solid surface with a cut.
To draft only one of the contours, activate the Exclude loops collector and pre-highlight the surface edges (the loop) that you want to exclude, as shown in the next illustration.
191/ 375
Select the loop on the left, and it is excluded from the draft. Only the portion on the right is drafted, as shown in the following illustration.
Example: Extending Intersect Surfaces You can use the Extend intersect surfaces checkbox in the Options slide-up panel to extend the draft to meet the adjacent surface of the model. If the draft cannot extend to the adjacent model surface, then the model surface extends into the draft surface. If neither of these cases exist, or if you did not select the checkbox, the system creates a draft surface that overhangs the edge of the model. Note: The Extend intersect surfaces is not applicable in following cases:
When the Split options is set to Split by split object, and one draft hinge is selected, and the Side options is set to Draft sides independently. When the Split options is set to Split by split object, and two draft hinges are selected. In the following example, a draft is added to a cylindrical protrusion near the edge of a box.
The draft in the illustration below is created without using the Extend intersect surfaces option. The draft surface overhangs the model surface. The model surface is not extended to the draft, and the draft is not extended to the model. The model face that is overlapped by the draft keeps the same dimensions.
The draft below was created with the Extend option. The surface that would be overlapped by the draft is extended so that the draft intersects that surface.
In the next example, instead, a draft is added to the side surface of the box near the cylindrical protrusion. If the draft is created without using the Extend intersect surfaces option, the surface of the protrusion overhangs the draft surface.
192/ 375
If the draft is created with the Extend intersect surfaces option, the model surface is extended so that the draft intersects that surface.
In the final example, in the part shown below, a draft is added to the highlighted side surface of a box near a conical protrusion.
If the draft is created without using the Extend intersect surfaces option, the surface of the protrusion overhangs the draft surface.
If the draft is created with the Extend intersect surfaces option, then the draft surface is extended so that the draft intersects the conical surface of the model.
To Create a Variable Draft This procedure is based on the procedure for creating a basic Draft feature. For detailed information on how to create a basic Draft feature, follow the link under See Also. 1. Click in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert > Draft. Create a basic Draft feature by selecting the draft surfaces, the draft hinge, and the pull direction. The system displays the preview geometry for a constant draft with the default angle of 1 degree. The default draft angle value is displayed on the screen and in the combo box in the dialog bar. The system also displays two drag handles: a round one located on the draft hinge and a square one connected to the draft angle. The round handle controls the location of the draft angle application; next to it, the system displays the location factor along the reference edge of the draft surface. The square handle controls the draft angle value. To create an additional draft angle control, right-click on round handle connected to a draft angle and select the Add Angle command from the shortcut menu. The system adds another pair of drag handles at a default location, usually halfway between the current draft angle location and the endpoint of the reference edge (or the adjacent draft angle location, if there is one). The default draft angle value is the same as the current one. To modify the location of the new draft angle, click on the round handle and drag it along the edge, or double-click the location value in the graphic window and type or select the new value. To modify the draft angle, type or select the new value in the combo box in the dialog bar. You can also drag the square handle connected to the draft angle, or double-click the draft angle value in the graphic window and type or select the new value. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to create additional draft angle controls, as necessary.
2.
3. 4.
5.
193/ 375
6.
When satisfied with the feature geometry, click Notes:
in the dialog bar.
o o o o
You can use the Angles slide-up panel to add or delete draft angles and modify their values and locations. Another way to add a draft angle is to hold down the CTRL key, click on the round handle connected to a draft angle and drag it along the edge to the desired location. To revert to a constant draft, use the Make Constant command on the shortcut menu. It deletes all the draft angles except the first one. If you are using a datum plane or a quilt as a draft hinge, the additional draft angle controls are located on the draft surface contour and projected along the Pull Direction to the intersection with the draft hinge. You can drag the draft angle control along the draft surface perimeter to be located on a different edge, if desired. The location value reflects the position along the current reference edge.
Example: Creating a Variable Draft This example shows creating a Draft feature with a variable draft angle. The original part shown in the following illustration.
1. 2. 3.
Click
Select the side surface (1) as the draft surface. Click the Draft hinges collector in the dialog bar to activate it and select the top plane (2) as the draft hinge. The system automatically uses it to determine the pull direction as well, and displays the preview geometry, as shown in the next illustration.
4.
Type 15 in the combo box in the dialog bar and click the Reverse angle to add or remove material icon. The system updates the preview geometry, as shown in the following illustration.
5. Right-click on any round handle connected to a draft angle and select Add Angle. The system adds another draft angle control location, as shown in the next illustration.
194/ 375
6.
Double-click on the second draft angle value and change it to 5. The new preview geometry is shown in the following illustration.
7.
Click on the round handle of the first draft angle control (the one that is at the 0.5 location) and drag it to the 0.25 location, as shown in the next illustration.
8.
Click
To Create a Split Draft This procedure is based on the procedure for creating a basic Draft feature. For detailed information on how to create a basic Draft feature, follow the link under See Also. 1. in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert > Draft. Create a basic Draft feature Click by selecting the draft surfaces, the draft hinge, and the pull direction. The system displays the preview geometry for a constant draft with the default angle of 1 degree. Modify the draft angle value, as necessary. Open the Split slide-up panel and select an option from the Split options menu:
2.
o o
Split by draft hingeSplit the draft surfaces along the draft hinge. Split by split objectSplit the draft surfaces along a different line or curve. If you select this option, the system activates the Split object collector.
3. If you are splitting by a split object, select or sketch a split object. You can select a sketched curve, a plane, or a quilt intersecting the draft surfaces. To sketch a split object, click the Define button next to the Split object collector and sketch a single continuous chain of entities on the draft surface or surfaces. 4. Select the desired option from the Side options menu:
Draft sides independentlySpecify two independent draft angles for each side of the drafted surface. If you use this option, the system adds to the dialog bar a combo box with the draft angle value for the second side and an icon for flipping the draft angle direction for the second side. Draft sides dependentlySpecify a single draft angle, with the second side drafted in the opposite direction. This option is available only if the draft surfaces are split by the draft hinge, or for a split draft with two hinges. Draft first side onlyDraft only the first side of the surface (determined by the positive pull direction from the draft hinge), with the second side remaining in the neutral position. Draft second side onlyDraft only the second side of the surface, with the first side remaining in the neutral position.
o o
195/ 375
Depending whether you are splitting by the draft hinge or by a different object, as well as on the split object type, not all of the options may be applicable for your particular draft configuration. 5. When satisfied with the feature geometry, click in the dialog bar.
Example: Creating a Split Draft This example shows creating a Split Draft feature. The original part is shown in the following illustration. It consists of a solid extruded feature, created symmetrically on both sides of the TOP datum plane, with rounds on all the vertical side edges.
1. 2.
Click
Select any side surface. Because all the side surfaces are tangent to each other, the draft automatically extends to all the surfaces around the part. Click the Draft hinges collector in the dialog bar to activate it and select the TOP datum plane as the draft hinge. Note that this datum plane is exactly in the middle of the part, because the extruded solid feature has been created symmetrically on both sides of the sketching plane. The system automatically uses this plane to determine the pull direction as well, and displays the preview geometry. Open the Split slide-up panel and select Split by draft hinge from the Split options menu. Select Draft sides dependently from the Split side menu. Reverse angle to add or remove material Type 10 in the combo box in the dialog bar. Click the icon to the right of the combo box to change the draft side. The system updates the preview geometry, as shown in the next illustration.
3.
4. 5. 6.
7.
Click
Example: Creating a Split Draft Using Sketch This example shows creating a Split Draft feature using a sketched split curve. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
196/ 375
1. 2. 3.
Click
Select the two opposite side surfaces (1 and 2) as the draft surface. Draft hinges collector in the dialog bar to activate it and select the top plane (3) as Click the the draft hinge. The system automatically uses it to determine the pull direction as well, and displays the preview geometry, as shown in the next illustration.
4. 5.
Open the Split slide-up panel and select Split by split object from the Split options menu. Click the Define button next to the Split object collector, select the side surface (1) as the surface to sketch on, and sketch a single continuous chain of entities, as shown in blue in the following illustration. Exit Sketcher.
6.
By default, the two sides are drafted independently. Type 4 in the first combo box in the dialog bar and 10 in the second combo box, which controls the draft angle for the second side. Click the Reverse angle to add or remove material icons to the right of each combo box to change the draft side. The system updates the preview geometry, as shown in the next illustration.
7.
Click
To Create a Split Draft with Two Hinges When you create a split draft with two hinges, each side of the draft surfaces rotates with respect to its own hinge. The sides can then be drafted either independently or dependently. 1. 2. Click in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert > Draft.
Select surfaces that you want to draft.
197/ 375
3. 4. 5.
Specify the first hinge. Click the Draft hinges collector in the dialog bar to activate it and select a plane or a curve chain located on the draft surfaces. Specify the pull direction. The system displays the preview geometry for a constant draft with the default angle of 1 degree. Open the Split slide-up panel and select Split by split object from the Split options menu. Select a quilt intersecting the draft surfaces as a split object. The system displays the preview geometry for a split draft with sides drafted independently, with the default draft angle of 1 degree for the second side. Both sides of the draft surfaces are rotated about the first hinge. Draft hinges collector in the dialog bar to activate it, hold Specify the second hinge. Click the down the CTRL key, and select another plane or curve chain. The preview geometry changes as the second side of drafted surfaces is rotated about the second hinge. Modify the draft angle values, as necessary. You can also select the Draft sides dependently option from the Side options menu, which becomes available after you specify the second hinge. When satisfied with the feature geometry, click in the dialog bar.
6.
7.
8.
Example: Creating a Split Draft with Two Hinges This example describes creating a split draft with two hinges. The original part is shown in the following illustration.
1. 2.
Click
in the Engineering Features toolbar, or click Insert > Draft.
Select the side surface of the cylinder as the draft surface. The cylinder consists of two halves; the second half is automatically added to the draft surfaces, because by default draft is extended to tangent surfaces. Draft hinges collector and select the top edge chain of the Specify the first hinge. Click the cylinder (1). This chain consists of two edges, corresponding to the two halves of the cylindrical surface. To select the edges as a chain, select one edge, hold down the SHIFT key, select the same edge again to indicate that you are adding to this chain, then select the second edge. The Draft hinges collector shows one chain. Click the Pull direction collector and select the top of the cylinder to define the pull direction.
3.
4. 5.
Open the Split slide-up panel and select Split by split object from the Split options menu. Select quilt (2) as the split object. Draft hinges collector to activate it, press the CTRL key, Specify the second hinge. Click the and select one of the bottom edges of the cylinder (3). Release the CTRL key, hold down the SHIFT key, select the same bottom edge again to indicate that you are adding to this chain, and select the second bottom edge, corresponding to the second half of the cylindrical surface. The Draft hinges collector now shows two chains. Adjust the draft angles for both sides. The resulting geometry, with sides drafted independently, is shown in the following illustration.
6.
7.
198/ 375
8.
After you specified the second hinge, the Draft sides dependently option becomes available in the Side options menu. If you select this option, the resulting geometry is shown in the next illustration.
Note: In this example, instead of selecting the curve chains, you could have selected the top and bottom surfaces of the cylinder as the first and second hinge, respectively. About the Round Feature Pro/ENGINEER enables you to create and modify rounds. Rounds are a type of edge treatment feature in which a radius is added to an edge or edges, an edge chain, or between surfaces. Surfaces can be solid model surfaces or traditional Pro/ENGINEER zero-thickness quilts and surfaces. To create rounds, you define one or more round sets. A round set is an organizational unit containing one or more round pieces (round geometry). After you specify round placement references, Pro/ENGINEER uses default attributes, radius values, and default transitions that best fit the referenced geometry to create the round. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the round in the graphics window enabling you to create and modify both round pieces and transitions before feature creation. Note that the default settings accommodate most modeling cases. However, you can define the round sets or transitions to achieve the preferred round geometry. Anatomy of a Round A round consists of the following items:
SetsRound pieces (geometry) created pertaining to the placement references. Round pieces consist of unique attributes, geometric references, and one or more radii. TransitionsFiller geometry that connects round pieces. Transitions are located where round pieces intersect or terminate. Pro/ENGINEER uses default transitions during the initial round creation and provides many transition types allowing you to create and modify transitions. Round Sets and Transitions Set Mode Display Two edge references are selected for the round set. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the two round pieces and the radius value. Transition Mode Display All transitions for the entire round feature are displayed. Pro/ENGINEER displays the two round pieces for context.
1 Round piece 2 Edge reference
1 Transition 2 Round piece
199/ 375
About Round Types and References Round Types Using Pro/ENGINEER, you can create the following round types: Constant The round piece has a constant radius Variable The round piece has multiple radii
Round Driven by a Curve The radius of the round is driven by the datum curve.
Full The Full round selected surface. replaces the
1 Datum curve Round Placement References The types of rounds that you can create are determined by the types of placement references that you select. The following table describes each round reference and lists the round types that you can create using each reference: Reference Type Edges edge chains or Definition Example Round Type
Place a round by selecting one or more edges, or by using an edge chain. The surfaces bordering the edge reference form the rolling tangent attachment for the round. Note: The propagates round across
Two edges
Constant, Variable, Through Curve, Full.* * For a Full round, you convert two round pieces within a round set.
1 Edge reference 2 Round piece (with radius value)
Note: The two edges must share a common surface.
200/ 375
tangent neighbors until it encounters a break tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the round does not propagate across tangent neighbors.
Edge chain
surface.
1 Edge chain reference 2 Round piece (with radius value) 3 Existing round geometry Surface to Edge Place a round by selecting a surface first and then an edge. The round remains tangent to the surface. The edge reference does not maintain tangency. 1 Surface reference 2 Edge reference 3 Round piece Surface to Surface Place a round by selecting two surfaces. The edges of the round will remain tangent to the reference surfaces. Two surfaces Constant, Variable, Through Curve, and Full* * For a Full round, you select a third surface as the Driving Surface. This surface determines the location and sometimes the size of the round. Surface and edge Constant, Variable, and Full.
1 Surface reference 2 Surface reference 3 Round piece (with radius value) About Creation Methods and Cross-Section Shapes
Pro/ENGINEER uses default attributes to create the round geometry (round pieces). These default attributes include the Rolling Ball creation method and the Circular cross-section shape. You can change these attributes at any time in your design session to achieve the preferred round geometry using the Sets slide-up panel located on the Dashboard. Creation Methods Creation methods are the way in which Pro/ENGINEER creates the round geometry. Different creation methods result in different round geometry. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following creation methods:
Rolling BallThe round is created by rolling a spherical ball along the surfaces to which it would naturally stay tangent. This is selected by default.
201/ 375
Normal To SpineThe round is created by sweeping an arc or conic cross-section normal to a spine. You must select a spine for this type of round. Note that this option is not available for Full rounds. Cross-Section Shapes Cross-section shapes help define the round geometry. As with creation methods, different shapes result in different round geometry. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following cross-section shapes:
CircularPro/ENGINEER creates a circular cross section. This is selected by default. ConicPro/ENGINEER creates a conical cross section. You control the sharpness of the conical shape by using a conic parameter (from 0.05 to 0.95). You can create two types of Conic rounds:
ConicThe Conic round is created with dependent legs. You can modify the length of one leg and the corresponding leg automatically snaps to the same length. The dependent Conic attribute is available only for Constant and Variable round sets. D1 x D2 ConicThe D1 x D2 Conic round is created with independent legs. You can modify the length of each leg independently providing a range of Conic round shapes. If you want to reverse the leg lengths, simply use the flip button. The independent Conic attribute is available only for Constant round sets.
About the Round User Interface Feature Icon The Round tool displays the following icons:
Indicates a round feature in the Model Tree and it is displayed in the dashboard to indicate that the Round tool is open. This icon also identifies the Round tool on the Insert menu and on the Feature toolbar. Dialog Bar The Round dialog bar displays the following options: Set Mode
default.
Activates Set mode enabling you to work with round sets. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by Options for rounds with a Circular cross-sectional shape (default setting):
Radius boxControls the distance of the radius for the current Constant round. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. This option is available only for Constant rounds. Radius Reference collectorIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the distance reference for the current radius in the active round set. This collector is available if you snap a handle to a reference or select Reference from the Distance box in the Sets slide-up panel (left box under Radius table). This collector corresponds to the Radius column collector in the Radius table. Options for rounds with a Conic cross-sectional shape:
Conic Parameter boxControls the sharpness of the current Conic round. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. This box corresponds to the Conic Parameter box in the Sets slide-up panel. Conic Distance boxControls the conic distance of the current Conic round. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. This box corresponds to the D column distance box on the Sets slide-up panel Radius table. This box is not available for D1 x D2 Conic rounds. Conic Distance collectorsIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the distance reference for the current radius in the active Conic round set. The collectors are available if you snap a handle to a reference or select Reference from the Distance box under Radius table on the Sets slide-up
202/ 375
panel. The collectors correspond to the D (Conic), or D1, D2 (D1 x D2 Conic) column collectors in the Radius table.
Reverses the distance of a D1 x D2 Conic round. Placement Ambiguity Option
Next Solution buttonDisplays each mutually exclusive group of round pieces enabling you to view them and select one. Pro/ENGINEER displays this button only if the round set has multiple mutually exclusive groups from the same reference. Transition Mode
Activates Transition mode enabling you to define all transitions for the round feature. Transition Type boxDisplays the default transition type for the current transition and contain a list of valid transition types based on the geometrical context. This box enables you to change the transition type for the current transition. The following is a complete list of transition types. Note: Not all transition types listed will be available for a given context:
o o o o o o o o
DefaultUses the default transition type assigned by Pro/ENGINEER. The transition type appears in parenthesis. Stop Case 1Assigns stop references generated by Pro/ENGINEER. Stop Case 2Assigns stop references generated by Pro/ENGINEER. Stop Case 3Assigns stop references generated by Pro/ENGINEER. Stop at ReferenceEnables you to assign stop references for the active Stop transition. The Stop reference collector (located in the Transitions slide-up panel and the dialog bar) activates. BlendBlends between two round pieces. The tangent round geometry stops at sharp edges. ContinueContinues the round geometry between two round pieces. The tangent round geometry does not stop at sharp edges. IntersectExtends two or more overlapping round pieces towards each other until they merge forming a sharp boundary. This command is available only if the active round set contains two or more overlapping round pieces. Corner SphereRounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping round pieces with a spherical corner. PatchCreates a patched surface at the location where three or four round pieces overlap. Round Only 1Creates a transition using compounded round geometry. Round Only 2Creates a transition using compounded round geometry
o o o o
Capped check boxCreates end surfaces to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry. This check box is available only if you select all of the following: a transition type (other than Default), valid geometry, and the Surface or New quilt attachment types from the Options slide-up panel. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this check box by default. You can also use Capped from the shortcut menu. Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the round pieces cannot be capped and the Capped check box is ignored. This check box caps the gaps only of the active transition while the Create end surfaces check box located on the Options slide-up panel caps all round piece ends for the entire round feature. The dialog bar check box overrides the slide-up panel check box enabling you to cap the gaps of the active transition even if you decide not to cap all of the round piece ends for the round feature.
203/ 375
You cannot cap rounds between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
Corner Sphere Transition Options R boxControls the sphere radius for the active Corner Sphere transition. You can type a new radius value or select a most recently used value from the list. L1, L2, L3 boxesControls the length for the active Corner Sphere transition. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. These value boxes are available only if you select the Corner Sphere transition type. Patch Transition Options
Optional surface collectorIndicates that a valid surface reference has been selected to place a fillet for the active Patch transition. To activate this collector, you can either click in it, use the Patch Optional Surface shortcut menu command, or click in the Optional surface collector in the Transitions slide-up panel. Radius boxControls the fillet radius for the active Patch transition. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. This box is available after the Optional surface collector contains a surface reference. Stop Transition Options
Stop reference collectorIndicates that valid stop references have been selected for the active Stop at Reference transition. To activate this collector, you can either click in it, use the Stop References shortcut menu command, or click in the Stop references collector in the Transitions slide-up panel. Note that you must select the Stop at Reference transition type to display this option. Stop reference boxContains the following options enabling you to stop the active round piece. Note: To display the Stop reference box, you must select the Stop at reference transition type either a vertex or a datum point located on the spine of the active round set as the valid stop reference.
o o
PointStops the round set at a plane that passes through the selected stop reference and is oriented normal to an edge with the stop reference. IsolinesStops the round set at a plane that passes through the stop reference and normal to the round surface.
Slide-up Panels The Round dashboard tabs activate the following slide-up panels: Sets Slide-up Panel You must activate Set mode to use this panel. The Sets slide-up panel contains the following options:
Sets listContains all round sets for the current round feature enabling you to add, remove, or select a round set for modification. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the active round set. The Sets list contains the following:
o o o
SetIndicates a round set. New SetAdds a new round set and makes it active. You can also use the Add Set shortcut menu command from the graphics window.
Cross-section shape boxControls the cross-sectional shape for the active round set. The box contains the following shapes:
o o
CircularCreates a round set with a circular cross-sectional shape. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. ConicCreates a round set with a conic cross-sectional shape and dependent dimensions (x- and yaxes). You can use this option for Constant and Variable round sets.
204/ 375
D1 x D2 ConicCreates a round set with a conic cross-sectional shape and independent dimensions (x- and y-axes). This option is available only for Constant round sets.
Conic Parameter boxControls the sharpness of the current Conic round. You can type a new value or select a most recently used value from the list. The default value is 0.50. This box is available only if the Conic or D1 x D2 Conic cross-sectional shapes are selected. Creation method boxControls the creation method for the active round set. The box contains the following creation methods:
Rolling BallCreates a round using the Rolling Ball method. Pro/ENGINEER selects this option by default. Normal to spineCreates a round using the Normal to Spine method. You can use this options only for Constant and Variable round sets.
Full Round buttonConverts the active round set to a Full round or allows a third surface to drive a surface-to-surface Full round. The Driving surface collector activates if it is required, such as with a surface-to-surface round. Notice that you can click this button again to restore the round to its previous state. The Full Round button is available only if you select valid Full round references and both the Circular cross-sectional shape and the Rolling Ball creation method. This button is not available if you select the Through Curve button. The Full Round button corresponds to the Full Round shortcut menu command. Through Curve buttonAllows the radius of the active round to be driven by the selected curve to create a round driven by a curve. The Driving curve collector activates. Notice that you can click this button again to restore the round to its previous state. The Through Curve button is available only if you select valid round references and both the Circular cross-sectional shape and the Rolling Ball creation method (both are default settings). This command is not available if you select the Full Round command. This button corresponds to the Through Curve shortcut menu command. References collectorContains the valid references that you selected for the round set. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the References shortcut menu command. Secondary collectorsThe following collectors activate depending on the active round type:
Driving curveContains the reference for the curve that drives the round radius to create a round driven by a curve. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the Through Curve shortcut menu command. Note: You can simply snap (SHIFT+click and drag) the radius to a curve to satisfy this collector.
o o
Driving surfaceContains the reference for the surface to be replaced by a Full round. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the Remove Surface shortcut menu command. SpineContains the spine reference for Normal to Spine or Variable surface-to-surface round sets. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the Spine shortcut menu command. DetailsOpens the Chain dialog box so that you can modify chain properties.
Radius tableControls the distance and location of the radius for the active round set. The Radius table contains the following options. This table is not available for Full rounds or rounds driven by a curve (Through Curve).
o o
# columnLists the number of radii for the active round set. Pro/ENGINEER displays one radius per row and highlights the current radius. Notice that the # column always contains at least one radius. Radius columnControls the distance of each radius for the active round set. This column contains values and references. You can type a new distance value or select a most recently used value from the list. Notice that the Radius column always contains at least one value or reference. Note: This column is not available for Conic rounds (see D and D1, D2 columns below).
205/ 375
Location columnControls the placement of each radius for the active Variable round set. This column contains ratios and references. The Location column is not available for Constant rounds and D1 x D2 Conic rounds. D columnControls the conic distance of each radius for the active Conic round set. This column contains values and references, and is available only for Conic rounds. D1, D2 columnsControls the conic distance of each radius for the active D1 x D2 Conic round set. These columns contain values and references, and are available only for D1 x D2 Conic rounds.
o o
You can use the following shortcut menu commands from the Radius table:
o o
Add RadiusAdds a radius to the active round set. DeleteDeletes the current radius. Note: You cannot use this command to delete radii that Pro/ENGINEER places at the ends of round pieces.
Make ConstantDeletes radii that Pro/ENGINEER places at the ends of round pieces.
Distance boxControls the distance of the current radius (displayed in the Radius table) for active round set. This box is located under the Radius table (left) and contains the following options. Note that two Distance boxes are appear for D1 x D2 Conic rounds. The second box replaces the Location box.
o o o
ValueSets the distance for the current radius by using a numerical value. The distance value displays in the Radius table. ReferenceSets the distance for the current radius by using a reference. This option activates a collector in the Radius table that contains the reference information.
Location boxControls the placement location of the current radius (displayed in the Radius table) for the active round set. This box is located under the Radius table (right) and contains the following options. The Location box is available only for Conic rounds with more than one radius and for Variable rounds. Note: The active round set must contain more than the default radii (which are automatically placed at the round piece ends and do not contain anchors) for the box to appear.
o o
RatioSets the location of the current radius by using a numerical value. The location ratio displays in the Radius table (Location column). ReferenceSets the location of the current radius by using a reference. This option activates a collector in the Radius table (Location column) that contains the reference information.
Transitions Slide-up Panel You must activate the Transition mode to use this panel. The Transitions slide-up panel contains the following options:
Transitions listContains all user-defined transitions for the entire round feature enabling you to modify a transition. Pro/ENGINEER does not list default transitions. You can view the default transition type for the active transition from the Transition Type box on the dialog bar or from the shortcut menu. To activate the Transitions list, you can either click in it or use the Transition Selection shortcut menu command. Stop references collectorContain the references for the active Stop at Reference transition. This collector is available only if you assign the Stop at Reference transition type to the active Stop transition. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the Stop References shortcut menu command. Optional surface collectorContain the references to place a fillet for the active Patch transition. This collector is available only if you assign the Patch transition type to the active transition. This collector corresponds to the Optional surface collector in the dialog bar. You can click in either collector to activate them or use the Patch Optional Surface shortcut menu command.
206/ 375
Pieces Slide-up Panel Round piece management is performed using the Pieces slide-up panel. You can view all round sets for the round feature, view all round pieces in the current round set, trim, extend, or exclude these round pieces, and address placement ambiguity. The Pieces slide-up panel contains the following options:
o o
Sets listLists all of the round sets for the entire round feature. The Sets list contains the following: SetIndicates a round set. New SetAdds a new round set and makes it active. You can also use the Add Set shortcut menu command from the graphics window.
Pieces tableLists all of the round pieces for the current round set and indicates their current state as one of the following:
IncludedDoes the following: Indicates that the round pieces are included in the current round set (selected by default). Includes the selected round piece that is in an excluded state. Restores a trimmed or extended round piece to its original state.
ExcludedExcludes the selected round piece that is in an included state. Note that this option is available only if the current round set contains two or more round pieces that use one explicit placement reference. This can occur if the round geometry breaks due to non-tangent chains. It can also occur if a single round piece cannot be created at a certain radius value. For example, a round that is too large to sweep around a corner. EditedIndicates that the selected round piece was trimmed or extended.
You can also use these options from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. Note that All included is available only from this shortcut menu. All included includes all of the round pieces for the current round set that are in an excluded state. This option also restores all trimmed or extended round pieces for the current round set to their original state. Options Slide-up Panel The Options slide-up panel contains the following options:
SolidCreates the round feature as a solid that intersects the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as round set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select solids as round set references. SurfaceCreates the round feature as a surface that does not intersect the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as round set references. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default. New quiltCreates the round feature as a new quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface round set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select different surface quilts or both a solid and a quilt as round set references. Same quiltCreates the round feature as a surface that merges with the reference quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface round set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select round set references from the same surface quilt. Create end surfacesCreates end surfaces to cap all of the round piece ends of the round feature. This check box is available only if you select valid geometry and the Surface or New quilt attachment types. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default. Note:
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the round piece ends cannot be capped.
207/ 375
This check box is different from the Capped check box on the dialog bar and the Capped shortcut menu command. The latter two enable you to create end surfaces to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry.
Properties Slide-up Panel The Properties slide-up panel contains the following options:
Name boxDisplays the current round feature name enabling you to rename it. Provides detailed round feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Shortcut Menus You can use the following shortcut (right-click) menu commands to quickly perform an action: Set Mode: Collector Commands
ReferencesActivates the References collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel) enabling you to select a placement reference for the round. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. This command is available if another collector is present. Driving CurveActivates the Driving curve collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel) enabling you to select a reference curve to drive the radius of the round. This command is available if you snap a radius to a curve, click the Through Curve button on the Sets slide-up panel button, or select the Through Curve shortcut menu command. SpineActivates the Spine collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel) enabling you to select a spine curve reference. This command is available if you use the Normal to spine round creation method option (located in the Sets slide-up panel) or if you create a surface-to-surface Variable round. Round Reference PointActivates the Radius collectors (located in the Sets slide-up panel Radius table and in the dialog bar) enabling you to size the current round radius by snapping to a reference. This command is available only when the highlighted radius in the table is driven by a reference. Location ReferenceActivates the Location collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel Radius table) enabling you to relocate the current round radius by snapping to a reference. This command is available only when the highlighted radius location in the table is driven by a reference Driving SurfaceActivates the Driving surface collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel) enabling you to use the selected surface to drive the location and size of a Full round. This command is available when the Driving surface collector is present. ClearClears the selected reference from the active collector. Set Mode: Mode Command
Show TransitionsSwitches to Transition mode. Set Mode: Round Set Commands
Make ConstantResets the active round to be driven by a single radius. Make VariableAdds a new radius to the active round set. If you are creating a surface-to-surface round, the Spine collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel) activates. Through CurveAllows the radius of the active round to be driven by the selected curve to create a round driven by a curve. The Driving curve collector (located in the Sets slide-up) activates. A check mark appears next to this shortcut menu command indicating that this round type has been selected. Notice that you can click this command again to restore the round to its previous state. The Through Curve command is available only if you select valid round references and both the Circular cross-sectional shape and the Rolling Ball creation method in the Sets slide-up panel (default settings). This command is not available if you select the Full Round command. The Through Curve command corresponds to the Through Curve button (located in the Sets slide-up panel).
208/ 375
Full RoundConverts the active round set to a Full round or allows a third surface to drive a surface-to-surface Full round. The Driving surface collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel) activates if it is required, such as with a surface-to-surface Full round. A check mark appears next to this shortcut menu command indicating that this round type has been selected. Notice that you can click this command again to restore the round to its previous state. The Full Round command is available only if you select valid Full round references and both the Circular cross-sectional shape and the Rolling Ball creation method in the Sets slide-up panel. This command is not available if you select the Through Curve command. The Full Round command corresponds to the Full Round button (located in the Sets slide-up panel). Add SetAdds a new round set and makes it active. Delete SetDeletes the active round set. You must place your pointer over a handle in the graphics window and right-click to use the following round set modification commands:
Add RadiusAdds a radius to the active round set. This command is not available for D1 x D2 Conic rounds. IndependentSelect this (check mark displayed) to create a D1 x D2 Conic round enabling you to adjust the dimensions independently (corresponds to the D1 x D2 Conic cross-sectional shape in the Sets slide-up panel). If it is not selected (check mark not displayed), the Conic round is dependent (same as Conic cross-sectional shape in the Sets panel). This command is available only for constant Conic rounds. FlipReverses the distance of a D1 x D2 Conic round. Set Mode: Collector Reference Commands You must place your pointer in a collector and right-click to use the following commands:
RemoveRemoves the selected reference from the active collector. Remove AllRemoves all references from the active collector. The collector must contain multiple references to use this command. InformationOpens the INFORMATION WINDOW to display detailed information about the selected reference in the collector. This command is unavailable for chain and surface references. Transition Mode: List and Collector Commands
Transition SelectionActivate the Transitions list (located in the Transitions slide-up panel) enabling you to select a user-defined transition. This command is available if a transition collector is displayed. Stop ReferencesActivates the Stop references collectors (located in the Transitions slide-up panel and in the dialog bar) enabling you to assign stop references to the active Stop transition. Patch Optional SurfaceActivate the Optional surface collectors (located in the Transitions slide-up panel and in the dialog bar) enabling you to select a surface reference to place a fillet for the active Patch transition. This command is available only if you select a three-sided corner transition and assign the Patch transition type to it. ClearClears the selected reference from the active collector. Transition Mode: Mode Command
Back to SetsSwitches to Set mode. Transition Mode: Transition Commands
Transition TypeThese commands are identical to the transition types that are available from the Transition Type box on the dialog bar. You can find a complete list of transition types in the dialog bar section.
209/ 375
The following transition commands enable you to modify a transition:
Delete TransitionDeletes the active transition. Make TransitionCreates a transition by selecting round piece edges associated with a deleted transition. CappedCreates end surfaces to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry. You can select this command for each active transition that you want to cap. This command is available only if you select all of the following: a transition type (other than Default), valid geometry, and the Surface or New quilt attachment types from the Options slide-up panel. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this command by default. The Capped command corresponds to the Capped check box located on the dialog bar. Collector Reference Commands You must place your cursor in a collector and right-click to use the following commands:
RemoveRemoves the selected reference from the active collector. Remove AllRemoves all references from the active collector. The collector must contain multiple references to use this command. InformationOpens the INFORMATION WINDOW to display detailed information about the selected reference in the collector. This command is unavailable for chain and surface references. Tip:
When using a most recently used box, you can always select Default from the list, enabling Pro/ENGINEER to determine the appropriate value for your geometrical context. Always place your pointer in the collector or in the most recently used box and right-click to use the shortcut menu commands for those options. To Create a Constant Round 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the round. Notice that the round propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a Oneby-One chain, the round does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active round set or to remove a reference. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Round. The Round tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER Click displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. To define a radius, drag the radius handle to the preferred distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value in the distance value box or select a most recently used value from the list on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the distance boxes in the Radius table (Radius column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
2.
3.
4.
5. Tip:
You can also use the Make Constant shortcut menu command (from either the graphics window or from the Radius table on the Sets slide-up panel) to convert a Variable round to a Constant round. If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box.
210/ 375
To quickly define a radius, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To easily create a round as you work in the graphics window, select edge references, right-click and select Round Edges from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER opens the Round tool enabling you to continue working with the round. Note that this command is available only if you select edge references. To Create a Variable Round Note: If you are using two surfaces to create a Variable round, refer to To Create a Surface-to-Surface Variable Round under See Also. 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the round. Notice that the round propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a Oneby-One chain, the round does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active round set or to remove references. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Round. The Round tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER Click displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Place your cursor over the radius anchor, right-click and select Add Radius from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER copies the radius and its value and places each radius at each ends of the round pieces. Note: These are the default radii for a Variable round. These radii do not contain anchors and cannot be relocated. To delete these default radii, you must use Make Constant from the shortcut menu. This command converts the active round set from Variable to Constant. To add another radius, place your cursor over the handle of the radius that you want to copy, rightclick and select Add Radius from the shortcut menu. These additional radii contain anchors. You can drag an anchor or snap it to a datum point reference to relocate the radius. Note: You can select Delete from the shortcut menu to remove the radius. To define a radius, drag the radius handle to the preferred distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value in the distance value box or select a most recently used distance value from the list in the Radius table (Radius column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. Tip:
You can also use the Add Radius, Delete, and Make Constant shortcut menu commands from the Radius table on the Sets slide-up panel. You can also use Make Variable from the shortcut menu to convert an existing Constant round to a Variable round. If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box.
211/ 375
To quickly define a radius, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To easily create a round as you work in the graphics window, select edge references, right-click and select Round Edges from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER opens the Round tool enabling you to continue working with the round. Note that this command is available only if you select edge references. To Relocate a Radius Using a Reference In addition to dragging an anchor or typing and selecting location ratios, Pro/ENGINEER enables you to relocate a radius by snapping to a vertex or to a datum point. 1. 2. 3. Select the placement references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
In the graphics window, select the radius anchor of a Variable round that you want to relocate. Note: You cannot relocate radii that Pro/ENGINEER places at the ends of round pieces. Press SHIFT and drag the radius anchor to snap it to a vertex or to a datum point. As you drag, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights the reference as your cursor moves over it. This enables you to target the correct reference. Pro/ENGINEER selects Reference from the Sets slide-up panel Distance box and populates the Radius table Location collector with the reference information. To relocate the radius, press SHIFT and drag the anchor to unsnap it from the reference. You can then either snap it to another reference, drag the anchor to a preferred location, or type or select a new location ratio from the Location column in the Sets slide-up panel. The radius is relocated. You can continue to work with rounds or click create the round and close the Round tool. enabling Pro/ENGINEER to
4.
5.
Tip:
If you prefer to relocate a radius from the Sets slide-up panel, simply select the radius to relocate in the Radius table # column and select Reference from the Location box (located to the right under the table). After the location collector activates, select the vertex or datum point from the graphics window. You can also activate this collector using the Location Reference shortcut menu command. To quickly identify a radius from the Sets slide-up panel, place your cursor over a radius number on the Radius table # column. Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights each radius enabling you to select it. If you want to use a datum point, but one is not present, you can create one without closing the Round tool by opening one of the Datum Point tools on the Feature Toolbar. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Create a Surface-to-Surface Variable Round Note: If you are not using two surfaces to create a Variable round, refer to To Create a Variable Round under See Also. 1. In the graphics window, select two surface references. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active round set or to remove references.
212/ 375
2.
Click on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Round. The Round tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Right-click in the graphics window and select Make Variable from the shortcut menu. You can also place your cursor over the handle of the radius, right-click and select Add Radius from the shortcut menu to make the round set variable. Pro/ENGINEER activates the Spine collector located on the Sets slide-up panel. Select an edge to define a spine for the round. Notice that the preview geometry is hidden while you select the spine reference. Pro/ENGINEER copies the current radius and its value and places each radius at each ends of the round pieces. Note: These are the default radii for a Variable round. These radii do not contain anchors and cannot be relocated. To delete these default radii, you must use Make Constant from the shortcut menu. This command converts the active round set from Variable to Constant. To add another radius, place your cursor over the handle of the radius that you want to copy, rightclick and select Add Radius from the shortcut menu. These additional radii contain anchors. You can drag the anchor or snap it to a datum point reference to relocate the radius. Note: You can select Delete from the shortcut menu to remove the radius. To define a radius, drag the radius handle to the preferred distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can type a new value in the distance value box or select a most recently used distance value from the list in the Radius table (Radius column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8. Tip:
You can also use the Add Radius, Delete, and Make Constant shortcut menu commands from the Radius table on the Sets slide-up panel. To quickly define a radius, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Define a Radius Using a Reference In addition to dragging radius handles, or typing or selecting distance values, Pro/ENGINEER enables you to define a radius by snapping to a vertex or datum point. 1. 2. Select the placement references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
In the graphics window, select the radius handle of a Constant or Variable round that you want to redefine.
213/ 375
3.
Press SHIFT and drag the radius handle to snap it to a vertex or to a datum point. As you drag, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights the reference as your cursor moves over it. This enables you to target the correct reference. Pro/ENGINEER does the following:
o o o
Replaces the default radius handle with a special handle in the graphics window that contains the reference information. Activates the Distance collector on the Dialog Bar to indicate that an item has been selected. Selects Reference from the Sets slide-up panel distance box and populates the Radius table Distance collector with the reference information.
Note: If you snapped the handle, notice the snapping behavior. For Constant and Variable rounds, Pro/ENGINEER hides the second radius handle and the radius anchor. For D1 x D2 Conic rounds, Pro/ENGINEER separates the handles and displays the unsnapped handle with the anchor to enable the handle to move independently. 4. To redefine the radius, press SHIFT and drag the handle to unsnap it from the reference. Notice that the default radius handle replaces the special handle. You can then snap the radius handle another reference, drag the handle to a preferred location, or type or select a new radius value using the value boxes from either the Dialog Bar (Constant rounds only) or from the Radius table in the Sets slide-up panel. The radius is defined. You can continue to work with rounds or click create the round and close the Round tool. enabling Pro/ENGINEER to
5.
Tip:
If you prefer to define a radius from the Sets slide-up panel, simply select the radius to define in the Radius table # column and select Reference from the Distance box located under the table. After the distance collectors activate, select the datum point or vertex from the graphics window. To quickly identify a radius from the Sets slide-up panel, place your cursor over a radius number on the Radius table # column. Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights each radius enabling you to select it. If you want to use a datum point, but one is not present, you can create one without closing the Round tool by opening one of the Datum Point tools on the Feature Toolbar. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Create a Round Driven by a Curve 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create a Constant or Variable round. Notice that the round propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the round does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active round set or to remove a reference. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Round. The Round tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER Click displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. In the graphics window, press SHIFT and drag a radius handle to snap it to a chain of curves as the Driving Curve reference. As you drag, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights the reference as your cursor moves over it. This enables you to target the correct reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the round. Note: You can use Through Curve from the shortcut menu to restore the round to its previous state. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information.
2.
3.
4.
214/ 375
5.
Click
to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
Tip:
If you prefer, you can create a Round Driven by a Curve using the Sets slide-up panel. Simply, click the Through Curve button. Pro/ENGINEER activates the Driving Curve collector. In the graphics window, select a chain of curves. Pro/ENGINEER populates the Driving Curve collector with the reference and displays preview geometry of the round. Notice that the preview geometry is hidden while you select the Driving Curve reference. You can also use Through Curve from the shortcut menu to create this round. Notice that a check mark appears next to this shortcut menu command indicating that this round type has been selected. If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. If a Driving Curve reference is not present, you can click Sketch tool and create one. on the Feature Toolbar to open the
As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to remove all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To easily create a round as you work in the graphics window, select edge references, right-click and select Round Edges from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER opens the Round tool enabling you to continue working with the round. Note that this command is available only if you select edge references. Example: Round Driven by a Curve
1 Edge reference 2 Datum curve 3 Round piece (Notice that Pro/ENGINEER copies the datum curve to complete the round) To Create a Full Round Note: If you are using two surfaces to create a Full round, refer to To Create a Surface-to-Surface Full Round under See Also. 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the round. If you use only edge references, the edges must share a common surface. Notice that the round propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the round does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active round set or to remove references. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Round. The Round tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER Click displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel.
2.
215/ 375
3.
In the graphics window, right-click and select Full Round from the shortcut menu. Notice that a check mark appears next to this shortcut menu command indicating that this round type has been selected. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the Full round. Note: You can select Full Round again to restore the round to its previous state. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
4.
5. Tip:
If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To easily create a round as you work in the graphics window, select edge references, right-click and select Round Edges from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER opens the Round tool enabling you to continue working with the round. Note that this command is available only if you select edge references. To Create a Surface-to-Surface Full Round Note: If you are not using two surfaces to create a Full round, refer to To Create a Full Round under See Also. 1. In the graphics window, select two surface references for the Full round. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active round set or to remove references. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Round. The Round tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER Click displays the selected surface references. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Right-click in the graphics window and select Full Round from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER activates the Driving Surface collector located on the Sets slide-up panel. Notice that a check mark appears next to this shortcut menu command indicating that this round type has been selected. Note: You can also activate this collector using Driving Surface from the shortcut menu. Select a third surface as the Driving Surface. Pro/ENGINEER populates the Driving Surface collector with the surface reference, replaces the surface with a Full round, and displays preview geometry of the round. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. Tip:
As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. Rules for Creating a Full Round The following rules apply for Full rounds:
216/ 375
If you are using edge references, the edge references must share a common surface. Pro/ENGINEER converts two round pieces within a round set to create the Full round. If you are using two surface references, you must select a third surface as the Driving Surface. This surface determines the location and sometimes the size of the round. Pro/ENGINEER replaces this common surface with a radius to create the surface-to-surface Full round. You can create a Full round for solid or surface geometry. You cannot create a Full round if:
o o o
1. 2. 3.
More than two edge references border the same surface. The round you are defining has a Conic cross-section shape. The round you are defining has been created using a Normal to Spine creation method.
To Create a Conic Round Create a Constant or Variable round. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the round. Click the Sets tab on the Dashboard. The Sets slide-up panel appears. In the cross-section shape box, select Conic. Pro/ENGINEER does the following:
o o o
Adds a conic parameter handle with a default value (0.5) to the current radius for the round set. Displays the Conic Parameter box in the Dialog Bar and on the Sets slide-up panel. Modifies the Radius table to contain a D column containing a conic distance value box for each radius. Note that the distance value box on the Dialog Bar is available only for Constant rounds.
4. To define the conic parameter which controls the sharpness of the conic shape, drag the conic parameter handle to the preferred value. Pro/ENGINEER displays the radius value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new parameter or select a most recently used one using the Conic Parameter box from the Dialog Bar or from the Sets slide-up panel. 5. To define a radius, drag the radius handle to the preferred distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value in the distance value box or select a most recently used value from the list in the Radius table (D column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. The same method applies to the distance value box on the Dialog Bar. However, this box is available only for Constant rounds. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
6.
7.
Tip:
You can easily convert a Conic round to a D1 x D2 Conic round by placing your cursor over the radius of the Conic round, right-click and select Independent from the shortcut menu (check mark displayed). If you select this command again, Pro/ENGINEER restores the round to its previous state (check mark cleared). Note that you can only convert Constant round types. If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance or conic parameter, simply double-click the value in the graphics window and type a new value and press ENTER or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value.
217/ 375
To Create a D1 x D2 Conic Round D1 x D2 Conic rounds enable you to define the round distance independently. 1. Create a Constant round.
Note: You must use a Constant round to create a D1 x D2 Conic round. 2. 3. Click the Sets tab on the Dashboard. The Sets slide-up panel appears. In the cross-section shape box, select D1 x D2 Conic. Pro/ENGINEER does the following:
o o o
Adds a conic parameter handle with a default value to the current radius for the round set. Displays the Conic Parameter box in the Dialog Bar and on the Sets slide-up panel. Displays two distance value boxes on the Dialog Bar and in the Radius table on the Sets slide-up panel.
4. To define the conic parameter which controls the sharpness of the conic shape, drag the conic parameter handle to the preferred value. Pro/ENGINEER displays the radius value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new parameter or select a most recently used one using the Conic Parameter box from the Dialog Bar or from the Sets slide-up panel. 5. To define a radius, drag each radius handle to the preferred distance or snap each one to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance values in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value in the distance value box or select a most recently used value from the list in the Radius table (D1 and D2 columns) located on the Sets slide-up panel. The same method applies to the two distance value boxes on the Dialog Bar. on the Dialog Bar. Click it again to return to the original 6. To reverse the conic distances, click distance. You can also place your cursor over the radius handle, right-click and use Flip from the shortcut menu. 7. At this point the round is complete. If you need to define the round further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
8.
Tip:
You can easily convert a D1 x D2 Conic round to a Conic round by placing your cursor over the radius of the D1 x D2 Conic round, right-click and select Independent from the shortcut menu (check mark cleared). If you select this command again, Pro/ENGINEER restores the round to its previous state (check mark displayed). Note that you can only convert Constant round types. If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance or conic parameter, simply double-click the value in the graphics window and type a new value and press ENTER or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. To Create a Normal to Spine Round 1. 2. Create a Constant or Variable round. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the round. You cannot use the Normal to spine creation method with Full rounds or rounds driven by a curve. Click the Sets tab on the Dashboard. The Sets slide-up panel appears.
218/ 375
3. 4.
In the Creation Method box, select Normal to spine. Do one of the following:
o o
5.
If your round uses edge references, Pro/ENGINEER uses the first edge that you selected as the spine reference for the round. Skip to step 6. If your round uses two surface references, Pro/ENGINEER activates the Spine collector located on the Sets slide-up panel. Proceed to step 5.
Select an edge for the spine reference. Pro/ENGINEER populates the Spine collector with the selected reference and displays preview geometry of the round.
6. If necessary, continue to modify the round using the procedures for the type of round with which you are working. 7. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
Tip:
As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Rename a Round Feature You can rename the current round feature while working in the Round tool. 1. 2. 3. Select the references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
Click the Properties tab on the Dashboard. The Properties slide-up panel appears. In the Name box, type the new name for the round feature on which you are working and press ENTER. When you are finished working with the round feature, click . Pro/ENGINEER renames the round feature, saves your modeling changes, creates the round, and closes the Round tool.
4.
To Retrieve Round Feature Information You can retrieve information for the current round feature while working in the Round tool. 1. 2. 3. Select the references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
Click the Properties tab on the Dashboard. The Properties slide-up panel appears. Click . Pro/ENGINEER opens the embedded browser and displays the round feature information.
Tip: If additional information is available for the current round feature, simply click the links in the browser. About Round Transitions Transitions allow you to specify how Pro/ENGINEER handles overlapping or discontinuous round pieces. Pro/ENGINEER uses default transitions after you create round geometry. These default transitions are selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases, you will simply use the default transitions. However, at some point, you will need to modify the existing transitions to achieve the preferred round geometry. You modify existing transition in the following ways:
Define a TransitionChange the transition type.
219/ 375
Delete Transitions and Make a New TransitionDelete one or more transitions to free references and replace them by making a new transition for the affected geometry. Round Transitions An understanding of round transitions will enable you to achieve the preferred round geometry for your model. The following table describes the round transitions that Pro/ENGINEER provides: Round Transitions Transition Type Stop Case 1 Example Description
Terminates the round using one of three different Stop Cases. Pro/ENGINEER configures each Stop Case geometry based on the geometrical context.
1 Round piece 2 Stop Case transition 3 Stop transition Stop Case 2
4 Stop Case transition Stop Case 3
5 Stop Case transition
220/ 375
Stop at Referenc e
Terminates round geometry at the datum point or datum plane that you specify.
1 Round piece 2 Stop transition at Reference
3 Datum point selected 4 Stop Transition 5 Existing round geometry Blend Blend on a corner Creates a fillet surface between the round pieces using an edge reference. Note that all tangent round geometry stops at sharp edges.
1 Round piece 2 Fillet surface 3 Stop transition Blend between two collinear round pieces
1 Round piece 2 Fillet transition) surface (Blend
3 Stop transition
221/ 375
Continue
Continue between two collinear round pieces
Extends the round geometry into two round pieces. Note that tangent round geometry does not stop at sharp edges (compare with Blend). The resulting geometry looks as if the round was placed first, and then geometry was cut away. Neighboring surfaces are extended to meet round geometry where applicable.
1 Round piece 2 Extension geometry transition) 3 Stop transition Corner Sphere of round (Continue
Rounds the corner transition formed by three overlapping round pieces with a spherical corner. By default, the sphere has the same radius as the largest overlapping round piece. However, you can modify the radius of the sphere as well as the transition distance along each edge enabling you to blend it into the smaller existing radii using fillet surfaces. Note: Corner Sphere transitions apply only to geometry where three round pieces overlap at a corner.
1 Sphere (with radius value) 2 Fillet surfaces (with length values)
Intersect
Intersect pieces
of
two
round
Extends two or more overlapping round pieces towards each other until they merge forming a sharp boundary. Note: Intersect transitions only apply to two or more overlapping round pieces.
1 Round piece 2 Intersect transition 3 Stop transition
222/ 375
Intersect for four round pieces
1 Round piece 2 Intersect transition 3 Stop transition Patch Patch for pieces. three round Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four round pieces overlap. You can add an additional side to a three-sided Patch transition by selecting an optional surface on which to create a fillet that contains a radius. 1 Round piece 2 Patch transition 3 Stop transition Same Patch as above with an optional surface This fillet becomes the fourth side of the resulting patch and is tangent. Note: Patch transitions apply only to geometry where three or four round pieces overlap at a corner.
1 Round piece 2 Patch transition radius value) (with
3 Optional surface selected 4 Stop transition
223/ 375
Patch pieces
for
four
round
1 Round piece 2 Patch transition 3 Stop transition Round Only 1 Round Only 1 for three round pieces having the same convexity. In this example below, the corner transition formed by three overlapping is round pieces is rounded with a sweep. The sweep wraps around the round piece with the largest radius. Round Only transitions create a transition using compounded round geometry. Two types of Round Only transitions are available based on the geometrical context. Notice that in the example, each round piece has a different radius.
1 Round Only transition Round Only 1 for three round pieces having mixed convexity
1 Round Only Transition
224/ 375
Round Only 2
Round Only 2 for three round pieces having the same convexity
Notice that each round piece has a different radius
1 Round Only transition
Round Only 2 for four round pieces having the same convexity
1 Round Only transition Round Only 2 for three round pieces having mixed convexity
1 Round Only Transition Defining Round Transitions Consider the following when defining round transitions:
If you copy, reroute, or place a group with a round that contains user-defined transitions, Pro/ENGINEER removes these transitions from the resulting feature. If a round feature fails due to missing transition references, Pro/ENGINEER displays an error message and instructs you to redefine the transitions by selecting references for each transition. If a transition has invalid references, you may repair the transition by replacing references that are missing or invalid, or you can change the transition type. If the round set geometry is modified in Set mode (for example, references or sets have been removed or added) resulting in the associated user-defined transitions becoming invalid, Pro/ENGINEER will delete the invalid transitions and reconstruct the default transitions for the round geometry. Note that Pro/ENGINEER will always maintain user-defined transitions whenever possible.
225/ 375
To Define a Round Transition Note: This topic is a Master Procedure in that some transitions require that you follow an additional topic to complete the procedure. If you select one of these transitions, simply follow the instructions. 1. 2. Select the references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
Click on the Dialog Bar to switch to Transition mode. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of all transitions for the entire round feature.
Note: You can also use Show Transitions from the shortcut menu to activate Transition mode. 3. 4. In the graphics window, select the transition that you want to define. Pro/ENGINEER makes the transition active. Select one of the following transition types from the Transition Type box on the Dialog Bar, or from the shortcut menu and follow the procedure for that transition type. Note: Pro/ENGINEER determines the valid transition types according to the geometrical context of the selected transition. This means that not every transition type listed below will be available to you for a particular transition.
o o o o o
DefaultPro/ENGINEER determines the transition type that is the best fit for the geometrical context. The transition type appears in parenthesis. Proceed to step 6. BlendCreate a fillet surface between the round pieces using an edge reference. Proceed to step 5. ContinueExtend round geometry into two round pieces. Proceed to step 5. IntersectExtend two or more overlapping round pieces toward each other until they merge forming a sharp boundary. Proceed to step 5. Round Only 1Create a transition using compounded round geometry. This includes rounding the corner transition formed by three overlapping round pieces by using a sweep that wraps around the round piece that has the largest radius. Proceed to step 5. Round Only 2Create a transition using compounded round geometry. Proceed to step 5. Corner SphereRound the corner transition formed by three overlapping round pieces with a spherical corner. Click To Define a Corner Sphere Transition under See Also to define this transition. PatchCreate a patched surface at the location where three or four round pieces overlap. Click To Define a Patch Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop Case 1Terminate the round using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Click To Define a Stop Case Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop Case 2Terminate round using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Click To Define a Stop Case Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop Case 3Terminate round using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Click To Define a Stop Case Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop at ReferenceTerminate round geometry at the datum point or datum plane that you specify. Click To Define a Stop at Reference Transition under See Also to define this transition.
o o o o o o o
Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the transition and adds the selected transition to the Transitions list located on the Transitions slide-up panel. Notice that Pro/ENGINEER displays only userdefined transitions on this list. If you want to remove a transition from the Transitions list, see the note at the end of this topic. 5. If you want to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry by creating end surfaces, click the Capped check box located on the Dialog Bar. Notice that this check box is available only if you select a transition type (other than Default) and use the Surface or New quilt attachment type (see About Round Attachment Types). Pro/ENGINEER clears this check box by default.
226/ 375
Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the round piece cannot be capped. This check box caps only the gaps of the active transition while the Create end surfaces check box located on the Options slide-up panel caps all round piece ends for the entire round feature. Remember, the Dialog Bar check box overrides the slide-up panel check box. This enables you to cap the gaps of the active transition even if you decide not to cap all of the round piece ends for the round feature. You cannot cap rounds between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
o
6.
At this point, the transition is defined. Do one of the following:
o o
Define another transition. Click to return to Set mode and continue Note: You can also use Back to Sets from the shortcut menu. Click working with round sets.
enabling Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, create the round, and close the Round tool.
Note: If you want to restore the default transition, select Default from the Transition Type box on the Dialog bar, or from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER does not display default transition types on the Transitions list. Do not use Delete Transition from the shortcut menu to remove a transition type from the Transitions list. If you do use it, you can do one of the following to restore the default transition type: Press CTRL+Z to undo the selection (or Edit > Undo setting), switch to Set mode, or close the Round tool. Tip:
You can also use Capped from the shortcut menu to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry. To preview various transitions before selecting one, simply place your cursor over each transition type in the Transition Type box. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the corresponding transition geometry in the graphics window. Example: Corner Transitions The following table illustrates possible combinations of corner transitions: Corner Transitions Transition Type R1 = R2 = R3 (R1 R2) R3 = < (R1 R2) R3 = > R1< R2 < R3
Corner Sphere Patch (without surface) Patch with surface 1
227/ 375
Patch with surface 2 Patch with surface 3 Round 1 Round 2 Only
Only
Note:
R1, R2, and R3 are radii of respective round pieces Arrow indicates the patch optional surface selected About Deleting Transitions and Making a Transition Pro/ENGINEER determines a transition type according to the selected placement references and geometrical context. However, sometimes the available transitions are not what is needed for the geometry. If this situation arises, you can delete one or more transitions to free references and make a new transition. Pro/ENGINEER configures the new transition according to the geometrical context. The following table illustrates this process. Note: If you delete one or more transitions and do not replace them by making a new transition, Pro/ENGINEER restores the default transitions for the free references because the geometrical input did not change and the transitions with the best fit for the geometry are again selected. Deleting Transitions and Making a Transition In Transition mode, transitions are selected and deleted using Delete Transition from the shortcut menu. The free round piece ends are selected (use CTRL+click), and a new transition is created using Make Transition from the shortcut menu. Deleting Two Making One and Deleting One Two and Making
228/ 375
1 Transitions (Stop Case transitions) 2 Free round piece ends 3 New (Continue) transition
1 Transitions (Intersect) 2 Free round piece ends 3 New transition (Round Only)
To Delete Transitions and Make a Transition 1. 2. Select the references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
Click on the Dialog Bar to switch to Transition mode. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of all transitions for the entire round feature. Note: You can also use Show Transitions from the shortcut menu to change to Transition mode. In the graphics window, select a transition that you want to delete, right-click and select Delete Transition from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER deletes the transition and frees the references. If needed, repeat this step to delete another transition. Note: The deleted transitions must share the same geometrical location in order to make a new transition. Press the CTRL key and click all of the round piece ends that are freed by the deleted transitions. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selected round piece ends. Right-click and select Make Transition from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER configures the new transition according to the geometrical context and displays it in the graphics window. Notice that the transition type for the new transition is displayed in the Transition Type box on the Dialog Bar, and on the shortcut menu. Note: If you do not select Make Transition, Pro/ENGINEER restores the default transitions for the freed references because the geometrical input did not change and the transitions with the best fit for the geometry was again selected. If you want to change the transition type for the new transition, select the new type from the Transition Type box on the Dialog Bar, or from the shortcut menu. At this point, the new transition is complete. Do one of the following:
3.
4. 5.
6. 7.
o o
Make another new transition. Click Click to return to Set mode and continue working with round sets.
enabling Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, create the round, and close the Round tool.
Tip:
If you need to return to the default transition after making a new transition, simply delete the new transition and click Proceed to step 2. . Pro/ENGINEER switches to Set mode and restores the default transitions.
You can also delete a transition from the Transitions list on the Transitions slide-up panel by using Delete Transition on the shortcut menu. If you delete the wrong transition, right-click and select Back to Sets. Pro/ENGINEER switches to Set mode and recreates the default transition. Proceed to step 2. If you made an error selecting a round piece end, right-click and select Clear from the shortcut menu. Then, select the preferred ends. Remember to use the CTRL key as you select multiple round piece ends.
229/ 375
About Piece Management As you work with rounds, the ability to manage round pieces becomes essential. Through piece management, you can better control your round features. Round piece management is performed using the Pieces slide-up panel (click the Pieces tab on the dashboard). Using the Pieces slide-up panel, you can perform the following:
View all round sets for the round feature View the current round set View all round pieces in the current round set View the current state of the round pieces (Included, Excluded, or Edited) Exclude round pieces from the round set Trim or extend round pieces Address placement ambiguity About Round Patches and Round Pieces To successfully exclude, trim, or extend round geometry, an understanding and accurate identification of round patches and pieces is necessary. A round piece is simply round geometry that is placed at the selected references. A round piece can contain patches. A patch is a neighbor that is tangent to the end of the round piece that is being created. This tangency occurs due to existing model geometry. The following table illustrates round patches and pieces: One Round Patches Piece with Three Two Round Pieces without Patches
After you select the edge reference, Pro/ENGINEER automatically propagates the round piece across all tangent points resulting in tangent segments called patches. In the illustration below, tangency occurs due to the existing round geometry.
After you select two edge references, Pro/ENGINEER places two separate round pieces at the selected references to create the round. In the illustration below, tangency does not occur due to the vertex. This results in the two overlapping round pieces. Pro/ENGINEER uses transitions to resolve this discontinuous geometry.
1 Edge reference 2 Patch 3 Patch 4 Patch 5 Existing round geometry
1 Edge references 2 Discontinuous round geometry
230/ 375
About Excluding Round Pieces You can exclude one or more round pieces in a round set that contains multiple round pieces by using the Pieces slide-up panel. Excluding pieces enables you to gain more control over the round geometry. Note: To exclude round pieces, the current round set must contain two or more round pieces that use one explicit placement reference. This can occur if the round geometry breaks due to non-tangent chains. It can also occur if a single round piece cannot be created at a certain radius value. For example, a round that is too large to sweep around a corner. Excluding Round Pieces Before Exclude The round placement reference is selected and the round geometry propagates across tangent points. The round piece radius is increased and the geometry breaks resulting in round pieces 1 and 2. After Exclude Round piece 2 is select from the Pieces slide-up panel and Excluded is used. Pro/ENGINEER excludes the round piece.
1 Round piece 1 2 Round piece 2 3 Trim/Extend handle 4 Edge placement reference 5 Existing round geometry To Exclude Round Pieces Note: To exclude round pieces, the current round set must contain two or more round pieces that use one explicit placement reference. This can occur if the round geometry breaks due to non-tangent chains. It can also occur if a single round piece cannot be created at a certain radius value. For example, a round that is too large to sweep around a corner. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the references for the round and click the round appears. . The Round tool opens and preview geometry of
Click the Pieces tab on the dashboard. The Pieces slide-up panel appears. On the Sets list, select the round set that contains the piece that you want to exclude. All of the round pieces for the current round set are listed on the Pieces table. On the Pieces table, select the round piece that you want to exclude and select Excluded. The round piece is excluded from the model. If you want to exclude another round piece, repeat step 3. and step 4. To include an excluded round piece, select the piece and Included from the Pieces table. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue to work with rounds.
231/ 375
8. Tip:
When completed, click
. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
You can also use Excluded or Included from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. If you excluded multiple pieces in the current round set and want to quickly include them all, simply select All included from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window.
About Trimming Round Geometry You can trim round geometry (pieces) to achieve the preferred rounds for your model. As you create a round, the round geometry automatically propagates across tangent points and then stops at a non-tangent point. If you need to terminate the round geometry before the non-tangent point, you can trim the round piece up to a patch that you select. The table following table illustrates the trim process. Note:
You can only trim open round sets. If you want to work with a closed-loop round set, you must first use open the round geometry. You cannot trim separate (overlapping) round pieces. To remove one of these pieces, press CTRL and select the piece, or clear it from its respective collector. If you need to terminate round geometry at a different point other than a patch, you must define a Stop at Reference transition.
Trimming Round Geometry Description The round placement edge reference is selected and the round geometry propagates across tangent points due to the existing round geometry (a). The round piece is selected from the Pieces slide-up panel and the trim/extend handles appear (b). As the left handle is dragged to trim the round piece, potential extension geometry appears. Notice that the cursor and handle change during trimming. Using the preview geometry as a guide, the handle is dragged to trim up the third patch (c). Notice that the preview geometry outline changes color indicating the extent of the trim. Release the mouse button and Pro/ENGINEER trims the round up to the patch (d). Example
232/ 375
1 Edge placement reference 2 Round piece (consisting of three patches) 3 Existing round geometry 4 Trim/Extend handles 5 Potential extension geometry 6 Trimmed patches 7 Trimmed round geometry To Trim Round Geometry 1. 2. Select the references for the round and click geometry appears. . The Round tool opens and round preview
Open the Pieces slide-up panel and select the round piece to trim from the Pieces table. Handles appear on the piece ends. Note: If you have a closed-loop round set, you need to open it by removing a patch. After you select the piece to trim, select a patch from the graphics window. Pro/ENGINEER removes the patch and handles appear. Drag a handle up to the patch where you want to trim the round piece. Pro/ENGINEER trims the round piece. Notice that Edited appears in the Pieces table for the selected piece. Repeat the process if needed. To trim another round piece, repeat step 2. and step 3. To restore the trimmed round piece to its original state, select Included from the Pieces table or from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. The trimmed round piece is complete. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue to work with rounds. When completed, click . Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
3.
4. 5. 6.
7. Tip:
If you trimmed multiple pieces in the current round set and want to quickly restore all of them to their original state, simply select All included from Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window. About Extending Round Geometry You can extend round geometry (pieces) to achieve the preferred rounds for your model. As you create a round, the round geometry automatically propagates across tangent points and then stops at a non-tangent point. If you need to continue the round geometry, you can extend the round piece up to a patch that you select. The following table illustrates the extend process. Note:
You can only extend open round sets. If you want to work with a closed-loop round set, you must first use open the round geometry. You cannot extend separate (overlapping) round pieces. To remove one of these pieces, press CTRL and select the piece, or clear it from its respective collector. If you need to extend round geometry at a different point other than a patch, you must define a Stop at Reference transition.
233/ 375
Pro/ENGINEER uses an automatic blend to fill the gap around a corner. This blend cannot be modified or deleted. If a blend cannot be added, extend cannot be performed. Extending Round Geometry Description Example
The round placement edge reference is selected and the round geometry stops at non-tangent points (a). The round piece is selected from the Pieces slideup panel and the trim/extend handles appear (b). As the right handle is dragged to extend the round piece, potential extension geometry appears. Notice that blend transitions are automatically added where a gap exists between tangent points. Also notice that the cursor and handle change during extending. Using the potential extension geometry as a guide, the handle is dragged to extend the round piece up to the third patch (c). Notice that the potential extension geometry outline changes color indicating the extent of the extension. Release the mouse button and Pro/ENGINEER extends the round piece up to the patch (d).
1 Edge placement reference 2 Round piece (consisting of three patches) 3 Trim/Extend handles 4 Potential extension geometry (including blend transitions) 5 Round extension 6 Extended round piece To Extend Round Geometry 1. 2. Select the references for the round and click geometry appears. . The Round tool opens and round preview
Open the Pieces slide-up panel and select the round piece to extend from the Pieces table. Handles appear on the piece ends. Note: If you have a closed-loop round set, you need to open it by removing a patch. After you select the piece to extend, select the patch to remove it. Pro/ENGINEER removes the patch and handles appear. Drag a handle to extend the piece. As you drag, the potential extension of the round piece appears. Follow the extension up to the patch where you want to extend the piece. Pro/ENGINEER extends the round piece up to the patch. Notice that Edited appears in the Pieces table for the selected piece. Repeat the process if needed.
3.
234/ 375
4. 5. 6.
To extend another round piece, repeat step 2. and step 3. To return the piece to its original state, select Included from the Pieces table or from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. The extended round piece is complete. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue to work with rounds. When completed, click . Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
7. Tip:
If you extended multiple pieces in the current round set and want to quickly restore all of them to their original state, simply select All included from Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window. About Round Placement Ambiguity As you work with rounds, you may encounter a situation when more than one possible placement location exists for the current round set. This can happen when two surfaces intersect in multiple, distinct locations. If this situation occurs, placement ambiguity results in which the placement of the round pieces is unclear due to the selected references and part geometry. Pro/ENGINEER enables you to easily address placement ambiguity using two methods. The table below illustrates the two types of placement ambiguity and the methods used to address them.
Placement Ambiguity Ambiguity Type Example
Round Set Ambiguity The round set contains round pieces that coexist and can be placed in various locations given the selected references and part geometry. If this occurs, the round set contains ambiguity. Method: Use the Pieces slide-up panel. From the Pieces table, select the round piece to exclude and select Excluded. All other pieces are Included by default.
1 Surface references 2 Round piece 1 3 Round piece 2 4 Round piece 1 excluded 5 Round piece 2 excluded 6 Both round pieces included
235/ 375
Mutually Exclusive Pieces The round set contains ambiguity, however, the round pieces cannot co-exist. This results in mutually exclusive pieces. Mutually exclusive pieces can be placed in different locations between the same referenced surfaces. These pieces are mutually exclusive in which only one can be selected for the round. This can occur if surfaces from two different quilts are used as references. Method: Use the Next Solution button on the Dialog Bar. Click the button to view each group and select the preferred group for the round.
1 Surface references 2 First round group displayed 3 After viewing groups, preferred round group is selected and the round is placed. To Address Round Placement Ambiguity 1. 2. Select the references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
If you are addressing ambiguity between mutually exclusive groups of round pieces, select a group by clicking Next Solution on the dialog bar. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the next group of round pieces. Proceed to step 5. If the selected mutually exclusive group has round pieces that have unclear placement, click the Pieces tab on the dashboard. The Pieces slide-up panel appears. On the Sets list, select the round set that contains the round pieces that you want to address. All of the round pieces for the current round set are listed in the Pieces table. In the Pieces table, do one of the following:
3. 4. 5.
Exclude a round pieceSelect the round piece to exclude and select Excluded. Pro/ENGINEER removes the round piece from the model.
Note: You cannot exclude all of the listed round pieces.
Include a round pieceSelect the round piece to include and select Included. Pro/ENGINEER displays the round piece on the model.
Note: Pro/ENGINEER includes all round pieces by default. 6. 7. 8. To exclude another round piece in the current round set, repeat step 5. To include an excluded round piece, repeat step 5. At this point, the ambiguity for the current round set has been addressed. Do one of the following:
o o
In the Sets list, select another round set that contains ambiguity to address. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue working with round sets.
236/ 375
o
Tip:
Click
. Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, creates the round, and closes the Round tool.
You can also use Excluded or Included from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. If you excluded multiple pieces in the current round set and want to quickly include them all, simply select All included from Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window. About Round Attachment Types After you create your round, Pro/ENGINEER attaches the round geometry to your model using an attachment type. Using the Options slide-up panel, you can view the current attachment type or change the way in which your round is attached by defining a different attachment type. The Options slide-up panel provides the following options:
SolidCreate the round feature as a solid that intersects the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as round set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select solids as round set references. SurfaceCreate the round feature as a surface that does not intersect the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as round set references. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default. New quiltCreate the round feature as a new quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface round set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select different surface quilts or both a solid and a quilt as round set references. Same quiltCreate the round feature as a surface that merges with the reference quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface round set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select round set references from the same surface quilt. Create end surfacesCreate end surfaces to cap all of the round piece ends of the round feature. This check box is available only if you select valid geometry and the Surface or New quilt attachment types. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default.
Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the round piece ends cannot be capped. For example, an L-shaped open quilt cannot be capped. This check box is different from the Capped check box on the Dialog Bar and the Capped shortcut menu command. The latter two enable you to create end surfaces to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry. You cannot cap rounds between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
Using End Surfaces to Resolve Round Failures If your round geometry has failed because it cannot be attached to the part, change the attachment type in the Options slide-up panel from a Solid to Surface. This enables you to save problematic round geometry as a quilt until you can resolve the geometry errors. After you resolve the errors, you can create a new solid round from the quilt by using the Solidify tool (Edit > Solidify). To Define a Round Attachment Type 1. 2. 3. Select the references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
Click the Options tab on the Dashboard. The Options slide-up panel appears. Under Attachment, select one of the following attachment types for the round feature:
237/ 375
o o o o
4.
Solid (you must select solids as references) Surface (you must select solids as references) New quilt (you must select a surface quilt as one of your references) Same quilt (you must select references from the same surface quilt)
If you selected the Surface or New quilt attachment type, you can click the Create end surfaces check box to create end surfaces to cap all of the round piece ends of the entire round feature. Pro/ENGINEER clears this check box by default. Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the round piece ends cannot be capped. This check box is different from the Capped check box on the Dialog Bar and the Capped shortcut menu command. The latter two enable you to create end surfaces to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry. You cannot cap rounds between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
o
5.
At this point, the attachment type is defined. You can continue to work with round sets or click enabling Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, create the round, and close the Round tool.
To Resolve Failed Rounds Using End Surfaces If your round geometry has failed because it cannot be attached to the part, use the following procedure to change the attachment type from a solid to a surface. This enables you to save the problematic round geometry until you can resolve the geometry errors. After you resolve the errors, you can create a new solid round from the quilt. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the references for the round and click . The Round tool opens.
Click the Options tab on the Dashboard. The Options slide-up panel appears. Click the Surface or New quilt attachment type. Note that New quilt is available only if you select a surface quilt as one of your references. If you need to create end surfaces to cap all of the round piece ends of the entire round feature, click the Create end surfaces check box. If you need to create end surfaces to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry, click the Capped check box on the Dialog Bar. Remember, you must be in Transition mode to cap the active transition. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the round and closes the Round tool.
6. 7. 8. Note:
Use the Pro/ENGINEER surface tools (surface extend, surface trim, etc.) to modify the surface and resolve the errors. Use the Solidify tool (Edit > Solidify) on the quilt to make the surface round a solid round.
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the round piece cannot be capped. You cannot cap rounds between a solid surface and a quilt surface. Tip: You can also use the Capped shortcut menu command from within the graphics window to quickly cap the gaps between active transition and part geometry. Round References and Attachment Types The following table provides possible attachment types based on geometric references:
238/ 375
Note:
The table applies only to rounds with two references, such as surface-to-surface or surface-to-edge rounds. Pro/ENGINEER overrides the attachment type settings that you select if it cannot perform the action requested due to geometrical limitations. Round References and Attachment Types Geometric References Default Type Attachment Optional Attachment Type Capped Ends
Solid-Solid
Solid Creates round geometry to the limit of the reference set, extends it to any capping surfaces if possible. If necessary, it is capped with a triangular patch and made into solid geometry
Surface Changes the default solid to a surface.
Create end surfaces (Options slide-up panel check box) Creates end surfaces to cap all of the round piece ends of the entire round feature You can use this option if the solid round fails.
Solid-Quilt
New quilt Creates round geometry to the limit of the set, trims it at a straight line in space, and does not cap it with a triangular patch. The surface is unattached.
N/A
N/A
Quilt-Quilt (same quilt)
Same quilt Creates round geometry to the limit of the set, trims it at a straight line in space, and does not cap it with a triangular patch. The surface is merged into the existing quilt.
New quilt Changes the default merged quilt into a new surface.
Create end surfaces (Options slide-up panel check box) Creates end surfaces to cap all of the round piece ends of the entire round feature. Note: Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the round piece ends cannot be capped. For example, an L-shaped open quilt cannot be capped.
239/ 375
You can use this option if the solid round fails.
Quilt-Quilt (different quilts)
New quilt Creates temporary round geometry to the limit of the set, trims it at a straight line in space, and does not cap it with a triangular patch. The surface is not merged into the existing quilt.
N/A
N/A
About the Chamfer Feature Pro/ENGINEER enables you to create and modify chamfers. Chamfers are a type of feature where an edge or corner is beveled. Surfaces can be solid model surfaces or traditional Pro/ENGINEER zero-thickness quilts and surfaces. You can create two types of chamfers: corner chamfers and edge chamfers. Corner Chamfers You create corner chamfers using the CHAMFER dialog box (Insert > Chamfer > Corner Chamfer) to define edge references and distance values for the corner chamfer. Refer to Chamfer Types and References under See Also for more information. Note: Because corner chamfer creation is a simple procedure, the chamfer documentation addresses edge chamfers and refers to them as chamfers. Edge Chamfers You create edge chamfers using the Chamfer tool. To create edge chamfers, you define one or more chamfer sets. A chamfer set is an organizational unit containing one or more chamfer pieces (chamfer geometry). After you specify chamfer placement references, Pro/ENGINEER uses default attributes, distance values, and default transitions that best fit the referenced geometry to create the chamfer. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the chamfer in the graphics window, enabling you to create and modify both chamfer pieces and transitions before feature creation. Note that the default settings accommodate most modeling cases. However, you can define the chamfer sets or transitions to achieve the preferred chamfer geometry. Anatomy of an Edge Chamfer An Edge Chamfer consists of the following:
SetsChamfer segments that consist of unique attributes, geometric references, and plane angles, and one or more chamfer distances: legs of the triangle formed by the chamfer and the neighboring surfaces.
240/ 375
TransitionsFiller geometry that connects chamfer pieces. Transitions are located where the chamfer pieces or set ends meet or terminate. Pro/ENGINEER uses default transitions during the initial chamfer creation and provides many transition types, allowing you to create and modify transitions. Chamfer Sets and Transitions Set Mode Display Transition Mode Display
Two edge references are selected for the chamfer set. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the two chamfer pieces and the distance value.
All transitions for the entire edge chamfer feature are displayed. Pro/ENGINEER displays the two chamfer pieces for context.
1 Chamfer piece 2 Edge reference
1 Transition 2 Chamfer piece
About Chamfer Types and References Using Pro/ENGINEER, you can create different chamfers. The type of chamfer that you can create is determined by the type of placement references that you select. The following table describes the chamfer types and the placement references used: Reference Type Definition Example Chamfer Type
241/ 375
Edges edge chains
or
Note: Only edges (solid or a two-sided surface) are valid chamfer references .
An edge chamfer removes the flat section of material from a selected edge to create a beveled surface between the two original surfaces common to that edge. Note: The chamfer propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the chamfer does not propagate across tangent neighbors.
Two edges
Edge chamfer
1 Edge references 2 Chamfer pieces (with distance value)
Edge chain
1 Edge chain reference 2 Chamfer piece (with distance value) 3 Existing round geometry One surface and one edge Place a chamfer by selecting a surface first and then an edge. The chamfer remains tangent to the surface. The edge reference does not maintain tangency. Surface and edge Surface edge chamfer to
1 Surface reference 2 Edge reference 3 Chamfer piece (with distance value)
242/ 375
Two surfaces
Place a chamfer by selecting two surfaces. The edges of the chamfer will remain tangent to the reference surfaces.
Two surfaces
Surface surface chamfer
to
1 Surface references 2 Chamfer piece (with distance value) One corner reference, and three edge placement dimension s common to the specified corner. A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part creating a beveled surface between the three original surfaces common to the corner. Three edges Corner chamfer
1 Corner chamfer About Chamfer Dimension Schemes Pro/ENGINEER uses various attributes to create the chamfer geometry (chamfer pieces). These attributes include the chamfer dimension schemes. The dimension schemes enable you to easily define the chamfer plane angle and distance. Different dimension schemes result in different chamfer geometry. To simplify the chamfer creation process, Pro/ENGINEER uses a default dimension scheme. You can change the default scheme at any time in your design session to achieve the preferred chamfer geometry using the dimension scheme box on the dialog bar. Pro/ENGINEER provides dimension schemes based on the placement references that you select and the chamfer creation method used. So, not all dimension schemes are available for a given geometry. The following dimension schemes are provided:
D x DCreate a chamfer that is at a distance (D) from the edge along each surface. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default.
Note: This scheme is available using the Offset Surface creation method only if the following conditions are met: For Edge chamfers, all members of the edge chain must be formed by exactly two 90-degree planes or two 90-degree surfaces (for example, the ends of a cylinder). For Surface to Surface chamfers constant angle planes or constant 90-degree surfaces must be selected.
D1 x D2Create a chamfer at a distance (D1) from the selected edge along one surface and a distance (D2) from the selected edge along the other surface. Note: This scheme is available using the Offset Surface creation method only if the following conditions
243/ 375
are met: For Edge chamfers, all members of the edge chain must be formed by exactly two 90-degree planes or two 90-degree surfaces (for example, the ends of a cylinder). For Surface to Surface chamfers constant angle planes or constant 90-degree surfaces must be selected.
Angle x DCreate a chamfer at a distance (D) from the selected edge along one adjacent surface at a specified angle (Angle) to that surface.
45 x DCreate a chamfer that is at an angle of 45 degrees to both surfaces and a distance (D) from the edge along each surface.
Note: This scheme is available only for chamfers that use 90-degree surfaces and the Tangent Distance creation method.
O x OCreate a chamfer that is at an offset distance (O) from the edge along each surface. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default only if D x D is not available.
Note: This scheme is only available if the Offset Surfaces creation method is used.
O1 x O2Create a chamfer at an offset distance (O1) from the selected edge along one surface and an offset distance (O2) from the selected edge along the other surface. Note: This scheme is only available if the Offset Surfaces creation method is used. Example: Chamfer Dimension Schemes The following diagram illustrates different chamfer dimension schemes:
1 45 x D 2DxD 3 D1 x D2 4 Angle x D
About the Chamfer User Interface Feature Icon The Chamfer tool uses the following icon:
Indicates a Chamfer feature in the Model Tree and is displayed in the dashboard to indicate that the Chamfer tool is open. This icon also identifies the Chamfer tool on the Insert menu and on the Feature toolbar. Dialog Bar The dialog bar contain the following options:
244/ 375
Set Mode
default.
Activates Set mode, enabling you to work with chamfer sets. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by Dimension scheme boxDisplays the current dimension scheme for the chamfer set and contains a list of valid dimension schemes based on the geometrical context. This box enables you to change the dimension scheme for the active chamfer set. The following dimension schemes are available:
D x DCreate a chamfer that is at a distance (D) from the edge along each surface. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default.
D1 x D2Create a chamfer at a distance (D1) from the selected edge along one surface and a distance (D2) from the selected edge along the other surface. Note: This scheme is available using the Offset Surface creation method only if the following conditions are met: For Edge chamfers, all members of the edge chain must be formed by exactly two 90-degree planes or two 90-degree surfaces (for example, the ends of a cylinder). For Surface to Surface chamfers constant angle planes or constant 90-degree surfaces must be selected. Angle x DCreate a chamfer at a distance (D) from the selected edge along one adjacent surface at a specified angle (Angle) to that surface.
45 x DCreate a chamfer that is at an angle of 45 degrees to both surfaces and a distance (D) from the edge along each surface.
Note: This scheme is available only for chamfers that use 90-degree surfaces and the Tangent Distance creation method.
O x OCreate a chamfer that is at an offset distance (O) from the edge along each surface. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default only if D x D is not available.
Note: This scheme is only available if the Offset Surfaces creation method is used.
O1 x O2Create a chamfer at an offset distance (O1) from the selected edge along one surface and an offset distance (O2) from the selected edge along the other surface. Note: This scheme is only available if the Offset Surfaces creation method is used.
o o o
D boxControls the distance of a current D x D, Angle x D, or 45 x D chamfer. This box corresponds to the distance in the Distance table D column on the Sets slide-up panel. O boxControls the offset distance of a current O x O chamfer. This box corresponds to the offset distance in the Distance table O column on the Sets slide-up panel. D collectorIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the distance reference for the active D x D, Angle x D, or 45 x D chamfer set. This collector is available if you snap a handle to a reference or select Reference from the distance box in the Sets slide-up panel (left box under Distance table). This collector corresponds to the D column collector in the Distance table. O collectorIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the offset distance reference for the active O x O chamfer set. This collector is available if you snap a handle to a reference or select Reference from the distance box in the Sets slide-up panel (left box under Distance table). This collector corresponds to the O column collector in the Distance table.
245/ 375
o o o
D1, D2 boxesControls the distance of a current D1 x D2 chamfer set. These boxes correspond to the distance in the Distance table D1 or D2 column on the Sets slide-up panel. O1, O2 boxesControls the offset distance of a current O1 x O2 chamfer set. These boxes correspond to the offset distance in the Distance table O1 or O2 column on the Sets slide-up panel. D1, D2 collectorIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the distance reference for the active D1 x D2 chamfer set. This collector is available if you snap a handle to a reference or select Reference from the distance box in the Sets slide-up panel (under the Distance table). This collector corresponds to the D1 or D2 column collector in the Distance table. O1, O2 collectorIndicates that a valid object has been selected as the offset distance reference for the active O1 x O2 chamfer set. This collector is available if you snap a handle to a reference or select Reference from the distance box in the Sets slide-up panel (under the Distance table). This collector corresponds to the O1 or O2 column collector in the Distance table. Angle boxControls the angle of the current Angle x D chamfer. This box corresponds to the current angle in the Distance table (Angle column) on the Sets slide-up panel. The box contains the following standard chamfer angles:
o o o
30.00Creates a chamfer with a 30-degree angle. 45.00Creates a chamfer with a 45-degree angle. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. 60.00Creates a chamfer with a 60-degree angle. Reverses the distance of a D1 x D2, Angle x D, or O1 x O2 chamfer.
Transition Mode
Activates Transition mode, enabling you to define all transitions for the chamfer feature. Transition Type boxDisplays the default transition type for the current transition and contain a list of valid transition types based on the geometrical context. This box enables you to change the transition type for the current transition. A complete list of transition types follows: Note: Not all transition types listed below will be available for a given context.
o o o o o o o o o o
DefaultPro/ENGINEER determines the transition type that is the best fit for the geometrical context. The transition type appears in parenthesis. Stop Case 1Terminates the chamfer using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Stop Case 2Terminates the chamfer using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Stop Case 3Terminates the chamfer using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Stop at ReferenceTerminates chamfer geometry at the selected datum point or datum plane. The Stop reference collectors (located in the Transitions slide-up panel and in the dialog bar) activate. BlendCreates a fillet surface between the chamfer pieces using an edge reference. ContinueExtends chamfer geometry into two chamfer pieces. IntersectExtends two or more overlapping chamfer pieces toward each other until they merge forming a sharp boundary. PatchCreates a patched surface at the location where three or four chamfer pieces overlap. Corner PlaneChamfers the corner transition formed by three overlapping chamfer pieces with a plane.
Capped check boxCreates end surfaces to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry. This check box is available only if you select all of the following: a transition type (other than Default), valid geometry, and the Surface or New quilt attachment types from the Options slide-up panel. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this check box by default. You can also use Capped from the shortcut menu.
246/ 375
Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the chamfer piece cannot be capped and the Capped check box is ignored. This check box caps the gap only of the active transition while the Create end surfaces check box located on the Options slide-up panel caps all chamfer piece ends for the entire chamfer feature. The dialog bar check box overrides the slide-up panel check box enabling you to cap the gap of the active transition even if you decide not to cap all of the chamfer piece ends for the chamfer feature. You cannot cap chamfers between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
Patch Transition Options Optional surface collectorIndicates that a valid surface reference has been selected to place a fillet for the active Patch transition. To activate this collector, you can either click in it, use the Patch Optional Surface shortcut menu command, or click in the Optional surface collector in the Sets slideup panel. Radius boxControls the fillet radius for the active Patch transition. You can type a new radius value or select a most recently used value from the list. The Optional surface collector must contain a surface reference to display this box. Stop Transition Options
Stop reference collectorIndicates that valid stop references have been selected for the active Stop at Reference transition. To activate this collector, you can either click in it, use the Stop References shortcut menu command, or click in the Stop references collector in the Transitions slide-up panel. Note that you must select the Stop at Reference transition type to display this option. Slide-up Panels The Chamfer dashboard displays the following slide-up panels: Sets Slide-up Panel You must activate the Set mode to use this panel. The Sets slide-up panel contains the following options:
Sets listContains all chamfer sets for the chamfer feature enabling you to add, remove, or select a chamfer set for modification. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the active chamfer set. The Sets list contains the following:
o o
SetIndicates a chamfer set. New SetAdds a new chamfer set and makes it active. You can also use the Add Set shortcut menu command from the graphics window.
References collectorContains the valid references that you selected for the chamfer set. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the References shortcut menu command. DetailsOpens the Chain dialog box so that you can modify chain properties. Distance tableControls the distance and location of the chamfer set. The Distance table contains the following options:
o o o
D columnControls the distance of the current D x D or 45 x D chamfer. This column contains values or references. D1, D2 columnsControls the distance of the current D1 x D2 chamfer. This column contains values or references. Angle columnControls the angle of the current Angle x D chamfer. This column contains the following standard chamfer angles: 30.00Creates a chamfer with a 30 degree angle. 45.00Creates a chamfer with a 45 degree angle. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default.
247/ 375
60.00Creates a chamfer with a 60 degree angle.
Distance boxControls the distance (displayed in the Distance table) of the chamfer set. This box is located under the Distance table and contains the following options. Note that two Distance boxes display for D1 x D2 chamfers. ValueSets the chamfer distance by using a numerical value. The distance value displays in the Distance table. ReferenceSets the chamfer distance by using a reference. This option activates a collector in the Distance table that contains the reference information.
Creation Method boxControls the chamfer creation method. This box contains the following creation methods: Offset SurfacesDetermines the chamfer distance by offsetting the neighboring surfaces of the reference edge. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. Tangent DistanceDetermines the chamfer distance with vectors that are tangent to the neighboring surface of the reference edge.
Transitions Slide-up Panel You must activate the Transition mode to use this panel. The Transitions slide-up panel contains the following options:
Transitions listContains all user-defined transitions for the entire Chamfer feature, enabling you to modify a transition. Pro/ENGINEER does not list default transitions. You can view the default transition type for the active transition from the Transition Type box on the dialog bar or from the shortcut menu. To activate the Transitions list, you can click in it or use the Transition Selection shortcut menu command. Stop references collectorContains the references for the active Stop at Reference transition. This collector is available only if you assign the Stop at Reference transition type to the active Stop transition. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the Stop at References shortcut menu command. Optional surface collectorContains the references to place a fillet for the active Patch transition. This collector is available only if you assign the Patch transition type to the active transition. You can click in this collector to activate it or use the Patch Optional Surface shortcut menu command. Pieces Slide-up Panel Chamfer piece management is performed using the Pieces slide-up panel. You can view all chamfer sets for the chamfer feature, view all chamfer pieces in the current chamfer set, trim, extend, or exclude these chamfer pieces, and address placement ambiguity. The Pieces slide-up panel contains the following options:
Sets listLists all of the chamfer sets for the entire chamfer feature. The Sets list contains the following:
o o
SetIndicates a chamfer set. New SetAdds a new chamfer set and makes it active. You can also use the Add Set shortcut menu command from the graphics window.
Pieces tableLists all of the chamfer pieces for the current chamfer set and indicates their current state as one of the following:
IncludedDoes the following: Indicates that the chamfer pieces are included in the current chamfer set (selected by default). Includes the selected chamfer piece that is in an excluded state. Restores a trimmed or extended chamfer piece to its original state.
248/ 375
ExcludedExcludes the selected chamfer piece that is in an included state. Note that this option is available only if the current chamfer set contains two or more chamfer pieces that use one explicit placement reference. This can occur if the chamfer geometry breaks due to non-tangent chains. It can also occur if a single chamfer piece cannot be created at a certain distance value. For example, a chamfer that is too large to sweep around a corner. EditedIndicates that the selected chamfer piece was trimmed or extended.
You can also use these options from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. Note that All included is available only from this shortcut menu. All included includes all of the chamfer pieces for the current chamfer set that are in an excluded state. This option also restores all trimmed or extended chamfer pieces for the current chamfer set to their original state. Options Slide-up Panel The Options slide-up panel contains the following options:
SolidCreates the Chamfer feature as a solid that intersects the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select solids as chamfer set references. SurfaceCreates the Chamfer feature as a surface that does not intersect the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default. New quiltCreates the Chamfer feature as a new quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select different surface quilts or both a solid and a quilt as chamfer set references. Same quiltCreates the Chamfer feature as a surface that merges with the reference quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select chamfer set references from the same surface quilt. Create end surfacesCreates end surfaces to cap all of the chamfer piece ends of the Chamfer feature. This check box is available only if you select valid geometry and the Surface or New quilt attachment types. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default. Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the chamfer piece ends cannot be capped. This check box is different from the Capped check box on the dialog bar and the Capped shortcut menu command, the latter two enable you to create cap the gap between the active transition and part geometry.
Properties Slide-up Panel The Properties slide-up panel contains the following options:
Name boxDisplays the Chamfer feature name enabling you to rename it. Provides detailed Chamfer feature information in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Shortcut Menu You can use shortcut (right-click) menu commands to quickly complete a task. Set Mode: Collector Commands
ReferencesActivates the References collector (located in the Sets slide-up panel) enabling you to select a placement reference for the Chamfer feature. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default. This command is available if another collector is present. Chamfer Reference PointActivates the D or O distance collectors (located on the Sets slide-up panel distance table and on the dialog bar) enabling you to modify the chamfer distance or offset distance
249/ 375
by snapping to a reference. This command is available only when the highlighted distance in the table is driven by a reference. This command is not available for chamfers using the D1 x D2 or O1 X O2 dimension schemes.
D1 Reference PointActivates the O1 distance collectors (located on the Sets slide-up panel distance table and on the dialog bar) enabling you to modify the chamfer distance or offset distance by snapping to a reference. This command is available only for the D1 x D2 dimension schemes and when the highlighted distance in the table is driven by a reference. O1 Reference PointActivates the O1 distance collectors (located on the Sets slide-up panel distance table and on the dialog bar) enabling you to modify the chamfer offset distance or offset distance by snapping to a reference. This command is available only for the O1 x O2 dimension schemes and when the highlighted offset distance in the table is driven by a reference. D2 Reference PointActivates the D2 distance collectors (located on the Sets slide-up panel distance table and on the dialog bar) enabling you to modify the chamfer distance by snapping to a reference. This command is available only for the D1 x D2 dimension scheme and when the highlighted distance in the table is driven by a reference. O2 Reference PointActivates the O2 distance collectors (located on the Sets slide-up panel distance table and on the dialog bar) enabling you to modify the chamfer offset distance by snapping to a reference. This command is available only for the O1 x O2 dimension scheme and when the highlighted offset distance in the table is driven by a reference. ClearClears the selected reference from the active collector. Set Mode: Mode Command
Show TransitionsSwitches to Transition mode. Set Mode: Chamfer Set Commands
Add SetAdds a new chamfer set and makes it active. Delete SetDeletes the active chamfer set. Dimension SchemeThese commands are identical to the dimension schemes that are available from the Dimension Scheme box on the dialog bar. You can find a complete list of dimension schemes in the Dialog Bar section of this topic. You must place your cursor over a handle in the graphics window and right-click to display the following chamfer set modification command:
FlipReverses the distance of a D1 x D2, Angle x D, or O1 x O2 chamfer. Set Mode: Collector Reference Commands You must place your cursor in a collector and right-click to use the following commands:
RemoveRemoves the selected reference from the active collector. Remove AllRemoves all references from the active collector. The collector must contain multiple references to use this command. InformationOpens the INFORMATION WINDOW to display detailed information about the selected reference in the collector. This command is unavailable for chain and surface references. Transition Mode: List and Collector Commands
Transitions' selectionActivates the Transitions list (located in the Transitions slide-up panel) enabling you to select a user-defined transition. This command is available if a transition collector is displayed. Stop ReferencesActivates the Stop references collectors (located in the Transitions slide-up panel and in the dialog bar) enabling you to assign stop references for the active Stop transition.
250/ 375
Patch Optional SurfaceActivates the Optional surface collectors (located in the Transitions slide-up panel and in the dialog bar) enabling you to select a surface reference to place a fillet for the active Patch transition. This command is available only if you select a three-sided corner transition and assign the Patch transition type to it. ClearClears the selected reference from the active collector. Transition Mode: Mode Command
Back to SetsSwitches to Set mode. Transition Mode: Transition Commands
Transition TypeThese commands are identical to the transition types that are available from the Transition Type box on the dialog bar. You can find a complete list of transition types in the Dialog Bar section of this topic. The following transition commands enable you to modify a transition:
Delete TransitionDeletes the active transition. You can also use DELETE. Make TransitionCreates a transition by selecting chamfer piece edges associated with a deleted transition. CappedCreates end surfaces to cap the gap between the active transition and part geometry. You can select this command for each active transition that you want to cap. This command is available only if you select all of the following: a transition type (other than Default), valid geometry, and the Surface or New quilt attachment types from the Options slide-up panel. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this command by default. The Capped command corresponds to the Capped check box located on the dialog bar. Tip:
When using a most recently used box, you can always select Default from the list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the appropriate value for your geometrical context. Always place your pointer in the collector or in the most recently used box and right-click to use the shortcut menu commands for those options. To Create a D x D Chamfer 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the chamfer. Notice that the chamfer propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the chamfer does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active chamfer set or to remove a reference. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer. The Chamfer tool opens Click and Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Click Sets. On the Sets slide-up panel, select the chamfer creation method that you want to use. The default chamfer creation method is Offset Surfaces. Select the D x D dimension scheme from the Dimension Scheme box on the dialog bar. The default chamfer dimension scheme is D x D. You can also select this scheme from the shortcut menu. To define the distance, drag the distance handle to the preferred distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value or select a most recently used value from the D box on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the distance box in the Distance table (D column) located on the Sets slide-up panel.
2.
3. 4. 5.
251/ 375
6.
At this point the chamfer is complete. If you need to define the chamfer further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
7. Tip:
If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Create a 45 x D Chamfer 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the chamfer. Notice that the chamfer propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the chamfer does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note:
o o
2.
The part geometry must allow the creation of a 45 degree angle. Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active chamfer set or to remove a reference.
Click on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer. The Chamfer tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Click Sets. On the Sets slide-up panel, select the chamfer creation method that you want to use. The default chamfer creation method is Offset Surfaces. Select the 45 x D dimension scheme from the Dimension Scheme box on the dialog bar. You can also select this scheme from the shortcut menu. To define the distance, drag the distance handle to the preferred distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value or select a most recently used value from the D box on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the distance box in the Distance table (D column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. At this point the chamfer is complete. If you need to define the chamfer further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
Tip:
If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list.
252/ 375
You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Create an Angle x D Chamfer 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the chamfer. Notice that the chamfer propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the chamfer does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active chamfer set or to remove a reference. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer. The Chamfer tool opens Click and Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Click Sets. On the Sets slide-up panel, select the chamfer creation method that you want to use. The default chamfer creation method is Offset Surfaces. Select the Angle x D dimension scheme from the Dimension Scheme box on the dialog bar. You can also select this scheme from the shortcut menu. To define the distance, drag the distance handle to the preferred distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value or select a most recently used value from the D box on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the distance box in the Distance table (D column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. To define the angle, drag the angle handle the preferred chamfer angle. Pro/ENGINEER displays the angle value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new angle or select a most recently used angle from the Angle box on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the angle box in the Distance table (Angle column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. At this point the chamfer is complete. If you need to define the chamfer further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
8. Tip:
If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu.
253/ 375
To Create a D1 x D2 Chamfer D1 x D2 chamfers enable you to define the chamfer distance independently. 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the chamfer. Notice that the chamfer propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the chamfer does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active chamfer set or to remove a reference. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer. The Chamfer tool opens Click and Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Click Sets. On the Sets slide-up panel, select the chamfer creation method that you want to use. The default chamfer creation method is Offset Surfaces. Select the D1 x D2 dimension scheme from the Dimension Scheme box on the dialog bar. You can also select this scheme from the shortcut menu. To define the distance, drag each distance handle to the preferred distance or snap each to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the distance values in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new distance value or select a most recently used value from the D1 or D2 box on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the distance box in the Distance table (D1 or D2 column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. on the Dialog Bar. Click it again to return to the original To reverse the chamfer distances, click distances. You can also place your cursor over the radius handle, right-click and use Flip from the shortcut menu. At this point the chamfer is complete. If you need to define the chamfer further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
8. Tip:
If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Create a O x O Chamfer 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the chamfer. Notice that the chamfer propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the chamfer does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active chamfer set or to remove a reference.
254/ 375
2.
Click on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer. The Chamfer tool opens and Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Click Sets. On the Sets slide-up panel, select the Offset Surfaces chamfer creation method. Note that this is the default chamfer creation method. Select the O x O dimension scheme from the Dimension Scheme box on the dialog bar. You can also select this scheme from the shortcut menu. To define the offset distance, drag the distance handle to the preferred offset distance or snap it to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the offset distance value in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry. Note: You can also type a new value or select a most recently used value from the O box on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the distance box in the Distance table (O column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. At this point the chamfer is complete. If you need to define the chamfer further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7. Tip:
If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Create a O1 x O2 Chamfer O1 x O2 chamfers enable you to define the chamfer offset distance independently. 1. In the graphics window, select the references from which to create the chamfer. Notice that the chamfer propagates across tangent neighbors until it encounters a break in tangency. However, if you use a One-by-One chain, the chamfer does not propagate across tangent neighbors. Note: Press CTRL+click to select additional references for the active chamfer set or to remove a reference. on the Feature toolbar or Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer. The Chamfer tool opens Click and Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry. Notice that the selected references are in the References collector on the Sets slide-up panel. Click Sets. On the Sets slide-up panel, select the Offset Surfaces chamfer creation method. This is the default chamfer creation method. Select the O1 x O2 dimension scheme from the Dimension Scheme box on the dialog bar. You can also select this scheme from the shortcut menu. To define the offset distance, drag each distance handle to the preferred offset distance or snap each to a reference. Pro/ENGINEER displays the offset distance values in the graphics window and dynamically updates the preview geometry.
2.
3. 4. 5.
255/ 375
Note: You can also type a new distance value or select a most recently used value from the O1 or O2 box on the Dialog Bar. The same method applies to the distance box in the Distance table (O1 or O2 column) located on the Sets slide-up panel. 6. To reverse the chamfer distances, click on the Dialog Bar. Click it again to return to the original distances. You can also place your cursor over the radius handle, right-click and use Flip from the shortcut menu. At this point the chamfer is complete. If you need to define the chamfer further, refer to the topics under See Also for more information. Click to save your changes. Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
7.
8. Tip:
If you are using a chain as a reference and you want to modify it, click Details on the Sets slide-up panel and use the Chain dialog box. To quickly define a distance, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. You can always select Default in a most recently used list to enable Pro/ENGINEER to determine the value. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To Define the Chamfer Distance Using a Reference In addition to dragging distance handles, or typing or selecting distance values, Pro/ENGINEER enables you to define a chamfer distance by snapping to a vertex or datum point. 1. 2. 3. Select the placement references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
In the graphics window, select the distance handle that you want to redefine. Press SHIFT and drag the distance handle to snap it to a vertex or to a datum point. As you drag, notice that Pro/ENGINEER pre-highlights the reference as your cursor moves over it. This enables you to target the correct reference. Pro/ENGINEER does the following:
o o o
Replaces the default distance handle with a special handle in the graphics window that contains the reference information. Activates the distance collector on the Dialog Bar to indicate that an item has been selected. Selects Reference from the Sets slide-up panel Distance box (located under the Distance table) and populates the Distance collector in the Distance table with the reference information.
Note: If you snapped the handle, notice the snapping behavior. For D x D and 45 X D chamfers, Pro/ENGINEER hides the second distance handle and the chamfer anchor. For Angle x D chamfers, the anchor is hidden. For D1 x D2 chamfers, Pro/ENGINEER separates the handles and displays the unsnapped handle with the anchor to enable the handle to move independently. 4. To redefine the distance, press SHIFT and drag the handle to unsnap it from the reference. Notice that the default handle replaces the special handle. You can then snap the distance handle to another reference, drag the handle to a preferred location, or type or select a new distance value using the distance value boxes from the Dialog Bar or from the Distance table in the Sets slide-up panel. The chamfer distance is defined. You can continue to work with chamfers or click Pro/ENGINEER to create the chamfer and close the Chamfer tool. enabling
5.
256/ 375
Tip:
If you prefer to define a chamfer distance from the Sets slide-up panel, simply select Reference from the distance box located under the Distance table. After the distance collector activates, select the reference vertex or datum point from the graphics window. To quickly identify a distance from the Sets slide-up panel, place your cursor over a distance value in the Distance table. Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights each distance handle enabling you to select it. If you want to use a datum point, but one is not present, you can create one without closing the Chamfer tool by opening one of the Datum Point tools on the Feature Toolbar. As you work in the graphics window, you can use Clear from the shortcut menu to clear all references from the active collector. To remove a reference from within a collector, select the reference that you want to remove, and with your cursor still in the collector right-click and select Remove from the shortcut menu. To quickly define a distance, simply double-click the distance value in the graphics window. After the box opens, type a new distance value and press ENTER, or select a most recently used value from the list. About Chamfer Creation Methods Pro/ENGINEER uses various attributes to create the chamfer geometry (chamfer pieces). These attributes include the chamfer creation method. The creation method is the way in which Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer geometry. Different creation methods result in different chamfer geometry. To simplify the chamfer creation process, Pro/ENGINEER uses a default creation method. Remember, you can change the default creation method at any time in your design session by using the Creation Method box on the Sets slide-up panel. Pro/ENGINEER provides the following chamfer creation methods:
Offset SurfacesDetermines the chamfer distance by offsetting the neighboring surfaces of the edge reference. Pro/ENGINEER selects this creation method by default. Tangent DistanceDetermines the chamfer distance with vectors that are tangent to the neighboring surface of the edge reference. To Create a Corner Chamfer A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a part. 1. 2. Choose Insert > Chamfer > Corner Chamfer. The CHAMFER (CORNER): Corner dialog box opens. Pro/ENGINEER selects the Corner element and indicates the status as Defining. In the graphics window, select the edge reference for the corner to chamfer. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selected edge and confirms the Corner element status as Defined. The PICK/ENTER menu appears. Do one of the following:
3.
Click Pick Point and select a point on the highlighted edge to define the chamfer length along that edge for the vertex. Pro/ENGINEER selects this command by default. Click Enter-input, type a length dimension value in the dimension box and click the chamfer length along the highlighted edge for the vertex. . This defines
o
4.
After you have defined the first vertex, Pro/ENGINEER highlights the other edges, one at a time, so you can define the other two vertices. Repeat step 3 to define each vertex. Notice that you can select different defining methods for each edge. Click OK in the dialog box. Pro/ENGINEER creates the corner chamfer.
5.
Example: Corner Chamfer The following illustration describes a corner chamfer:
257/ 375
To Rename a Chamfer Feature You can rename the current chamfer feature while working in the Chamfer tool. 1. 2. 3. Select the references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
Click the Properties tab on the Dashboard. The Properties slide-up panel appears. In the Name box, type the new name for the chamfer feature on which you are working and press ENTER. When you are finished working with the chamfer feature, click . Pro/ENGINEER renames the chamfer feature, saves your modeling changes, creates the chamfer, and closed the Chamfer tool.
4.
To Retrieve Chamfer Feature Information You can retrieve information for the current chamfer feature while working in the Chamfer tool. 1. 2. 3. Select the references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
Click the Properties tab on the Dashboard. The Properties slide-up panel appears. Click information. . Pro/ENGINEER opens the embedded browser and displays the chamfer feature
Tip: If additional information is available for the current chamfer feature, simply click the links in the browser. About Chamfer Transitions Transitions allow you to specify how Pro/ENGINEER handles overlapping or discontinuous chamfer pieces. Pro/ENGINEER uses default transitions after you create chamfer geometry. These default transitions are selected according to the particular geometrical context. For many cases, you will simply use the default transitions. However, at some point, you will need to modify the existing transitions to achieve the preferred chamfer geometry. You modify existing transition in the following ways:
Define a TransitionChange the transition type. Delete Transitions and Make a New TransitionDelete one or more transitions to free references and replace them by making a new transition for the affected geometry. Chamfer Transitions An understanding of chamfer transitions will enable you to achieve the preferred chamfer geometry for your model. The following table describes the chamfer transitions that Pro/ENGINEER provides: Chamfer Transitions Transition Type Example Description
258/ 375
Stop Case 1
Terminates the chamfer using one of three different Stop Cases. Pro/ENGINEER configures each Stop Case geometry based on the geometrical context.
1 Stop Case transition 2 Chamfer piece 3 Stop transition Stop Case 2
4 Stop Case transition Stop Case 3
5 Stop Case transition
259/ 375
Stop at Referenc e
Terminates chamfer geometry at the datum point or datum plane that you specify.
1 Chamfer piece 2 Stop at Reference transition 3 Datum point 4 Stop transition 5 Existing round geometry Blend Blend on a corner Creates a fillet surface between the chamfer pieces using an edge reference. Note that all tangent chamfer geometry stops at sharp edges.
1 Chamfer piece 2 Fillet surface 3 Stop transition Blend between two collinear chamfer pieces
1 Chamfer piece 2 Fillet surface (Blend transition)
260/ 375
3 Stop transition
Continue
Continue between two collinear chamfer pieces
Extends the chamfer geometry into two chamfer pieces. Note that tangent chamfer geometry does not stop at sharp edges (compare with Blend). The resulting geometry looks as if the chamfer was placed first, and then geometry was cut away. Neighboring surfaces are extended to meet chamfer geometry where applicable.
1 Chamfer piece 2 Extension of chamfer (Continue transition) 3 Stop transition 4 Extension of neighboring surface to meet chamfer geometry. geometry
Corner Plane
Chamfers the corner transition formed by three overlapping chamfer pieces with a plane. Note: Corner Plane transitions apply only to geometry where three chamfer pieces overlap at a corner.
1 Chamfer piece end (chamfer pieces are under the transition preview geometry) 2 Corner Plane transition 3 Stop transition
261/ 375
Intersect
Intersect of two chamfer pieces
Extends two or more overlapping chamfer pieces towards each other until they merge forming a sharp boundary. Note: Intersect transitions only apply to two or more overlapping chamfer pieces.
1 Chamfer piece 2 Intersect transition 3 Stop transition
Intersect of four chamfer pieces
1 Chamfer piece 2 Intersect transition 3 Stop transition
Patch
Patch for three chamfer pieces.
Creates a patched surface at the location where three or four chamfer pieces overlap. You can add an additional side to a three-sided Patch transition by selecting an optional surface on which to create a fillet that contains a radius. This fillet becomes the fourth side of the resulting patch
1 Chamfer piece 2 Patch transition 3 Stop transition
262/ 375
Same Patch as above with an optional surface
the resulting patch and is tangent. Note: Patch transitions apply only to geometry where three or four chamfer pieces overlap at a corner.
1 Chamfer piece 2 Patch transition (with radius value) 3 Optional surface selected 4 Stop transition
Patch for four chamfer pieces.
1 Chamfer piece 2 Patch transition 3 Stop transition Defining Chamfer Transitions Consider the following when defining chamfer transitions:
If you copy, reroute, or place a group with a chamfer that contains user-defined transitions, Pro/ENGINEER removes these transitions from the resulting feature. If a chamfer feature fails due to missing transition references, Pro/ENGINEER displays an error message and instructs you to redefine the transitions by selecting references for each transition. If a transition has invalid references, you may repair the transition by replacing references that are missing or invalid, or you can change the transition type. If the chamfer set geometry is modified in Set mode (for example, references or sets have been removed or added) resulting in the associated user-defined transitions becoming invalid, Pro/ENGINEER will delete the invalid transitions and reconstruct the default transitions for the chamfer geometry. Note that Pro/ENGINEER will always maintain user-defined transitions whenever possible. To Define a Chamfer Transition Note: This topic is a Master Procedure in that some transitions require that you follow an additional topic to complete the procedure. If you select one of these transitions, simply follow the instructions.
263/ 375
1. 2.
Select the references for the chamfer and click
. The Chamfer tool opens.
on the Dialog Bar to switch to Transition mode. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry Click of all transitions for the entire chamfer feature.
Note: You can also use Show Transitions from the shortcut menu to activate Transition mode. 3. 4. In the graphics window, select the transition that you want to define. Pro/ENGINEER makes the transition active. Select one of the following transition types from the Transition Type box on the Dialog Bar, or from the shortcut menu and follow the procedure for that transition type. Note: Pro/ENGINEER determines the valid transition types according to the geometrical context of the selected transition. This means that not every transition type listed below will be available to you for a particular transition.
o o o o o o o o o o
DefaultPro/ENGINEER determines the transition type that is the best fit for the geometrical context. The transition type appears in parenthesis. Proceed to step 6. BlendCreate a fillet surface between the chamfer pieces using an edge reference. Proceed to step 5. ContinueExtend chamfer geometry into two chamfer pieces. Proceed to step 5. IntersectExtend two or more overlapping chamfer pieces toward each other until they merge forming a sharp boundary. Proceed to step 5. Corner PlaneChamfer the corner transition formed by three overlapping chamfer pieces with a plane. Proceed to step 5. PatchCreate a patched surface at the location where three or four chamfer pieces overlap. Click To Define a Patch Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop Case 1Terminate the chamfer using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Click To Define a Stop Case Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop Case 2Terminate chamfer using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Click To Define a Stop Case Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop Case 3Terminate chamfer using geometry configured by Pro/ENGINEER. Click To Define a Stop Case Transition under See Also to define this transition. Stop at ReferenceTerminate chamfer geometry at the selected datum point or datum plane that you specify. Click To Define a Stop at Reference Transition under See Also to define this transition.
Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry of the transition and adds the selected transition to the Transitions list located on the Transitions slide-up panel. Notice that Pro/ENGINEER displays only userdefined transitions on this list. If you want to remove a transition from the Transitions list, see the note at the end of this topic. 5. If you want to cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry by creating end surfaces, click the Capped check box located on the Dialog Bar. Notice that this check box is available only if you select a transition type (other than Default) and use the Surface or New quilt attachment type (see About Chamfer Attachment Types). Pro/ENGINEER clears this check box by default. Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the chamfer piece cannot be capped. This check box caps only the gaps between the active transition and part geometry while the Create end surfaces check box located on the Options slide-up panel caps all chamfer piece ends for the entire chamfer feature. Remember, the Dialog Bar check box overrides the slide-up panel check box.
264/ 375
This enables you to cap the gaps of the active transition even if you decide not to cap all of the chamfer piece ends for the chamfer feature.
o
6.
You cannot cap chamfers between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
At this point, the transition is defined. Do one of the following:
o o
Define another transition. Click to return to Set mode and continue Note: You can also use Back to Sets from the shortcut menu. Click tool. working with chamfer sets.
enabling Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, create the chamfer, and close the Chamfer
Note: If you want to restore the default transition, select Default from the Transition Type box on the Dialog bar, or from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER does not display default transition types on the Transitions list. Do not use Delete Transition from the shortcut menu to remove a transition type from the Transitions list. If you do use it, you can do one of the following to restore the default transition type: Press CTRL+Z to undo the selection (or Edit > Undo setting), switch to Set mode, or close the Chamfer tool. Tip:
You can also use Capped from the shortcut menu to cap the gaps of the active transition. To preview various transitions before selecting one, simply place your cursor over each transition type in the Transition Type box. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the corresponding transition geometry in the graphics window. About Deleting Transitions and Making a Transition Pro/ENGINEER determines a transition type according to the selected placement references and geometrical context. However, sometimes the available transitions are not what is needed for the geometry. If this situation arises, you can delete one or more transitions to free references and make a new transition. Pro/ENGINEER configures the new transition according to the geometrical context. The following table illustrates this process. Note: If you delete one or more transitions and do not replace them by making a new transition, Pro/ENGINEER restores the default transitions for the free references because the geometrical input did not change and the transitions with the best fit for the geometry are selected. Deleting Transitions and Making a Transition In Transition mode, transitions are selected and deleted using Delete Transition from the shortcut menu. The free chamfer piece ends are selected (use CTRL+click), and a new transition is created using Make Transition from the shortcut menu. Deleting One Two and Making Deleting One and Making One
265/ 375
1 Transitions (Stop Case) 2 Free chamfer piece ends 3 New transition (Continue)
1 Transitions (Intersect) 2 Free chamfer piece ends 3 New transitions (Stop Case)
To Delete Transitions and Make a Transition 1. 2. Select the references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
on the Dialog Bar to switch to Transition mode. Pro/ENGINEER displays preview geometry Click of all transitions for the entire chamfer feature.
Note: You can also use Show Transitions from the shortcut menu to change to Transition mode. 3. In the graphics window, select a transition that you want to delete, right-click and select Delete Transition from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER deletes the transition and frees the references. If needed, repeat this step to delete another transition. Note: The deleted transitions must share the same geometrical location in order to make a new transition. Press the CTRL key and click all of the chamfer piece ends that are free by the deleted transitions. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the selected chamfer piece ends. Right-click and select Make Transition from the shortcut menu. Pro/ENGINEER configures the new transition according to the geometrical context and displays it in the graphics window. Notice that the transition type for the new transition is displayed in the Transition Type box on the Dialog Bar, and on the shortcut menu. Note: If you do not select Make Transition, Pro/ENGINEER restores the default transitions for the freed references because the geometrical input did not change and the transitions with the best fit for the geometry was again selected. If you want to change the transition type for the new transition, select the new type from the Transition Type box on the Dialog Bar, or from the shortcut menu. At this point, the new transition is complete. Do one of the following:
4. 5.
6. 7.
o o
Make another new transition. Click Click tool. to return to Set mode and continue working with chamfer sets.
enabling Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, create the chamfer, and close the Chamfer
266/ 375
Tip:
If you need to return to the default transition after making a new transition, simply delete the new transition and click Proceed to step 2. . Pro/ENGINEER switches to Set mode and restores the default transitions.
You can also delete a transition from the Transitions list on the Transitions slide-up panel by using Delete Transition on the shortcut menu. If you delete the wrong transition, right-click and select Back to Sets. Pro/ENGINEER switches to Set mode and recreates the default transition. Proceed to step 2. If you made an error selecting a chamfer piece end, right-click and select Clear from the shortcut menu. Then, select the preferred ends. Remember to use the CTRL key as you select multiple chamfer piece ends. About Piece Management As you work with chamfers, the ability to manage chamfer pieces becomes essential. Through piece management, you can better control your chamfer features. Chamfer piece management is performed using the Pieces slide-up panel (click the Pieces tab on the dashboard). Using the Pieces slide-up panel, you can perform the following:
View all chamfer sets for the chamfer feature View the current chamfer set View all chamfer pieces in the current chamfer set View the current state of the chamfer pieces Exclude chamfer pieces from the chamfer set Trim or extend chamfer pieces Address placement ambiguity
About Chamfer Patches and Chamfer Pieces To successfully exclude, trim, or extend chamfer geometry, an understanding and accurate identification of chamfer patches and pieces is necessary. A chamfer piece is simply chamfer geometry that is placed at the selected references. A chamfer piece can contain patches. A patch is a neighbor that is tangent to the end of the chamfer piece that is being created. This tangency occurs due to existing model geometry. The following table illustrates chamfer patches and pieces:
267/ 375
One Chamfer Piece with Three Patches
Two Chamfer Pieces without Patches
After you select the edge reference, Pro/ENGINEER automatically propagates the chamfer piece across all tangent points resulting in tangent segments called patches. In the illustration below, tangency occurs due to the existing round geometry.
After you select two edge references, Pro/ENGINEER places two separate chamfer pieces at the selected references to create the chamfer. In the illustration below, tangency does not occur due to the vertex. This results in the two overlapping chamfer pieces. Pro/ENGINEER uses transitions to resolve this discontinuous geometry.
1 Edge reference 2 Patch 3 Patch 4 Patch 5 Existing round geometry About Excluding Chamfer Pieces
1 Edge references 2 Overlapping chamfer pieces
You can exclude one or more chamfer pieces in a chamfer set that contains multiple chamfer pieces by using the Pieces slide-up panel. Excluding pieces enables you to gain more control over the chamfer geometry. Note: To exclude chamfer pieces, the current chamfer set must contain two or more chamfer pieces that use one explicit placement reference. This can occur if the chamfer geometry breaks due to non-tangent chains. It can also occur if a single chamfer piece cannot be created at a certain distance value. For example, a chamfer that is too large to sweep around a corner. Excluding Chamfer Pieces Before Exclude The placement edge reference is selected and the chamfer geometry propagates across tangent points. The chamfer piece distance is increased and the geometry breaks resulting in chamfer pieces 1 and 2. After Exclude Chamfer piece 2 is select from the Pieces slide-up panel and Excluded is used. Pro/ENGINEER excludes the chamfer piece.
268/ 375
1 Chamfer piece 1 2 Chamfer piece 2 3 Trim/Extend handle 4 Edge reference 5 Existing round geometry To Exclude Chamfer Pieces Note: To exclude chamfer pieces, the current chamfer set must contain two or more chamfer pieces that use one explicit placement reference. This can occur if the chamfer geometry breaks due to non-tangent chains. It can also occur if a single chamfer piece cannot be created at a certain distance value. For example, a chamfer that is too large to sweep around a corner. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Tip: Select the references for the chamfer and click of the chamfer appears. . The Chamfer tool opens and preview geometry
Click the Pieces tab on the dashboard. The Pieces slide-up panel appears. On the Sets list, select the chamfer set that contains the piece that you want to exclude. All of the chamfer pieces for the current chamfer set are listed on the Pieces table. On the Pieces table, select the chamfer piece that you want to exclude and select Excluded. The chamfer piece is excluded from the model. If you want to exclude another chamfer piece, repeat step 3. and step 4. To include an excluded chamfer piece, select the piece and Included from the Pieces table. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue to work with chamfers. When completed, click . Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
You can also use Excluded or Included from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. If you excluded multiple pieces in the current chamfer set and want to quickly include them all, simply select All included from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window. About Trimming Chamfer Geometry You can trim chamfer geometry (pieces) to achieve the preferred chamfers for your model. As you create a chamfer, the chamfer geometry automatically propagates across tangent points and then stops at a non-
269/ 375
tangent point. If you need to terminate the chamfer geometry before the non-tangent point, you can trim the chamfer piece up to a patch that you select. The table following table illustrates the trim process. Note: You can only trim open chamfer sets. If you want to work with a closed-loop chamfer set, you must first use open the chamfer geometry.
You cannot trim separate (overlapping) chamfer pieces. To remove one of these pieces, press CTRL and select the piece, or clear it from its respective collector. If you need to terminate chamfer geometry at a different point other than a patch, you must define a Stop at Reference transition. Trimming Chamfer Geometry Description The chamfer placement edge reference is selected and the chamfer geometry propagates across tangent points due to the existing round geometry (a). The chamfer piece is selected from the Pieces slide-up panel and the trim/extend handles appear (b). As the left handle is dragged to trim the chamfer piece, potential extension geometry appears. Notice that the cursor and handle change during trimming. Using the preview geometry as a guide, the handle is dragged to trim up the third patch (c). Notice that the preview geometry outline changes color indicating the extent of the trim. Release the mouse button and Pro/ENGINEER trims the chamfer up to the patch (d). Example
1 Edge placement reference 2 Chamfer piece (consisting of three patches) 3 Existing round geometry 4 Trim/Extend handles 5 Potential extension geometry 6 Trimmed patches 7 Trimmed chamfer geometry
270/ 375
To Trim Chamfer Geometry 1. 2. Select the references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
Open the Pieces slide-up panel and select the chamfer piece to trim from the Pieces table. Handles appear on the piece ends.
Note: If you have a closed-loop chamfer set, you need to open it by removing a patch. After you select the piece to trim, select a patch from the graphics window. Pro/ENGINEER removes the patch and handles appear. 3. Drag a handle up to the patch where you want to trim the chamfer piece. Pro/ENGINEER trims the chamfer piece. Notice that Edited appears in the Pieces table for the selected piece. Repeat the process if needed. To trim another chamfer piece, repeat step 2. and step 3. To restore the trimmed chamfer piece to its original state, select Included from the Pieces table or from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. The trimmed chamfer piece is complete. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue to work with chamfers. When completed, click . Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
4. 5. 6.
7. Tip:
If you trimmed multiple pieces in the current chamfer set and want to quickly restore all of them to their original state, simply select All included from Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window. About Extending Chamfer Geometry You can extend chamfer geometry (pieces) to achieve the preferred chamfers for your model. As you create a chamfer, the chamfer geometry automatically propagates across tangent points and then stops at a nontangent point. If you need to continue the chamfer geometry, you can extend the chamfer piece up to a patch that you select. The following table illustrates the extend process. Note:
You can only extend open chamfer sets. If you want to work with a closed-loop chamfer set, you must first use open the chamfer geometry. You cannot extend separate (overlapping) chamfer pieces. To remove one of these pieces, press CTRL and select the piece, or clear it from its respective collector. If you need to extend chamfer geometry at a different point other than a patch, you must define a Stop at Reference transition. Pro/ENGINEER uses an automatic blend to fill the gap around a corner. This blend cannot be modified or deleted. If a blend cannot be added, extend cannot be performed.
271/ 375
Extending Chamfer Geometry Description Example
The chamfer placement edge reference is selected and the chamfer geometry stops at nontangent points (a). The chamfer piece is selected from the Pieces slide-up panel and the trim/extend handles appear (b). As the right handle is dragged to extend the chamfer piece, potential extension geometry appears. Notice that blend transitions are automatically added where a gap exists between tangent points. Also notice that the cursor and handle change during extending. Using the potential extension geometry as a guide, the handle is dragged to extend the chamfer piece up to the third patch (c). Notice that the potential extension geometry outline changes color indicating the extent of the extension. Release the mouse button and Pro/ENGINEER extends the chamfer piece up to the patch (d). 1 Edge placement reference 2 Chamfer piece (consisting of three patches) 3 Trim/Extend handles 4 Potential extension geometry (including blend transitions) 5 Chamfer extension 6 Extended chamfer piece
To Extend Chamfer Geometry 1. 2. Select the references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
Open the Pieces slide-up panel and select the chamfer piece to extend from the Pieces table. Handles appear on the piece ends.
Note: If you have a closed-loop chamfer set, you need to open it by removing a patch. After you select the piece to trim, select a patch from the graphics window. Pro/ENGINEER removes the patch and handles appear. 3. Drag a handle to extend the piece. As you drag, the potential extension of the chamfer piece appears. Follow the extension up to the patch where you want to extend the piece. Pro/ENGINEER
272/ 375
extends the chamfer piece up to the patch. Notice that Edited appears in the Pieces table for the selected piece. Repeat the process if needed. 4. 5. 6. To extend another chamfer piece, repeat step 2. and step 3. To return the piece to its original state, select Included from the Pieces table or from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. The extended chamfer piece is complete. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue to work with chamfers. When completed, click . Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer and closes the Chamfer tool.
7.
Tip: If you extended multiple pieces in the current chamfer set and want to quickly restore all of them to their original state, simply select All included from Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu.
To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window. About Chamfer Placement Ambiguity As you work with chamfers, you may encounter a situation when more than one possible placement location exists for the current chamfer set. This can happen when two surfaces intersect in multiple, distinct locations. If this situation occurs, placement ambiguity results in which the placement of the chamfer pieces is unclear due to the selected references and part geometry. Pro/ENGINEER enables you to easily address placement ambiguity. The table below illustrates placement ambiguity and the method used to address it: Placement Ambiguity Ambiguity Type Chamfer Set Ambiguity The chamfer set contains chamfer pieces that coexist and can be placed in various locations given the selected references and part geometry. If this occurs, the chamfer set contains ambiguity. Method: Use the Pieces slide-up panel. From the Pieces table, select the chamfer piece to exclude and select Excluded. All other pieces are Included by default. Example
1 Chamfer piece 1 2 Chamfer piece 2 3 Edge reference 4 Chamfer piece 1 excluded 5 Chamfer piece 2 excluded 6 Both chamfer pieces included
273/ 375
To Address Chamfer Placement Ambiguity 1. 2. 3. Select the references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
Click the Pieces tab on the dashboard. The Pieces slide-up panel appears. On the Sets list, select the chamfer set that contains the chamfer pieces that you want to address. All of the chamfer pieces for the current chamfer set are listed in the Pieces table. 1. In the Pieces table, do one of the following:
Exclude a chamfer pieceSelect the chamfer piece to exclude and select Excluded. Pro/ENGINEER removes the chamfer piece from the model.
Note: You cannot exclude all of the listed chamfer pieces.
Include a chamfer pieceSelect the chamfer piece to include and select Included. Pro/ENGINEER displays the chamfer piece on the model. Note: Pro/ENGINEER includes all chamfer pieces by default.
5. 6. 7.
To exclude another chamfer piece in the current chamfer set, repeat step 5. To include an excluded chamfer piece, repeat step 5. At this point, the ambiguity for the current chamfer set has been addressed. Do one of the following:
o o
sets.
In the Sets list, select another chamfer set that contains ambiguity to address. Close the Pieces slide-up panel to activate Sets mode and continue working with chamfer
o
Tip:
Click Chamfer tool.
. Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, creates the chamfer, and closes the
You can also use Excluded or Included from the Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. If you excluded multiple pieces in the current chamfer set and want to quickly include them all, simply select All included from Pieces slide-up panel shortcut menu. To quickly locate a piece on your model, place your cursor over each piece in the Pieces table and Pro/ENGINEER dynamically highlights it in the graphics window. About Chamfer Attachment Types After you create your chamfer, Pro/ENGINEER attaches the chamfer geometry to your model using an attachment type. Using the Options slide-up panel, you can view the current attachment type or change the way in which your chamfer is attached by defining a different attachment type. The Options slide-up panel provides the following options:
SolidCreate the chamfer feature as a solid that intersects the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select solids as chamfer set references. SurfaceCreate the chamfer feature as a surface that does not intersect the existing geometry. This attachment type is available only if you select solids as chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default. New quiltCreate the chamfer feature as a new quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select different surface quilts or both a solid and a quilt as chamfer set references.
274/ 375
Same quiltCreate the chamfer feature as a surface that merges with the reference quilt. This attachment type is available only for surface chamfer set references. Pro/ENGINEER selects this by default if you select chamfer set references from the same surface quilt. Create end surfacesCreate end surfaces to cap all of the chamfer piece ends of the chamfer feature. This check box is available only if you select valid geometry and the Surface or New quilt attachment types. Pro/ENGINEER does not select this by default. Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the chamfer piece ends cannot be capped. For example, an L-shaped open quilt cannot be capped. This check box is different from the Capped check box on the Dialog Bar and the Capped shortcut menu command. The latter two enable you to create end surfaces to cap the gaps between active transition and part geometry. You cannot cap chamfers between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
Using End Surfaces to Resolve Chamfer Failures If your chamfer geometry has failed because it cannot be attached to the part, change the attachment type in the Options slide-up panel from a Solid to Surface. This enables you to save problematic chamfer geometry as a quilt until you can resolve the geometry errors. After you resolve the errors, you can create a new solid chamfer from the quilt by using the Solidify tool (Edit > Solidify). To Define a Chamfer Attachment Type 1. 2. 3. Select the references for the chamfer and click . The Chamfer tool opens.
Click the Options tab on the Dashboard. The Options slide-up panel appears. Under Attachment, select one of the following attachment types for the chamfer feature:
o o o o
4.
Solid (you must select solids as references) Surface (you must select solids as references) New quilt (you must select a surface quilt as one of your references) Same quilt (you must select references from the same surface quilt)
If you selected the Surface or New quilt attachment type, you can click the Create end surfaces check box to create end surfaces to cap all of the chamfer piece ends of the entire chamfer feature. Pro/ENGINEER clears this check box by default. Note:
o o
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the chamfer piece ends cannot be capped. This check box is different from the Capped check box on the Dialog Bar and the Capped shortcut menu command. The latter two enable you to create end surfaces to cap the gaps between active transition and part geometry. You cannot cap chamfers between a solid surface and a quilt surface.
5. At this point, the attachment type is defined. You can continue to work with chamfer sets or click enabling Pro/ENGINEER to save your changes, create the chamfer, and close the Chamfer tool. To Resolve Failed Chamfers Using End Surfaces If your chamfer geometry has failed because it cannot be attached to the part, use the following procedure to change the attachment type from a solid to a surface. This enables you to save the problematic chamfer geometry until you can resolve the geometry errors. After you resolve the errors, you can create a new solid chamfer from the quilt.
275/ 375
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Select the references for the chamfer and click
. The Chamfer tool opens.
Click the Options tab on the Dashboard. The Options slide-up panel appears. Click the Surface or New quilt attachment type. Note that New quilt is available only if you select a surface quilt as one of your references. If you need to create end surfaces to cap all of the chamfer piece ends of the entire chamfer feature, click the Create end surfaces check box. If you need to create end surfaces to cap the gaps between active transition and part geometry, click the Capped check box on the Dialog Bar. Remember, you must be in Transition mode to cap the active transition. Click to save your changes, Pro/ENGINEER creates the chamfer, and closed the Chamfer tool.
6. 7. 8. Note:
Use the Pro/ENGINEER surface tools (surface extend, surface trim, etc.) to modify the surface and resolve the errors. Use the Solidify tool (Edit > Solidify) on the quilt to make the surface chamfer a solid chamfer.
Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the chamfer piece cannot be capped. You cannot cap chamfers between a solid surface and a quilt surface. Tip: You can also use the Capped shortcut menu command from within the graphics window to quickly cap the gaps between the active transition and part geometry. Chamfer References and Attachment Types The following table provides possible attachment types based on geometric references: Note: Pro/ENGINEER overrides the attachment type settings that you select if it cannot perform the action requested due to geometrical limitations.
276/ 375
Chamfer References and Attachment Types Geometric References Default Attachment Type Optional Attachment Type Surface Changes the default solid to a surface. Capped Ends
Solid-Solid
Solid Creates chamfer geometry to the limit of the reference set, extends it to any capping surfaces if possible. If necessary, it is capped with a triangular patch and made into solid geometry
Create end surfaces (Options slide-up panel check box) Creates end surfaces to cap all of the chamfer piece ends of the entire chamfer feature. You can use this option if the solid chamfer fails.
Solid-Quilt
New quilt Creates chamfer geometry to the limit of the set, trims it at a straight line in space, and does not cap it with a triangular patch. The surface is unattached.
N/A
N/A
Quilt-Quilt (same quilt)
Same quilt Creates chamfer geometry to the limit of the set, trims it at a straight line in space, and does not cap it with a triangular patch. The surface is merged into the existing quilt.
New quilt Changes the default merged quilt into a new surface.
Create end surfaces (Options slide-up panel check box) Creates end surfaces to cap all of the chamfer piece ends of the entire chamfer feature. Note: Side surfaces must exist in order to extend and use them as capping surfaces. If not, the chamfer piece ends cannot be capped. For example, an L-shaped open quilt cannot be capped. You can use this option if the solid chamfer fails.
Quilt-Quilt (different quilts)
New quilt Creates temporary chamfer geometry to the limit of the set, trims it at a straight line in space, and does not cap it with a triangular patch. The surface is not merged into the existing quilt.
N/A
N/A
277/ 375
To Create a Shaft Shafts are analogous to sketched holes. Both are created by sketching sections of revolution then placing them on the model. However, shafts add material instead of removing it. 1. 2. 3. Click Insert > Advanced > Shaft. A SHAFT dialog box opens and the PLACEMENT menu appears. As with sketched holes, you must sketch the centerline axis of revolution as vertical. Place the topmost portion of the section on the placement plane. Because material is added for a shaft, the shaft projects away from the part instead of into the part.
Note: Insert > Advanced > Shaft is available when the configuration option allow_anatomic_features is set to yes. Example: Creating a Shaft The following figure illustrates a shaft feature.
To Create a Neck A neck is a special type of revolved slot that creates a groove around a revolved part or feature. You always create a neck on a Through Axis datum plane and sketch it inside the part. You must align both ends of the section to the revolved surface of the parent feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Inser t> Advanced > Neck. The OPTIONS menu appears. Choose an angle to specify the number of degrees in the revolution. Create or select a Through Axis datum plane as the sketching plane. Sketch the neck cross section open with the ends aligned to the silhouette edge of the part or feature. Sketch the centerline that becomes the axis of rotation.
In creating a neck, Pro/ENGINEER revolves the section around the part to the specified angle measure, removing the material inside the section. Note: Insert > Advanced > Neck is available when the configuration option allow_anatomic_features is set to yes. Example: Neck Feature Sketching the section
Perspective view of the section
The completed feature
To Create a Flange 1. 2. Click Insert > Advanced > Flange. Choose an angle to specify the number of degrees of revolution.
278/ 375
3. 4. 5.
Set up or select a Through/Axis datum plane as the sketching plane. Sketch the flange cross section open with the ends aligned to the silhouette edge of the revolved part or feature. Sketch the centerline that will become the axis of rotation.
A flange is analogous to a neck, except it adds material to the revolved solid. Therefore, you should sketch the section outside the part. Note: Insert > Advanced > Flange is available when the configuration option allow_anatomic_features is set to yes. Example: Creating a Flange The following figure illustrates a flange feature. Sketching the section
Perspective view of the section
The completed feature
To Create a Pipe The pipe feature is a three-dimensional centerline that represents the centerline of a pipe. Given the diameter of a pipe (and, for a hollow pipe, the wall thickness), a pipe connects selected datum points either with a combination of straight lines and arcs of specified bend radius, or a spline. After the pipe feature is created, you can determine its length by using Info from the toolbar. Before you start to create a pipe feature, reference datum points must already exist. 1. 2. Click Insert > Advanced > Pipe. The OPTIONS menu appears. Click one command from each of the following command sets:
GeometryCreate a pipe feature with a hollow or solid geometry. No geometryCreate the pipe trajectory only.
HollowCreate a hollow pipe with a specified wall thickness. SolidCreate a pipe with solid geometry (a rod).
Constant RadThe bend radius for all arc segments of the pipe will be the same. Multiple RadThe bend radius for each arc segment is specified and can be modified separately.
3.
Click Done.
4. If you selected Hollow, type the values for the outside diameter and wall thickness. The CONNECT TYPE menu appears. Use the commands on the CONNECT TYPE menu to add, delete, and insert points to redefine a pipe trajectory, as well as specify tangency to a linear trajectory.
279/ 375
5.
You can create the pipe trajectory by connecting the datum points. One of the CONNECT TYPE menu commands can be used interchangeably on the same pipe to construct the trajectory. The optiocomands ns are as follows:
o o
SplineCreate the trajectory as a three-dimensional spline passing through the datum points. Single RadCreate the trajectory by connecting datum points with alternating straight lines and arcs with a constant radius, starting and ending with straight lines. The datum points are connected with straight lines, then the breakpoints are filleted with the arcs of the specified bend radius. Multiple RadCreate the trajectory by connecting datum points with alternating straight lines and arcs with a variable radius, starting and ending with straight lines. The datum points are connected with straight lines, then the breakpoints are filleted with the arcs of the specified bend radii.
You can connect datum points in a datum point array using one of the CONNECT TYPE menu commands:
o o
Single PointSelect individual datum points. These points can have been created individually or as part of a datum point array. Whole ArrayConnect in consecutive order all the points in a datum point array.
7. You can add, delete, or insert points while creating or redefining the pipe feature using the following commands:
o o o
Add PointAdd to the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve will pass. Delete PointDelete from the definition of the curve an existing point, vertex, or curve end through which the curve currently passes. Insert PointInsert a point between already selected points, vertices, and curve ends. This modifies the curve definition to pass through the inserted point. The system prompts you to select a point or vertex before which to insert.
8.
Use one of the techniques below to complete the creation of the pipe trajectory, depending on the command you chose:
o o
SplineStart picking points; the system connects them with a spline. Single RadPro/ENGINEER prompts you to enter a bend radius value after you have selected the third datum point of the trajectory. The system uses this radius for all the other bends in the current pipe feature. Multiple RadPro/ENGINEER prompts you to enter a radius value for each bend defined by three consecutive points. The SEL VALUE menu lists all the existing radius values for this pipe. Either select one of the listed values, or choose the New Value option and enter the new value. Spline(alternating with either Single Rad or Multiple Rad)Create a trajectory for the first option, then the other. Connect the trajectory points accordingly.
Note: As you select datum points, the system constructs segments of the pipe feature. If a segment cannot be constructed, Pro/ENGINEER ignores the last datum point selection. 9. When you have finished creating the trajectory, choose Done.
Pipes After the pipe is created, you can modify the diameter, wall thickness (if any), and bend radii. You can redefine the feature attributes by toggling between the following OPTION menu commands:
Geometry and No geometryIf you choose Geometry, Pro/ENGINEER constructs the pipe feature with hollow or solid geometry. If you choose No geometry, the system constructs the pipe trajectory with no hollow or solid geometry.
280/ 375
Hollow and Solid. You cannot redefine the pipe trajectory type or toggle between the following pipe attributes:
Line/Arc and Spline Constant Rad and Multiple Rad You can redefine the feature references. When you choose References from the REDEFINE menu, Pro/ENGINEER redisplays the CONNECT TYPE and GET SELECT menus. Note: You can insert datum points as you redefine a pipe feature. To do this, the datum points must be older than the pipe feature. If they are not, you can reorder them. Creating Pipes in Assembly Mode You can construct pipes in Assembly mode as either a part feature or an assembly feature. When you create a pipe as a part feature in Assembly mode, you can use datum points on other parts. However, when you attempt to retrieve and regenerate the model in Part mode, the system issues a warning if some of the datum points belong to other parts. Although the system displays the pipe trajectory, it will not show the "external" datum points. To resolve the conflict, you can change the pipe trajectory in Part mode by modifying the remaining datum points. A pipe can also be an Assembly feature, although it will have no geometry. The process of creating an Assembly pipe feature is the same as described previously, but the system does not display the Geometry and No geometry options. Creating a Part Consisting Only of a Pipe Feature To create a part consisting only of a pipe feature, start with three default datum planes, create a datum point array, then create a pipe. Creating Pipe Connections For two separate pipes to be connected without creating an unattached feature, you must align their segments. How to Create Pipe Connections 1. 2. 3. Create both datum point arrays using the same coordinate system. Create an intermediate one-point array using that coordinate system. Write relations to determine coordinates of the intermediate point, relative to those of its neighbors. For instance, in the example below, the relations are as follows: DX6 = (DX2 + DX3) / 2 DY6 = (DY2 + DY3) / 2 DZ6 = (DZ2 + DZ3) / 2 To find the dimension symbols corresponding to the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the points, use the Info option. 4. Create the pipes, using the intermediate point as the last point in one pipe and the first in another. 5. Regenerate the model. Compound pipe
281/ 375
1. 2. 3. 4.
First array Intermediate point, located on the line connecting points 2 and 3 Second array First pipe created through points 0, 1, 2, and 6 with bend radius R1; second pipe created through points 6, 3, 4, and 5 with bend radius R2
Specifying Part Accuracy for Pipes The part accuracy value is very important, especially when you are creating long, thin pipes. Creating Pipes with Multiple Radii If you create a pipe with multiple radii, make sure all the radial values are different. Otherwise, the system creates only one dimension for equal radii and you will not be able to control them individually. If equal radii are required, modify the pipe after it has been created. Example: Pipe :Hollow pipe feature with geometry
Creating a Pipe Feature in Assembly Mode Perspective view
Side view
About Sketched Cosmetic Features Sketched cosmetic features are "drawn" on the surface of a part. They include such things as company logos or serial numbers that are stamped on an object. Sketched cosmetic features are also used to define the boundaries of a region for FEM partial loads. Other features cannot reference the cosmetic feature (dimensions, Use Edge, and so on). Sketched cosmetic features do not have to be regenerated or dimensioned. However, when in a nonparametric state, their section or location cannot be modified. If you want a non-parametric section and you dimension the section anyway, you can use Sketcher mode to modify the shape of the feature. Then delete all the dimensions before you choose Done. When the system prompts that the section is unresolved, type yes to continue. Unlike other features, cosmetic features can have a line style. You can use the Cosm Font option from the GEOM TOOLS menu to set the color, font, and style of the feature. Each individual geometry segment of the feature, whether a single feature or a pattern, can be set to a line style; they do not all have to be the same.
282/ 375
When you redefine a cosmetic feature, the line style can not be changed. If the line style does not have the default width, or if it uses a user-defined font, it is replaced with the appropriate default values. To Create a Regular Section Cosmetic Feature 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Insert > Cosmetic > Sketch. The OPTIONS menu appears. Click Regular Sec, and Xhatch or No Xhatch. Set up sketching references and sketch the feature. Click Done when finished. Pro/ENGINEER displays the cosmetic feature. If you selected Xhatch, the cross-hatch is displayed.
Regular Section Sketched Cosmetic Feature A regular section cosmetic feature stays right where you sketch it, whether in space or on a part surface. It is a flat feature. Regular section cosmetic features can be cross-hatched when they are created. The cross-hatching is displayed in all modes, but is modifiable only in Drawing mode. In Part and Assembly mode, the cross-hatch will be displayed at 45. If you create a cosmetic feature as a pattern, any changes to a member of the pattern, including cross-hatch modification, also changes every other member of the pattern. Example: Creating a Regular Section Cosmetic Feature The following figure illustrates a patterned cosmetic feature with cross-hatching.
To Create a Projected Section Cosmetic Feature Projected section cosmetic features are projected onto a single part surface; they can not cross part surfaces. Projected sections cannot be cross-hatched or patterned. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Insert > Cosmetic > Sketch. The OPTIONS menu appears. Click Project Sec and Done. Select the surfaces onto which the feature will be projected and click Done Select and Done Refs. Set up the sketching plane. Specify section references, sketch the section, and click Done.
Example: Creating a Projected Section Cosmetic Feature The following figure illustrates a sketched cosmetic feature that is projected.
a. b. c.
Sketched section Surface for projection Resulting feature
About Cosmetic Threads A cosmetic thread is a cosmetic feature that represents the diameter of a thread. It is displayed in magenta.
283/ 375
Unlike other cosmetic features, you cannot modify the line style of a cosmetic thread, nor are threads affected by hidden line display settings in the ENVIRONMENT menu. Threads are created with the default tolerance setting of limits. Cosmetic threads can be external or internal, and blind or through. You create cosmetic threads by specifying the minor or major diameter (for external and internal threads, respectively), starting surface, and thread length or ending edge. For a starting surface, you can select a quilt surface, regular Pro/ENGINEER surface, or split surface (such as a surface that belongs to a revolved feature, chamfer, round, or swept feature). For an up to surface, you can select any solid surface or a datum plane. Note: A thread that uses a depth parameter (a blind thread) cannot be defined from a non-planar surface. A blind external cosmetic thread fails if the minor diameter is equal to the diameter of the placement surface. The following table lists the parameters that can be defined for a thread at its creation, or later when the thread is added. In this table, pitch is the distance between two threads. PARAMETER NAME MAJOR_DIAMETER THREADS_PER_INCH THREAD FORM CLASS PLACEMENT METRIC PARAMETER VALUE Number Number String Number Character TRUE/FALSE PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Thread major diameter Threads per inch (1/pitch) Thread form Thread class Thread placement (A-external, B-internal) Thread is metric
You can manipulate thread parameters as you can manipulate other user-defined parametersyou can add, modify, delete, or display them using Tools > Parameters. To Create Cosmetic Threads You can create cosmetic threads using cylinders, splines, and non-normal planes as the references. 1. Click Insert > Cosmetic > Thread. The COSMETIC: Thread dialog box opens. This dialog box lists the required elements for the threadThread Surf, Start Surf, Direction, Depth, Major Diam, and Note Params. Select the cylindrical thread surface. Select the starting surface of the cosmetic thread. Pro/ENGINEER displays an arrow indicating the direction of feature creation. Click Flip, if necessary, then Okay. The SPEC TO menu appears. Click Blind, UpTo Pnt/Vtx, UpTo Curve, or UpTo Surface. Click Done. You are prompted for the necessary depth information. Note: If you select UpTo Surface, you can select a solid surface or datum plane, or you can create a datum plane "on-the-fly". 7. 8. Type the necessary depth information, depending on which option you chose. For example, if you chose Blind, the system prompts for the depth. Enter the diameter of the thread. Pro/ENGINEER displays a default value of the diameter of the cylinder. Note: Whether a thread is external or internal is determined by the geometry of the thread surface. If it is a shaft, the thread is external; if it is a hole, the thread is internal. For an internal thread, the default diameter value is 10% larger than the hole diameter. For an external thread, the default diameter value is 10% smaller than the shaft.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
284/ 375
9.
If you are satisfied with the definition of the thread, click OK.
Creating Cosmetic Threads The parameters file lists all the information on the thread parameters. You can edit the parameter file as needed. For example, the system prompts you twice for information about the diameter. One benefit of this redundancy is that you can place a metric thread on an English unit part, and vice versa. Note the following:
Options that can be specified in both the parameter file and the creation user interface are displayed with the values from the creation user interface by default. If you change these values, or if you read in another parameter file, these new values remain in the file. However, the values in the creation user interface remain unchanged. For example, if you specified a thread diameter of 2.5, then change the parameter file so the diameter is 3.5, the thread diameter remains 2.5. Note that if you modify the values in the parameter file, they lose their associativity with the model. The associativity between the parameter file and the creation user interface exists only feature creation. After you accept the default values, or make changes in the parameter file, these remain the same until you select the Note Params from the SEL ELEMENTS file. Even if you redefine the feature and the diameter thread type, the parameter file remains unchanged unless you manually change it. during values option or the
Pro/ENGINEER calculates the THREAD PLACEMENT value in the parameter file based on whether the thread is external (the thread surface geometry is a shaft) or internal (the thread surface geometry is a hole). The system displays the values of the feature in the dialog box, which may not be the same as the values in the parameter file. However, if you choose the Feat Info option, Pro/ENGINEER displays both the values you specified during feature creation and the values in the parameter file. Example: Creating Cosmetic Threads The following figures illustrates blind and through thread features. Blind Thread
a. b. c.
Surface Thread surface Length
Through Thread
a. b. c.
Surface Thread surface Ending edge+
Sample threads appear in the following figures.
285/ 375
Internal thread from the round up to the chamfer
External thread from the round up to the chamfer
To Create Custom Cosmetic Threads 1. 2. Create a simple part on which you want to create the thread. For example, extrude a cylinder, then extrude a radial hole through it. Create an extruded surface that completely goes through the solid material, using a circle as its section. This will be the main feature of the thread. Note: When you create the surface features, try to pick the minimum number of references to make a simpler UDF. 3. Create a surface copy feature using the SURF FORM Copy option to copy the surface whose profile you want to match. If this thread is being created on an existing hole, use the Fill option from the SRF GATHER menu when you copy the surface to fill in the hole. Choose Loops from the GATHER FILL menu, then pick the edge of the hole on the surface. Create a surface TRIM feature, choosing Use Quilt from the SOLID OPTS menu as the trim type. Pick the thread as the surface to trim and the copied surface as the surface to create the trim. Group the surface features together in a UDF.
4. 5.
Creating Custom Cosmetic Threads A thread is a grouped cosmetic feature. You can create your own (custom) thread by creating a new group. After the custom thread exists, you can step through the appropriate directory path to reach it. However, the menu option UP is not available for custom cosmetic threads. To create a cosmetic thread as a User-Defined feature (UDF), set the configuration file option allow_udf_style_cosm_threads to yes. To create a custom cosmetic thread, create a UDF and store it in a custom directory in the same path as the external and internal directories: <loadpoint>/intudfs/threads. You can then select this group using the option Search/Retr. Note: Custom cosmetic threads stored in the loadpoint may be preserved during a system update installation. Therefore, be sure to back up the custom cosmetic thread directory before updating an installation. The benefit of using a UDF as a thread feature is that thread parameters can be assigned to a cosmetic thread. These parameters can then be shown in a drawing by choosing Detail, Show, Note, Feat & View to select a feature in a picked view. To include thread parameters in an assembly drawing, you must add the part that contains the thread to the drawing.
To Create a Groove A groove is a projected cosmetic feature. You create a groove by making a sketch and projecting it onto a surface. However, the groove feature cannot cross surface boundaries.
286/ 375
You can use the groove feature in the manufacturing process with the Groove option, where the tool follows the groove path. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Insert > Cosmetic > Groove. The FEATURE REFS menu appears. Select the surface onto which to project the feature. Set up the sketching plane and reference. Sketch the groove section. Choose Done after the section is successfully regenerated. The groove feature is projected onto the selected surface and has no depth.
Note: Because a groove is a cosmetic feature, you can modify the display of its geometry using Redefine > Line Style. Groove features can be patternized. Example: Creating a Groove The following figures illustrate how to create a groove feature. Sketching the groove feature
Result User-Defined Cosmetic Features The option User Defined accesses groups from the FEAT CLASS menu. It functions like the option Create from the GROUP menu. About Sweeps A sweep feature is created by sketching or selecting a trajectory and then sketching a section to follow along it. Rules for Defining a Trajectory A constant section sweep can use either a trajectory sketched at the time of feature creation or a trajectory made up of selected datum curves or edges. As a general rule, the trajectory must have adjacent reference surfaces or be planar. When you define a sweep, the system checks the specified trajectory for validity and establishes normal surfaces. A normal surface is the surface whose normal is used to establish the Y-axis of the trajectory. When ambiguity exists, the system prompts you to select a normal surface. Depending on the type of chain selected as a trajectory, the following occurs:
All chain segments reference edgesThe normal surfaces are the adjacent surfaces of the edges. If the edges are two-sided, the system prompts you to choose one set of surfaces. All chain segments reference entities that belong to a datum curve, created by referencing surfaces (for example, by using the Projected option)The normal surfaces are reference surfaces of the curve. If the curve references two sets of surfaces, the system prompts you to choose one. All chain segments reference a sketched datum curvethe normal surface is the sketching plane of the curve. The chain of edges/curves is planar (other than a straight line) The normal surface is the plane defined by the chain. Datum curves that you select for the trajectory must be created with one of the following commands:
287/ 375
o o o o o o o
Sketch Intr. Surfs Use Xsec Projected Formed OffsetfromSrf Two Projections from any curve that lies in a plane
Consider the following special cases: If a datum curve and its adjacent surfaces were bent by a toroidal bend feature, you can use that curve as a trajectory. If you extend the chain with Trim/Extend in the CHAIN menu, the system accepts that chain if it is planar. Note that a sweep may fail if
A trajectory crosses itself You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when its is swept along the 3-dimensional trajectory An arc or a spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself traversing around the arc. To Create a Swept Feature 1. Click Insert > Sweep > Protrusion. The PROTRUSION: Sweep dialog box opens and the SWEEP TRAJ menu appears. Click Sketch Traj to sketch the directory or Select Traj to select the directory.
2.
o o
3.
Sketch TrajSketch the sweep trajectory using Sketcher mode. Select TrajSelect a chain of existing curves or edges as the sweep trajectory. The CHAIN menu allows you to select the desired trajectory.
If the trajectory lies in more than one surface, such as a trajectory defined by a datum curve created using Intr. Surfs, the system prompts you to select a normal surface for the sweep cross section. Pro/ENGINEER orients the Y-axis of the cross section to be normal to this surface along the trajectory.
4. Create or retrieve the section to be swept along the trajectory and dimension it relative to the crosshairs displayed on the trajectory. Click Done. 5. If the trajectory is open (the start and end points of the trajectory do not touch and you are creating a solid sweep, click one of the following ATTRIBUTES commands, then click Done.
o o
8.
Merge EndsMerge the ends of the sweep, if possible, into the adjacent solid. To do this, the sweep endpoint must be attached to part geometry. Free EndsDo not attach the sweep end to adjacent geometry.
If the sweep trajectory is closed, click one of the following SWEEP OPT menu commands and then click Done:
Add Inn FcsFor open sections, add top and bottom faces to close the swept solid (planar, closed trajectory, and open section). The resulting feature consists of surfaces created by sweeping the section and has two planar surfaces that cap the open ends. No Inn FcsDo not add top and bottom faces.
288/ 375
9.
Click Flip, if desired, then OK from the DIRECTION menu to select the side from which to remove material for swept cuts.
10. Select OK in the dialog box to create the sweep. Sweep Geometry The sweep will have a mitered corner if the trajectory has straight line segments that form an angle. Sweep with Mitered Corner
1 Angles in sweep trajectories create sweep corners Non-Tangent Trajectory Segments Sweeps can be made along trajectories consisting of non-tangent entities. However, as the section is swept along, the resulting geometry should not have any gaps. This is shown in the following illustration. Sweeping Along Non-Tangent EntitiesCorrect Sweep
1 Trajectory Sweeping Along Non-Tangent EntitiesIncorrect Sweep
1. 2.
Trajectory Gap in the sweep geometry
Three-Dimensional Sweeps You can create sweeps along a three-dimensional path with a three-dimensional spline for the sweep trajectory. You can modify the Z-coordinates of spline points. All other Sketcher entities must lie on a twodimensional sketching plane. In all other respects, three-dimensional sweeps are created in the same way as two-dimensional sweeps. For such applications as creating springs, you can also create an advanced feature helical sweep by sweeping a section along a helical trajectory. Example: Sweeps Solid Sweeps with Closed Trajectories Closed Trajectory, No Inn Fcs. Section must be closed.
289/ 375
Closed Trajectory, Add Inn Fcs. Section must be open.
Note: When creating a surface sweep with a closed trajectory, use No Inn Fcs with an open or closed section. Add Inn Fcs requires only an open section.
Constant Section Sweep A constant section sweep can use either a trajectory sketched at the time of feature creation or a trajectory made up of selected datum curves or edges. As a general rule, the trajectory must have adjacent reference surfaces, or be planar. The following figure illustrates a constant section sweep.
a. Sweep uses as a trajectory a datum curve created from the intersection of two surfaces. A sweep may fail if
A trajectory crosses itself You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when its is swept along the 3-dimensional trajectory An arc or a spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself traversing around the arc (see the following illustration) Self-Intersecting Feature
a. b.
Trajectory (Radius 1.0) Section (Radius 1.5)
Free and Merged Ends
a. b. c.
Merged ends Free ends The trajectory ends at intersection with solid geometry, but the sweep end is unattached.
290/ 375
To Create a Three-Dimensional Sweep 1. 2. Create a two-dimensional spline and dimension it to a Sketcher coordinate system. Modify the X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates for one or more spline points. You can modify the spline coordinates manually, or by using a spline definition file.
Note: You cannot modify coordinates of the spline if its endpoints are attached to other entities in the sketch. Example: Three-Dimensional Sweep Spring Created from a 3-D Spline
a. b.
3-D spline Cross section
About Helical Sweeps You create a helical sweep by sweeping a section along a helical trajectory. The trajectory is defined by both the profile of the surface of revolution (which defines the distance from the section origin of the helical feature to its axis of revolution) and the pitch (the distance between coils). The trajectory and the surface of revolution are construction tools that do not appear in the resulting geometry. Helical Swp is available for both solid and surface features. Use the following ATTRIBUTES menu options in mutually exclusive pairs to define the helical sweep feature:

1. 2. 3.
ConstantThe pitch is constant. VariableThe pitch is variable and defined by a graph. Thru AxisThe cross section lies in a plane that passes through the axis of revolution. Norm To TrajThe cross section is oriented normal to the trajectory (or surface of revolution). Right HandedThe trajectory is defined using the right- hand rule. Left HandedThe trajectory is defined using the left-hand rule. To Create a Helical Sweep with a Constant Pitch Value Click Insert > Helical Sweep and then click the type of helical sweep you want. A dialog box corresponding to the type of Helical Sweep you selected opens, and the ATTRIBUTES menu appears. Define the feature by selecting from the ATTRIBUTES menu, then click Done. Pro/ENGINEER places you in Sketcher. Specify the sketching plane and its orientation. Sketch the profile of the surface of revolution and the axis of revolution. When sketching the profile, follow these rules:
o o o o o o
The sketched entities must form an open loop. You must sketch a centerline to define the axis of revolution. If you chose Norm To Traj, the profile entities must be tangent to each other (C1 continuous). The profile entities must not have a tangent that is normal to the centerline at any point. The profile starting point defines the sweep trajectory starting point. You can modify the starting point by clicking Sketch > Feature Tools > Start Point.
291/ 375
5. 6. 7. 8.
When finished sketching, click
Enter the pitch value (the distance between the coils). Pro/ENGINEER places you in Sketcher to sketch the cross section that will be swept along the trajectory. Sketch the cross section based about the visible cross hairs. For a surface feature, you can specify if the feature has closed or open ends. Click the Attributes element on the dialog box and click Define. Click Open Ends or Capped Ends from the ATTRIBUTES menu, then Done. When finished sketching the cross section, click to exit Sketcher.
9.
10. Click OK on the Protrusion: Helical Sweep dialog box. Example: Creating a Helical Sweep Cross section of the Helical Sweep
a. This circular section will be swept along the trajectory. Helical Sweep Feature with Constant Pitch
Profile for a Helical Sweep
a. b.
This centerline is the axis of revolution. This line will be rotated about the centerline to define the surface of revolution.
About the Boundary Blend Feature With the Boundary Blend tool, you can create a boundary blended feature between reference entities that defines the surface in one or two directions. The first and last entities selected in each direction define the surface boundary. Adding more reference entities, such as control points and boundary conditions, allows you to more fully define the surface shape. The rules for selecting reference entities are as follows:
Curves, part edges, datum points, and ends of curves or edges can be used as reference entities. In each direction, reference entities must be selected in consecutive order. However, reference entities can be reordered. For blended surfaces defined in two directions, the outer boundaries must form a closed loop. This means that the outer boundaries must intersect. If the boundaries do not terminate at the intersection points, Pro/ENGINEER automatically trims them and uses the relevant portion.
292/ 375
Curves selected for blending need not contain the same number of entities. About the Boundary Blend User Interface Feature Icon To access the Boundary Blend tool, click Blend. Dialog Bar The Boundary Blend dialog bar contains two collectors. The two collectors indicate selected curve chain references to add, remove, or redefine. The two collectors correspond to the first-direction curves and second-direction cross curves. Click in the collector to activate and collect curves for that direction or use the corresponding shortcut menu. Slide-up Panels The Boundary Blend dashboard displays the following slide-up panels: in the Base Features toolbar or click Insert > Boundary
CurvesCreates a blended surface using the curves selected in the first and second direction and controls the selection order. Select the Closed Blend check box to form a closed loop surface by blending the last curve back to the first curve. Closed Blend is only applicable to single direction curves where the other collector is empty. Details opens the Chain dialog box so you can modify the chain and surface set properties. ConstraintsControls the boundary conditions including tangency conditions for edge alignment. Possible conditions are free, tangent, curvature, and normal.
o o
Display drag handlesShows drag handles to control the boundary stretch factor. Add side curve influenceEnables side curve influence. In a one-directional blended surface, for boundary conditions specified as Tangent or Curvature, Pro/ENGINEER makes the side edges of he blended surface tangent to the side edges of the references. Add inner edge tangencySets the tangent inner edge condition for one or both directions of a blended surface. This condition applies only to surfaces with multisegment boundaries. You can create a blended surface with patches that are tangent across inner edges. In some cases, when geometry is complex, dihedral angles at inner edges may deviate from zero.
o o o
Control PointsAdds control points and shapes the surface by mapping locations on input curves. New Set in the Sets column adds a new set of control points. A control options list contains the following predefined control options: NaturalBlended using the general blending routine and resets the parameters for input curves using the same routine to obtain the best approximation for the surface. ArclengthMinimal adjustments are made to the original curves. Curves are blended using the general blending routine except curves are divided into equal pieces and blended piece-by-piece. Point to PointBlended point-by-point. Point 1 in the first curve is connected to point 1 in the second curve and so forth. Piece to PieceBlended piece-by-piece. Curve chains or composite curves are connected. DevelopableIf two tangent curves in one direction are selected, you can toggle to determine if you want the developable option or not. OptionsSelects curve chains to influence the shape of the blended surface or approximate direction in the user interface.
o o
DetailsOpens the Chain dialog box so you can modify the chain set properties. SmoothnessControls the surface roughness, irregularities, or projections.
293/ 375
Patches in direction (first and second)Controls the number or patches along u- and v- directions used to form the resultant surface.
PropertiesRenames the blend feature or displays information about the blend feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser. Shortcut Menus In the graphics window, right-click to access the Boundary Blend shortcut menu:
First Direction CurvesCreates a surface feature by specifying bounding curves, edges, or datum points in one direction. Second Direction CurvesCreates a surface feature by specifying bounding curves, edges, or datum points in two directions. Influencing CurvesCreates a blended surface using boundary curves or edges and additional curves. Pro/ENGINEER evaluates the curves or edges and creates a blended surface approximating the reference entities, and it allows you to control the amount of deviation from the curves. Control PointsAdds control points to control the shape of the blended surface. ClearRemoves all items from the active collector. You can right-click on the sensitive zone located next to each outside boundary (first and second directions) to access a shortcut menu with the following control boundary conditions.
FreeNo tangency conditions are set along the boundary. TangentThe blended surface is tangent to the reference surface along the boundary. CurvatureThe blended surface has curvature continuity across the boundary. NormalThe blended surface is normal to the reference surface or datum plane. About Boundary Blend Reference Entities When you select curves for a boundary blend surface, Pro/ENGINEER allows you to select curves in the first and second directions. In addition, you can select additional curves that the blended surface will try to approximate. The rules for selecting reference entities are as follows:
Curves, part edges, datum points, and ends of curves or edges can be used as reference entities. Datum points or vertexes can only appear first or last in the collector. In each direction, reference entities must be selected in consecutive order. For blended surfaces defined in two directions, the outer boundaries must form a closed loop. This means that the outer boundaries must intersect. If the boundaries do not terminate at the intersection points, the system automatically trims them and uses the relevant portion. If you want to use continuous edges or more than one datum curve as one boundary, select curve chains by holding down SHIFT. Curves selected for blending need not contain the same number of entities. When you specify curves or edges defining the shape of the blended surface, the system remembers the order in which reference entities were selected and assigns an appropriate number to each chain. You can rectify the order by clicking the curve set in the reference table and dragging it wherever required. To Create a Boundary Blend in One Direction 1. 2. Set the selection filter to Geometry (optional). Select the curves in the first direction of the surface. To select multiple curves, hold down CTRL. Options, located in the References slide-up panel, provides additional functions to construct chains and surface sets.
294/ 375
3.
Click surface.
or Insert > Boundary Blend. The dashboard appears and shows a preview of the blended
Note: Click Curves and select the Close Blend check box to form a closed loop by blending the last curve back to the first curve. 4. Click to accept boundary blend conditions.
To Create a Boundary Blend in Two Directions 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click or Insert > Boundary Blend. The dashboard appears.
Click Curves and select the curves in the first direction of the surface. To select multiple curves, hold down CTRL. Detail provides additional functions to construct chains and surface sets. Click the Second direction collector box. Select the curves in the second direction of the surface. To select multiple curves, press CTRL. Click to accept boundary blend conditions.
To Create a Boundary Blend 1. 2. 3. Click or Insert > Boundary Blend. The dashboard appears.
Create a one- or two-directional blend. Refer to See Also for more information. Click the following dashboard slide-up panels to further develop the boundary blend: ConstraintsControl the boundary conditions including tangency conditions for edge alignment and side curve influence. Control PointsAdd control points and shape the surface by mapping locations on input curves. Right-click and click Next Chain in the shortcut menu to leave the control point for a curve undefined and skip to the next curve. OptionsSelect curves that influence the shape of the blended surface or approximate direction in the user interface. PropertiesRename the blend feature or view information about the blend feature in the Pro/ENGINEER browser.
4.
Click
to preview geometry or
to accept boundary blend conditions.
Example: Blended Surface The following figure shows how to create a surface by blending curves in one direction.
4 Select these curves in order 1-2-3, or 3-2-1. The following figure shows the resulting surface feature.
295/ 375
The following figure shows how to create a surface by blending curves in two directions.
4 Curves selected in the first direction. 5 Curves selected in the second direction in order 1-2-3 or 3-2-1. The following figure shows the resulting surface feature.
About Defining Boundary Conditions You can apply conditions to blended boundaries that constrain the new surface feature to existing surfaces or quilts. When you define boundary contraints, Pro/ENGINEER attempts to select default references based on the boundaries specified. You can accept the system defaults, or you can select your own references. The boundary conditions are free (default), tangent, curvature, and normal. Consider the following information about boundary conditions and referenced entities: If Tangent or Curvature is specified and the boundary consists of a chain of one-sided edges or a curve from one-sided edges, the referenced entity is set by default, and the boundary automatically has the same reference surfaces as the one-sided edges. If Normal is specified and the boundary consists of a sketched curve, the referenced entity is set to sketching plane, and the boundary automatically has the same reference plane as the curve. If Normal is specified and the boundary consists of a chain of one-sided edges or a curve from one-sided edges, the default reference entity is used, and the boundary automatically has the same reference surfaces as the onesided edges. For all other combinations of boundary conditions and boundaries, the referenced entity is set to the selected surface and Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to select a reference surface or plane for each segment of the boundary. Sensitive zones (free, tangent, curvature, and normal) are displayed on your model allowing you to identify conditions on each boundary. You can right-click on the sensitive zone located next to each outside boundary (first and second directions) to access a shortcut menu with control boundary conditions. Setting Boundary Conditions By setting boundary conditions, you can create blended surfaces that are tangent or curvature continuous to adjacent references (quilts or solid surfaces), are normal to a reference surface or plane, or have continuous curvature across the boundary with another surface. Select the Add inner edge tangency check box to set the tangent inner edge condition for one or both directions of a blended surface. This condition applies only to surfaces with multisegment boundaries. You can create a blended surface with patches that are tangent across inner edges. In some cases, when geometry is complex, dihedral angles at inner edges may deviate from zero. Select the Add side curve influence check box to enable side-curve influence.
296/ 375
To Define Boundary Conditions Click Constraints in the dashboard. 1. 2. The Boundary column lists all surface boundaries. In the Condition column, click the box adjacent to the boundary for which you want to set the boundary condition. Select one of the following boundary conditions from the Condition drop-down list box:
FreeNo tangency conditions are set along the boundary. TangentThe blended surface is tangent to the reference surface along the boundary. CurvatureThe blended surface has curvature continuity across the boundary. NormalThe blended surface is normal to the reference surface or datum plane. Note: For conditions other than Free, select reference surfaces. Selecting the boundary displays the surface referenced for the boundary conditions in the surfaces list.
When the boundary conditions are set to Tangent, Curvature, or Normal, if required, click Display drag handles to control the boundary stretch factor. Alternatively, you can type the stretch value in the Stretch Value box. The default stretch factor is 1. The value of the stretch factor influences the direction of the surface. 4. 5. Set boundary conditions for all the boundaries as required. Define other optional feature elements or click to complete the feature.
Note: Alternatively, you can right-click on sensitive zones located next to each outside boundary (first and second directions) to access and control boundary conditions. About Boundary Blend Control Points You can control the shape of the surface by using boundary blend control points. For curves in each direction, you can specify points to be connected with each other. Two types of points can be selected as control points:
Vertices of the datum curves or edges used to define the boundary Datum points that lie on the curve Right-click and click Next Chain on the shortcut menu to leave the control point for a curve undefined and skip to the next curve. Pro/ENGINEER assigns a sequential number for each set of blend control points. Blend control points help you to implement the design intent more accurately by allowing you to create surfaces with an optimal number of edges and surfaces. By eliminating unnecessary small surfaces and extra edges, you can achieve a smoother surface shape and avoid undesirable twisting and stretching of surfaces. Using Boundary Blend Control Points You can control the shape of the surface by using boundary blend control points. For curves in each direction, you can specify points to be connected with each other. Using boundary blend control points can help you to implement the design intent more accurately by allowing you to create surfaces with an optimal number of edges and surfaces. By eliminating unnecessary small surfaces and extra edges, you can achieve a smoother surface shape and avoid undesirable twisting and stretching of surfaces. Depending on the type of curves selected, the following parameters to blend curves are available:
297/ 375
Case Any
Parameter Natural
Description Blended using the general blending routine and resets the parameters for input curves using the same routine to obtain the best approximation for the surface. Minimal adjustments are made to the original curves. Curves are blended using the general blending routine except curves are divided into equal pieces and blended piece-by-piece. Blended point-by-point. Point 1 in the first curve is connected to point 1 in the second curve and so forth. Blended piece-by-piece. Curve chains or composite curves are connected.
Any
Arc Length
Only splines with equal number interpolation points
an of
Point to Point
Any curve, curve chain, or composite curve having an equal number of entities or segments. Input are two tangent continuous curves
Piece to Piece
Developable
If curves in one direction are selected, you can toggle to determine whether you want the developable option.
To Specify Boundary Blend Control Points You can optionally define boundary blend control points after you define references for the blended surface. 1. 2. Click Control Points in the dashboard. Right-click in the Sets collector and click Add. The default control point set is valid for the first direction. Note: When you start specifying blend control points, the first boundary in the first direction is highlighted by default. 3. Select a vertex or datum point from the first boundary. Points on he current chain that are valid for control point selection are highlighted in red. Select a matching blend control point. To skip one curve, right-click and select Next Chain in the shortcut menu to leave the control point for a curve undefined and skip to the next curve. After one set of blend control points is defined, they appear in Sets as Set 1. You can select New Set from the Sets column of the Control Points table to add a new set of control points. To specify blend control points in the second direction, click Second and continue in a similar manner. Optionally, you can select one of the following predefined control options from the Fit list:
4. 5.
o o o
NaturalBlended using the general blending routine and resets the parameters for input curves using the same routine to obtain the best approximation for the surface. ArclengthMinimal adjustments are made to the original curves. Curves are blended using the general blending routine, except curves are divided into equal pieces and blended piece-by-piece. Point to PointBlended point-by-point. Point 1 in the first curve is connected to point 1 in the second curve and so forth. This option is only available for spline curves with an equal number of spline points. Piece to PieceBlended piece-by-piece. Curve chains or composite curves are connected. This option is only available for curves with an equal number of pieces.
298/ 375
DevelopableIf two tangent curves in one direction are selected, you can toggle to determine whether you want the developable option. when you have finished defining boundary blend control points.
6.
Click
Example: Specifying Boundary Blend Control Points This example shows the effects of using boundary blend control points. The following figure shows a blended surface created without control points. The blended surface feature consists of 4 surfaces.
1 small surface The following figure shows a blended surface created using control points. The blended surface feature consists of 3 surfaces.
About Side Curves and Boundary Blends You can control geometry of an improved blended surface so that the shape and properties of side curves are propagated into the shape of the blended surface. Although the system changes the geometry of the blended surface with respect to the specified side curve influence, in some cases the resulting changes may not be visually apparent without using surface visualization or analysis tools. When you enable side curve influence, the following surfaces result. One-Directional Blended Surface In a one-directional blended surface, for boundary conditions specified as tangent or curvature continuous, the system makes the side edges of the blended surface tangent to the side edges of the reference. The next two figures demonstrate the effect of side-curve influence on a one-directional blended surface. The first figure shows a surface created without using side-curve influence.
1 Blended surface, created tangent or C2 to the reference surfaces 2 Reference surfaces 3 Side curves 4 Bounding curves 5 Side curves The second figure shows a surface created using side-curve influence. In this example the side curves are used for determining the shape of the side boundaries (curves a and b) of the blended surface.
299/ 375
1 Side curves 2 Select these boundaries Two-Directional Blended Surface In a two-directional blended surface, the system propagates the behavior of the side curves (that border the selected boundary) into the surface shape along the specified boundary (see the following figure). If you apply side curve influence to Boundary 1, then the shapes of the side curves a and b are propagated into the surface shape along Boundary 1.
1 Boundary 1 The next two figures demonstrate the effect of side-curve influence on a two-directional blended surface. Note that the blended surface is shown with porcupine curvature to illustrate the subtle differences in the surface shape. Notice that when side-curve influence is used, porcupine curves maintain the same curvature pattern of the side-curves longer than in the surface without side curve influence. The first figure shows a surface created without side-curve influence.
The second figure shows a surface created with side-curve influence.
1 The arrows point to the curves where side-curve influence is specified. These curves properties are propagated into the blended surface.
Tip: Working with Antitangent and Tangent Boundaries You can create a boundary blend surface between two antitangent boundaries. The following figure shows two antitangent curves, trimmed at a common point. Notice that the angle between tangency vectors of the two curves is 180 degrees.
300/ 375
1 Tangency vector of Curve A 2 Tangency vector of Curve B 3 Curve A 4 Curve B 5 180 degrees Specifying tangency conditions for both antitangent boundaries may create contradictory constraints for the resulting geometry. As a result, the feature may fail or produce a surface that does not comply with the specified tangency conditions. A blended surface feature cannot be created when bounding curves become tangent to each other. About Parallel Blends You create parallel blends using the Parallel option in the BLEND OPTS menu. A parallel blend uses several blend sections that are created on the same sketching plane and then projected normal to the sketching plane. Depending on how the blend sections are projected, there are two types of parallel blend:
Regular SecThis type of parallel blend allows multiple sections. The first section remains on the sketching plane. Each subsequent section is projected normal to the sketching plane at a specified distance in the direction of feature creation. Project SecThis type of parallel blend uses only two sections created on a planar surface or datum plane. The sections are projected onto two solid surfaces. Sections Used for Parallel Blends Consider the following information about sections for parallel blends:
Parallel blend sections cannot be saved and retrieved as ordinary sections. First and last sections can be defined as a point or a blend vertex. You can retrieve a saved section into the blend only if the blend is not the first feature in the model. The retrieved section is added to the current section and can be placed into different sections with variations in rotation angle and size. Note: You can dimension a section to the previous section or a local coordinate system. Modifying Blend Sections When you modify the section for a parallel blend feature, the system displays the dimensions and contours for all sections. Note: You can place or move the starting point of a section only when it is active. To activate the section, toggle sections until the section you want is active. Projected Section Blends Projected section blend allows you to create two sections on the same planar surface or datum plane and then project these sections onto two opposing solid surfaces. The depth of this type of blend is defined by two intersecting surfaces. The first section is projected on the first surface selected, and the second section is projected on the second surface selected. Each section must lie within the boundaries of its selected surface and cannot intersect other surfaces.
301/ 375
Note:

1. 2. 3.
In Assembly mode, you cannot use an external reference as a surface to project onto. If you make a cut in a parallel projected blend, the sections must be closed. To Create a Parallel Blend with a Regular Section Click Insert > Blend and then click the type of blend you want. The BLEND OPTS menu appears. Click Parallel > Regular Sec > Done. The Protrusion: Blend, Parallel dialog box and the ATTRIBUTES menu appear. From the ATTRIBUTES menu, choose one of these options followed by Done:
o o o o o o o
StraightConnect blend sections using straight lines. SmoothConnect blend sections using smooth curves. Define the sketching plane, direction of feature creation, and section orientation. You are placed in Sketcher. Accept the default or select different dimension references. Create the first blend section.
To create the next sections, click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section. The first section turns gray and becomes inactive. Create the second section. If you want to continue creating sections, click Toggle Section after each section. When you finish creating sections, click to exit Sketcher.
o o o o
1. 2. 4. 5. 6.
Choose the depth option from the DEPTH menu. Click Done. Define the feature depth as required. Click OK on the Protrusion: Blend, Parallel dialog box.
To Create a Parallel Blend with a Projected Section Click Insert > Blend and then click the type of blend you want. The BLEND OPTS menu appears. Click Parallel > Project Sec > Done. The Protrusion: Blend, Parallel dialog box and the ATTRIBUTES menu appear. Define the sketching plane, direction of feature creation, and section orientation. You are placed in Sketcher. Accept the default or select different dimension references. Create the first blend section.
7. To create the second section, click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section. The first section turns gray and becomes inactive. 8. 9. Sketch the second section. Click to exit Sketcher.
10. Select the intersecting surfaces. The first section is projected on the first selected surface. The second blend section is projected on the second selected surface. 11. Click OK on the Protrusion: Blend, Parallel dialog box. About Non-Parallel Blends Non-parallel blends (Rotational and General options) have some particular advantages over parallel blends:
302/ 375
Sections can be non-parallel, but do not have to be. Parallel blends can be created simply by entering a 0 angle between sections. A section can be created by importing from an IGES file. Sketched Versus Selected Sections Non-parallel blend sections can be created by sketching them (using Sketch Sec), or by selecting threedimensional entities (using the option Select Sec). The restrictions for selecting section entities are as follows:
All the entities must lie in the same plane. For rotational blends, the planes of all sections must intersect at a single axis. For rotational blends with only two sections, there is never ambiguity. However, if more than two sections are defined and they do not form a single axis, the feature fails. Open and Closed Blends Non-parallel blends can be open or closed. If you specify Closed, Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section of the blend as the last section and creates a closed, solid shape. Specifying Tangent Surfaces You can create a smooth transition between the surfaces of a blend feature and surfaces of an adjacent feature on the same part. Open, smooth blends can have a tangent surface specified for each segment in the first and last sections. To Specify Tangency Conditions for Non-Parallel Blends 1. 2. 3. 4. Select Tangency element and Define from the dialog box. If you want the blend should be tangent to any surfaces at the first end, click Yes at the prompt. Each segment in the first section is highlighted sequentially. Select a surface for each highlighted entity. If you do not want to specify tangency for the highlighted segment, click Done to move to the next segment. Repeat the process for the other end of the blend.
Example: Specifying Tangency Conditions for Non-Parallel Blends The following figure illustrates tangent surfaces. Blend Tangent to Adjacent Surfaces Before After
To Import a Section for a Non-Parallel Blend When creating a section for a general or rotational blend, instead of sketching a new section, you can retrieve a previously saved section into Sketcher. Once the section is retrieved, you can adjust the section location, scale, and orientation.
303/ 375
Note: A retrieved section must contain a coordinate system. 1. 2. 3. 4. Define the blend attributes as required. When you enter Sketcher, click Sketch > Data from File. Select a section from the Open dialog box. A section appears in the Sketcher window. You can move, scale, or rotate the section directly in the graphics window. Alternatively, you can scale and rotate the section using the Scale Rotate dialog box. When finished adjusting the section, click 5. 6. on the Scale Rotate dialog box. to exit Sketcher.
Click
Continue with the feature creation.
Creating Non-Parallel Blend with an Imported Section You can import an IGES file section to use for non-parallel blends. Consider the following rules:
Modifying the dimensioning scheme of the feature causes Pro/ENGINEER to prompt you for a new IGES file name. There must be a one-to-one correspondence between existing IGES entities and the replacement IGES entities (the first entity in the IGES file replaces the first entity in the section). The IGES entities are placed using their absolute coordinate values. There is no option to scale or dimension the resulting sketch. The IGES file section must be closed and all endpoints must be matched exactly with another endpoint. Otherwise, import of an IGES file may fail. To Cap a Blend To create a capped blend, select Capped Ends on the ATTRIBUTES menu. 1. 2. 3. For the last section of the non-parallel blend, create a coordinate system and a point entity. When finished sketching the section, click Choose an option from the CAP TYPE menu: to exit Sketcher.
o o
SmoothCreate a cap that is smooth. SharpCreate a cap that is sharp.
Capping a Blend The first and last sections of a blend can each be a point. This caps the end of the blend feature with either a sharp or smooth transition to a tip. The end subsection of a parallel blend must always form a sharp cap. Smooth and sharp caps create very different features. The smooth cap is created by forcing all geometry to be tangent at the point section. The sharp cap allows the geometry to flow straight towards the point section. The best way to control the shape of the feature as it approaches the cap is to use as many sections as are necessary to achieve the desired result. Note the following information about capped blends:
The Z-axis is normal to the surface at the point entity. Entering rotation values for the X- and Y-axis affects the feature definition of a smooth cap. For a smooth cap, the point entity must be located within the boundaries of the previous section (picture where it would be if you used the same dimensions, but had sketched it on the previous section). To Create a Rotational Blend 1. 2. Click Insert > Blend and then click the type of blend you want. The BLEND OPTS menu appears. Click Rotational and Done. The feature creation dialog box and the ATTRIBUTES menu appear.
304/ 375
3.
Choose from the mutually exclusive pairs of elements in the ATTRIBUTES menu, then choose Done. The choices are as follows:
o o o o
3.
StraightCreate a straight blend by connecting vertices of different subsections with straight lines. Edges of the sections are connected with ruled surfaces. SmoothCreate a smooth blend by connecting vertices of different subsections with smooth curves. Edges of the sections are connected with spline surfaces. OpenCreate an open solid shape. ClosedCreate a closed solid shape. Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section of the blend as the last section.
Use Sketch Sec to sketch the sections of the blend, or Select Sec to select three-dimensional entities.
4. If you are sketching the section, add a coordinate system using Sketch > Coordinate System. 5. 6. When finished sketching the section, click to exit Sketcher.
For sketched sections, first enter the Y-axis rotation angle for the next section (120 maximum).
7. The system displays a separate window for you to sketch the next section. After sketching the section, click 8. 9. to exit Sketcher.
The system prompts you whether to continue to the next section. If you reply "yes", continue creating sections. If you are creating a smooth blend and selected Tangency in the dialog box, create the blend with surfaces tangent to adjacent geometry.
10. When you have sketched or selected all sections, select OK on the dialog box. Creating a Rotational Blend A rotational blend is created by sections that are rotated about the Y-axis. You enter angular dimensions to control section orientation and can dimension sections from their Sketcher coordinate system to control radial placement. You must add a section coordinate system in Sketcher mode. You cannot use the default coordinate system. If you define a rotational blend as being closed, Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section as the last section and creates a closed solid feature. There is no need to sketch the last section. Example: Creating a Rotational Blend Sketched Rotational Blend
a. b. c.
Section 3 is rotated at 90 degrees with respect to section 2 about the y-axis. Section 2 is rotated at 45 degrees with respect to Section 1 about the y-axis. Section 1
To Create a General Blend 1. 2. 3. Click Insert > Blend and then click the type of blend you want. The BLEND OPTS menu appears. Click General and Done. The feature creation dialog box and the ATTRIBUTES menu appear. Choose either Straight or Smooth from the ATTRIBUTES menu.
305/ 375
4.
Use Sketch Sec to sketch the sections of the blend, or Select Sec to select three-dimensional entities. When sketching the section, add a coordinate system using Coord System in the ADV UTILS menu. For sketched sections, enter the X-, Y-, and Z-axis rotation angle (120 maximum) as prompted to determine the orientation of the next sketch, or reply "no" to the prompt (after the second section is defined) whether to continue to next section. After all the sections of the blend are finished, enter an offset depth value for all sections but the first. This dimension is the straight-line distance between coordinate system origins. If you are creating a smooth blend and selected the Opt Tangency element in the dialog box, create the blend with surfaces tangent to adjacent geometry. If you are creating a smooth blend, select tangency and section options. You can create the sections of the blend by sketching (using Sketch Sec), or by selecting three-dimensional entities (using Select Sec). When you have sketched or selected all sections, select OK in the dialog box to create the feature.
5. 6. 7.
8.
Example: Creating a General Blend General Blend Sections
Blend
Cap Type Affects the Feature Shape "Smooth" cap "Sharp" cap
Open Blend
Closed Blend
306/ 375
About Swept Blends A swept blend requires a single trajectory (the Origin Trajectory) and multiple sections. To define the Origin Trajectory of the swept blend, you can either sketch a curve or select a chain of datum curves or edges. You sketch the sections to be blended at specified segment vertices or datum points on the Origin Trajectory. To orient a section, you can specify the rotation angle about the Z-axis, and/or use the Pick XVector or Norm to Surf options. Note the following restrictions:
A section cannot be located at a sharp corner in the Origin Trajectory. For a closed trajectory profile, sections must be sketched at the start point and at least one other location. Pro/ENGINEER uses the first section at the endpoint. For an open trajectory profile, you must create sections at the start and end points. There is no option to skip placement of a section at those points. Sections cannot be dimensioned to the model, because modifying the trajectory would invalidate those dimensions. A composite datum curve cannot be selected for defining sections of a swept blend (Select Sec). Instead, you must select one of the underlying datum curves or edges from which a composite curve is determined. If you choose Pivot Dir and Select Sec, all selected sections must lie in planes that are parallel to the Pivot Direction. You can control swept blend geometry by using an area graph and by controlling the perimeter of the feature between the sections. An area graph represents the exact area of the cross section of the swept blend at selected locations on the Origin Trajectory. You can add or remove points on the Origin Trajectory at which to specify the swept blend sectional area. You can also change the graph value at user-defined points. Terminology The following table lists terminology common to variable section sweeps and swept blends. Term Normal To Trajectory Origin Definition The section plane remains normal (perpendicular) to the origin trajectory throughout its length. The generic sweep behaves this way. Two trajectories must be selected to determine the location and orientation of the section. The origin trajectory determines the origin of the section along the length of the feature. The section plane remains normal to the normal trajectory along the length of the feature. The section plane remains normal to the origin trajectory as it is viewed along the pivot direction. The upward direction of the section remains parallel to the pivot direction.
Normal To Trajectory
Pivot Direction
To Create a Swept Blend (basic) To create a swept blend, you can define the trajectory by sketching a trajectory, or by selecting existing curves and edges and extending or trimming the first and last entity in the trajectory. 1. 2. Click Insert>Swept Blend and then click the type of swept blend you want. The BLEND OPTS menu appears. Click Select Sec or Sketch Sec. Select SecSelect existing curves or edges to define each section using the CRV SKETCHER menu.
307/ 375
Sketch SecSketch new section entities to define each section. 3. Click NrmToOriginTraj, Pivot Dir, or Norm To Traj. NrmToOriginTrajSelect the Origin Trajectory. Pivot DirUse the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the Pivot Direction. The options are as follows:
o o
PlaneSelect a plane or create a new datum plane to which the direction will be normal. Crv/Edg/AxisSelect as the direction an edge, curve, or axis. If you select a non-linear edge or curve, the system prompts you to select an existing datum point on the edge or curve to specify a tangent. CsysSelect an axis of the coordinate system as the direction.
Norm To TrajSelect the Origin Trajectory and an additional trajectory to which the section will remain normal. Note: For a Norm To Traj swept blend, the system checks if the normal plane to the selected trajectory has a defined intersection with the Origin Trajectory. If the intersection cannot be found, the system issues a warning so you can redefine the normal trajectory. 4. Click Done. A Swept Blend dialog box appears with the following elements: Pivot Dir(If selected) Specify the Pivot Direction. Normal Traj(If selected) Select the normal trajectory. Origin TrajSpecify the trajectory that defines the section origin. SectionsDefine the sections. Blend Control(Optional) Define how to control the blend geometry along the Origin Trajectory. Tangency(Optional) Specify tangency conditions for the feature. 5. Define the type of Origin Trajectory by choosing an option from the SWEEP TRAJ menu: Sketch TrajSketch the Origin Trajectory. Select TrajDefine the Origin Trajectory using existing curves and edges. Choose Done from the CHAIN menu when finished defining the chain. Note: The Origin Trajectory can have sharp corners (a discontinuous tangent to the curve), except at the endpoint of a closed curve. At non-tangent vertices, Pro/ENGINEER mitres the geometry as in constant section sweeps. 6. If you selected the NrmToOriginTraj option, the system brings up the SEC ORIENT menu. Select one of these options, followed by Done: Pick XVectorSelect an axis, straight edge/curve, or plane normal to determine the sections positive X-axis. Use options in the GEN SEL DIR menu to select a horizontal reference. The system displays a red arrow, indicating the positive direction for the X-vector. Choose Flip or Okay to determine the direction for the operation. Note: The Pick XVector option is available only for the trajectories defined with the Select Traj option. AutomaticThe system automatically determines the sections orientation. If you select this option for the first section, then the X-axis is determined by the curvature vector at the beginning of the Origin Trajectory. When you select Automatic for a section other than the first, the system determines the X-vector automatically based on the previous section orientation and the behavior of the Origin Trajectory. Norm to SurfUse the adjacent surface section normal to determine the section upward direction. If you select this option for the first section, then all sections use the same reference surfaces as the upward direction.
308/ 375
If the Origin Trajectory has only one adjacent surface, then the system automatically selects this surface, highlighted in blue, as the reference for the section orientation. A red arrow appears, indicating the upward direction. Choose Flip or Okay to specify the upward direction. If the Origin Trajectory has two adjacent surfaces, the system prompts you to select a surface for the section orientation. The default surface is highlighted in blue. You can accept the default surface or select the other one. A red arrow appears, indicating the upward direction. Choose Flip or Okay to specify the upward direction. 7. The system highlights endpoints and vertices along the Origin Trajectory. Use options in the CONFIRM menu to select points at which you want to specify additional sections. AcceptSketch or select a section at this highlighted location. NextGo to the next point. PreviousReturn to the previous point. 8. If you chose Norm To Traj in Step 6, select the trajectory to which the section will be normal. Choose an option in the SEC ORIENT menu, followed by Done: Norm to SurfSelect a surface that determines the sections upward direction, then select or sketch the trajectory that defines the section plane normal. Choose Flip an Okay to select the upward direction. This option is available only if the Origin Trajectory belongs to a surface. Use Norm TrajSelect a trajectory that defines the section plane normal. 9. For each vertex or datum point where you define a section, specify the sections rotation angle about the Z-axis (with a value between 120 and +120 degrees).
10. Select or sketch the entities for each section, depending on whether you chose Select Sec or Sketch Sec, respectively. Choose Done to exit Sketcher. 11. When all cross-sections are sketched or selected, unless you want to define optional elements, select OK in the dialog box to generate the swept blend feature. Example: Creating a Swept Blend Completed Swept Blend
Section Definition The sections must be sketched at the first and last Origin Trajectory points.
a. b.
This point was added using an Area Graph. Origin Trajectory
Note: Each section remains displayed as the next section is created.
309/ 375
To Control the Perimeter of a Swept Blend The Blend Control element lets you select a method for controlling the shape of the swept blend between its sections. When you choose Blend Control and Define from the dialog box, the BLEND CONTROL menu appears with the following options:
Set PerimeterControl the shape of the feature by controlling its perimeter between the sections. If two consecutive sections have equal perimeters, the system attempts to maintain the same cross-section perimeter between these sections. For sections that have different perimeters, the system uses smooth interpolation along each curve of the trajectory to define the perimeter of the feature between its sections. Note: You cannot specify both perimeter control and tangency conditions for the swept blendonly one of these conditions is allowed.
Area GraphControl the shape of the feature through control points and area values. NoneDo not set any blend control for the feature. Center CrvShow a curve connecting the centroids of the features cross-sections. This option is available only with the Set Perimeter option. Modifying a Swept Blend Using an Area Graph The Area Graph option lets you add or remove control points to/from the Origin Trajectory at which you can specify or change area values. The GRAPH menu options are as follows:
DefineDefine an area graph using the DEFINE GRAPH submenu. The Define Graph submenu options are as follows:
o o o
Add PointDefine a control point using the Get Dtm Pnt submenu to select or create a datum point on the Origin Trajectory, then enter the area values. Remove PointSelect a control point to remove. Change ValueSelect a control point and enter a new area value.
Note: If a value is zero on the area graph at a parameter, the swept blend self-intersects. To correct this, add control points to change the area graph value to a positive value.
InfoDisplay an Information Window (see the following figure), which contains the following information:
The normalized length of a parameter (point or cross section) measured from the starting point of the current segment of the Origin Trajectory, in the form i.rrrr. A Origin Trajectory consists of one or more segments. The integer, i, identifies on which of the segments of the Origin Trajectory the parameter is located. The value of i ranges from 0 to n, where 0 corresponds to the first segment and n to the last segment. The decimal .rrrr is the ratio of the length from the starting point on the segment to the parameter location. The section area values at each parameter. The driving dimension, if any, for the value of a user-defined area. The location type specifies whether the area is at a section or at a user-defined point.
o o o
Example: Controlling the Perimeter of a Swept Blend Using the Set Perimeter Option
a.
Section 1, Perimeter 1
310/ 375
b. c. d.
Section 2, Perimeter 2 Perimeter 3. If Per. 1 = Per. 2, then Per. 3 = Per. 1 = Per. 2. Origin Trajectory
Sample Area Graph and Information Window
a. b. c. d. e.
csys Area values Area graph Solid lines at user-defined locations Dashed lines at fixed cross section locations
About Tweak Features Pro/ENGINEER offers several advanced features to deform or alter (tweak) the surface of a part:
Local PushDeform a surface by pushing or pulling on a circular or rectangular region of a surface. Radius DomeCreate a dome on a limited region of a surface. Section DomeCreate a dome from sketched sections. EarCreate a protrusion that is extruded along the top of a surface and bent at the base. LipCreate a lip on selected edges that can be used for interlocking parts. This feature cannot be created as an Assembly feature, but the dimensions on mating parts can be controlled through relations. ToroidalBendBend a selected solid, surface, or datum feature in two directions to produce a toroidal or revolved shape. Spinal BendBend an object about a curved spine by continuously repositioning cross-sections along a curve. Solid Free FormTweak a surface by dynamic manipulation. Bend Solid Bend solids or curves using the references of a flatten quilt feature. Flatten QuiltFlatten surfaces by transformation. To Create a Local Push A local push deforms a surface by pushing or pulling on a circular or rectangular region on the surface. 1. 2. 3. Click Insert > Advanced > Local Push. Set up a sketching plane and sketch the local push boundaries (sketch the section). Pick the surfaces on which to apply the local push. Push is available when the configuration file option
Note: Insert > Advanced > Local allow_anatomic_features is set to yes.
311/ 375
Defining a Local Push Sketching a local push boundary is different from all other sketches in that the system displays a rubberband rectangle instead of a rubberband line when you click the left mouse button. All other sketcher options are identical when creating a local push. You can create multiple boundaries for the local push. To sketch a rectangular local push boundary, do the following: 1. 2. Locate the pointer on the sketching grid and click the left mouse button. The system displays a pick box. Enclose the desired area within the selection rectangle and click the left mouse button. This region can extend beyond the surface.
Pro/ENGINEER always prompts for a surface for placement of the local push for two reasons:
Local pushes can be sketched across surface boundaries and can be created on more than one surface. The surface that is the sketching plane does not necessarily have to be the surface upon which the local push is placed. The local push is placed upon the surface that is selected after the prompt. Defining the Local Push Height After you create the local push, the system gives it a default height, measured from the sketching plane. You can modify this parameter to create the desired deformation of the surface. A positive value deforms the local push out from the part surface, while a negative value deforms it into the surface of the part. Example: Local Push Local Push Feature
a. b. c.
Sketching plane Surface to be pushed Sketched boundaries
d. Two Pushes with positive deformation To Create a Radius Dome The Radius Dome option allows you to create a dome feature. A radius dome deforms a surface and is parameterized by one radius and one offset distance. It is useful for creating qualitative deformations on a surface. If you want more precise control over the geometry, use a section dome feature. 1. 2. 3. Click Insert > Advanced > Radius Dome. Pick a surface to dome. The surface to dome must be a plane, torus, cone, or cylinder. Select a datum plane, planar surface, or edge to which to reference the dome arc.
312/ 375
4. 5.
Enter the dome radius. The radius value can be positive or negative, resulting in a convex or concave dome. Pro/ENGINEER creates the domed surface using two dimensions the radius of the dome arc and the distance from the arc to the reference datum plane or edge. The radius of the dome is the radius of an arc that passes through the two edges of the domed surface. Thus, a larger radius value results in less elevation from the original surface. The placement dimension affects the dome steepness: The closer the dome arc to the middle of the domed surface, the less the dome elevation. On non-rectangular surfaces, Pro/ENGINEER trims the dome to the part edges (see the next figure). Dome is available when the configuration file option
6.
Note: Insert > Advanced>Radius allow_anatomic_features is set to yes. Example: Radius Dome Original part
Radius Dome feature
a. b.
Reference edge Surface to be domed
About Section Domes A section dome replaces a planar surface with a sculptured surface. This surface can be defined by a sweep or a blend. The swept dome uses two perpendicular cross-sections to create the sculptured surface. The blended dome uses parallel sections blended together to create the new surface. With the blended dome, you can use a reference profile to help generate the sections. Before creating the section dome feature, consider the following restrictions:
The surface to be domed must be horizontal when you sketch the sections. Specify the sketching plane for the section dome as you would normally sketch on a part. Because the cross-sections must be perpendicular to the profile, it may be necessary to reorient the view between sketches using the View option. Pro/ENGINEER adds or removes material while creating a section dome, depending on how high or low the section is sketched in relation to the specified surface. For example, if the sections are attached to the surface, some material around the edges will be removed. Sections should not be tangent to the sides of the part. You cannot add a dome to a surface that is filleted along any edge. If you want a fillet, add the dome first, then fillet the boundary. It is not necessary to have the same number of segments for each section. Sections should be at least as long as the surface and do not have to be attached to the surface. Sections must be sketched to be open. To Create a Section Dome (basic) 1. 2. Click Insert>Advanced > Section Dome. The OPTIONS menu appears. Specify the type of dome:
313/ 375
SweepCreate a dome by sweeping the first profile along the second profile, sweeping the second profile along the first profile, then using the mathematical average of the two surfaces to create the dome. BlendCreate a dome by blending two or more sections. No ProfileCreate a blended dome without using a profile. This option is not accessible when you have selected the Sweep option. One ProfileCreate a dome feature using a reference profile.
o o o
Note: The Section Dome is available when the configuration file option allow_anatomic_features is set to yes. To Create a Swept Section Dome You can create a swept section dome using a profile and one section that is perpendicular to it. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click Insert > Advanced > Section Dome. The OPTIONS menu appears. Choose Sweep and One Profile. Pick the planar surface to be domed. Create the profile by indicating the sketching plane, then sketching and regenerating the section. Return to the default view and choose Done. Create one section perpendicular to the profile by selecting or creating a sketching plane and sketch the section. Click Done to complete the dome.
Example: Swept Section Dome Original part Part with Swept Section Dome
a. b.
Section Profile
c. The domed surface
To Create a Blended Section Dome with No Profile You can create a blended section dome feature without using a profile. In this case, the system creates the domed surface by blending parallel sections. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Insert > Advanced > Section Dome. The OPTIONS menu appears. Click Blend and No Profile from the SECTION DOME menu. Select the planar surface to turn into a dome. Specify a sketching plane for the first section and sketch the first section. When selecting a sketching plane, the viewing direction arrow indicates the positive direction for offset sections. When finished creating sections, click to exit Sketcher.
5. 6.
Enter the distance between the first section and the new section to sketch. The orientation of the . At least two sections must be used for this sections is the same. Sketch the new section and click. option. Note that the previous sections are toggled to a light gray color when you sketch the new section.
314/ 375
Be sure to orient the start points of the sections so the correct points are connected for the dome. The start point is displayed as a small circle on the sketch. To reorient the start point, click Sketch > Feature tools > Start Point. 5. If other sections are required, enter yes to continue and create new sections as needed. If no other sections are required, answer no to the prompt. Pro/ENGINEER then generates the dome.
Example: Blended Section Dome without a Profile Original Part Part with Blended Section Dome without a Profile
a. b.
Section 1 Section 2
Note that the entire surface was domed, even though only two sections were sketched.
To Create a Blended Section Dome with a Single Profile 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Insert > Advanced > Section Dome. The OPTIONS menu appears. Click Blend and One Profile from the SECTION DOME menu. Pick the surface from which to make a dome. Specify a sketching plane for the profile, sketch the section, and choose Done. Create the first section by indicating a sketching plane that is perpendicular to the profile. The viewing direction of the section indicates the positive offset direction for additional sections. After orienting the sketching plane, the system displays a set of crosshairs at the intersection of the sketching plane and the profile. When you sketch the section, the system displays a circular start point at the beginning of the sketch. All start points for additional sections should be lined up. When you have finished with the sketch, choose Done. 4. Sketch the next section by choosing the sketching plane and completing the sketch. At least two sections are required for a blended dome. 5. If another section is required for the dome, answer "yes" to the prompt asking if you want to proceed to the next section, then sketch the next section. Note that the previous parallel sections toggle to a light gray color. If no other section is required for the dome, answer "no" to the prompt to complete the dome.
Note: A dome is always created over the entire specified surface. If the sections are sketched where they do not cover the entire surface, Pro/ENGINEER extends the dome as necessary to complete it. Blended Section Dome with a Single Profile You create a blended section dome with one profile and two or more sections. Pro/ENGINEER adds or removes material, as necessary, from the edges of the specified surface to create the dome. Whether material is added or removed depends on the sections being sketched. A section that dips below the surface removes material. A section that is above (to the positive side of) the surface adds material. The profile and the sections of a single-profile blended dome are not necessarily related. This feature allows you to dimension to the profile by selecting the horizontal and vertical centerlines displayed while sketching a section.
315/ 375
The centerlines are put there for your convenience, but you do not have to dimension to them. If you do not dimension to the profile, you can modify the profile without affecting the resulting dome. If you dimension to the profile, modifying the profile automatically moves the sections and modifies the dome. Example: Blended Section Dome with a Single Profile Original Part Part with Blended Section Dome with a Single Profile
a. b. c. d.
Section dimensioned to profile Centerlines Profile Section dimensioned to part
To Create an Ear Feature An ear is a protrusion that is extruded along the top of a surface and can be bent at the base. 1. 2. Click Insert > Advanced > Ear. The OPTIONS menu appears. Select the type of ear feature you want
o o
VariableThe ear is bent at a user-specified, modifiable angle, measured from the surface from which the ear is extruded. 90 deg tabThe ear is bent at 90. No dimension is created for the angle.
You can redefine ears from one type to another. The dimensioning of the two ear types is: Variable earThe length of the sketched section represents the overall length of the inside edge (including the length of the bent portion). TabThe length of the sketched section represents the distance between the bottom and the top of the outside edge (including the projection of the bent portion on the plane of the straight portion). Note: Insert > Advanced > Ear is available when the configuration file option allow_anatomic_features is set to yes. Sketching the Ear Section When you sketch an ear, remember the following rules:
The sketching plane must be perpendicular to the surface to which the ear will be attached. The section for the ear must be open with the endpoints aligned to the surface to which the ear will be attached. The entities that are attached to the surface must be parallel to each other, perpendicular to the surface, and long enough to accommodate the bend. The radius of the bend is measured from the sketching plane out of the screen. Pro/ENGINEER bends the ear at the specified angle, measured from the surface from which the ear is extruded. The ear bends towards you, out of the screen, and is extruded into the screen to the specified thickness.
316/ 375
Example: Dimensioning an Ear Feature Ear Feature
a. b.
Sketching plane (hidden surface) Section Bend dimensions of an ear feature
Dimensioning an ear to a part
a. b.
Straight edge Parallel lines perpendicular to edge
a. Bending line (normal to page)
About a Lip Feature You can create a lip feature on mating surfaces of two different parts in an assembly to ensure that the interlock geometry is the same on both parts. A lip is created as a protrusion on one part and a cut on another. A lip is not an assembly featureit must be created on each part separately. You can set appropriate connections between dimensions on both parts through relations and parameters. A lip is constructed by offsetting the mating surface along the selected edges. The edges must form a continuous contour, either open or closed. The top (or bottom) surface of the lip copies the geometry of the mating surface; you can draft the side surface with respect to the lip direction. Lip direction (the direction of the offset) is determined by the normal to a reference plane. The draft angle is the angle between the normal to the reference plane and the side surface of the lip. The following figure shows the lip feature parameters.
a. b. c. d. e. f.
This surface repeats the shape of the mating surface Draft angle Mating surface (could be reference plane too) Side offset Selected edge Lip offset
Usually, the reference plane is coincident with the lip (mating) surface. You must select a separate reference plane in the following cases:
The mating surface is not a plane.
317/ 375
You want the lip creation direction not to be normal to the mating plane. The lip feature will then be distorted. At any point of lip feature creation, the normal to the mating surface must be either coincident, or form a slight angle with the normal to the reference plane. The closer the normals, the less the lip geometry distortion. To Create a Lip Feature 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Choose Feature > Create > Solid > Tweak > Lip, or Insert > Advanced > Lip. Select adjacent edges to form a lip. You can select edges using Single, Chain, or Loop (the same way as for a round feature). Choose Done when you have finished. Select the mating surface (the surface to be offset). Enter the lip offset from the selected surface. Enter the side offset (from the selected edges to the draft surface). Select the drafting reference plane. Enter the draft angle. Pro/ENGINEER creates the lip feature.
Note: The Lip option on either the TWEAK menu or the Insert > Advanced menu is available when the configuration file option allow_anatomic_features is set to yes. Example: Lip Feature Initial model
Enter the positive offset from the mating surface.
a. b.
Select this plane Select this surface (and edges)
Enter the negative offset from the mating surface.
a. b.
Select this plane Select this surface (and edges)
318/ 375
About Toroidal Bends The ToroidalBend option bends solids, nonsolid surfaces, or datum curves into toroidal (revolved) shapes. For example, you could use this option to create an automobile tire from a flat solid object. When you include a datum curve in the bend, the system first creates its copy and then bends it. The feature creates two bends at the same time. To define the bend profile, or sectional curvature of the toroid shape, you sketch a chain of entities. The second bend is determined by two parallel planes that define the radius of the toroid. When creating a toroid, the system rotates each of the parallel planes around the intersection of the neutral plane and the end surface by the angle specified. To define the bend, you must select a coordinate system. The X-vector of the coordinate system defines a neutral plane in the bent object. This point does not have to lie on the geometric entity; however, it is recommended for geometric clarity. Note: If the coordinate system does not lie on the profile, the sketched profile must consist of tangent entities. The neutral plane defines the theoretical plane of zero deformation (elongation or compression) along the sectional thickness of the bent material. The material that lies outside the plane is elongated to compensate for the bend deformation, and the material that lies inside the bend is compressed to accommodate the deformation. To Create a Toroidal Bend 1. 2. 3. 4. From the FEAT menu click Create > Solid > Tweak > ToroidalBend, or Insert > Advanced > Toroidal Bend. The OPTIONS menu appears. Choose Variable, 90, 180, 270, or 360 to indicate the angle of the bend. Choose One Side or Both Sides to indicate whether to create the feature on one side or both sides of the sketching plane. Specify whether datum curves should be contracted during bending by choosing one of the following options:
o o o o
CrvBendContractDatum curves are contracted radially while bent. CrvBendExpandDatum curves are not contracted radially while bent. CrvFlatContractDatum curves remain planar and are contracted within the neutral plane. CrvFlatExpandDatum curves remain planar and are expanded within the neutral plane.
Note: Toroidal bend features created with a Flat option require all curves included in the bend to lie in the neutral plane. 5. The DEFINE BEND menu appears with the following commands:
o o
6.
AddSelect objects to bend. RemoveCancel the selection of objects from the bend feature.
Choose Add and select solid surfaces, quilts, or datum curves to include in the bend. When you bend datum curves, they are displayed in both the bent fashion and in their original locations. Note: The included objects must not exceed the boundaries specified by the end planes; otherwise, the toroidal bend may fail.
7.
Choose Done to finish selecting the objects to bend.
8. Pick a sketching plane and a sketcher reference plane to sketch the sectional bend profile.
319/ 375
9.
Sketch a chain of entities (spline, arc, line, and so on) to define the shape of the cross section of the toroid.
10. Create a sketcher coordinate system. 11. Select two parallel planes to bend toward each other at the specified angle. These parallel planes define the radius of the toroid. For a 360-degree bend, these planes meet. Example: Creating a Toroidal Bend The following figures illustrate the steps for creating a toroidal bend. 1. Base object 2. Select the features to bend
a. b. c.
Cuts added to base object (optional) Sketching plane (DTM3) Surface picked to bend (includes cuts)
3. Sketch the bend profile and the axis of revolution
a. b.
Sketched 3-point arc Sketcher coordinate system
The following figure shows the area of compression in a toroidal bend.
a. b.
Neutral plane (no deformation) Region of elongation deformation
c. Region of compressed deformation
To Create a Spinal Bend The Spinal Bend option bends a solid or quilt about a curved spine by continuously repositioning crosssections along a curve. Planar cross-sections perpendicular to an axis are repositioned perpendicular to the trajectory with no distortion. All compression or distortion is done longitudinally along the trajectory. 1. 2. Click Feature > Create > Solid > Tweak > Spinal Bend, or Insert > Advanced > Spinal Bend. Specify the feature attributes by choosing from the OPTIONS menu. The options are as follows: Sketch SpineSketch the spine trajectory. Select SpineSelect an edge or chain of edges to define a spin trajectory. No Prop CtrlDo not adjust the resulting geometry.
320/ 375
SecProp CtrlAdjust the resulting geometry to control the distribution of a varying cross section mass property along the spine. This property is defined by relations. Choose one of the following options:
o o
LinearThe section property varies linearly between the values at the start and end points. GraphThe section property varies, per the graph values, between the values at the start and end points.
The resulting spinal bend feature is defined by the same family of cross-sections, regardless of whether you choose No Prop Ctrl, SecProp Ctrl and Linear, or SecProp Ctrl and Graph. However, the distribution of the cross-sections in the spinal bend differs for each of these choices. 3. Select a solid or quilt feature to bend. You can bend only one quilt feature, or you can bend all the solid features in the part. If you select a solid feature, the system makes the original solid feature invisible after the spinal bend feature is created. However, the feature and its geometry can still be selected. If you select a quilt feature, the original quilt feature remains visible. Sketch or select the spine, per the selection made in Step 2. The spine must be C1 continuous (tangent). If the spine is not also C2 continuous (curvature continuous), the feature surfaces might not be tangent. If you chose SecProp Ctrl, the plane that passes through the start point of the spine, and is normal to the spine, must intersect the original quilt or solid feature. If you chose No Prop Ctrl, go to Step 8. If you chose SecProp Ctrl, Pro/ENGINEER displays the SKETCHER menu. Sketch the coordinate system to be used in the calculation of cross section properties. This coordinate system will be projected onto the plane of each cross section. Enter feature relations that define the symbol SEC_PROP as a function of the mass properties of the original quilt or solid cross-sections. The right side of the relations can include the following:
4.
5. 6.
7.
o o o o
AREA CENTROID_X, CENTROID_YCoordinates, with respect to the sketched coordinate system, of the center of area of the cross section IXX, IXY, IYYPlanar moments of inertia of the cross section, with respect to the sketched coordinate system IXX_AT_CENTROID, IXY_AT_CENTROID, IYY_AT_CENTROIDPlanar moments of inertia of the cross section, with respect to a coordinate system at the centroid and with axes parallel to the specified coordinate system PRINCIPAL1Greater planar principal moment of inertia PRINCIPAL2Lesser planar principal moment of inertia
o o
8.
Use the SETUP PLANE menu to specify a second plane, which must be parallel to the first, to define the volume of the original quilt or solid to be bent. If you chose the SecProp Ctrl option, both planes must intersect the original quilt or solid. The system creates and displays the first plane, which defines the volume. It is normal to the spine, passes through the start point of the spine, and can be referenced when you are creating the second plane. If you chose Graph, select an existing graph feature. The graph must pass through the points (0, 0) and (1, 1) and must be monotonically non-decreasing (that is, with no horizontal tangent to the curve) in the interval 0 to 1.
9.
10. If you chose SecProp Ctrl, the system places each cross section of the original quilt or solid at the trajectory parameter (trajpar) on the spine, according to the following formula: G(Trajpar)=(F(p) - F(0)) / (F(p1) - F(p0)) The variables are as follows:
321/ 375
o o o o
G()If you chose Graph, this is the function defined by the reference graph feature. If you chose Linear, this is the function defined by trajpar itself (the identity function). F()The cross section property function defined by feature relations. pThe properties of the original quilt or solid cross section (AREA, CENTROID_X, and so on). p0, p1The properties of the first and last cross sections defined by the two planes specified in Step 8.
Example: Creating and Modifying a Spinal Bend The following figure illustrates a linear spinal bend with SEC_PROP = AREA. Before Spinal Bend After Spinal Bend
a. b.
Feature to be bent Spine
Cosmetic Mesh View of Linear Spinal Bend
You can pick on the spinal bend and choose Next to display the original solid/quilt, highlighted in red (see the following figure). Modifying or Redefining a Spinal Bend 1. Linear spinal bend after selecting to redefine.
a. Original feature appears in red. Select the spinal bend feature. 2. Redefine spinal bend to use Section Property Control and Graph.
3. Cosmetic mesh view after redefining section property control to Graph.
322/ 375
4. Spinal bend redefined as No Prop Control.
To Redefine a Spinal Bend 1. Select the feature and click Edit > Definition. Click one of the following elements:
AttributesRedefine the attribute value SecProp Ctrl or NoProp Ctrl; Linear or Graph. If you choose SecProp Ctrl, Pro/ENGINEER displays a default coordinate system and asks you to sketch a coordinate system for the first section. You can either align the sketched coordinate system to the default one or offset it. SectionRedefine the spine, if sketched; redefine the cross section, if you chose SecProp Ctrl. ReferencesReselect the quilt, graph, end plane, or cross section properties. Choose one of the following SPINAL BEND menu options: Quilt/SolidRedefine the spinal bend to be a quilt or solid. End PlaneRedefine the second plane, defining the volume of the original quilt or solid to be bent. EquationsRedefine the relations. GraphRedefine the graph feature.
o o
About User-Defined Features A User-Defined Feature (UDF) consists of selected features, all their associated dimensions, any relations between the selected features, and a list of references for placing the UDF on a part. User-defined features can be subordinate or standalone. The UDF dialog box provides a running status of these UDF elements during UDF creation and modification. Subordinate UDFs A subordinate UDF gets its values directly from the original model at run time, so the original model must be present for the subordinate UDF to function. If you make any changes to the dimension values in the original model, they are automatically reflected in the UDF. A model can have more than one subordinate UDF associated with it. Items in the family table of a subordinate UDF show the identifiers and symbols from the original model. Standalone UDFs A standalone UDF copies all the original model information into the UDF file. Because of this, a standalone UDF requires more storage space than a subordinate UDF. If you make any changes to the reference model, they are not reflected in the UDF.
323/ 375
When you create a standalone UDF, you have the option of creating a reference part by copying the original part from which the UDF is derived. The reference part has the same name as the UDF, with the extension _gp. For example, if you name a UDF radial_holes, the reference part is named radial_holes_gp.prt. A reference part displays UDF references and elements through the original features. UDF Recommendations Follow these recommendations for creating a UDF:
Make sure you have the desired dimensioning scheme. Provide the necessary relations between the defining features before you create the UDF. Although a reference part is not required for a standalone UDF, it is useful to have a reference part displayed when you place a UDF. The system highlights the dimensions to be entered and the reference information at the appropriate times during the UDF placement. If you have no reference part, the number of UDF elements you can modify is limited. UDF Restrictions
When creating a UDF or copying features, you cannot mix features from the merged geometry group (created with the By Copy option) with features outside of this group. Parameters not used in relations are not copied with UDFs to another part. A UDF created in Part mode can be used in Assembly mode to create assembly features, as long as that UDF does not contain features that are not allowed for assembly features (such as rounds). When you copy a group with an advanced round which contains user-defined transitions, the system removes user-defined transitions from the resulting feature. Redefine the round transitions in the new feature, as appropriate. Dimension Types You can create a UDF with the following dimension types:
part.
Variable dimensionsDimensions for which you will enter values when you place the UDF in a Invariable dimensionsDimensions that you will not change when you place the UDF in a part. Table-driven dimensionsDimensions and dimension tolerances for which values are given in a family table. Every instance in the family table has its own dimension values. About Creating UDF Library Before you create a UDF, you may want to create a UDF library directory. By default, Pro/ENGINEER creates the UDF in the current directory. If you create a UDF library directory, make sure all users have Read access permission. When you create a UDF library, copy the UDF files, name.gph and name_gp.prt (for standalone udfs), to this UDF library directory. To access the UDF library directory in Pro/ENGINEER, specify the directory name with the configuration file option pro_group_dir. You can set up the directory tree to support the UDF library hierarchy. You can easily walk through this directory tree to search for a specific UDF to place on a part as a group. However, when you retrieve a part with a dependent group, the group file must be located in the directory set by the pro_group_dir option. To Create a UDF (basic) There are some elements you must define before you create a UDF. Other elements are optional and may be defined during UDF creation or later during modification. 1. If you want to set variable parameters in your UDF, set the configuration option udf_var_params to yes.
324/ 375
2.
Click Tools > UDF Library. The UDF menu appears with the following commands:
o o o o o
2. 3. 4.
CreateAdds a new UDF to the UDF library. ModifyModifies an existing UDF. If there is a reference part, the system displays the UDF in a separate part window. This command is not available in Assembly mode. ListLists all the UDF files in the current directory. DbmsPerforms database management functions for the current UDF. IntegrateResolves the differences between the source and the target UDFs.
Click Create. In the Graphics window message area, type a name for the new UDF and click menu appears. Click one of the following commands in the UDF OPTIONS menu: . The UDF OPTIONS
o o
Stand AloneCopies all the required information to the UDF. SubordinateCopies most of the information from the original part at run time.
Note:
o o
4.
A standalone UDF cannot have an assembly as a reference model, but a subordinate UDF can. Punch and Notch UDFs (Pro/SHEETMETAL) cannot be subordinate.
Click Done. The UDF <udf name> Standalone or UDF <udf name> Subordinate dialog box opens listing the following elements. Note that Features is selected by default.
o o o o o o o o o o
FeaturesSelects features to include in the UDF. Ref PromptsEnters prompts for specifying placement references. The system will print these prompts to guide you when you place the UDF. Var ElementsSpecifies feature elements that you want to be able to redefine when you place the UDF in a part. Var Dims(Optional) Selects dimensions that you want to modify when you place the UDF in a part and enter prompts for them. Var Parameters(Optional) Selects parameters that you want to modify when you place the UDF in a part. Dim Prompts(Appears if Var Dims is defined) Selects dimensions whose prompts you want to modify and enter new prompts for them. Dim Values(Optional) Selects a dimension that belongs to the UDF and enter its new value. Family Table(Optional) Creates a family table of UDFs. Units(Optional) Changes the current units. Ext Symbol(Optional) Includes external dimensions and parameters in the UDF.
The UDF FEATS and SELECT FEAT menus also appear. The Add and Select commands are selected by default. 5. Select one or more features to add to the UDF. Note: You cannot include Annotation Features in UDFs. 6. 7. Click DONE on the SELECT FEAT menu and Done/Return on the UDF FEATS menu Type or select the default prompts for the references used by the selected features. Each reference is highlighted as you are prompted to enter or accept the default prompt. For example, if you type bottom
325/ 375
surface for the highlighted surface, then when you place the UDF, the prompt Select the bottom surface appears. When you specify a prompt for a placement reference that is used by more than one feature in the UDF, specify either single or multiple prompts for this reference.
SingleSpecifies a single prompt for the reference used in several features. When the UDF is placed, the prompt appears only once, but the reference you select for this prompt applies to all features in the group that use the same reference. MultipleSpecifies an individual prompt for each feature that uses this reference. If you select Multiple, each feature using this reference is highlighted, so you can enter a different prompt for each of them.
The MOD PROMPT and SET PROMPT menus appear. 10. To accept the prompts you set, click Done/Return on the SET PROMPT menu. To make changes before setting the prompts, use Next and Previous from the MOD PRMPT menu to select the prompt or prompts you want to change. Note: To change a single prompt (specified for the placement reference used in several features) into multiple prompts, find a prompt that you want to change, click Multiple, and type an individual prompt for each feature. 11. When all required UDF elements are defined, you can click OK in the UDF dialog box to create the UDF, or continue to define the optional elements and then click OK. To Define Variable Elements in a UDF When you create a UDF, you can specify feature elements (for example, attributes or a section of a particular feature) that you want to redefine when you place the UDF. Note: As an alternative to defining variable elements, you can skip references during the placement of the UDF, and the system will ask you to redefine the features that have missing references. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Create a UDF. Select the Var Elements element in the UDF dialog box and click Define. The Select dialog box opens. Select a feature that belongs to the UDF for which you want to specify variable elements. The VARIABLE ELEMENT OPTS menu appears. Click ALL or None and Done. The Select dialog box opens. Repeat step 13 for as many features as required, then click OK in the Select Dialog box. In the UDF dialog box, click Define.
To Define Variable Dimensions in a UDF You can select dimensions that you may want to modify when you place the UDF. 1. 2. Create a UDF. In the UDF dialog box, select the Var Dims element and click Define. The VAR DIMS Menu (Add, Remove, and Show commands) and the ADD DIMS menu (Select Dim, Select All, Show All commands) appear. The menus default to Add and Select Dim. The Select dialog box opens. Accept the default, Select Dim, to add one UDF dimension as variable dimension. Select a dimension from the Graphics window and click OK in the Select dialog box. Continue to click Select Dim and repeat step 6 until all UDF dimensions you want to make variable are selected. Click OK in the Select dialog box, and Done/Return on the ADD DIMS and VAR DIMS menus. In the Graphics window message area, you are prompted to enter a prompt for a dimension value.
3. 4. 5. 6.
326/ 375
7.
Type the prompt for dimension value and click . If you selected more than one dimension to be variable, the prompt appears again. The prompts you type are the prompts will see when you place the UDF. Repeat step 7 as required. In the UDF dialog box, Var Dims is now Defined. Click OK. Note: If you want to remove a variable dimension, click Remove from the VAR DIMS menu. Specify the selection method by choosing one of the options in the REMOVE DIMS menu: Select Dim, Select All, Remove Last.
8. 9.
To Define Variable Parameters in a UDF From the UDF dialog box, you define what parameters you want to make variable. When you place the UDF, you are then given the opportunity to change the parameters you defined as variable. 1. 2. Create a UDF. In the UDF dialog box, select the Var Parameters element and click Define. The Select dialog box opens. Note: You must set the configuration option udf_var_params to yes,to see and work with the Var Parameters element . 3. Select the UDF features for which you want to define variable parameters and click OK in the Select dialog box. The Select Parameter dialog box opens. A feature you selected appears in the Look In selection box. All parameters for the feature are listed in the Parameters Table. Note:
o o
4. 5.
You can only select features that contain parameters. You cannot include Annotation Features in a UDF.
Select Variable for all parameters you want to make variable. In the Look In selection box, select another feature and select Variable for all parameters you want to make variable. Note: You can filter the parameters you can select by changing the type in the first Look In box. Then, only parameters belonging to that type are listed in the Look In selection box. For example you may want to change the type to Part, Assembly, or Feature.
6. Repeat step 3 until you have completed your selections. 7. 8. Click Close in the Select Parameter dialog box. Click Define or OK in the UDF dialog box.
To Activate Pro/PROGRAM in a UDF Pro/PROGRAM is available only for subordinate UDFs. In your Pro/PROGRAM design, include only features needed to define the UDF. You can add any standard Pro/PROGRAM control statements. 1. 2. 3. Create a UDF. Click Pro/PROGRAM in the UDF dialog box and click Define. The PROGRAM menu appears. Click one of the following commands:
o o
Show DesignShow the current design in the Information Window. Edit DesignModify the design with the system editor. The GET INPUT menu allows you to choose the source of values for the Pro/PROGRAM inputs for the model. Choose Current Vals to use the current values, Enter to enter new values from the keyboard, or Read File to read in new values from
327/ 375
a file. The system then adds the Pro/PROGRAM design for the UDF features to the model. If a Pro/PROGRAM already exists in the model, the system integrates the changes. 4. Click Done/RETURN.
When you add an instance of a subordinate UDF on a model, the system copies any Pro/PROGRAM control statements that affect the UDF features into the model, and executes the program. Pro/ENGINEER also copies INPUT statements (see the Fundamentals manual). You copy relations in the same way as regular UDFs. Note: The control statements are copied only once at placement time. They are not recopied on regeneration, even if the group is UDF-driven. To Use Database Commands on UDFs 1. 2. Click Tools > UDF Library > Dbms. The DBMS menu appears. Click one of the following commands to perform standard database management operations on UDFs:
o o o o o o o o o
SaveSave the UDF to disk. Save AsSave a copy of the UDF under a new name. BackupSave the UDF to a specific directory on disk. RenameChange the name of a UDF object. EraseErase the UDF from memory. EraseNotDispErase all the objects that are not being displayed in the current session. PurgePurge all previous copies from the disk. InstDbmsGenerate an instance index file for UDF instances regenerated and stored in the current directory. Delete AllDelete the UDF from memory and disk.
Note: When you use DBMS commands, consider their effects on UDFs. When UDF-driven groups are present in your part, renaming and deleting removes needed references. About Placing a UDF in a Model When you place a UDF, you copy the features into your model. The copied features become a group. Groups created from a UDF can be Independent or UDF-driven
When placed as Independent the resulting group is independent of any changes to the UDF. All the required UDF values copy into the part, along with the UDF. When placed as UDF-driven, changes to the fixed dimensions of the UDF cause a change to the group when you choose Update from the GROUP menu. When a UDF is subordinate, a UDF-driven group is indirectly driven by the original model of the UDF. When you retrieve the part with a UDF-driven group, the variables are also updated. Note: UDF-driven groups update dimension values only if the features included in the UDF have not changed since the UDF was placed. If features are added to or removed from a UDF, updating the UDF in a model does not add or remove the features. To add or remove features to or from a UDF, make a copy of the old UDF, rename it, and then recreate this new UDF in all models in which the old UDF was placed. To Place a UDF (basic) 1. 2. 3. Create a UDF. Click Insert > User-Defined Feature. The Open dialog box opens. Select the .gph file you want. The PLACE OPTS menu appears.
328/ 375
Note: For a subordinate UDF, click Preview in the Open dialog box to preview the reference model of the selected .gph file. 4. On the PLACE OPTS menu, click Independent or UDF Driven.
o o
IndependentCopies all the required UDF values into the part to create a group that will be independent of any changes to the UDF. UDF DrivenThe UDF drives the group. The dimensions of a UDF-driven group update either automatically whenever the model is retrieved, or when you select Update from the GROUP menu. Because the variable dimensions of a group are not UDF-driven, they are unaffected by any change to the dimensions of the UDF. In addition, variable elements are unaffected.
5. 6.
Click Done. The SCALE menu appears and the Group Elements dialog box opens. Specify the placement scale by selecting one of the following commands on the SCALE menu. After making your selection, click Done
Same SizeKeeps the group the same size as when you created it, by rescaling the dimension values while you place the UDF. This option converts dimensions as needed (for example, millimeters to inches). This option is available only when the model and the group have different units. Same DimsKeeps the same numeric value for all the dimension values, regardless of any difference in units for the model and the group. For example, the dimension 25 inches becomes 25 millimeters. User ScaleScales all the dimensions by a scale factor you enter when prompted, but do not change the units of the group.
o
6.
If the UDF you are placing has variable dimensions, you are prompted to enter each value. Type each value and click as prompted. When you finish entering this information, the next item in the Group Elements box is automatically selected.
7.
If the next element is Var Parameters, a dialog box opens containing all existing parameters you set as variables when you created the UDF. The feature name for the parameter also appears. Change parameters as required. The DISP OPTION element is selected. Select the display option for invariable dimension:
8.
o o o
NormalCreates normal dimensions. You can then modify these dimension values to create a unique version of the group. Read OnlyMakes the dimensions read-only. You can display them, but cannot modify them. BlankBlanks the dimensions so they cannot be displayed or modified in any mode. Be careful using this option. The only way to retrieve the dimensions is to delete the group features and place the UDF again.
8.
Place the UDF by selecting placement references. When you place the UDF, you can skip some of the placement references and redefine them later. As each placement prompt appears, select a command from the SEL REF menu:
o o o
9.
AlternateSelects a corresponding reference by picking on the model. SameUses the current reference. This option appears only if the group is placed in the same model where it was originally created. SkipSkips the current reference and move on to the next one. Later, you must redefine the feature that requires the current reference.
After you have either defined or skipped all the references, an Information Window appears with a list of the skipped references. Do one of the following:
329/ 375
If you want to redefine the missing references, click Confirm from the CONFIRMATION menu. The feature creation environment is activated so you can redefine the feature element that uses the skipped reference. If you do not want to redefine the missing references, click CANCEL on the CONFIRMATION menu. The GP REFS menu appears. Select the references that you want to respecify and click Done. The SEL REF menu appears. Click Alternate or Skip to resume the process of specifying the references that you selected.
10. After you complete the placement process, the GRP PLACE menu appears with the following commands:
o o o
RedefineRedefines the group references in the same way as you defined them. Show ResultPreviews the geometry. InfoShows the current status of the group prompts.
11. If you are satisfied with the group placement, click Done from the GRP PLACE menu. The group is created and Group <udf name> appears in the model tree. Previewing a UDF You can preview a reference model of a subordinate UDF in the Pro/ENGINEER browser while you browse through folders or when working with the Windchill Properties page. After you find the UDF you want, you can drag it from the Pro/ENGINEER browser into the Graphics window. Note: Preview is available only for subordinate UDFs. UDFs created as standalone cannot be previewed. When placing a UDF using the Open dialog box, click Preview to preview the reference model of the selected .gph file. Tip: To make UDF previewing easier, the model should contain only one UDF. After you create the UDF, save the reference model in the view that clearly shows the UDF. Browsing UDFs by Parameters If you want to search for a UDF by properties other than the name, make sure the reference model has designated model parameters that are linked to the feature parameters. Then you can search the library of reference models and use Where Used query to find the desired UDF. Defining Skipped References To place the UDF correctly, you must define missing references by using the same commands you used to specify the references originally. Before you can place a UDF that contains a skipped reference, the UDF dialog box opens, listing elements with skipped references and variable elements. Each skipped element has the status comment References are missing. To define the skipped reference, select the corresponding element from the UDF dialog box and click Define. The procedure for defining a skipped reference varies, depending on the type of reference skipped.
o o o o o
If the skipped reference is used by an element other than a sketched section, Select the skipped reference element and click Define. The dialog bar (dashboard features) appears or a feature creation dialog for (non-dashboard features) opens. Redefine the element that uses the skipped reference. If the skipped reference is a sketching plane or horizontal references of a section: Select the skipped reference element and click Define. The dialog bar (dashboard features) opens or a feature creation dialog for (non-dashboard features) appears for the feature that uses the skipped reference.
330/ 375
o o o o
Define the Section element and Sketch Plane. If the skipped reference is used by a section (other than a sketching plane or horizontal reference) Select the skipped reference element and click Define. The dialog bar (dashboard features) or the Menu Manager (non-dashboard features) appears for the feature that uses the skipped reference. Select Sketch and the part reappears in the sketching view. Choose one of the following: DragAndDropPlace the existing UDF section directly on the part by using the drag-and-drop technique. After you select this option, a red outline of the section, attached to the cursor, appears on the screen. Using the mouse, move the section to its new location and place it by pressing the left mouse button. Dimension the section to the part and regenerate it. To quit section placement, press the middle mouse button. Note: The DragAndDrop option is not available for the sections that are either fully aligned to part geometry or created with the Use Edge option. Create NewDiscard the existing UDF section and create a new section. Confirm your intent by choosing Confirm. The SKETCH menu appears and you can sketch a new section.
Redefining a Missing Reference Used by Several Features Consider the following when redefining a missing reference used by several features:
If the skipped reference has a single prompt for all featuresYou must redefine this reference for each feature where it is used. For example, if you use an edge to place a hole and a cut, and you have set up a single prompt for both features, you must reselect the reference edge for both the hole and the cut if you skip the edge reference when you place the group. If the skipped reference has individual prompts for all features, you must redefine this reference only for the feature where it was skipped.
Feature, Dimension, and Parameter Names in a Group After you place a UDF in a new part, new names are assigned to the features and dimensions according to their consecutive order in the part. Parameters within a feature are always unique when created. Therefore, when a feature in a group is renamed, the parameter is still unique to the now renamed feature. Note: If the UDF has features, dimensions, or parameters with user-defined names, these names are preserved in the resulting group. When feature names already exist the destination model, features within the group are automatically renamed. To view the original names, select the feature, right click, and select Info > Feature. For example, the model tree below contains the UDF group, Group TEST1. The model already contains Extrude 1, therefore, the Extrude features in Group TEST1 are renamed Extrude 2 and Extrude 3 because this is how they fall sequentially in the model.
To Change the Group Type If you no longer want a UDF-driven group feature to be UDF-driven, 1. 2. 3. Click Edit > Feature Operations. The FEAT menu appears. Click GROUP > Disassociate. Select the UDF-driven groups to make independent.
331/ 375
4.
Click Done/Return.
If, as variable elements, you redefine all the dimensions of a UDF-driven group, the group is no longer UDFdriven. Pro/ENGINEER disassociates the group and issues a message stating so. To Redefine the References Element 1. 2. When you redefine the References element of the group feature, the GP REFS menu appears with all placement references listed according to their prompts. As you move the cursor across the list of references (with the exception of skipped references), the system highlights the corresponding reference geometry in both the model window and UDF subwindow. A system message reports on each highlighting action, explaining the colors used. Select the reference or references that you want to redefine.
3.
To Resolve a Placement Failure When placement of a UDF fails because of incorrect references, you can either redefine the failed features or place the UDF incompletely by including only the fully defined or successful features. If you place an incomplete UDF, the excluded (or incomplete) features are still listed as group members in the Model Tree; however, they are marked as incomplete. When you redefine the incomplete group to specify missing feature references, the properly redefined features appear in the group. Note: When a fully defined feature fails during placement, you can leave the group incomplete. 1. 2. When the UDF placement fails, the FAILED FEAT menu appears and the reason for failure is displayed in the Message window. Click one of the following commands:
o o o
3.
INFOObtain information about the features that could not be placed and reasons for failure. For example, Feature #12 (protrusion) failed regeneration. Could not determine feature depth. Redefine UDFRedefines the group so you can place all of its features. RedefineRedefines the failed feature in the UDF.
The GRP PLACE menu appears so you can continue with the group placement.
Note: If a UDF feature fails during regeneration, the RESOLVE FEAT menu appears. About Local Groups Local groups differ in the following ways from the groups defined from UDFs:
You cannot replace local groups. When you create a local group, you do not give placement references. Local groups provide the only way to collect several features to pattern in one operation as if they were a single feature. When you create a local group, you must select the features in the consecutive sequential order of the regeneration list. A quick way to do this is to select the intended group by range. If there are features between the specified features in the regeneration list, you are prompted to group all the features in between. If you do not want to group some of the features within the sequential order, first reorder the features. For example, you can select features 2, 3, and 4, but you cannot select features 2, 3, and 17. In this case, reorder feature 17 to feature 4. Features that are already in other groups cannot be grouped again. To Create a Local Group Use one of the procedures below to create a local group.
332/ 375
To Create a Local Group Using the Shortcut Menu 1. In the Graphics window or the Model Tree, select the features you want to group. The group must contain all features between the features you select. For example, if your model tree lists DTM1, DTM2 and DTM3 you can create a group by selecting any of the following combinations:
o o o
2.
DTM1 and DTM2 DTM2 and DTM3 DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3
Right-click and select Group. Group LOCAL_GROUP appears in the model tree. Note: You can also click Edit > Group.
To Create a Local Group Using the Menu Manager 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Edit > Feature Operations. The FEAT menu appears. Click Group > Local Group. Type a group name and click .
Select each feature to include in the local group or select the starting and ending features. If you select the starting and ending features click yes when prompted to include the features between the starting and ending features. Click Done. The local group feature is created and is listed in the Model Tree.
5.
Note: To create a local group of the Analysis type, you must have the appropriate license. When you select features to include in the local group of the Analysis type, the Analysis feature must be the last item selected. To Select a Local Group Feature from the Graphics Window You can directly select a Local Group feature from the Model tree. From the Graphics window you must first select a feature in the Local Group to select a Local Group Feature. 1. If you are selecting the Local Group feature only: a. In the Graphics window, select a feature belonging to a Local Group feature. b. Right-click and select Select Group. The Local Group feature is selected. 2. If you are selecting other features and the Local Group feature: a. In the Graphics window select all required features except a feature belonging to the Local Group feature. b. Select a feature in the Local Group feature and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. c. Select Select Group. The Local Group feature is selected. Note: The Select Group command is only available when a feature belonging to the Local Group feature is the last in your feature selections. Note: When you want to include a Local Group in your feature selections, you must select a feature belonging to the Local Group feature last, to make the Select Group command available. About Working with Groups After you place a UDF on a part, all features belonging to the UDF, become a group. The following feature operations treat groups as a single feature.
Delete Ungroup Group
333/ 375
Suppress Rename Edit Edit Definition Pattern Note: To pattern a group with external references in Assembly mode, the parent assembly must be in session. To Replace, Disassociate, or Update a group, use a GROUP command on the Menu Manager. To Replace a Group Each time a group is replaced, Pro/ENGINEER keeps track of the group being replaced as it becomes inactive and adds it to a list of inactive groups. To replace one group with another or replace a group with an instance from a family table, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. In the GROUP menu, click Replace. Select the group feature to replace. Select the new UDF to place on the part to replace the group selected in Step 2. Choose Retrieve or Search/Retr to retrieve a new UDF for placement, or choose PrevReplaced to select from the namelist of the groups that has been previously replaced. Note: If the group is table-driven, you must also select an instance. 4. 5. 6. If the old and new groups are interchangeable, the Scale menu appears. Make your scale selection. You are prompted for variable dimensions (if any). The replaced group and its children (if suppressed) become inactive.
Replacement Conditions Pro/ENGINEER attempts to replace group instances that are from the same family table. The following examples illustrate how Pro/ENGINEER attempts to replace groups that are not members of the same table or that do not have a defined table.
o o o
Pro/ENGINEER example, the existing group has the following references and prompts: edgeleft edge surfaceplace surface axisaxis
If the replacement group has the following references and prompts, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the groups:
o o o
edgeleft edge surfaceplace surface axisaxis
Replacement is not possible when the types of references are different. For example, the existing group has the following references and prompts:
o o
edgeright surfaceleft
If the replacement group has the following references and prompts, Pro/ENGINEER does not replace the groups:
334/ 375
o o
edgeright edgeleft
Replacement Conditions Pro/ENGINEER attempts to replace group instances that are from the same family table and to replace groups that are not members of the same table or that do not have a defined table. If the existing group has the same references and prompts (such as edgeleft edge, surfaceplace surface, and axisaxis), as the replacement group , then the groups are replaced. If the existing and replacement groups have different references and prompts then the groups cannot be replaced. For example, if the existing group has the references and prompts edgeright and surfaceleft, and the replacement group has edgeright and edgeleft, you cannot replace the groups. Replacing a Group After you placed the UDF, you can replace it with another one that has the same number of references and lists them in the same sequence. When you replace the group, the system suppresses the original group and keeps it in the model. The suppressed groups are available for selection when you replace the group next time. Children of the suppressed group are suppressed with the group. For example, when you replace a patterned group, the pattern becomes inactive, and it becomes active when the original group is replaced back. In a group defined from a UDF that has a family table, you can replace any instance with any other instance of the same family table. Note the following restrictions:
Both groups must have the same number of prompts, type, and order of references. For example, a group that uses a linearly placed hole cannot be replaced with a group that uses a radially placed hole; one has two references to edges or surfaces for linear dimensions, the other has one reference to axis for rotational center and one reference to the edge or surface for angular dimension. These are not compatible. Groups with suppressed children cannot be replaced. You cannot replace a Local Group. Deleting a Replacement Group Deleting the active group from the part deletes all the associated groups. To Copy a Group You can use the Copy command to copy a Local Group or a group placed in your model using Insert > User-Defined Feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Create a UDF. Place UDF in your model. Create a Local Group in your model. Select one of the groups in your model. Click Edit > Copy. Click Edit > Paste. A copy of the group is pasted in the model tree. and the dashboard opens so you can place the feature.
To Pattern a Group You can pattern groups created from UDFs and local groups using Pattern from the shortcut menu.
335/ 375
You can select all the dimensions in the selected group as incremental dimensions except those used to create a feature pattern within the group. When you create a patterned group, one member represents the whole group. When regenerating, however, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates all the features individually. 1. Select a Group, right-click, and select Pattern. The Pattern tool opens. Note: Alternatively click 2. 3. Create a pattern. Specify the variable dimensions, increments, and number of instances. or Edit > Pattern.
Tip: Patterning a Group When you pattern or copy a group, be careful which placement dimensions you select to increment or vary. If a feature in a group references another for placement (for example, a chamfer references the edge of a hole), you need to change only the placement dimensions of the referenced feature. If you place features in a group separately, you must change the placement dimensions of each member. Otherwise, features with unchanged dimensions will have several copies superimposed on each other. A feature created using the Use Prev option (to select sketching and reference planes) has its own dimension if the previous section plane has one. To pattern a group that includes this feature, you must select and modify these dimensions. To Use Groups to Copy Features Quickly Another way to copy features quickly, without having to specify all the references is to use the GROUP shortcut menu commands: Local Group, Pattern, Unpattern, and Ungroup. For example to copy features using the GROUP menu options: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose from the GROUP menu. Select the group you want to pattern and right-click. Select Pattern. The dashboard appears. Specify the variable dimensions, increments, and number of instances. Choose Unpattern to remove the pattern setting for a family table generic part, then select the pattern. Choose Ungroup to disassemble the groups into individual features and select each group instance.
Rules for Patterning Groups Remember the following rules when you work with groups and patterns:
If the features of a group reference a pattern, you can create a pattern of the group referencing that base pattern (that is, a group reference pattern). If patterned groups are unpatterned, each group member behaves like a group of copied features. For dimension patterns, variable dimensions again become variable dimensions and can be modified individually. Other dimensions are still shared by the group unless you ungroup them and make them independently modifiable using the Make Indep option. You can delete an individual group to create an irregular pattern-like setting. You cannot ungroup patterned groups. You must first unpattern the groups, then ungroup them. The process of unpatterning and ungrouping features does not automatically give them individual dimensions. The original parent dimensions selected for the group and pattern still control all the features. To make them independently modifiable, use the Make Indep option. You can not pattern a feature that belongs to a group pattern. The workaround is to modify the number of group members to one, pattern the feature, then pattern the group again.
336/ 375
If you redefined a feature in a group pattern, the system will recreate the pattern and assign new IDs to pattern instances. Children of the original pattern members will fail because they lost their references. When you replace a patterned group, the pattern becomes inactive. About Editing Parts The Editing state you are in determines what is and what is not available when you edit or modify a part. The changes you can make include the following:
Change the properties (value), text, and text style for feature and section dimensions. Redefine a feature or section. Delete or suppress a feature. Edit references and parameters Group multiple features into one feature. Move datum tags. Change datum properties (plane and axis only). Change the curve line type and color (datum curves and cosmetic curves). Create a Setup Note. Edit functionality is available from a shortcut menu after selecting a part entity from the Model Tree or from the Graphics Window. Some of the commands on edit shortcut menu are also available from the Pro/ENGINEER Edit menu. You can edit multiple entities at one time, however, only those commands that are valid for the entity or entities selected are available. For example there are fewer editing commands available when both a Datum and a Feature are selected, than there are if one feature is selected. In some applications you must use the Modify command from the Part Setup (Edit > Part Setup) menu on the Menu Manager for editing commands. About States of Editing There are three levels or states in which you can be working when editing a feature. The state determines what is available for selection so you can, for example, change values easily and efficiently. Feature editing is the highest level at which you can edit. When you complete your dimension or sections editing and exit, you remain in the top level Feature editing state.
Edit FeatureThis is the top editing level. From here you can go to the other editing states. Edit DimensionAfter selecting a dimension, editing is filtered so only dimensions are available for selection and change. When you exit dimension editing, you are still in Edit Feature. Edit SectionAfter selecting a section, editing is filtered so only subitems for the section are available for selection and change. When you exit section editing, you are still in Edit Feature. To Make Features Read-Only To ensure that certain features cannot be modified at a later time,.you can make them read-only. The dimensions, attributes, scheme, and so on of read-only features can not be modified and are not regenerated when the part is regenerated. However, you can add features to the parts that intersect the read-only features. When you make a feature read-only, Pro/ENGINEER makes it, and all the features that came before it in the regeneration list, read-only. 1. 2. 3. Select the feature in the Model Tree or in the graphics window. Click Edit > Read Only. The R-ONLY FEAT menu appears. Click one of the following commands:
337/ 375
o o o o
4.
SelectPick a feature to make it and all previous features read only. Feat NumEnter a feature external identifier to make it and all previous features read-only. All FeatMake all features read-only. CleanRemove the read-only setting from the features.
Click Done/Return.
To Rename a Feature Select the appropriate procedure, based on the application in which you are working. Note: You cannot rename the top-level Part or Assembly in the Model Tree. To Rename a Feature from the Model Tree 1. 2. Select the feature name on the model tree and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Rename and type the new name for the feature. Note: You can also double-click the feature name and then type the new name. To Rename a Feature Name Using the Menu Manager 1. 2. 3. Click Edit > Setup. The PART SETUP menu appears. Click Name. The NAME SETUP menu appears. Click one of the following commands:
o o o
4.
FeatureName or rename all features, including datum points. Detail ItemRename a surface finish, geometric tolerance or symbol instance to modify symbol name OtherName datum axes that were created as part of another feature (such as a hole), curve segments making up composite curves, datum points, surface features, and feature edges.
Select the feature or axis to be modified. Enter NEW NAME appears at the bottom of the graphics window. Type the new name and click .
5.
Note:
If a datum point array feature contains a single point only, the name of the point and the name of the feature are identical. Names cannot contain spaces and are limited to 31 characters. To Modify Features with Multiple Sections When you redefine sections of features that contain multiple sections, you must specify the section that you want to change. 1. 2. 3. 4. Right-click a feature in the Model Tree and click Edit Definition. Select the Sections element in the feature dialog box and click Define. The SECTIONS menu appears. Select an action from the SECTIONS menu. From the SPECIFY menu, select a section or trajectory that you want to modify. Note: In addition to the Specify command, you can use the following selection options:
o o
SelectSelect the approximate location of the section to modify. The system selects the closest section to the pick, moving in the direction towards the first section. AllDisplay the dimensions for all the sections and trajectories in the feature.
338/ 375
To Edit Datum or Axis Properties Select the appropriate procedure, based on the application in which you are working. To Edit Datum or Axis Properties Using the Shortcut Menu 1. Select the datum plane or axis in the Model Tree or the graphics window and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Note: Alternatively, select the datum plane or axis in the Model Tree and click Edit > Properties. 2. 3. 4. Click Properties. The Axis or Datum dialog box opens. Change the name, type, or placement of the element you selected. Click OK to see the changes in the graphics window.
To Edit Datum or Axis Properties Using the Menu Manager 1. 2. 3. 4. On the PART menu click Modify > Datum/Axis. Select the datum plane or axis to modify. The Datum dialog box or the Axis dialog box appears. Change the name, type, or placement of the element you selected. Click OK. The graphics window refreshes to reflect your changes.
To Edit Datum Curve Line Style 1. 2. Select the datum curve or datum curves in the Model Tree or the graphics window and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Properties. The Line Style dialog box opens. (Alternatively, select the datum curve or curves in the Model Tree and click Edit > Properties). Note: If your application uses the Menu manager, on the PART menu click Modify > Line Style, and select the curve whose attributes you want to modify. 3. Use the options described below to modify line style:
o o o o
4.
StyleSets the line style name by selecting a from a list of existing line style names. Existing LineSelects an existing line using Select Line. Line FontSets a line font by selecting from a list of all available line fonts. ColorSets the color of selected lines using the Color dialog box.
Click Apply to apply the line style or Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes. If you click Reset, the line style resets to the original values.
About Editing Dimensions You can directly modify dimension values in the Graphics window. The most recently used dimension value is displayed on the model and a list of previous values is available in the attached list box. The mode in which you are working determines the steps you must take to see the dimensions you want to modify, and the way in which you can modify dimension properties, text, and text style. In most applications you use the Dimension Properties dialog box to change the properties, dimension text, and dimension text style. In other applications, you must use the Menu Manager to complete these tasks. When you choose to edit a feature, you can select dimensions and change their values and properties, or select a section and isolate the editing just to the section dimensions. You can also isolate the kinds of elements you want to select by filtering your selection. Negative Dimensions Pro/ENGINEER supports negative dimension values. How the dimensions are displayed, and how the configuration option show_dim_sign affects the display, is determined by the type of dimension
339/ 375
Some dimensions in Pro/ENGINEER use references outside the feature and determine the location of the feature. Other dimensions control feature shape. Most dimensions controlling feature shape are displayed as positive values. If you enter a negative dimension value, geometry is flipped to the opposite side but the dimension value remains positive. For these or type a negative dimension value to flip the feature direction. The dimensions you can click configuration option show_dim_sign has no control over this type of dimension. show_dim_sign controls the display of dimension type that determines the location of a feature. For this type of dimension there is no button available to flip the geometry. When set to no, negative values create geometry to the opposite side and dimension values remain positive. When set to yes, the value appears as it is entered. Entering a value with the opposite sign flips the geometry, and with the same sign increases or decreases the value. To Edit Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style The procedure below applies to most applications. If the menu manager is available in your application, refer to table of contents and select a procedure in the book Using the Menu Manager to Edit 1. If you are working in the Graphics window, a. Set the Selection Filter to Features, b. Double-click on a feature to select and edit it. All feature dimensions appear. c. To select more than one feature for editing, press CTRL+double-click. Note:
o o
2.
Pressing CTRL+double-click selects or removes an item and activates Edit, enabling you to change dimension values and properties for the selected items. When editing more than one feature, only feature level dimensions appear. To edit sketch level dimensions, select the sketch. Feature dimensions are also available in this case.
If you are working from the Model Tree: a. Select one or more features and right-click. b. Select Edit to see the feature dimensions in the Graphics window.
Note:

3.
When you are selecting more than one feature to edit, only feature level dimensions are available. When in Assembly mode, click Settings > Tree Filters > Feature to see the features listed in the Model Tree. You can also select Features from the selection filter. If you select a copied dependent feature containing a section, then Make Sec Indep appears in the shortcut menu. You must make the section independent before you can modify (edit) the section. Double-click a dimension to select it, right click and select Properties. The Dimension Properties dialog box opens. Note: If the dimension is dependent, the command Make Dim Indep appears in the shortcut menu. Click Make Dim Indep to make the dimension independent. 4. 5. Click the appropriate tab to modify the properties, dimension text, or text style for the selected dimensions. Changes are visible in the Graphics window. When your modifications are complete, click OK.
Tips:
If Fractional is selected in the Properties tab, set the denominator you want. The specified denominator overrides any value set with the configuration option dim_fraction_denominator.
340/ 375
When Decimal is selected in the Properties tab, the default number of decimal places for dimensions is two. To increase the precision, type a value in Number of decimal places. You can also change the number of decimal places using the configuration option default_dec_places. To turn on Tolerance mode in the Properties tab, click Tools > Environment and click Dimension Tolerances. You can then set the tolerance mode in the Properties tab. You can also set tolerances to display by setting the tol_display configuration option to yes. You can change the value of the selected dimension from the Nominal value box in the Properties tab. Use Flip Arrows in the Properties tab to toggle the display of arrowheads between inside and outside the dimension extension lines. In the Dimension Text tab, you can add text to a dimension value (such as diameter, ref, or type ) and special symbols. Type @D at the point in your text where you want the dimension to display. To Change Dimension Values The procedure below applies to most applications. If the menu manager is available in your application, refer to the table of contents and select a procedure in the book Using the Menu Manager to Edit. 1. If you are working in the Graphics window, a. Set the Selection Filter to Features. b. Double-click a feature to select and edit it. All feature dimensions appear. (To select additional features press CTRL+click.) c. To select more than one feature, press CTRL+double-click. Note: After you double-click to select a dimension, the Selection Filter changes to Dimensions. You can then edit other visible dimensions by placing the pointer on the dimension and right-clicking. 2. If you are working from the Model Tree, select one or more features, right-click, and select Edit to see the feature dimensions in the Graphics window.
Note: When in Assembly mode click Settings > Tree Filters > Feature to see the features listed in the Model Tree. 3. If you select only one dimension, you can change the dimension value in any of the following ways:
o o
Right-click and select Value, click Edit > Value, or double-click the dimension. A value box appears. Type a new value or select a value from the list. The most recently used value is at the top of the list. Right-click and select Properties or click Edit > Properties. The Dimension Properties dialog box opens. In the Properties tab, type a new value in the Nominal value box and click OK. The selected dimension changes.
4.
If you select more than one dimension, right-click and select Properties or click Edit > Properties. The Dimension Properties dialog box opens. In the Properties tab, type a new value in the Nominal value box and click OK to change the selected dimensions. Note: When you are selecting more than one feature to edit, you will not see all the dimensions for the features. Only those dimensions you can edit at the same time appear.
5.
To leave the edit dimension state, but remain in editing mode, right-click and select Exit Edit Dimension. The Selection Filter changes to All.
Tip: To edit more than one section, a. Set the Selection Filter to Sections. b. Double-click the section to select and edit. c. To select and edit additional sections, press CTRL+double-click.
341/ 375
To Change Overall and Dimension Tolerances 1. Set the configuration option tol_display to yes or click View > Display Settings > Model Display and select tolerances. The general tolerances for the part are displayed in the bottom area of the Graphics window. To see the dimension tolerance ranges for a feature, select the feature in the model tree, right-click and select Edit, or double-click the feature in the Graphics Window. Select the tolerance or the tolerances you want to change.
2. 3.
4. If you are changing a general tolerance a. Select the tolerance. A value box appears in the Pro/ENGINEER message area. b. Type a new value and click 5. . The new tolerance value is displayed.
If you are changing one dimension tolerance value for a feature follow one of the following procedures:
o o o
Select the dimension tolerance, right-click, and select Value. A value box appears. Type or select a value. Double-click the dimension tolerance. A value box appears. Type or select a value. Select the dimension tolerance (both the upper limit and lower limit are selected), right-click and select Properties. The Dimension Properties dialog box opens. Type new values in the Upper limit and the Lower limit boxes.
6. If you are changing more than one dimension tolerance: a. Select the dimensions to change, right-click, and select Properties. The Dimension Properties dialog box opens. b. Type new values in the Upper limit and Lower limit boxes. c. Click OK. 7. To leave the edit dimension state, but remain in editing mode, right-click and select Exit Edit Dimension. The Selection Filter changes to All.
To Modify Dimension Values Using the Menu Manager If the menu manager is not available, refer to the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. On the Part Menu, click Modify > Value. Select a feature. Dimensions appear in the Graphics window. Click a dimension. A value box appears. Type a new dimension or select a dimension. Click Regenerate to recalculate the part using the new dimension values.
To Modify Dimension Cosmetics If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. 1. 2. On the Part menu, click Modify > DimCosmetics. Click one of the following commands:
o o o o
FormatToggles the dimension format between fraction and decimal. Num DigitsChanges the number of decimal places displayed in the dimension TextAdds text or special symbols to the dimension. SymbolChanges the symbolic name of the dimension.
342/ 375
o o o o
Move DimMoves the dimension itself, and the associated leader lines, to a new location. Move TextMoves the text associated with the dimension to a new location. Flip ArrowsToggles the display of the arrowheads between inside and outside the extension lines. Assign TolAssigns a tolerance table reference to the dimension.
To Modify the Dimension Format If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click PART > Modify > DimCosmetics. The DIM COSMETIC menu appears. Click Format. The DIM FORMAT menu appears. Select what you want as a result of the conversion, Decimal or Fraction. Select any number of dimensions to convert. You can convert fraction to fraction, decimal to fraction, and so on. Click Done . If you are converting to fractions, type the denominator you want.
Note: The specified denominator overrides any value set for the dim_fraction_denominator option in the configuration file. Modifying the Dimension Format The system can display dimensions in decimal or fractional format. You can specify configuration file options to cause the system to automatically use one format or the other. If you want to convert only a few dimensions to the other format, use the Fraction and Decimal options from the FORMAT menu. When converting to fractions, remember the following:
The system prompts you for the value of the largest allowable denominator. Valid denominators are the numbers by which the largest denominator can be evenly divided. A fraction is separated with a hyphen. When you enter fraction values, always enter them as "#+#/#", such as 1+5/8. When converting to decimals, remember that Pro/ENGINEER uses the current number of digits of each selected dimension. Normally, a fraction to decimal conversion is exact. However, if the current number of digits is too small, the system truncates and changes the value. For all exact conversions, you need a maximum of five digits only. You can mark approximate fractional dimensions driven by a relation by setting the mark_approximate_dims configuration option. To Add Text to a Dimension If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. The Text option from the DIM COSMETIC menu allows you to add text to a dimension value (such as diameter, ref, and typ), as well as special symbols. 1. 2. 3. Click PART > Modify > DimCosmetics. The DIM COSMETIC menu appears. Pick the dimension to add the text. Type the text. You can enter several lines of text, but each line must end with ENTER. To place the dimension within the text (other than the start of the line) type[@D] at the point within the text, where you want to locate the dimension.
343/ 375
4. To complete the text string, press ENTER two times. You can also define your own special fonts and symbols. To Modify a Dimension Symbol If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. The Symbol option in the DIM COSMETIC menu allows you to rename the symbolic name of a dimension. For example, you can change the symbol for the diameter of the hole from d8 to hole_dia. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click PART >Modify > DimCosmetics. The DIM COSMETIC menu appears. Click Symbol. Select the symbolic dimension to rename. Type the desired text followed by ENTER. If you select a symbolic dimension and you press ENTER for the text input, the symbolic dimension remains unchanged.
Modifying a Dimension Symbol
When you change a dimension symbol, the system updates any relations or family tables that use that symbol. Pattern symbols cannot be modified. If you must name the symbol, use a parameter and establish a relation, setting the pattern symbol to the appropriately named parameter. You cannot modify the name of a tolerance symbol. For example, if you have a dimension d0 with tolerances +p0 and +m0, you cannot modify the name of +p0 or +m0. To Modify Dimension Locations If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. 1. 2. 3. 4. Click PART >Modify > DimCosmetics. The DIM COSMETIC menu appears. Click Move Dim. Select the feature for which you want to display the dimensions, then select the dimension to move. Click the point where you want to relocate the dimension. The dimension, the extension lines, and the leader lines automatically adjust to the new location.
To Move Dimension Text If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. Move Dim moves both the dimension and its text to any new location. Use Move Text to move dimension text only. 1. 2. 3. Click PART > Modify > DimCosmetics. The DIM COSMETIC menu appears. Click Move Text. Select the dimension text to move then click a new location for the text. The dimension leader line moves.
To Switch Dimension Arrowheads If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. 1. 2. Click PART >Modify > DimCosmetics. The DIM COSMETIC menu appears. Click Flip Arrows. The display of arrowheads toggles between inside and outside the extension lines.
344/ 375
To Make Copied Feature Dimensions Independent If the application in which you are working requires that you use the Menu Manager, follow the procedure below, otherwise follow the procedure To Modify Dimension Properties, Text, or Text Style. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click PART >Modify > Make Indep. The DIM COSMETIC menu appears. Select a copied feature. All the dimensions of the features are displayed. If you copied the feature using Dependent, the dimensions on the parent feature are displayed. Select a shared dimension to make independent. After you select a dimension, all the features that share the dimension are highlighted in yellow. Select the features that are to have that dimension independent. Click Done. After a dimension is made independent, modifying it for one of the features does not affect another feature.
Making Copied Feature Dimensions Independent When you use the Dependent command to create a feature by copying another feature, all the dimensions of the parent feature (except those selected as variable when copying by References) become shared between the parent feature and its copy. If you modify the value of a shared dimension, both features change simultaneously. Use the Make Indep command to make any shared dimension (including the number of pattern instances) of the copied feature independent from that of the parent feature. The MAKE INDEP menu contains the following commands:
DimensionSelect the dimensions that the copied feature shares with its parent to make them independent of the parent feature. SectionPick a copied feature to make its section independent from its parent feature. Note: When in Part or Assembly Modes, you can make a dimension independent by selecting the dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Make Independent on the shortcut menu. Making Copied Feature Dimensions Independent When you use the Dependent command to create a feature by copying another feature, all the dimensions of the parent feature (except those selected as variable when copying by References) become shared between the parent feature and its copy. If you modify the value of a shared dimension, both features change simultaneously. Use the Make Indep command to make any shared dimension (including the number of pattern instances) of the copied feature independent from that of the parent feature. The MAKE INDEP menu contains the following commands:
DimensionSelect the dimensions that the copied feature shares with its parent to make them independent of the parent feature. SectionPick a copied feature to make its section independent from its parent feature. Note: When in Part or Assembly Modes, you can make a dimension independent by selecting the dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Make Independent on the shortcut menu. Redefining Section Geometry When you redefine a section, you can resketch any portion of the section. When you delete an entity that is referenced by another feature, the system asks for confirmation. You can respond in one of the following ways:
YesThe system suspends the child feature, and regeneration may fail after you have redefined the parent. If regeneration fails, Pro/ENGINEER enters the Resolve environment.
345/ 375
NoThe entity will not be deleted. You can then replace the sketched entity with another entity, thereby keeping the reference that the child feature needs. Abort the section redefineReroute or modify the scheme of the child feature so that the section redefinition is successful. You can redefine features that were created using the Sketcher text just as any other features of the same type. When you redefine a section, you can edit the text and modify the font. Note: Redefining a section of a copied feature is similar to redefining its parent. When you attempt to redefine a copy, Pro/ENGINEER displays the section used to define the parent. To Replace Section Entities Instead of resketching a section entity, you can replace it with another one by using the Replace command. This allows the new entity to keep the ID of the original one and to preserve any data (for example, geometric tolerances) that may be associated with the original entity. 1. 2. Enter Sketcher with a section that you want to modify. To replace an entity, you must sketch a new entity. You cannot use an old one. Tip: When an entity is split by intersecting, one portion of the entity is old, while the other is newand can be used to replace another entity of the section. 3. 4. Click Edit > Replace. Select the new entity that you want to use.
5. Select the old entity that you want to replace. The system deletes the old entity and any dimensions associated with it. You cannot restore the deleted entity or its dimensions. Note: You can intersect or fillet all entities except circles without losing the children. Example: Replacing Section Entities In the following example, on entity with children is being deleted, and two entities with children are being intersected. When an entity is intersected, one portion of it retains the old entity ID, and the other portion gets a new ID. To retain the children, you can use this new entity to replace the old one. In the following example, entities 1 and 3 have children. Instead of deleting them, you can replace 1 with 2 and 3 with 5 in order to preserve children of the entities 1 and 3. Modification Example
To Add or Remove a Section in a Blend You can add or remove a section when you are redefining a parallel or non-parallel blend. You cannot add or remove sections for swept blends. Pro/ENGINEER renumbers all blend sections as necessary after you have added or removed one or more sections. For a parallel blend subsection, deleting all entities in the subsection automatically removes it. To add a new subsection, toggle to an empty subsection and sketch. If the total number of subsections changes, you must enter all the required depth values again.
346/ 375
Removing a Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Right-click a blend feature in the Model Tree and click Edit Definition. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. Select the Section attribute and click Define. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SECTION menu. Choose Sketch from the SECTION menu. The system displays the blend subsections in Sketcher. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section to toggle to the subsection that you want to remove. Delete the section geometry. Toggle to the section that remains in the blend. Click to exit Sketcher.
Enter new values for the distance between each section. Click OK in the dialog box.
Adding a Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Notes: Right-click a blend feature in the Model Tree and click Edit Definition. The system displays the feature creation dialog box. Select the Section attribute and click Define. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SECTION menu. Choose Sketch from the SECTION menu. The system displays the blend subsections in Sketcher. Toggle to an empty subsection. Sketch a new subsection. Click to exit Sketcher.
Enter the depth between each blend section. Click OK in the dialog box.
You can not insert a new section between two existing sections. Any additional sketches added to the blend are placed behind the last section created before the redefine. To Redefine a Section in a Parallel Blend 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select a blend feature in the Model Tree, right-click, and select Edit Definition. The feature creation dialog box opens. Select the Section attribute and click Define. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SECTION menu. Choose Sketch from the SECTION menu. The system displays the blend subsections in Sketcher. Click Sketch > Feature Tools > Toggle Section to toggle to the subsection that you want to change. Modify the section geometry as needed. Click to exit Sketcher.
Enter new values for the distance between each section. Click OK in the dialog box.
347/ 375
To Add or Remove a Section in a Non-Parallel Blend Removing a Section 1. 2. 3. Select a blend feature in the Model Tree, right-click, and select Edit Definition. The feature creation dialog box opens. Select the Section attribute and click Define. The system displays the SECTIONS and SPECIFY menus. The SPECIFY menu lists the existing blend sections. Choose Remove, then choose one of the sections in the SPECIFY menu. The system redisplays the SPECIFY menu with an updated list of blend sections, so you can add, remove, or modify another section, if desired. When you have finished redefining the blend, choose Done from the SECTIONS menu. Click OK in the dialog box to regenerate the feature.
4. 5.
Adding a Section 1. 2. 3. Select a blend feature in the Model Tree, right-click, and select Edit Definition. The feature creation dialog box opens. Select the Section attribute and click Define. The system displays the SECTIONS and SPECIFY menus. The SPECIFY menu lists the existing blend sections. Choose Add from the SECTIONS menu, then choose the number of the section you are adding from the SPECIFY menu. This allows you to insert a new section after an existing one. For example, if you are adding a section to a blend that already has three sections, the options in the SPECIFY menu are Section 2, Section 3, and Section 4. The Section 2 option inserts your new section between the existing sections 1 and 2. The Section 3 option inserts your new section between the existing sections 2 and 3. The Section 4 option places your new section after the existing section 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Enter the x-, y-, and z-axis rotation angles for the section you are creating. The system displays a subwindow with the sketcher grid. Sketch the new section and regenerate it. Enter the depth value for the new section. Pro/ENGINEER redisplays the SECTION and SPECIFY menus, so you can redefine another section, if desired. When you have finished, click OK in the dialog box to regenerate the feature.
To Redefine a Dimensioning Scheme You can change the dimensioning scheme (how a feature is dimensioned) by choosing Scheme from the SECTION menu. Redefining the dimensioning scheme changes only how the feature is dimensioned. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select a feature and right-click. A dialog box defining the selected feature is displayed. Select the Section element and click Define. The SECTION menu appears. Pro/ENGINEER displays the SECTION menu. Choose Scheme. Select a feature. The system rolls the part back to the state it was in at the time the feature was created. This prevents you from dimensioning the feature to a feature created after it. For sketched entities, add or delete dimensions to change the scheme. When you add new dimensions, Pro/ENGINEER numbers the symbolic dimensions sequentially, starting with the most current value. For example, if the current model has dimensions d0, d1, ..., d27, when you modify the scheme to add new dimensions, the new dimensions start with d28. When you have finished, choose Done. Select one of the buttons in the dialog box, if desired, then select OK.
7.
Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the part to its full state with the new dimensioning scheme. For successful regeneration to occur, the revised dimensioning scheme must be sufficient (not over- or underdimensioned).
348/ 375
Side Effects of Modifying a Dimensioning Scheme When you modify the scheme of a feature, you can delete or add dimensions, and align or unalign the features. This causes a change in the symbolic representation of feature dimensions that affects drawings and relation files of parts and assemblies. Deleting dimensions using the Scheme option obsoletes any relations that contain the deleted dimensions. You must update the relations file to reflect the changes to the relations, or use Dimension > Replace instead. New dimensions added to a scheme will not retain any cosmetic modifications made to the old dimensions. Note: Dimension notes with obsolete symbolic dimensions replace the dimension with asterisks ("***"). To Create Incomplete Features You can suspend feature creation without losing data that you have already defined. This produces an incomplete feature, which you can complete later (for example, when required geometric references are available for feature definition). Because you have not finished feature creation, the system can not generate geometry for the incomplete feature. An incomplete feature differs from a failed feature in the following respect: It is intended to be left unfinished until the design intent is clarified or geometry it depends on becomes available. A fully defined feature cannot be made incomplete. Incomplete features are listed in the feature status column of the Model Tree as Incomplete. To leave a feature incomplete when creating a feature: 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose OK from the dialog box. When the system asks you if you want to leave the feature incomplete, choose Yes. You can exit Sketcher with an incomplete section by choosing Done from the SKETCHER menu. To finish an incomplete feature, redefine and complete the definition of all required elements.
About Redefining Features You redefine a feature to change how a feature is created. The types of changes you can make depend on the selected feature. For example, if a feature is created using a section, you can redefine the section, feature references, and so on. After redefining, features with no external references regenerate starting from the first modified feature, which may or may not be the feature you are redefining or rerouting. In calculating where to begin regeneration during the redefining operations, Pro/ENGINEER does not consider features with an external reference. For example, if you modify feature 10, then redefine feature 15, the regeneration begins with feature 10. Pro/ENGINEER recreates the feature using the new feature definitions. When you redefine the feature sections, you may need to redefine or reroute any child feature whose reference edge or surface was replaced. If you make any changes to the feature that causes the feature redefinition to abort, you enter the Resolve environment. When you redefine a feature that was created using the options Copy, Mirror, and Dependent, the system issues a warning message stating that the selected feature is a dependent copy of the highlighted feature. If you choose Continue from the WAITING menu, the system displays the REDEFINE menu with the options Attribute, Direction, Section, and Depth. For example, if you choose Section after you select the options to redefine, the system asks for confirmation because the section of the selected feature will become independent. When you preview the redefinition, the system removes the feature geometry and creates temporary geometry for your changes. When you exit from the user interface, the system regenerates the part.
349/ 375
If you quit the redefinition of a feature, Pro/ENGINEER attempts to restore the part to its original state, without regenerating the geometry of the model. After you have redefined certain part features, if you quit the redefinition, the system must still regenerate the geometry of later features. To Redefine Features with Elements 1. 2. 3. Select the feature in the model tree or double-click the feature in the graphics window. Right-click and select Edit Definition. The dashboard appropriate for the feature you are redefining appears or a dialog box defining the selected feature opens. If the dashboard appears, use the appropriate options to redefine the feature. For more information, see the Help for specific feature on which you are working. If the dialog box defining the feature opens, go to step 4. Double-click the element or select the element and click Define. Pro/ENGINEER prompts you for the information needed to redefine the element.
4. 5.
To Redefine Features with No Elements 1. 2. Select the feature and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Edit Definition. The REDEFINE menu appears with the following commands. (Not all commands are available for all features.) AttributesRetrieves and redefines the feature attributes. DirectionRedefines the direction in which the feature is created, relative to the sketching plane. SectionModifies or reconstructs the section. SchemeEnter Sketcher mode to redefine the dimensioning scheme. FlipChanges the side to which material is added or removed. ReferencesReselects the placement references of the feature (such as UpTo Surface), removing edges from a round definition, and so on. BoundariesResizes the selected surface. SchemeChanges the dimensioning scheme by redimensioning the section. CurvesRedefine curves created from file. CornerRedefines corner rounds of round feature PlacementReassembles component into the assembly by specifying new contraints. PatternRedefine the pattern type and the pattern increment types. Style CurvesRedefines a scan curve feature or scan curves of a blended surface. 3. Click the available and appropriate commands for the feature on which you are working. Follow the prompts to complete the process.
To Redefine a Merged Part You can redefine a merge or mold feature created using the Reference option. The redefinition allows you to replace the reference member with another instance from the same family. 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Redefine from the FEAT menu, or Edit > Redefine, and select a reference member feature in the merged part. Choose References and Done from the REDEFINE menu. The system displays the INSTANCES menu, which allows you to select an instance or show or edit the family table. Choose the appropriate option. As soon as you have selected an instance name, Pro/ENGINEER replaces the reference member with the new instance.
350/ 375
To Redefine Imported Datum Curves You can edit the definition of an imported curve with the Curves command in the REDEFINE menu. 1. 2. Select the imported datum curve in the model tree or the graphics window and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Edit Definition. The EDIT CURVES menu appears. Use the commands below to redefine the curve:
Edit FileEdit the current curve file. The system displays the file feat_#.ibl (where # is the internal identifier) in the system window. This file follows the IBL format, regardless of how it was imported. All the changes are reflected on the curve as you exit the editor. Note: When you open a file in the IBL format, it loses the tangency information.
o o o o o o o o
CreateAdds additional curves to the same feature by selecting points on the model (datum points, vertices, curves, and coordinate systems). Spline PntsDisplays the SPLINEPNTS menu. AdjustAdjusts the datum curves so they intersect. Trim/ExtendTrims or extends selected curves up to a curve or surface. SplitSplits a curve at the intersection with another. MergeMerges curves together. DeleteDeletes all the curves selected. MeasureMeasures a curve.
Note: When you redefine an imported curve with children, the Merge and Delete options are not available. Creating New Curves You can add new curve segments to the curve feature using the Create option in the EDIT CURVES menu. You create the curve by selecting points for it to pass through. These points can be datum points, edge and curve vertices, curves, and coordinate systems. Selecting a datum curve creates a point for the new curve on the selected datum curve. The points are used only to establish the offset from the reference coordinate system for the original feature. You can edit all the curves using the Edit option. To Decrease the Number of Spline Points Using Deviation 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Sparse from the SPLINEPNTS menu. Choose the spline on which you wish to reduce the number of points. Enter a deviation value that will cause the spline to be redrawn without one or more of its points. This value must be a positive number. The system displays the spline resulting from the change in green, and tells you how many points will be removed. If the changed spline is acceptable, choose Accept from the MOD ACTION menu. If not, choose Reject, and enter a different deviation value. For each spline, you may need to try several different deviation values before achieving the desired result, because the proportion of the spline by which points are interpolated varies from spline to spline. To Make a Spline Smoother 1. 2. 3. Choose Smooth from the SPLINEPNTS menu. Choose the spline that you want to make smoother. Enter an odd number of points that will be averaged together to smooth the spline. For example, you could enter 1 (which does not change the spline at all), 3, or 5.
351/ 375
Pro/ENGINEER averages the centermost point on the spline, and the appropriate equal number of points on each side of it (one point on each side if you entered 3, or two points on each side if you entered 5). 4. The system displays the spline resulting from the change in green. If the resulting spline is acceptable, choose Accept. Otherwise, choose Reject and try again with a different number of points.
To Add Points to a Spline 1. 2. 3. Choose Show (if you want to see each point as you add it). Choose Add. Select the curve at the locations where you want the points added.
To Move Curve Points 1. 2. 3. Choose Move from the SPLINEPNTS menu. Select a curve. Select a reference plane. Choose an option from the REF PLANE TYPE menu:
o o o
View PlaneThe reference plane is parallel to the screen. SelectSelect any planar surface or datum plane. OscPlnAtPntThe reference plane will be through the point being moved. Pro/ENGINEER constructs the reference plane from the spline tangent and curvature vectors at the selected point.
Note: You can move the splines only in the reference plane. 4. Select the point to move and an adjustment range. The adjustment range is between any two points (the point being moved must be within this range) and establishes the area where the spline curve will change. If you click the middle button or select the two endpoints, the entire curve can change shape. You must accept or reject changes to the spline after you move each point. Use the Done move option in the MOVE SPL PNT menu to accept the changes, or the Quit move option to cancel the process. The Show option displays the points of a spline. Choose Show and pick a curve. The system displays the spline points like small white axes. The points remain displayed until you choose Blank from the SPLINEPNTS menu. To Adjust a Curve To adjust imported datum curves so they intersect, redefine the datum curve using the Adjust option in the EDIT CURVES menu. All curves to be adjusted must belong to the same curve feature. 1. Choose Adjust from the EDIT CURVES menu. Select one of the options from the ADJUST TYPE menu:
o o
2. 3. 4. 5.
FixedThe curves selected remain fixed. If you select this option for the first set of curves, the second set will be adjustable automatically. AdjustableThe curves selected will be adjusted.
Select curves in the first direction. These are curves that cross the second set of curves. Choose Done If you chose Adjustable for the first set of curves, you need to select again from the ADJUST TYPE menu for the second set of curves. Select curves in the other direction. For the curves to be adjusted, you need to set the extent of the curve that will change. To set the extent, select spline points that are highlighted in green. When the curve is adjusted, answer the Pro/ENGINEER prompt to keep the changes.
When you select curves to adjust, selecting the curve itself adjusts the curve, while selecting the endpoint for the curve trims the curve to the intersection.
352/ 375
Example: Adjusting the Curve Adjusting the Curve
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select these two spline points as the extents of the adjustment. Select this curve for the second direction. Select this curve as Fixed for the first direction. The curve adjusts to intersect the other curve.
Adjusting Curve Endpoints
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select this curve at the endpoint for the second direction. Select these two spline points as the extents of the adjustment. Select this curve as Fixed for the first direction. The curve adjusts to intersect the other curve.
To Split a Curve 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Split from the EDIT CURVES menu. Select the curve segments to split. Choose Done when you have finished. Select a surface or another datum curve that intersects the first curve. Pro/ENGINEER splits the selected segments of the first curve at the points of intersection. If the reference curve or surface intersects a segment between its points, the system adds a new point. The system highlights new curves in green, and you can accept or reject the changes.
To Trim or Extend a Curve You can trim or extend a curve by selecting the curves to trim or extend, then selecting the reference curve or surface to which to trim or extend. 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Trim/Extend. Select the curves to trim or extend. Choose Done Select the reference curve or surface. The system lengthens or shortens the curves, as needed, to the reference. If the curve is satisfactory, choose Accept.
To Merge Curves Merging curves connects imported curves at their endpoints and merges them into one curve. 1. Choose Merge.
353/ 375
2.
Choose an option from the PICK CURVES menu, and select the curves. The PICK CURVES options are as follows:
o o
Two CurvesMerge any two imported curves. ChainMerge connected curves that form a chain with no gaps.
Example: Merging Curves The next figure illustrates how to merge curves.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Merge these three datum curves using the Chain option. Merge these 3 datum curves using the Chain option. Merge the resulting curves using the Two Curves option. The resulting datum curve.
To Insert Features Normally, Pro/ENGINEER adds a new feature after the last existing feature in the part, including suppressed features. Insert mode allows you to add new features at any point in the feature sequence, other than before the base feature or after the last feature. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the feature and click Edit > Feature Operations. The FEAT menu appears. Click Insert Mode > Activate. Select a feature after which the new features will be inserted. All features after the selected one will be automatically suppressed. Click Create and create the new features as usual Cancel insert mode in one of the following ways:
o o
Click Edit>Resume to resume the features that were suppressed when you activated insert mode. Click Cancel from the INSERT MODE menu. Pro/ENGINEER asks you whether to resume the features that were suppressed when you activated insert mode, then automatically regenerates the part.
Note: The system grays out the Cancel and Activate commands in the INSERT MODE menu in turn, depending on whether the insert mode is currently active. At any time, you can click the Return command from the INSERT MODE menu to return to the previously active menu. If the feature after which the new features will be inserted is a merged-by-copy feature, the system redisplays the part to show only merged features. The INSERT FEAT menu appears with the options Create Copy and Mirror Geom. After you click Done from the INSERT FEAT menu, the system redisplays the whole part and exits Insert mode. To Reorder Features 1. 2. Select the feature and click Edit > Feature Operations. The FEAT menu appears. Click Reorder.
354/ 375
3.
Click a selection method from the SELECT FEAT menu:
o o o
SelectSelects features to reorder by picking on the screen and/or from the tree tool. You can also click Sel By Menu to enter the feature number. When finished selecting, click Done Sel. LayerSelects all features from a layer by selecting the layer. When you finish, click Done Sel from the LAYER SEL menu. RangeSpecifies the range of features by entering the regeneration number of the starting and ending feature.
A system message lists the selected features for reorder and states the valid ranges for the new insertion point. 4. 5. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. Click one of the commands in the REORDER menu:
o o
6.
BeforeInsert the feature before the insertion point feature. AfterInsert the feature after the insertion point feature.
Select a feature to indicate the insertion point.
Reordering Features You can move features forward or backward in the regeneration order list, thus changing the order in which they are regenerated. You can reorder multiple features in one operation, as long as these features appear in consecutive order. Feature reorder cannot occur under the following conditions:
Parents cannot be moved so their regeneration occurs after the regeneration of their children. Children cannot be moved so their regeneration occurs before the regeneration of their parents. About Suppressing and Resuming Features Suppressing features is like removing them from regeneration temporarily. However, you can unsuppress (resume) suppressed features at any time. You can suppress features on a part to simplify the part model and decrease regeneration time. For example, while you work on one end of a shaft, it may be desirable to suppress features on the other end of the shaft. Similarly, while working on a complex assembly, you can suppress some of the features and components for which the detail is not essential to the current assembly process. You may want to suppress features to:
Concentrate on the current working area by suppressing other areas. Speed up a modification process because there is less to update. Speed up the display process because there is less to display. Temporarily remove features to try different design iterations. Note: Unlike other features, the base feature cannot be suppressed. If you are not satisfied with your base (first) feature, you can redefine the section of the feature, or delete it and start again. About Deleting Features Deleting a feature removes the feature from the part permanently. When you select a feature for deletion that has children, you must account for the children. You can delete them, too, but Pro/ENGINEER provides a way to save the children by rerouting. Note: Normally, Pro/ENGINEER regenerates all the features from the first modified feature or the first feature with an external reference, onward, when you select Regenerate. In calculating where to begin regeneration during Delete operations, Pro/ENGINEER does not consider features with an external reference.
355/ 375
To Suppress or Delete Features 1. 2. Select a feature in the Model Tree or in the graphics window and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Suppress or Delete. The selected feature and its children are highlighted in the Model Tree and a Suppress or Delete message window appears. Note: You can also use Edit > Suppress or Edit > Delete after selecting the feature. 4. 5. Click OK to suppress or delete the feature and all the children of the feature or click Options and the Children Handling dialog box opens. In the Children Handling dialog box, select one of the objects and right-click. Depending on the object selected, and whether you are suppressing or deleting, some of the following commands are available. The same commands are available from the Status, Edit, and Info menus in the Children Handling dialog box. Note:
o o
You can select more than one object in the Children Handling dialog box, however, only Suppress and Suspend, or Delete and Suspend, are available with a multiple selection. If the feature has external children, Local and External appear under Children. When you select an object in the dialog box, either Local or External is selected.
DeleteDeletes the selected feature. SuppressSuppresses the selected child. SuspendSuspends action on the selected child. The feature is retained until the part is regenerated. You must then decide how to handle the feature. Freeze(Assembly Mode only) Keeps the selected feature in its current location and is available for components only. Replace ReferencesReroutes the selected feature. The REROUTE REFS menu and the message Do you want to roll back the part? appear. If you type yes, the part returns to the state it was in prior to the feature creation. and all features created after the rerouted feature are removed. Roll back the part if many of the features are younger than (created after) the rerouted feature. This prevents the possibility of using a younger feature as a reference and invalidating the reroute process. If you type no, the REROUTE and REROUTE SELECT menus appear. RedefineRedefines the selected feature. If you are redefining an object, the appropriate feature dashboard or feature dialog box appear. Show ReferencesShows the references on which the child feature is dependent. The SHOW REF menu appears from which you can show the reference identifier and highlight the reference geometry for each reference of the highlighted child by stepping through the references using Next and Previous. . InfoProvides Feature, Model, Parent/Child, and Global Reference viewer information on the selected feature. Note: If you create a feature in a part and dimension it to another part in the assembly, the other part becomes the external parent. If you then suppress that external parent, the system highlights all the dependent children in blue, and displays the EXTCHILD menu. This menu allows you to abort the suppression of the feature, or suspend all the external children. 6. 7. For each object, select the action you want to take or accept the default status. Click OK.
356/ 375
Side Affects of Features When you delete a feature whose dimensions are used in a relation, the relation becomes invalid. To fix the relation, use commands in the OBSOL RELS menu:
o o o
Commnt RelsConvert the obsolete relations to comments. Delete RelsDelete the obsolete relations. Edit RelsEdit the relations. With Edit Rels you can add comments to, delete, and edit the relations. You cannot exit from the editor until you have edited obsolete relations.
Note: If the relations file contains conditional logic statements that depend on the deleted feature, the system forces you to edit the relations file to fix the statements. If you delete a feature that has a note attached to it, the note remains in the drawing but the extension line to the feature disappears. If the note included dimensions of the feature, they appear with the default display of ***. If you delete a feature that has dimensions included in a family table, the affected columns of the table become obsolete. If you delete a feature that was referenced when assembling parts, the parts will not reassemble. Pro/ENGINEER provides you with several options for recovering the assembly. To Suppress Features Using the Menu Manager 1. Click Edit > Feature Operations to open the FEAT menu and then click Suppress. The DELETE/SUPP, SELECT FEAT, and SELECT menus appear. Note: For some applications you may have to click PART > Feature > Suppress. 2. Click one of the following commands from the DELETE/SUPP menu:
o o o
NormalSuppress the selected feature and all its children. ClipSuppress the selected feature and all the features that follow. UnrelatedSuppress any feature other than the selected ones and their parents.
4. Select a feature to suppress by selecting it in the graphics area, selecting from the Model Tree, specifying a range, entering its feature number or identifier, or using layers. If any children are present and are not currently selected, Pro/ENGINEER highlights them in blue and displays the CHILD menu. 5. Select one of the following commands:
Show RefShow the reference identifier and highlight the reference geometry for each reference of the highlighted child. step through the references using Next and Previous. You can also obtain information about the reference, showing the reference identifier and the total number of references, and what type of reference it is (feature or entity). RerouteReroute the references of the highlighted child feature to break the parent-child relationship. RedefineModify the dimensioning scheme of the child. SuppressSuppress the highlighted child. Suppress AllSuppress the highlighted child and all its children (not just children of the children this includes other children of the feature being suppressed). SuspendSuspend action on the highlighted child. Pro/ENGINEER retains the feature until its regeneration. Then you must decide how to handle it (by deleting, rerouting, and so on). Suspend AllSuspend action on all children of the feature being suppressed until they are actually being regenerated.
o o o o o o
357/ 375
o o
FreezeKeep the highlighted feature in its current location. This option is available for components only. InfoProvides information about the highlighted child feature.
Note: If you are in an assembly, create a feature in a part, and dimension it to another part in the assembly, the other part becomes the external parent. If you then suppress that external parent, Pro/ENGINEER highlights all the dependent children in blue, and displays the EXTCHILD menu. This menu allows you to stop the feature suppression , or suspend all the external children. 6. Click Done when you finish selecting features.
To Resume Features 1. 2. Click Edit > Resume. Click on one of the following commands.
o o o
LastResumes the last feature you suppressed AllResumes all the features you have suppressed. SelectResumes the selected feature.
About the Reroute Command Rerouting breaks the parent-child relationship by letting you change feature references. The Reroute command is available when you:
Click Edit > References. Select a feature in the model tree, right-click, and select Edit References. Select a feature in the graphics window, right-click, and select Edit References. Select an object in the Children Handling dialog box, right-click and select Replace References. You can only reroute external references in the environment (the level in an assembly) in which they were created. Pro/ENGINEER checks the rerouting of features to determine if the new reference and the old reference are compatible. If the references are not compatible, Pro/ENGINEER issues a warning message and continues processing. The following features cannot be rerouted:
Rounds that have user-defined transitions Grouped patterned features Read-only features To Reroute Features This command is available when the feature you select has children. You can reroute the children of the feature you have selected. 1. 2. Select a feature in the Model Tree or in the graphics window and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Suppress or Delete. The select feature and its children are highlighted in the Model Tree and a Suppress or Delete message window appears. Note: You can also use Edit>Suppress or Edit>Delete after selecting the feature. 3. 4. Click Options and the Children Handling dialog box opens. Select an object and right-click. A shortcut menu appears.
358/ 375
5.
Click Replace References. The REROUTE REFS menu and the message Do you want to roll back the part? appear.
6. Type yes, to return the part to state it was in before the feature was created or type no and the REROUTE and REROUTE SELECT menus appear. 7. Click one of the following commands from the REROUTE REFS menu:
o o o o
Reroute FeatReroute a feature by selecting new references. Replace RefSelect a referenced entity and replace it with another entity, as prompted. Click one of the following commands from the SELECT TYPE submenu. FeatureSelects a feature, then replaces all the referenced (parent) entities. Indiv EntityElects an individual reference entity, such as an edge, vertex, or plane. After you successfully replace the references for the selected object, the Children Handling dialog box opens.
8.
If you are not to rolling back the part, click one of the following commands from the REROUTE menu. AlternateSelects or creates an alternate reference for the feature. Use the Make Datum option, if necessary, to construct new references. Make sure the datum planes themselves do not reference the parent feature. Same RefThe current reference remains the same. Ref InfoShows information about the highlighted reference. This option gives the reference identifier and the type of reference. This is important because you can only reroute to like reference types. DoneFinishes the rerouting process. Quit RerouteQuits the reroute for the current feature. Even when you quit the reroute process, any datums created during feature reroute remain in the model.
9.
Follow the above steps for each object you want to reroute, or for which you want to replace the references.
10. After you complete all the necessary actions on the objects in the Children Handling dialog box, click OK. 11. Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the feature. If the automatic regeneration is successful, the new parent-child relationships are established; if not, the original references are restored. Note: To permanently retain the references defined with the automatic regeneration, you must explicitly click Edit > Regenerate before you save the part. About Simplified Representations The design of a part can become quite complex. Pro/ENGINEER provides simplified representation functionality that allows you to do the following:

Note:
Simplify the display of a design by showing less detail by including or excluding features. Limit the display of a design to a selected portion of the total part geometry by specifying a "work region." Exclude (or include) selected surfaces from the display of the design.
When you modify a feature, you must regenerate all the features after that feature, even those that have been removed by a work region cut. To avoid regenerating features that are not visible in the specified work region, use both the Features and the Work Region commands when you create the simplified representation.
359/ 375
When you create features in a simplified representation with a work region, you cannot select edges and surfaces created by the work region cut. You cannot use both Work Region and Surfaces in the same simplified representation. To Create a Simplified Representation (basic) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click View > Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. Click New and type the name for the simplified representation Press RETURN. Click the representation and right-click. A shortcut menu appears. Click Redefine. The EDIT METHOD and .REP ATTR menus appear. Click commands from the submenus and then click Done.
o o
To set the rule for selecting features use Include Feat, and Exclude Feat. To specify how to retrieve the simplified representation use: RegenerateRecreate the simplified representation by regenerating the master model. The master model must be in session. The GeomSnapshot is not valid for Regenerate. AccelerateUse the accelerator file to speed up the retrieval of the simplified representation.
To define the type of data for the simplified representation:Whole Model and GeomSnpshot.
To Include or Exclude Features Before you start defining a simplified representation, you can change the default rule for specifying features. 1. 2. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. In the Simp Rep tab Names column double-click to select the representation. Note: You can also click the representation in the Names column and click Display>Set to select it. 3. 4. Right-click and select Redefine. The EDIT METHOD menu appears. Click Features. The FEAT INC/EXC menu appears with the following commands:
o o o o
Exclude and IncludePick a feature to exclude from or include in the representation. (The opposite of the default rule appears.) UndoRemove an instruction for excluding or including a feature. UpdateScreenUpdate graphical view of the model according to the specified changes. Display ModeModify the number of features displayed in the Model Tree window. Use the following commands in the DISP MODE menu to change the structure of the tree: Show AllShow all features. DefaultFeatsShow only those features whose status conforms to the default rule. Marked FeatsShow only those feature whose status is opposite to the default rule.
5. 6.
To exclude features, click Exclude and select the features from the Model Tree. Click Done from the FEAT INC/EXC menu to complete the selection.
To Edit a Simplified Representation Using the Model Tree You can use the Model Tree shortcuts to edit existing simplified representations of the model by including/excluding features. 1. 2. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. In the Simp Rep tab Names column, click the representation to select it.
360/ 375
3.
Click Display > Add Column. A column is added to the Model Tree. The name of the representation is displayed at the top of the column. A definition of the representation is displayed in the first line of the column. Click in the column you just added and a text box opens for each item in the model tree. For each item in the model tree, select the one of the following from the text box.
4. 5.
o o o
DefaultUndoes the include/exclude action. IncludeIncludes this feature in the model for this simplified representation (available for the exclude default rule). ExcludeExcludes this feature from the model for this simplified representation (available for the include default rule).
The status of the feature changes. To Create a Work Region Create a simplified representation by creating a work region that removes a portion of the model from display. Each simplified representation can have its own work region. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. In the Simp Rep tab Names column click a representation to select it. Right-click and select Redefine. The EDIT METHOD menu appears. Click Work Region. The SOLID OPTS menu appears. Specify the type of cut you want to create by Click one of the commands in the SOLID OPTS menu. The dialog box for defining the cut of the specified type appears. Define the cut feature. When you finish defining the cut, click OK from the dialog box.
Notes:
Work regions behave in a manner similar to cut features, except that geometry is removed from the display only rather than physically removed from the model (that is, from the regeneration list). When a simplified representation is active, the system applies the work region cut; otherwise, the cut is suppressed. Once you create a work region, you can redefine it by using the Redefine command in the WORK REGION menu; this brings up the dialog box so you can select the feature elements that you want to redefine. To delete a work region, click Delete from the WORK REGION menu. To Create a Simplified Representation from Part Surfaces You can create a simplified representation by copying part surfaces to create a surface envelope. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. In the Simp Rep tab Names column and click a representation to select it. Right-click and select Redefine. The EDIT METHOD menu appears. Click Surfaces from the EDIT METHOD menu. The dialog box or the dialog bar appear, listing elements for defining surfaces. Select the surfaces . When you finish selecting surfaces, click OK or .
361/ 375
To Update an Accelerated Simplified Representation 1. 2. 3. 4. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. In the Simp Rep tab Names column, click the representation to select it. Right-click and select Update Reps. The UPDATE REP menu appears. Click one of the following commands.
UpdateUpdates and save outdated accelerated simplified representations to disk. Pro/ENGINEER updates all the outdated representations that are in the accelerator file, even if they are not in session. InfoDisplays the Information Window, listing all outdated representations, including the name of the master representation, the name of the simplified representation, and whether it is in memory. CancelCancels the update.
o o
5.
If you click Update, the CONFIRMATION menu. appears. Click Confirm to update the simplified representations, or Cancel.
Note: You can also update any out-of-date representations that are in session when you save the part. To Create a Geometric Snapshot A geometric snapshot representation does not include any parametric information, such as dimensions or parametersjust visible geometry that can be used for referencing. Pro/ENGINEER can detect when a snapshot is out-of-date, but you must explicitly initiate the update. This command is available only if you selected Accelerate. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. Click the Simp Rep tab In the Names column, click the representation to select it. Right-click and select Redefine. The EDIT METHOD menu appears. Click Attributes > Accelerate>GeomSnpshot. Click Done. A geometry snapshot representation is created.
The following restrictions apply to geometric snapshots in Part mode:
You cannot make any modifications to geometric snapshots, such as changing dimensions or parameters. Because no dimension or parameter information is available, you can not make any references to them in relations. To Create an Accelerated Simplified Representation You can create accelerated simplified representations by setting special attributes. An accelerated simplified representation is saved to a file to make retrieval quicker. Instead of regenerating the master representation to get a simplified representation, you can retrieve the (accelerated) simplified representation by itself. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click View > View Manager. The View Manager dialog box opens. Click the Simp Rep tab In the Names column, click the representation to select it. Right-click and select Redefine. The EDIT METHOD menu appears. Click Attributes > Accelerate > Whole Model. An accelerated representation is created.
Note the following when creating accelerator files:
362/ 375
Whole Model includes the entire model (with geometry, dimensions, parameters, and so on) in the simplified representation. The resulting representation is fully associative and modifiable. This option requires the presence of the master model in memory. An accelerator file is named part_name.xrp. There can be only one accelerator file per part. Accelerator files do not have version numbers. If you use the Save As or Backup option on the master model, the corresponding accelerator files are not created. If you rename or delete the master model, Pro/ENGINEER automatically renames or deletes the corresponding accelerator file. To Erase a Simplified Representation You can erase a simplified representation of the current object from memory with or without the current object. Use one of the following procedures to erase a simplified representation. To Erase using the View Manager 1. 2. 3. Click View > Manager. In the Simp Rep tab Names column select the representation. Right-click and click Remove. A Confirm Delete message appears. Note: You can also click Edit > Remove. 4. Click Confirm.
To Erase Using the Menu Manager 1. 2. Click File > Erase > Current. The OBJ ERASE menu appears. Click one of the following commands:
o o
3.
Current ObjErase the current object and its simplified representation. Simplfd RepsErase the simplified representation by placing the check mark in front of its name in the SELECT REP menu.
Click Done Sel.
About Changing Part Accuracy The Accuracy command modifies the computational accuracy of geometry calculations. Part accuracy is relative to the size of the part. The valid range is 0.01 to 0.0001, and the default value is 0.0012. Note that if you decrease the value of part accuracy, the regeneration time also increases. You should use the default part accuracy unless you need to increase it. In general, you should set the accuracy to a value less than the ratio of the length of the smallest edge on the part to the length of the largest side of a box that would contain the part. Even so, use the default accuracy until you have a reason not to do so. In the following situations, you may need to change the part accuracy:
Placing a very small feature on a large part. Intersecting (through merge or cutout) two parts of very different size. For the two parts to be compatible, they must have the same absolute accuracy. To use the same absolute accuracy, estimate each part size and multiply each by its respective current accuracy. If the results differ, enter a value for the accuracy of the parts that yields the same results for each.
363/ 375
You may need to increase the part accuracy of the larger part by entering a smaller decimal number. For example, if the size of the smaller part is 100 and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 1. If the size of the larger part is 1000 and the accuracy is .01, the product of these numbers is 10. Change the accuracy of the larger part to .001 to yield the same product. Working with Absolute and Relative Accuracy Absolute accuracy is the smallest size (measured in the current units) that Pro/ENGINEER can recognize. To enable the absolute accuracy functionality, set the configuration option enable_absolute_accuracy to yes. The absolute accuracy functionality improves the matching of parts of different sizes or different accuracies (for example, imported parts created on another system). In general, you should use relative accuracy for most part models. You should consider using absolute accuracy only when you are doing one of the following:
Copying geometry from one model to another during core operations, such as Merge and Cutout. Designing parts for manufacturing and mold design. Matching accuracy of imported geometry to its destination part. You can match the accuracies of a set of parts mainly in two ways:
Give them all the same absolute accuracies. Designate one of them (perhaps the smallest) as the "base" part and assign its accuracy to the other parts. To Specify Relative Accuracy The first time you bring up the ACCURACY menu for a part, the Relative option is active and highlighted (because the part is initially created with Relative accuracy). Thereafter, the accuracy type you used last will be active when you access the menu. Set configuration file option accuracy_lower_bound to override the lower boundary of the relative accuracy range. The specified values for the lower boundary must be between 1.0000e-6 and 1.0000e-4. 1. 2. 3. Click Edit > Setup. The PART SETUP menu appears. Click Accuracy. The prompt Enter relative part accuracy is displayed. Type the new relative accuracy and click to accept or keep the existing value. If you do not change the accuracy, the PART SETUP menu appears again. If you change the accuracy, a prompt appears asking you to confirm the regeneration of the entire part. Click Yes or No. The PART SETUP menu is displayed.
4.
Note: The default value 0.0012 given in the brackets is the hard-coded default value for relative accuracy. To Specify Absolute Accuracy The first time you bring up the ACCURACY menu for a part, the Relative option is active and highlighted (because the part is initially created with Relative accuracy). Thereafter, the accuracy type you used last will be active when you access the menu. You must set the configuration option enable_absolute_accuracy to yes, to see the ACCURACY and ABS ACCURACY menus. To set a default absolute accuracy, set the configuration option default_abs_accuracy. 1. 2. 3. Click Edit> Setup. The PART SETUP menu appears. Click Accuracy. The ACCURACY and ABS ACCURACY menus appear. If you select Absolute from the ACCURACY menu, the ABS ACCURACY menu appears with the following commands:
364/ 375
Enter ValueEnters an absolute value.If the previous accuracy type was Relative, nnnn is the default value for absolute accuracy specified by the configuration file option default_abs_accuracy. (If no value for default_abs_acuracy is specified, then the prompt shows only units inside the brackets.) If the previous accuracy type was absolute, nnnn is the current absolute value. Note that units is the parts units (for example, inches).
o
4.
Select ModelAssigns absolute accuracy value from a different part in session.
If you click Enter Value
o o
5.
Type the absolute part accuracy value and click part.
to accept. You are prompted to regenerate the
Click Yes to regenerate or No to return to the Accuracy menu.
If you click Select Model, the Open dialog box opens with a list of parts currently in session.
Double-click to select one of the parts. A message appears stating the absolute accuracy of the part you selected. Click part to accept the value. If you enter and accept the value, you are prompted to regenerate the
About the Copy Command The Copy command in the FEAT menu allows you to copy existing features of the same or a different model and place them at a new location on the active part. You can copy any number of features at one time. The Copy command creates a local group of the copied features. When you copy a feature, you can vary the following:
References Dimension values Placement location When you redefine a section of a feature that has a child created using Copy > Dependent, you cannot delete entities referenced to external geometry and you cannot align entities to external geometry. Terms and Definitions The following table presents definitions of and uses for the feature copying functionality. COPYING FEATURES Definition Uses Copy features from any model by selecting new references, translating, rotating, or mirroring. Save time by reusing features from any model. Establish dependency between dimensions different features in the same model. of
USER-DEFINED FEATURE (UDF)
Definition
A set of features from any part that can be placed in any other part by specifying new references. Establish a library of commonly placed features. Reuse features from any part. Enforce consistent design techniques by creating dependencies for a UDFs parent model.
Uses
365/ 375
Important aspects of UDFs
User-specified prompts for defining references guide you in placing the UDF. Let you specify new values for dimensions when placing the UDF with "variable dimensions." Provide a simple way to create variations of features in the UDF with Family Tables. Let you incorporate Pro/PROGRAM into the UDF for further customization. A named set of consecutive features that is the result of copying features, placing a UDF, or creating a local group. Simplify selection for operations involving multiple features such as: Pattern, Delete, Copy, Suppress, and Reorder. Help organize the model tree by collapsing related features into a single node.
GROUP
Definition
Uses
Rules for Copying Features Consider the following rules for the copy operation:
If you copied geometry with Copy, Mirror, All Feat, any features inserted after you created the copy feature will not be copied. To avoid this, use Mirror Geom. You may not mirror or use the Same Refs option without also copying the features that own the references if those references have been consumed in the process of feature creation (for example, the edge reference of a round is consumed after the round is created). When you copy a round with user-modified transitions, only default transitions are copied with the round. If there is ambiguity between the new and old references, the system will issue additional prompts (for example, if one of references is a datum plane, the system will ask you to select the side of the plane to use). For specifics of copying features in Assembly mode, see the following section. Using the Copy Command in Assembly Mode To copy features in Assembly mode, choose Copy from the ASSY FEAT menu; this displays the COPY FEAT menu. Consider the following restrictions in Assembly mode:
In Assembly mode, the All Feat option is dimmed in the COPY FEATURE menu. You cannot mirror assembly components using Feature, Copy. Instead, use Component > Create > Mirror. A feature that contains external references to a different assembly component must either be copied in the assembly that contains the external reference, or be redefined in that assembly to eliminate the external reference. To Copy Features 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Edit > Feature Operations. The FEAT.menu appears. Click Copy, choose the appropriate options from the COPY FEATURE menu, and click Done. Select features to be copied. The Group Elements dialog box appears, listing elements for the specified copy method. Define all elements in the dialog box.
366/ 375
Using the COPY FEATURE Menu You can copy features into the current part, with or without external references, from parts or assemblies. You can copy features from a different model by using new references. You can also copy features from another version of the same model by using the same or new references. When you copy a feature with new references, Pro/ENGINEER makes all the necessary prompts, highlighting each placement reference so you can enter the corresponding reference. The COPY FEATURE menu lists different options for copying features. Specifying the Placement Method Specify the placement method by choosing one of the following commands:
New RefsCopy features with an option to select new references for the copied features. Same RefsCopy features using the same references as the original features. You can vary dimensions in the copied features. MirrorCopy features by mirroring about a planar surface or a datum. Pro/ENGINEER mirrors the features automatically without displaying a dialog box. MoveCopy features by specifying translation and rotation. This option allows for additional transformation beyond what you can achieve by varying dimensions. Specifying Features to Copy Specify features to copy by choosing one of the following commands:
SelectSelect features from the active model to copy. All FeatSelect all the features to copy. FromDifModelSelect features from a different model to copy. This option is available with New Refs only. See the Independent option. FromDifVersSelect features from a different revision of the current model to copy. This option is available with either New Refs or Same Refs. See the Independent option. Specifying Dependent or Independent Specify whether the resulting features should be independent by choosing one of the following options:
IndependentMake the dimensions of the copied feature independent of the dimensions of the parent. A feature that is copied from a different model or version is automatically independent. DependentMake the dimensions of the copied feature dependent on the dimensions of the parent. When you redefine the section of the dependent copy, all the dimensions show up on the parent. When you modify the original section, the system also updates the dependent copy. This option refers to sections and dimensions only. All other references and attributes are not dependent. To Copy Features within the Same Model Use the New Refs and Same Refs options to create a copy by using the placement references (modified or the same) of the features selected for copy. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Edit > Feature Operations. The FEAT.menu appears. Click Copy. The COPY FEATURE menu appears. Click New Refs or Same Refs, Select, Independent or Dependent, and Done. Select the features that you want to copy and click Done. The Group Elements dialog box opens. The dimensions for the selected features are displayed and the GP VAR DIMS menu appears, listing the dimensions. As you scroll down the list, the corresponding dimensions on the model are highlighted. Select dimensions to vary by picking the feature dimensions from the screen or by clicking the appropriate checkbox in the GP VAR DIMS menu. Click Done.
367/ 375
6. 7.
At the prompts, type the new values. If you click Same Refs, the selected features are copied. If you click New Refs, the WHICH REF menu appears and highlights each planar or linear reference for every selected feature, sequentially, in the reference color. Click one of the following commands:
o o o o
AlternatePick a new reference for the copied feature. SameIndicate that the original reference should be used for the copied feature. SkipSkip the current reference so you can redefine it later. Ref InfoProvide information explaining the placement reference.
When you have specified all the references, Pro/ENGINEER copies all the selected features. 8. Redefine the dimensions or references, if desired, or click Done from the GRP PLACE menu. Copying Features Using New References If you copy a feature and choose new references (sketching plane and reference plane) for the resulting feature, two different arrows appear to indicate the direction of the new planar references. The system highlights the original reference plane and its corresponding new reference plane in the reference color. The original reference has a reference color arrow attached to it, pointing in the viewing direction for that plane. The new reference has a red arrow attached to it. Flip the direction of the red arrow if necessary, then choose Okay from the DIRECTION menu to indicate which side of the new reference corresponds to the original reference with the reference color arrow. To Copy Features with SameRefs, FromDifVers You can copy features from a different model (part or assembly) or from another version of the same model. When you copy a feature from one model to another, the feature will regenerate with the accuracy of the model into which it is copied. It is best, if possible, to have similar part accuracy in both models. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Retrieve the part or assembly from which you want copy features. Activate your destination model Click Edit>Feature Operations. The FEAT.menu appears. Click Copy. The COPY FEATURE menu appears. Click Same Refs, FromDifVers, and Done from the COPY FEATURE menu. Select a model from which to copy the features. To indicate the source model, the system prompts you to click in the model window; this activates this model so you can select the features to copy. Select the features to be copied and click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. After you select the features, the destination model becomes active again and the dialog box opens. The system prints the units in the Message Window. Specify the placement scale. Click Done from the SCALE menu. Choose OK from the dialog box. The selected features are copied into the current model, keeping the same references.
Note: If a reference is missing in the destination model, you are prompted to respecify all feature references. To define a missing reference, click Alternate and pick a reference on the model. To Copy Features with New Refs, FromDifModel or FromDivVers 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Edit>Feature Operations. The FEAT menu appears. Click Copy. The COPY FEATURE menu appears. Click New Refs, FromDifModel or FromDifVers, and Done. Select a model from which to copy the features.
368/ 375
5. 6. 7. 8.
Select the features to be copied. Click Done from the SELECT FEAT menu. The dialog box opens and the units are displayed in the message window. Click Done from the SCALE menu. The WHICH REF menu appears and you are prompted to select a reference that corresponds to the highlighted reference in the source model. Click one of the following commands:
o o o
Same to keep the same reference Alternate to choose a new reference Skip to skip the current reference so you can redefine it later.
Note: When you use the New Refs option to copy a feature and a feature reference is missing in the other version, use Alternate to select a new reference. 9. If any of the references are missing, the INFORMATION Window opens with a list of the skipped references. Do one of the following:
o o
To redefine the missing references, click Confirm from the CONFIRMATION menu. Redefine the feature element that uses the skipped reference. If you do not want to redefine the missing references, click Cancel from the CONFIRMATION menu. The GP REFS menu appears. Click the appropriate checkboxes to specify or the references you want and click Done. The WHICH REF menu appears. Use the Alternate, Same, and Skip commands to resume the process of specifying the references which you identified with the checkmarks.
10. To complete the procedure, click Done from the GRP PLACE menu, or click any of the following commands in the GRP PLACE menu:
o o o
RedefineRedefine the group elements. Show ResultPreview the geometry. InfoShow the current status of the group prompts.
To Copy Features by Mirror The Mirror option in the COPY FEATURE menu adds geometry to the part by creating a mirrored copy of existing features and intersecting them with the part. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click Edit>Feature Operations. The FEAT menu appears. The COPY FEATURE menu appears. Click Mirror. Select the features to copy, or click All Feat. Click Independent or Dependent to establish whether the dimensions of the mirrored feature depend on those of the parent, then click Done. If you use Select, select the features you want, and click Done from the SELECT FEAT. Select or create the mirror plane.
Copying Features by Mirror Consider the following information about the features copied with the Mirror command:
Sections always regenerate at the pre-mirror location, using the original references. If features are mirrored about a datum created with Make Datum, the datum plane becomes an independent feature in the model, providing a visual reference for the mirrored copy.
369/ 375
Mirroring with All Feat creates an additional merge feature that is interdependent with the copied features. The merge feature is both a parent and a child of the copied features. Mirroring with All Feat mirrors suppressed features. Mirroring coordinate systems always preserves the right-hand rule. Pro/ENGINEER mirrors the X- and Y-axes of the coordinate system appropriately and then determines the Z-axis. To Copy Features by Moving You can copy features to new locations on the part by translating them with respect to a coordinate system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click Edit>Feature Operations. The FEAT menu appears. The COPY FEATURE menu appears. Click Move. Click Select to select individual features to copy, or All Feat to copy all features. Click Independent or Dependent to establish whether the dimensions of the translated feature depend on those of the parent and click Done. The SELECT FEAT menu appears. Select the features and click Done. The MOVE FEAT menu appears. Define the movement of the copied features with the following commands.. Note: You can use the commands Translate and Rotate together to define a single movement.
o o
TranslateMove (translate) the copied features using the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the direction. Then, enter the translation (offset) distance. RotateRotate the copied features using the GEN SEL DIR menu to specify the direction. Then, enter the rotation angle. The GEN SEL DIR commands are as follows: PlaneSelect a plane, or create a new datum plane to which the direction will be normal. Crv/Edg/AxisSelect as the direction an edge, curve, or axis. If you select a non-linear edge or curve, the system prompts you to select an existing datum point on the edge or curve to specify a tangent. CsysSelect an axis of a coordinate system as the direction, then enter the translation value for the coordinate system type.
For features created by translating copies of two other features (for which the dimensions of one of the original features is only referenced to the other feature being copied), Pro/ENGINEER translates the copied dimension references, along with the geometry. The copy and translation process automatically creates a group for the geometry and its dimensions. You can use the Ungroup option in the GROUP menu to allow independent selection of the individual dimensions and redefinition of the features. Copying Features by Translating For features created by translating copies of two other features (for which the dimensions of one of the original features is only referenced to the other feature being copied), Pro/ENGINEER translates the copied dimension references, along with the geometry. The copy and translation process automatically creates a group for the geometry and its dimensions. You can use the Ungroup option in the GROUP menu to allow independent selection of the individual dimensions and redefinition of the features. To Redefine the Copied Element You can redefine a copied feature while you are in the copy environment only. 1. Highlight the element in the Group Elements dialog box that you want to modify and click Define.
370/ 375
2.
If you selected the variable dimensions, the system displays the GP VAR DIMS toggle menu. If you selected the references, Pro/ENGINEER displays the GP REFS toggle menu. In either case, toggle on the items you want to change, then choose Done. Enter the new values, as prompted. Click OK in the dialog box to regenerate the part.
3. 4.
To Make a Dependent Copy Independent 1. 2. Click Modify > Make Indep. The MAKE INDEP menu appears, enabling you to make a dependent copied feature independent of its parent, as if it had been copied using the Independent command
To Mirror the Model In addition to using the Mirror tool, you can mirror all part geometry at one time by using the Menu Manager. 1. 2. 3. In an active session of Pro/ENGINEER, click Edit > Feature Operations. The Menu Manager appears. Click Copy > Mirror > All Feat > Done. The SETUP PLANE menu appears. Select a plane or create a new datum about which to mirror the part. Pro/ENGINEER creates a new merge feature containing the mirrored geometry, merged with the original geometry.
Example: Mirroring the Model Original part Original part mirrored once
a. Mirror plane b. Cut added after mirror Original part mirrored twice
a. Mirror plane
Note: Mirroring coordinate systems follows the right hand rule. Pro/ENGINEER mirrors the x- and y-axes of the coordinate system appropriately, then determines the Z-axis. About Resolving Feature Failures To prevent regeneration problems, Pro/ENGINEER checks for geometry errors. If needed it automatically activates the Geom Check command so you can view the feature that has the possible errors, review the feature definition and make changes to elminate the potential problem. When Pro/ENGINEER regenerates a model, it recreates the model feature by feature, in the order in which each feature was created, and according to the hierarchy of the parent-child relationship between features. Regeneration can fail for reasons such as bad geometry, broken parent-child relationships,and missing or invalid references. Pro/ENGINEER attempts to provide critical information so that you can decide what steps you need to take to resolve or prevent a problem. When regeneration fails, Pro/ENGINEER enters the Resolve environment (also referred to as Fix Model Mode) where the following occurs:
File > Save is not available. The failed feature and all subsequent features do not regenerate. The current model displays only the regenerated features as they were at the last successful regeneration.
371/ 375
If you are working outside of a feature tool, Pro/ENGINEER displays the RESOLVE FEAT menu and the Feature Diagnostic window. When working inside some feature tools, the Troubleshooter dialog box opens so you can get information about the problem first. After diagnosing the problem, open the Feature Diagnostic window and use RESOLVE FEAT menu. Note: In non-dashboard applications, the feature dialog box, instead of the feature dialog bar, opens. If this is the case, you can either redefine the feature or click Resolve to obtain diagnostics or make changes to other parts of the model. About Backing Up the Model and References Working with the Backup Model For both diagnosing and fixing the problem, you can choose to work on the current (failed) model or backup model. The backup model shows all features in their pre-regenerated state, and can be used to modify or restore dimensions of the features that are not displayed in the current (failed) model. If Tools > Environment > Make Regen Backup is selected Pro/ENGINEER uses the regenerated backup model. A copy of the model is saved as regen_backup_model####.prt prior to each regeneration. After successful regeneration of the feature, the copy is removed. If Tools > Environment > Make Regen Backup is not selected, then Pro/ENGINEER uses the last saved pre-failure version of the current model. Creating Backup References Backup references are used to prevent feature failure when a reference model is not in session. When a backup reference is available you can highlight and dynamically preview a reference when the original is not present. Some reference types, such as Direction References and Chains, are automatically backed up. You can create additional backup references from Tools > Assembly settings > Reference Control. When the original reference is missing and a feature uses a backup reference:
The feature is regenerated with the backup references when possible and the backup reference is shown in the collector and can be highlighted Reference status is displayed in the collector and in the Troubleshooter dialog box. Preview is available. You can choose to make changes and complete the feature using the backup reference or to cancel the tool. When original reference is missing and the feature has no backup reference, the
The Feature fails. A missing reference is marked in the collector. No preview. Cannot resolve the failure until the reference is replaced, the original is found, or the feature is Suppressed or Deleted. Canceling the tool will not resolve the failure. When original reference has become invalid and the feature has no backup reference:
The Feature fails. Failed/invalid reference is marked in the collector. No preview. You cannot resolve the failure until the reference is replaced, or the feature is suppressed or deleted. Canceling the tool does not resolve the failure.
372/ 375
Reducing Regeneration Time When you regenerate a part after modifying it, Pro/ENGINEER recalculates the geometry of the part. For example, changing dimensional values, editing relations, or altering dimension tables require part regeneration. Pro/ENGINEER performs a fast regeneration by regenerating only the features affected by certain actions. Pro/ENGINEER performs fast regeneration in the following situations:
Modifying dimension valuesThe part regenerates from the earliest modified feature only. Resuming featuresThe part regenerates from the earliest resumed feature. Redefining features, and modifying schemes and patternsThe part regenerates from the earliest modified feature only. Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the entire part when you modify the following:
Part accuracy Part unit value You can significantly enhance regeneration time by doing the following:
Create identical or varying patterns instead of general patterns. Suppress features that have not been modified since the last regeneration. To Step Through Feature Creation With the Model Player, you can go backward or forward through the feature creation history in the model in order to observe how the model was created. 1. 2. Click Tools > Model Player. The Model Player dialog box opens. Select one of the following options to control feature regeneration and display:
Regenerate featuresRegenerates each feature in sequence, starting from the specified feature, as the model moves forward. If this box is cleared, features will be rolled forward without regenerating. Display each featureDisplays each feature in the Graphics window as it is being regenerated or rolled forward. Future features are not displayed until they are regenerated. If this box is cleared, the entire display is updated only when the desired feature is reached and the model playback is complete, or when you stop model playback. Compute CL(Manufacturing only) When selected, the CL data is recalculated for each NC sequence during regeneration. If cleared, no CL data is calculated during regeneration. Click one of the following to select where (at which feature) to start part regeneration:
o o o o
Starts part regeneration at the beginning of the model, with feature number 1. Starts part regeneration with the last feature, and moves backwards through feature regeneration. Steps backward through the model one feature at a time. Regenerates the preceding feature in the model. Steps forward through the model one feature at a time. Regenerates the next feature in the model. Slider BarDrag the slider handle to the first feature at which you want model playback to begin. The features are highlighted in the Graphics window as you move through their position with the slider
o o
373/ 375
handle. The feature number and type are displayed in the selection panel (such as #16 (CHAMFER)), and the feature number is displayed in the Feat # box.
o o
Selects a starting feature from the Graphics window or the Model Tree. Feat #Specifies a starting feature by typing the feature number in the box. The feature you specify becomes the starting feature, and all features that occur after it (if you are using forward playback) or before it (if you are using backward playback) are suppressed.
The model playback process begins. 4. 5. To stop the playback at the current feature, click .
For the current feature, select from the following options:
o o o o
Show DimsDisplays the dimensions of the current feature
Feat InfoProvides regular feature information about the current feature. If you choose this option, the system displays a window with the feature information. Geom CheckInvestigates the geometry error for the current feature. This option is accessible only when the system encounters a geometry error. Fix ModelActivates Resolve mode by forcing the current feature to abort regeneration. When you exit Resolve mode, Pro/ENGINEER brings you back to the Model Player at the current feature. You can then continue to move backward or forward through the model. CloseCloses the Model Player and enter Insert mode at the current feature (the last feature to be generated). You can choose this option at any time during model playback mode. FinishCloses the Model Player and return to the last feature in the model.. Pro/ENGINEER restores all features. You can choose this option at any time during model playback mode.
o o
Using Geometry Checking To prevent regeneration problems, Pro/ENGINEER checks for geometry errors. If needed, the Geom Check command is automatically activated in the INFO and TRIM MODEL menus and in the Model Player, if open, for those features that are successfully created. For example, if a problematic geometric condition is detected during feature creation or regeneration, the message WARNING: Design intent is unclear. Use Info > Geometry Check for more details appears. Use the Geom Check command to view the feature that may have an error, so you can revise its definition to eliminate the potential problem. The GEOM CHECK menu provides a namelist of problem features and a Restore command. What May Cause a Geometry Check Warning? The following cases might cause the system to issue a geometry check warning:
Using blind features to extrude all the way through a part or intersect another surface When the blind depth is not quite enough, there will be a little gap, which will be detected by Pro/ENGINEER. Do not modify the extruded value onlyredefine the feature to use one of the Thru depth options.
Sketching intersecting features on drafted surfaces You may not notice the slight angle of the draft, but the feature you sketch will not quite align with the feature to be intersected. You should either sketch the feature on the original non-drafted surface or use the option Use Edge so the entities align exactly.
374/ 375
To Use the FEAT FAILED Menu 1. If a feature fails during creation and it does not use the dialog box interface, Pro/ENGINEER displays the FEAT FAILED menu with the following options:
o o
RedefineRedefines the feature. Show RefOpens the Reference Information Window dialog box in which parents and children of the current feature are listed. Click Filters to select what you want to see in the dialog box, and use the ActionsMenu or right-click selected items to get reference information. When selected, items are highlighted in the Graphics window. Geom CheckChecks for problems with overlapping geometry, misalignment, and so on. This command may be dimmed. If a shell, offset surface, or thickened surface fails, the system stores information about the surfaces that could not be offset. The GEOM CHECK menu displays a list of features with failed geometry and a Restore command. Feat InfoGet information about the feature.
o
2.
If a feature fails, you can redisplay the part with all failed geometry highlighted in different colors. The system displays the corresponding error messages in an Information Window. Features can fail during creation for the following reasons:
Overlapping geometryA surface intersects itself. If Pro/ENGINEER finds a self-intersecting surface, it does not perform any further surface checks. The system highlights the overlapping geometry in red and the corresponding points of intersection in white, and displays an error message. Surface has edges that coincideThe surface has no area. Pro/ENGINEER highlights the surface in red and displays an error message. Inverted geometryPro/ENGINEER highlights the inverted geometry in purple and displays an error message. Bad edgesPro/ENGINEER highlights bad edges in blue and displays an error message. Sheetmetal formPro/ENGINEER highlights sheetmetal form features that fail in red.
o o o o
About Feature Relations When creating or editing features, you can type an expression in place of a dimension value. This adds a relation that controls the dimension. You can type an expression in place of a dimension in the following cases:
When modifying dimensions in the graphics window, double-click the dimension value and type an equation in the dimension box. When creating or editing a feature, type an expression in the dimension box located on the dashboard. For example, when creating an extrusion, you can type an expression in the depth dimension box. When editing dimensions using a dialog box, type an expression in the dimension box. To add a relation as a dimension value: 1. 2. 3. 4. If dimensions are not displayed, double-click a feature to show its dimensions. Click Info > Switch Dimensions to show dimensions in symbolic format. For the dimension that you want to control by a relation, type an expression in the dimension box. For example, d2*2. A dialog box prompts you to confirm if you want to add a part level relation. Click Yes. The system evaluates the relation and assigns its value to the dimension.
375/ 375

Part Modeling Print

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part Modeling Print

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

About Part Pro/ENGINEER Part enables you to design models as solids in a progressive three-dimensional solid modeling environment.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Configuration option name.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Insert > Model Datum > 2. 3. 4.

Insert > Model Datum > 2.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

To adjust the angle of the datum plane:

Click OK to create the offset datum plane.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Insert > Model Datum > 2. 3. 4.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Click OK to create the datum axis and adjust its length.

Two nonparallel datum planes or planar

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

A datum point and a surface

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

There are two ways to specify the offset distance:

Click New Point to add more points, or click OK.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Click New Point to add more points, or click OK.

Click New Point to add more points, or click OK.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

. Then click About the User Interface Feature Icon

is located on the datum point palette

In addition, the Placement tab has the following buttons:

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

To adjust the offset distance, you can:

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Click the OK button to finish orientating coordinate system.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

in the Model Tree.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Click Done on the REROUTE menu. The model regenerates automatically.

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

There are several ways to activate the Extrude tool:

. This method is referred to as

and create a sketch to extrude. This method is referred to as action-object. .

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling

Pro-Engineer Part & Advanced Part Modeling